Donate
   
Select your preferred input and type any Sanskrit or English word. Enclose the word in “” for an EXACT match e.g. “yoga”.
Amarakosha Search
38 results
WordReferenceGenderNumberSynonymsDefinition
ākṣāritaḥ3.1.41MasculineSingularkṣāritaḥ, abhiśastaḥ
asrī2.9.35MasculineSingularśākam, haritakam
avadhiḥ3.3.106MasculineSingularnadaviśeṣaḥ, abdhiḥ, sarit
bālapāśyā2.6.104FeminineSingularritathyā
barivāsitaḥ3.1.102MasculineSingularvarivasyitam, upāsitam, upacaritam
bhrūṇaḥ3.3.51MasculineSingularmaurvī, dravyāśritaḥ, sattvādikaḥ, śuklādikaḥ, sandhyādikaḥ
bhūḥ2.1.2-3FeminineSingularkṣmā, mahī, dhātrī, kumbhinī, ratnagarbhā, bhūmiḥ, rasā, dharā, kṣoṇī, kṣitiḥ, vasudhā, gotrā, pṛthvī, medinī, gahvarī, ilā, bhūtadhātrī, sāgarāmbarā, anantā, sthirā, dharaṇī, kāśyapī, vasumatī, vasundharā, pṛthivī, avaniḥ, vipulā, gauḥ, kṣamā, jagatī, acalā, viśvambharā, dharit, jyā, sarvaṃsahā, urvī, kuḥ
diśFeminineSingularkakup, kāṣṭhā, āśā, haritquarter or region pointed at/ direction
jāgarūkaḥ3.1.31MasculineSingularjāgaritā
kalikā3.3.15FeminineSingulardāmbhikaḥ, adūreritākṣaḥ
mīḍham3.1.95MasculineSingularmūtritam
nadī1.10.29-30FeminineSingularkūlaṅkaṣā, sravantī, dhunī, śaivalinī, rodhovakrā, apagā, dvīpavatī, hradinī, taraṅgiṇī, nirjhariṇī, nimnagā, srotasvatī, taḍinī, sarit, sarasvatīa river
nimitam3.3.83NeuterSingularnistalam, padyam, caritram, atītam, dṛḍham
nirastam1.6.20MasculineSingulartvaritoditamsputtered
pālāśaḥ1.5.14MasculineSingularharitaḥ, haritgreen
paṃkam1.4.24MasculineSingularkalmaṣam, pāpmā, aṃhaḥ, vṛjinam, kilbiṣam, duṣkṛtam, agham, kaluṣam, pāpam, duritam, enaḥsin
praryāptiḥ03.04.2005FeminineSingularparitrāṇam, hastavāraṇam
pūrṇaḥ3.1.97MasculineSingularritaḥ
samudraḥ1.10.1MasculineSingularsāgaraḥ, udadhiḥ, pārāvāraḥ, apāṃpatiḥ, ratnākaraḥ, sarasvān, udanvān, akūpāraḥ, yādaḥpatiḥ, arṇavaḥ, sindhuḥ, saritpatiḥ, abdhiḥ, jalanidhiḥthe sea or ocean
śīghram1.1.65NeuterSingularavilambitam, satvaram, kṣipram, tūrṇam, drutam, laghu, āśu, capalam, aram, tvaritamswiftly
sthāṇuḥ3.3.55MasculineSingularmṛgī, hemapratimā, haritā
vedhitaḥ3.1.98MasculineSingularchidritaḥ, viddhaḥ
vegī2.8.74MasculineSingulartvaritaḥ, prajavī, javanaḥ, javaḥ, tarasvī
vibhramaḥ3.3.149MasculineSingularharit, kṛṣṇaḥ
vinītaḥ3.1.24MasculineSingularnibhṛtaḥ, praśritaḥ
ācchuritakamNeuterSingulara horse laugh
aritramMasculineSingularkenipātakaḥthe rudder
saritaḥ1.10.34FemininePluralcandrabhāgā, sarasvatī, kāverī, śarāvatī, vetravatīsavarmati(river)
sucarit2.6.6FeminineSingular‍pativratā, satī, sādhvī
ākṣāritaḥ3.1.41MasculineSingularkṣāritaḥ, abhiśastaḥ
preritaḥ3.1.86MasculineSingularkṣiptaḥ, nuttaḥ, nunnaḥ, astaḥ, niṣṭhyūtaḥ, āviddhaḥ
vicāritaḥ3.1.99MasculineSingularvinnaḥ, vittaḥ
ritaḥ3.1.101MasculineSingularbhinnaḥ, bheditaḥ
svairitā3.2.2FeminineSingular
ucchritaḥ3.3.91MasculineSingularsambaddhārthaḥ, hitam, śaktisthaḥ
paritaḥ2.4.12MasculineSingularsamantataḥ, sarvataḥ, viṣvak
haritaḥ3.5.19MasculineSingular
haritālam3.5.32NeuterSingular
Monier-Williams Search
1534 results for rit
Devanagari
BrahmiEXPERIMENTAL
ritmfn. ( ri-, -) running, flowing ( equals gantṛ-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritakvanm. a thief (varia lectio for takvan-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ābharitamfn. (fr. ā-bharaṇa-), ornamented, decorated View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhicaritan. exorcising, incantation, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhicāritamfn. enchanted, charmed. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhighāritamfn. sprinkled with View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhimantritamfn. consecrated by a certain formula. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhiprakṣaritamfn. poured out View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhisaṃśritamfn. who has resorted to any one (for refuge) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhisaṃśritamfn. (for a visit) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhisphuritamfn. expanded to the full (as a blossom). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhritamf(ā-)n. covered with clouds, (gaRa tārakādi- q.v) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhyucchritamfn. raised aloft, elevated etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhyucchritamfn. prominent View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhyucchritamfn. excellent through (instrumental case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhyucchritakaramfn. with uplifted proboscis View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhyudīritamfn. "raised (as the voice), said" View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhyudīriteind. locative case after it had been said by (instrumental case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
acaritan. not eating, abstinence from food (according to to Scholiast or Commentator on but in rather read ā-- carita-, quod vide). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ācaritamfn. passed or wandered through, frequented by etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ācaritamfn. observed, exercised, practised View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ācaritamfn. (in grammar) enjoined, fixed by rule commentator or commentary View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ācaritan. approaching, arrival View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ācaritan. conduct, behaviour View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ācaritan. the usual way (of calling in debts) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ācaritadistress for debt (in the legal sense), . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ācaritatvan. custom, usage View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ācaritavyamfn. equals ā-caraṇīya- q.v View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ācaritavyamfn. (impersonal or used impersonally) to be acted in a customary manner View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ācchuritamfn. ( chur-), covered, clothed with (instrumental case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ācchuritan. making a noise with the finger-nails by rubbing them on one another View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ācchuritan. a horse-laugh View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ācchuritakan. a scratch with a fingernail View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ācchuritakan. a horse-laugh View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āḍambaritamfn. accompanied with sounds of a drum, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āḍambaritahighly increased, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
adhikāritāf. authority, rightful claim, ownership, etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
adhikāritvan. authority, rightful claim, ownership, etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
adhiśritamfn. put on the fire (as a pot) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
adhiśritamfn. resided in, dwelt in View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
adhiśritamfn. occupied by. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādisvaritamfn. having the Svarita accent on the first syllable, VPra1t., Scholiast or Commentator View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
adritanayāf. "mountain-daughter", Name of pārvatī- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
adritanayāf. Name of a metre (of four lines, each containing twenty-three syllables). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aharitamfn. not yellow View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ājarjaritamfn. (fr. jarjara-), torn into pieces View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ākāritamfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' having the shape of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ākṣāritamfn. calumniated, accused (especially of adultery or fornication) (an-- negative) 355. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āmantritamfn. addressed, spoken to View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āmantritamfn. called, invited, summoned View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āmantritamfn. asked View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āmantritamfn. one of whom leave is taken etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āmantritan. addressing, summoning View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āmantritan. the vocative case View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
amarasaritf. "river of the gods", Name of the Ganges. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ambūkritamfn. (ambū-used onomatopoetically to denote by trying to utter mb-the effect caused by shutting the lips on pronouncing a vowel), pronounced indistinctly (so that the words remain too much in the mouth) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ambūkritamfn. ([in later writers derived fr. ambu-,water]) sputtered, accompanied with saliva (an--,neg.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ambūkritan. a peculiar indistinct pronunciation of the vowels View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ambūkritan. roaring (of beasts) accompanied with emission of saliva View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
amiśritamfn. unmixed, unblended.
anākāritamfn. not claimed, not exacted. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anākṣāritamfn. unreproached. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anantacāritram. Name of a bodhisattva-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anantaritamfn. not separated by any interstice View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anantaritamfn. unbroken. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anantaritif. not excluding or passing over View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ananyāśritamfn. not having resorted to another View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ananyāśritamfn. independent View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ananyāśritan. (in law) unencumbered property. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anāśritamfn. not supported, detached View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anāśritamfn. disengaged, independent, non-inherent. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
andhakāritamfn. made dark, dark (see gaRa tārakādi-.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anekāśritamfn. (in vaiśeṣika- philosophy) dwelling or abiding in more than one. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aṅgāritamfn. charred, roasted, (gaRa tārakādi-, q.v) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aṅgāritamfn. "burnt", a kind of food not to be accepted by jaina- ascetics View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aṅgāritāf. a portable fire-place View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aṅgāritāf. a bud View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aṅgāritāf. Name of a creeper View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aṅgāritāf. of a river View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aṅgāritan. the early blossom of the kiṃśuka-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anidritamfn. not asleep, awake. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
animantritamfn. uninvited. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
animantritabhojinmfn. eating without being invited. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anirdhāritamfn. undetermined, unascertained, undefined. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anīritamfn. unstirred, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anivāritamfn. unhindered, unimpeded, unopposed, unforbidden, unchecked. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aṅkuritamfn. sprouted. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
antaritamfn. gone within, interior, hidden, concealed, screened, shielded View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
antaritamfn. departed, retired, withdrawn, disappeared, perished View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
antaritamfn. separated, excluded View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
antaritamfn. impeded View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
antaritan. (?) remainder (in arithmetic) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
antaritan. a technical term in architecture. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
antariti(ant/ar--), excluding, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
antaritif. exclusion View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
antasvaritam. the svarita- accent on the last syllable of a word View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
antasvaritan. a word thus accentuated. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anucaraṇacaritan. acts, deeds, adventures, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anumantritamfn. so consecrated. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anupacaritamfn. not transferred, Sa1m2khyas., Scholiast or Commentator View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anupariśritind. along or at the surrounding fence View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anuparivāritamfn. surrounded, ibidem or 'in the same place or book or text' as the preceding View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anvāśritamfn. ( śri-), one who has gone along View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anvāśritamfn. placed or situated along. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anyāśritamfn. gone to another. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anyonyāśritamfn. mutually supported or depending. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
apacaritamfn. gone away, departed, dead View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
apacaritan. fault, offence View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
apahāritamfn. carried off View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
apahritmfn. taking away (compound), View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
apapātritamfn. idem or 'mfn. "not allowed to use vessels (for food)", people of low caste ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
apariśritan. not an enclosure View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aparitoṣamfn. unsatisfied, discontented View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aparitta(?), for /a-- parītta- (below), View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aparityajyamfn. = (or varia lectio for) a-- parityājya-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
apasāritamfn. removed, put away. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
apasāritāf. (from rin-) issue, end, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
apaśritamfn. retired from, retreated, absconded View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
apāśritamfn. resting on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
apāśritamfn. resorting to. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
apavāritamfn. covered, concealed etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
apavāritakenaind. equals apa-vāritam-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
apavāritamind. (in theatrical language) secretly, apart, aside (speaking so that only the addressed person may hear, opposed to prakāśam-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āpūritamfn. filled up, full. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ariṣṭāśritapuran. Name of a town View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aritāf. enmity View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āritamfn. praised View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aritm. ( -), a rower View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aritm. ([ confer, compare Greek , etc.; Latin ratis,remex,etc.]) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aritramfn. () propelling, driving View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aritram. an oar View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aritran. (f ā-.) (ar/itra- [ ] or /aritra- [ ]) an oar (confer, compare d/aśāritra-, n/ityār-, ś/atār-, sv-aritr/a-) ; [ Latin aratrum.] View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aritragādhamfn. oar-deep, shallow View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aritraparaṇamf(ī-)n. crossing over by means of oars View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āritrikamf(ā-and ī-)n. (fr. aritra- gaRa kāśy-ādi- ), belonging to or being on an oar. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aritvan. enmity View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
arṇavasaridāsritamfn. living on the bank of the sea and of rivers View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritamfn. ? View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āśritamfn. attaching one's self to, joining View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āśritamfn. having recourse to, resorting to as a retreat or asylum, seeking refuge or shelter from View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āśritamfn. subject to, depending on etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āśritamfn. relating or belonging to, concerning etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āśritamfn. inhabiting, dwelling in, resting on, being anywhere, taking one's station at etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āśritamfn. following, practising, observing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āśritamfn. using, employing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āśritamfn. receiving anything as an inherent or integral part etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āśritamfn. regarding, respecting View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āśritamfn. taken or sought as a refuge or shelter View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āśritamfn. inhabited, occupied View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āśritamfn. chosen, preferred, taken as rule View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āśritam. a dependant, subject, servant, follower View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āśritan. (with Buddhists) an object perceived by the senses and manas- or mind. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āśritatvan. dependance. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āśritya ind.p. having sought or obtained an asylum View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āśrityahaving recourse to, employing, practising, etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āsūtritamfn. tied on or round, forming or wearing a garland. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
asvaritamfn. not having the accent called svarita- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atandrita mfn. idem or 'mfn. free from lassitude, alert, unwearied ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ataritramfn. taritra
ātmambharitvan. selfishness View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ātmaparityāgam. self-sacrifice View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avacāritamfn. (in med.) applied View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avacchurita n. a horse-laugh View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avacchuritakan. a horse-laugh View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avadāritamfn. rent or burst open View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avadhāritamfn. ascertained, known, certain, heard, learnt View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avadhāritamfn. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' with śreṇy-ādi-) "known as", (gaRa kṛtādi- q.v) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avadhāritinmfn. (gaRa iṣṭād- q.v) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avadhīritamfn. disrespected, disregarded, etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avadhīritamfn. surpassed, excelled View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avamūtritamfn. urined upon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avamūtritamfn. wetted by the fluid excretion (of an insect) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avapātritamfn. a person not allowed by his kindred to eat or drink from the same vessel (see apa-pātrita-.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avāritamfn. unimpeded, unobstructed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avāritadvāramfn. having open doors View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avāritamind. without obstacles, at pleasure View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avāritavyamfn. not to be impeded or hindered, not to be kept off. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avatāritamfn. caused to descend, fetched down from (ablative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avatāritamfn. taken down, laid down or aside View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avatāritamfn. removed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avatāritamfn. set a-going, rendered current, accomplished View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avataritavyan. impersonal or used impersonally to be alighted View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avicāritamfn. unconsidered, not deliberated, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avicāritamfn. not requiring deliberation, certain, clear View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avicāritamind. unhesitatingly View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ayantritamfn. unhindered, unrestrained, self-willed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ayatnakrita mfn. easily or readily produced,. spontaneous View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bābakhānacaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
badhiritamfn. made deaf, deafened View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bahuniḥśrita wrong reading for bāhu-n-, q.v View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bālacarita n. "childish doings", Name of works or chs. of works treating of the youthful adventures of a deity, (especially) of chapter of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bālacaritanāmann. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bālacaritvan. "childish doings", Name of works or chs. of works treating of the youthful adventures of a deity, (especially) of chapter of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
balātkāritamfn. equals next View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
balihritmfn. equals -hāra- mfn. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
balihritoffering oblations, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bandhanakāritāf. bandhanakārin
bandhuritamfn. inclined, bent View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bandhuritamfn. curved View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
barbaritamfn. gaRa kāśādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
baṭucaritanāṭakan. Name of a drama. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhadrabāhucaritran. bhadrabāhu
bhānucaritran. Name of a poem. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bharitamfn. (fr. bhara-) nourished, full (opp. to rikta-,"empty"), filled with (genitive case or compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bharitamf(ā-or riṇī-)n. equals harita-, green View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bharitran. the arm (;rather "a kind of hammer") .
bhāritvan. bhārin
bhāskaracaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhītaparitrāṇavastūpālambhapaṇḍitamfn. clever in finding fault with the means of rescuing the terrified View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhojacaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhojarājasaccaritan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhramaritamfn. covered with bees View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhujaṃgeritan. a kind of metre View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhūritāf. muchness, multitude View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhūritaramfn. more, more abundant or numerous View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhūritejasmfn. of great splendour, very glorious View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhūritejasm. Name of a prince View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhūritejasamfn. equals prec. mfn. (said of fire) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhūritokamfn. having many children View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhuvanacaritan. the doings of the world View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bilhaṇacaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
buddhacaritan. "the acts of buddha-", Name of a kāvya- by aśva-ghoṣa-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
buddhacaritran. Buddha's history, narrative of Buddha's life, Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caitanyacaraṇāmritan. "nectar of caitanya-'s life", Name of work by kṛṣṇa-dāsa- (abridgement of the caitanya-caritra- ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caitanyacaritāmṛtan. equals raṇām-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caitanyacaritram. Name of work (See before) . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
camatkāritamfn. astonished View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
camatkāritāf. the producing of astonishment, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caṇḍīcaritan. Name of a drama. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
candrabhāgasaritf. idem or 'f. idem or 'f. (gaRa bahv-ādi-) the river Chenab (in the Panjab) (see cāndr-)' gaRa bahv-ādi- (see )' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
candraprabhasvāmicaritran. " candra-prabha-'s life", Name of a Jain work. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cārāntaritam. idem or 'm. equals rapāla- ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caritamfn. gone, gone to, attained View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caritamfn. "practised", in compound View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caritamfn. espied, ascertained (by a spy, cara-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caritan. going, moving, course View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caritan. motion (of asterisms) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caritamfn. acting, doing, practice, behaviour, acts, deeds, adventures etc. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' f(ā-). ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caritan. fixed institute, proper or peculiar observance (see uttara-rāma--, d/uś--, sac--, saha--, su--). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caritaetc. See View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritamfn. set in motion View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritamfn. caused to be done by (instrumental case)
caritaguṇatvan. attainment of peculiar property or use (rthaka-tva- Scholiast or Commentator) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caritamayamf(ī-)n. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' containing or relating deeds or adventures of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caritapūrvamfn. performed formerly View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caritārthamf(ā-)n. attaining one's object, successful in any undertaking and View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caritārthatā -- f. successfulness (see cāritārthya-.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caritārthatvan. idem or ' -- f. successfulness (see cāritārthya-.)' (see cāritārthya-.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caritārthayaNom. yati-, to cause any one (accusative) to attain his aim, satisfy View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caritārthinmfn. desirous of success
caritārthitamfn. satisfied View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritārthyan. (fr. caritārtha-) attainment of an object View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritārthyan. fitness View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caritavratamfn. one who has observed a vow View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caritavyamfn. (equals cart-) to be practised or performed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caritavyan. impersonal or used impersonally with upāṃśu vācā-,"he is to continue speaking low" View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caritran. (;rarely m. ) a foot, leg View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caritran. going View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caritran. acting, behaving, behaviour, habit, practice, acts, adventures, deeds, exploits etc. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' f(ā-). ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caritran. nature, disposition View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caritran. custom, law as based on custom View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caritf. the tamarind tree (see cār-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caritraetc. See View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritram. ( car- see śāmitra-) "moving", Name of a marut- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritran. (equals car-) proceeding, manner of acting, conduct (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' f(ā-).) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritran. good conduct, good character, reputation etc. ("life in accordance with the 5 great vows") View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritran. peculiar observance, peculiarity of customs or conditions View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritran. a ceremony View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritf. the tamarind tree View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caritrabandhakam. n. a friendly pledge View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritrakavacamfn. cased in the armour of good conduct View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caritrapuṣpamfn. whose flowers are moral actions, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritrasiṃhagaṇim. Name of an author. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caritrāvaśeṣamfn. having only virtue left, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caritravatmfn. one who has already performed (a sacrifice) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritravatīf. Name of a samādhi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritrinmfn. of good conduct View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritryan. good conduct View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caturviṃśatyavatāracaritran. "history of the 24 incarnations", Name of a work by naraharadāsa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chidritamfn. perforated View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
choritamfn. abandoned, thrown away View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
choritamfn. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
choritamfn. drawn (a sigh) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
churitamfn. strewed, set, inlaid with (instrumental case or in compound), blended etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
churitan. flashing (of lightning) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cikuritamfn. ? View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cirāśritamfn. long maintained or protected, an old dependant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritamfn. "ragged", only in compound View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritacchadāf. Beta bengalensis View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritapattrikāf. equals ra-p- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
citritamfn. made variegated, decorated, painted View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
citritamfn. see vi--. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
coritamfn. stolen View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
coritan. theft View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
coritakan. anything stolen, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
coritakan. petty theft View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
daivatasaritf. "divine stream", the Ganges View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dakṣiṇācaritantran. equals ra-t-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dakṣiṇāvrittamfn. twisted from the left to the right View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dāmacarita (or tra-) n. Name of a drama View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dāmaśrīdāmacarita(or tra-) n. Name of a drama View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
daṇḍaneṭritvan. judicature () . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
daṇḍavāritamfn. forbidden by threat of punishment Va1rtt. 5 View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
danturitamfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' filled with, full of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
daridritamfn. idem or 'mfn. poor ' , 52 View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
daridritmfn. (future p., Va1rtt. 7 ) idem or 'mfn. idem or 'mfn. poor ', 52 ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritamfn. torn, rent, divided View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
daritamfn. timid View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
daśakumāracarita n. "adventures of the 10 princes", Name of work by daṇḍin-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
daśakumāracaritran. "adventures of the 10 princes", Name of work by daṇḍin-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dāśāritramfn. having 10 ar/ītra- parts (a chariot), View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
daśāvatāracaritan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dauritan. mischief. harm View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
deśāntaritamfn. living in a foreign country View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
deśarājacaritan. "history of native princes", Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
devacaritan. the course of action or practices of the gods View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
devāṅgacaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
devarṣicaritan. the deeds of divine sages View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dhammillacaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dhāritamfn. borne (also in the womb), held, supported etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dhāritan. (also taka-) a horses trot (wrong reading for dhorita-, taka-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dharitf. a female bearer or supporter View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dharitf. the earth View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dharitrībhṛtm. prince, king View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dharitrīdharam. "earth-holder", mountain View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dharitrīputram. metron. of the planet Mars View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dharitrīsutrāmanm. idem or 'm. prince, king ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dharmaguptacaritan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dharmakrityan. fulfilment of duty, virtue, any moral or religious observance View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dharmāśritamfn. seeking virtue, just, pious View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dharmavivritif. "explanation of the law", Name of works. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dhauritakaand dhaurya- n. a horse's trot (see dhorita-, taka-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dhorita n. a horse's trot View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dhoritakan. a horse's trot View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dhruvacaritan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dhūrtacaritan. the tricks of rogues (plural ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dhūrtacaritan. Name of a play. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dhūsaritamfn. made grey, greyish View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dīrghasūtritāf. equals tratā- (varia lectio) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diviśritmfn. going to heaven View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyasūricaritan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
draṣṭritvan. the faculty of seeing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dravyāśritamfn. inherent in a substance View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dṛḍhaprahāritāf. dṛḍhaprahārin
duḥkhaśokaparitrāṇan. a shelter from pain and sorrow (kṛṣṇa-) , View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
durācaritan. misfortune, ill luck View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dūrāntaritamfn. separated by a wide space View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dūravidāritānanamfn. having the mouth widely open (varia lectio bhūri--). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
durdritāf. a kind of creeping plant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dūreritekṣaṇamfn. "who sends his glances far apart", squint-eyed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
duritan. (d/ur-- ) bad course, difficulty, danger. discomfort, evil, sin (also personified) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
duritamfn. difficult, bad View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
duritamfn. wicked, sinful View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
duritadamanīf. Mimosa Suma View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
duritakṣayam. destruction of sin View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
duritakṣayam. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
duritārif. "enemy of sin", Name of a jaina- goddess View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
duritārṇavam. "ocean of sins", Name of a king View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
duritātmanmfn. evil-minded, malicious View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
duritif. bad course, difficulty, distress View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
durmantritamfn. badly advised View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
durmantritan. equals prec. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dūrotsāritamfn. driven far away, removed, banished View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dūrotsāritatvan. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
duścaritan. (d/uś--) misbehaviour, misdoing, ill-conduct, wickedness etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
duścaritan. plural () the 10 chief sins (viz. murder, theft, adultery, lying, calumny, lewdness, evil speech, covetousness, envy, heresy; see ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
duścaritamfn. misbehaving, wicked (also tin- ) . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
duścāritra() mfn. equals -carita-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
duṣkarakāritāf. duṣkarakārin
duṣṭacaritramfn. ill-conducted, evil-doer View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dviruccāritan. the repetition of a piece of music View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dvyahavrittamfn. happened 2 days ago. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dyusarit() f. equals -nadī-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ekacchāyāśritamfn. involved in similarity (of debt) with one debtor (said of a surety who binds himself to an equal liability with one debtor id est to the payment of the whole debt, Mit.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ekāntaritin(?) mfn. one who fasts every second day, L View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ekāśritamfn. resting upon or clinging to one object or person (see an-ekāśr-), View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ekāśritaguṇam. a simple attribute or predicate (as form, smell, taste, etc.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gahvaritamfn. absorbed (in one's thoughts) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gajasiṃhacaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gajasukumāracaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gamakāritvan. inconsiderateness, rashness View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gaṇakāritāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
garbhadhāritamfn. contained in the womb, conceived View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
garbhadhāritamfn. borne View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
garbhasaṃkaritam. a mongrel View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
garitamfn. poisoned gaRa tārakādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritran. rice, corn, grain View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gauraveritamfn. praised, celebrated View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gaurīcaritan. "life of gaurī-", Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gauritam. plural Name of a family View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gayasiṃharājacaritran. equals gajasiṃha-c-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ghargharitan. grunting View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ghoritan. snorting, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ghritāhutamfn. one to whom ghee is offered (agni-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
giritamfn. swallowed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
giritaSee 2. gir-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
giritramfn. protecting mountains (rudra-- śiva-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gotritvan. relationship. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
grahacaritavidm. "knowing the course of planets", an astrologer, . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
guṇatritayan. equals -traya- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hammīracaritan. " hammīra-'s deeds", Name of a mahā-kāvya- by naya-candra-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haracaritacintāmaṇim. Name of a poem. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haradattacaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haridhāritagrantha(?) m. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hariścandracaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritmfn. fawn-coloured, pale yellow, yellowish, pale red, fallow, bay, tawny, greenish etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritm. pale yellow, reddish, bay (the colour) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritm. a horse of the Sun (harito harīṃś ca-,acc plural"the horses of the Sun and of indra-") View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritm. emerald View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritm. a lion View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritm. the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritm. Name of viṣṇu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritm. Phaseolus Mungo (prob. wrong reading for hari-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritf. a female horse of a reddish colour, a bay mare (applied to the horses of soma-, indra-, and tvaṣṭṛ-, and especially to sapta-haritaḥ-,"the 7 horses of the Sun", thought to symbolize the days of the week) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritf. a quarter of the sky etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritf. plural rivers (equals nadyas-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritf. grass or a species of grass View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritf. turmeric View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritamfn. (fr. Causal;for 2.See) caused to be taken or seized etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritamfn. brought, conveyed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritamfn. robbed, carried off View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritamfn. made away with, lost, relinquished etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritamfn. deprived of (accusative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritamfn. surpassed, exceeded View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritamfn. captivated, fascinated View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritamf(ā-or h/ariṇī-)n. yellowish, pale yellow, fallow, pale red, pale (also,"pale with fright"), greenish, green (also;"verdant"as opp. to śuṣka-"dry") etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritam. yellowish (the colour) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritam. Phaseolus Mungo or Lobatus View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritam. a lion View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritam. Name of a son of kaśyapa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritam. of a son of yadu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritam. of a son of rohita- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritam. of a son of rohitāśva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritam. of a son of yuvanāśva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritam. of a son of parāvṛt- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritam. of a son of vapuṣmat- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritam. of an ichneumon (varia lectio hariṇa-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritam. plural the descendants of harita- (also called harītāḥ-), (see Va1rtt. i ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritam. Name of particular verses of the (also haretā mantrāḥ-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritam. of a class of gods in the 12th manvantara- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritāf. dūrvā- grass (equals nīla-dūrva- ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritāf. turmeric View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritāf. a brown-coloured grape View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritāf. Sesbana Aegyptiaca View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritāf. a kind of svara-bhakti- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritan. a yellowish or greenish substance View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritan. gold View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritan. greens, vegetables ("unripe grain"Scholiast or Commentator) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritan. a kind of fragrant plant (equals sthauṇcyaka-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritam. (fr. harit-and harita-) green (the colour) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritam. a moderate wind neither too gentle nor too strong View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritam. the haritāla- pigeon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritam. "descendant of harita-", Name of a son of viśvāmitra- (plural his family, also called haritāḥ-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritāf. a kind of svara-bhakti- (varia lectio haritā-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritabheṣajan. a remedy against jaundice View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritacārikamfn. (perhaps) using supernatural means of locomotion View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritacchadamf(ā-)n. having green leaves View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritacchadam. a tree, plant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritadhānyan. green id est unripe corn View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritagarbhamf(ā-)n. containing a golden germ View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritagomayam. plural fresh cow-dung View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritaharim. "having reddish or bay horses", the Sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritajambhanmfn. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritakamfn. greenish (applied to the 6th unknown quantity) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritakam. or n. a green herb View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritakan. grass View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritakan. equals haritaka-, a green vegetable View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritakapiśamfn. yellowish-brown View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritakaśākan. Moringa Pterygospermum View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritakātam. plural the descendants of haritakātya- Va1rtt. 8. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritakātyam. Name of a man Va1rtt.8.
haritakīf. Terminalia Chebula View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritālam. a kind of pigeon of a yellowish green colour, Columba Hurriyala View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritālan. yellow orpiment or sulphuret of arsenic (described as the seed or seminal energy of viṣṇu- equals harer vīryam-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritālajanakam. orpiment-producer (a word employed in modern Sanskrit to express the metal arsenic). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritālakam. a kind of pigeon (equals haritāla-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritālakan. yellow orpiment View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritālakan. painting the person, theatrical decoration View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritālamayamf(ī-)n. consisting or made of orpiment View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritalatāf. equals pattrikā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritālīf. Panicum Dactylon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritālīf. the blade of a sword View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritālīf. the fourth (or third) day in the light half of the month bhādra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritālīf. a streak or line in the sky View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritālīf. the atmosphere View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritālikāf. See next. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritālikāf. Panicum Dactylon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritālikāf. the fourth (or third) day of the light half of the month bhādra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritālikākathāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritālikāpūjanan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritālikāvratan. a particular religious observance on the above day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritālikāvratakathāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritālikāvratanirṇayam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritaneminmfn. having (a chariot with) golden fellies (śiva-), R: View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritapāṇḍumfn. yellowish-pale View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritapattramayamf(ī-)n. formed of green leaves View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritapattrikāf. a species of plant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritaprabhamfn. appearing yellowish or pale View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritardhakāyamfn. having half the body green View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritāruṇamfn. yellowish-red View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritaśākam. Moringa Pterygospermum View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritasenam. Name of a king View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritāśman. "green-coloured stone", a turquoise or emerald View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritāśman. sulphate of copper or blue vitriol View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritāśmakan. a turquoise View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritaspṛśamfn. (?) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritāsram. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritasrajmfn. (h/arita--) wearing or forming yellow (green) garlands View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritasrajmfn. adorned with a golden chain or garland View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritāśvamfn. having reddish or bay horses (the Sun) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritāśvam. Name of a son of su-dyumna- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritatṛṇan. green grass View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritattvamuktāvali f. Name of a commentator or commentary View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritattvamuktāvalīf. Name of a commentator or commentary View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritatvan. yellowish green (the colour) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritāyaNom. P. A1. yati- or yate-, to become or appear green View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritayajñam. Name of a man (See hāritay-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritayajñamfn. relating or belonging to harita-yajña- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritāyanam. patronymic fr. hārita- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritayavam. green barley View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritīf. a patronymic ( hāritīputra -putra- m.a son of harītī-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritīkṛtamfn. painted green View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritīputram. hāritī
haritmatmfn. gaRa yavādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritopalam. "green stone", an emerald View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritoṣaṇan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritparṇan. "green-leaved", a radish View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritpatim. the regent of a quarter of the sky View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritrātamfn. protected by hari- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
harituragam. a horse of indra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
harituragam. Name of indra- idem or 'm. a horse of indra- ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
harituraṃgamam. idem or 'm. Name of indra- idem or 'm. a horse of indra- ' ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
harituraṃgamāyudhan. indra-'s thunderbolt View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritvan. hārin
haritvacmfn. yellow-skinned View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haritvat(h/arit--) mfn. gold-coloured View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
harivaṃśasāracaritan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
harṣacaritan. Name of a poem by bāṇa- (containing the life of king harṣa-vardhana- of sthāneśvara-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
harṣacaritasaṃketam. Name of Comm. on the above work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
harṣacaritavārttikan. Name of Comm. on the above work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
himādritanayāf. "daughter of himālaya-", parvatī- ( himādritanayapati -pati- m."husband of parvatī-", śiva-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
himādritanayāf. the Ganges View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
himādritanayapatim. himādritanayā
hīnacaritan. (plural) base or mean conduct, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hitakāritāf. hitakārin
hitakāritvan. hitakārin
hrita wrong reading for hṛta-, or hrīta-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hritif. equals hṛti-, taking, conveying View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hvaritamfn. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
īritamfn. sent, despatched View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
īritamfn. said, uttered. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
īritākūtan. declared purpose or intention. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jāgaritamfn. () equals ta-vat- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jāgaritan. waking View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jāgaritadeśam. place of waking, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jāgaritāntam. equals grad-avasthā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jāgaritasthānamfn. being awake View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jāgaritavatmfn. one who has long been awake or is exhausted with sleeplessness, 37. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jāgaritmfn. waking, wakeful View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jagattritayan. idem or 'n. the three worlds (heaven, earth, and the lower world) ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jāṅghāprahritikamfn. (fr. jaṅghā-prahata-or hṛta-) produced by a blow with the leg gaRa akṣadyūtādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
janmāntaritamfn. done in a former life View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jaritamfn. (past participle Caus.) old, decayed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jaritāf. Name of a śārṅgikā- bird (mother of 4 sons at once by the ṛṣi- manda-pāla- in the form of a śārṅgaka-; see jarit/ṛ-at end) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jaritaetc., See View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jaritārim. manda-pāla-'s eldest son by jaritā-, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jaritm. an invoker, praiser View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jaritm. Name of the author of (with the patronymic śārṅga-; see ta-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jarjaritamfn. become decrepit or decayed, torn in pieces, worn out View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jhampānrityan. a kind of dance. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jhaṅkāritan. idem or 'm. a low murmuring (buzzing of bees etc.), jingling, clanking ' (varia lectio ṭaṃ-k-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jharjharitamfn. ( jhṝ-) worn, wasted, withered View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jinacaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jinendracaritran. Name of work by amara-candra- (also called padmānanda-mahākāvya-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jīvaṃdharaṇacaritran. Name of a tale by bhāskara-kavi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jvaritamfn. (gaRa tārakādi-) feverish, affected with fever View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kākamṛgagocaritamfn. following the manner of the crow in drinking, of the deer in eating, and of the cow in making water View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kakṣāśritan. "being in the arm-pit", the hair under the armpit View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kalahāntaritāf. a heroine separated from her lover in consequence of a quarrel View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kālakāritamfn. effected or brought about by or in time (see kāla-kṛta-.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kālatritayan. idem or 'n. the three times id est past, present, and future.' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kalmāṣapādacaritan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kalyāṇarājacaritran. "the life of king kalyāṇa-"by madana-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kāmacāritvan. moving or acting at pleasure View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kāmacāritvan. lewdness View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kāraṇakāritamind. in consequence of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
karbūritamfn. variegated, many-coloured View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritamfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' caused to be made or done, brought about, effected etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritāf. (scilicet vṛddhi-) forced to be paid, interest exceeding the legal rate of interest commentator or commentary on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritan. the Causal form of a verb View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritāntamfn. ending with a Causal affix View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritavatmfn. one who has caused to be made or done. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
karitvamfn. fit for work or business, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
karmāśritabhaktam. plural Name of a vaiṣṇava- sect. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kaṣṭaśritamfn. undergoing pain or misfortune or hardships, performing penance Scholiast or Commentator on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kathāsaritsāgaram. "the ocean of rivers of stories", Name of work by soma-deva-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kaṭhoritamfn. made to thrive, strengthened View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kaumārahāritam. patronymic fr. kumārahārita- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kharitam. the brother's son View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kiṃciccīritapattrikāf. the plant Beta bengalensis (= cīrita-cchadā-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kirmīritamfn. "variegated", mingled with (in compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kirmīritamfn. variegated, spotted View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
koneritīrthan. Name (also title or epithet) of a tīrtha-, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
koritamfn. scraped out of the ground View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
koritamfn. pounded, ground View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
koritamfn. budded, sprouted View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṛcchreśritmfn. undergoing danger View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṛṣṇahāritam. Name of a ṛṣi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṛṣṇāśritamfn. devoted to or a votary of kṛṣṇa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṛtasmaracaritan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
krūracaritamfn. addicted to cruel practices, cruel, ferocious. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṣāratritayan. idem or 'n. "a triad of acrid substances", natron, saltpetre, and borax ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṣaritamfn. dropped, liquefied, oozed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṣaritamfn. flowing, trickling View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṣāritamfn. distilled from saline matter, strained through alkaline ashes etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṣāritamfn. calumniated, falsely accused (especially of adultery), accused of a crime (locative case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṣāritamfn. (instrumental case) (edition Gorr.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṣitīśavaṃśāvalīcaritan. "genealogy and history of kṣitīśa-'s family", Name of work composed in the last century. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṣudrācaritamfn. visited by common people (as a country) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kucaritran. evil conduct View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kuharitan. noise, sound View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kuharitan. the song or cry of the Kokila or Indian cuckoo View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kuharitan. a sound uttered in copulation View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kumārahāritam. Name of a teacher View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kumāritamāf. (superl.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kumāritarāf. (Comparative degree) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kūrparitamfn. struck by the elbow View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kusaritf. a shallow stream View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kuvalayāśvacaritran. "the adventures of kuvalayāśva-", Name of a Prakrit poem (composed by viśvanātha- kavi-rāja-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
lakṣmīcaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
lalitāṅganareśvaracaritan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
liṅgalīlāvilāsacaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
lokacāritran. the way or proceedings of the world View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
lokāntaritamfn. deceased, dead View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mādhavacaritan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madhyasvaritamfn. having the svarita- accent on the middle syllable View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mādrīprithāpatim. "husband of pṛthā- and mādrī-", Name of paṇḍu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahāvīracaritan. "the exploits of the great hero (rāma-)", Name of a celebrated drama by bhavabhūti- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahāvīracaritran. equals prec. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahāvīracaritran. Name of another work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mairāvaṇacaritran. mairāvaṇa
malamūtraparityāgam. evacuation of feces and urine View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mallināthacaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
manaḥśilāvicchuritamfn. inlaid with red arsenic View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mānavendīyacarita(?) n. Name of a poem. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mandāritāf. (for 2.See below, column 2) the having few enemies View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mandāritāf. (fr. mandārin-;for 1.See under manda-, column 1) the state of abounding in mandāra- trees View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
maṇipaticaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mañjarīpiñjaritamfn. "having pearls and gold"or"yellowish coloured with clusters of flowers" View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mañjaritamfn. "having clusters of flowers"or"mounted on a stalk" (gaRa tārakādi-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
manoramāpariṇayanacaritan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mantharitamfn. made slow or lazy, relaxed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mantritāf. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mantritamfn. discussed, deliberated, determined etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mantritamfn. advised, counselled (said of Persons and things) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mantritamfn. consecrated with sacred texts, enchanted, charmed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mantritan. counsel, deliberation, plan View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mantritaSee p.786. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
māntritamfn. (fr. next) gaRa kaṇvādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mantritvan. the office or vocation of a minister, ministership, ministry View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
māntrityam. patronymic fr. mantrita- gaRa gargādi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
manyuparitamfn. filled with anger View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritamfn. (fr. Causal) killed, slain, destroyed, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rita mārin- See above. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mārkaṇḍeyacaritan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mayūravarmacaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
meduritamfn. thickened, made dense by or with (compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
meduritamfn. unctuous View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
meghakumāracaritan. Name of a jaina- work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
miśritamfn. mixed, blended with (compound) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
miśritamfn. promiscuous, miscellaneous (as taste) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
miśritamfn. added View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
miśritamfn. respectable View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
miśritamāhātmyan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mithileśacaritan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mitrāvaruṇasamīritamfn. impelled by mitra- and varuṇa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mṛgāvatīcaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mrit cl.4 P. mrity/ati-, to decay, be dissolved View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mrita"begging for food"(for read ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mritasaṃjīvakamfn. reviving the dead, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mudritamfn. sealed, stamped, impressed, printed, marked View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mudritamfn. contracted, closed, sealed up (nidrā-m-sunk in sleep ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mudritamfn. strung, bound View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mudritamfn. unblown (as a flower) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mudritamfn. intertwined in particular forms (as the fingers; see mudrā-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mudritan. impressing a seal on (locative case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mudritākṣamf(ī-)n. having the eyes closed
mudritamukhamfn. having the mouth closed or the lips sealed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mudritapāṃsumfn. making impressions on dust or sand (said of drops of water) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mukharitamfn. rendered noisy. made resonant, sounding, ringing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mukhyamantritvan. mukhyamantrin
muktācaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mukuritamfn. (prob.) = View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mukuritatārakādi View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
munipaticaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mūrchāparitamfn. idem or 'mfn. overcome with faintness, insensible ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mūtritamfn. one who has voided urine View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mūtritamfn. discharged like urine View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mūtritamfn. soiled with urine View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mūtritan. the voiding of urine View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nabhaḥsaritf. "sky-river", the milky way or = next View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nabhaḥśritmfn. reaching to the sky View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nāgāritantrahomam. a kind of sacrifice View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nāgārjunacaritan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nahuṣacarita" nahuṣa-'s life", Name of chapter of the View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
naiṣadhacaritan. equals prec. n. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
naiṣadhīyacaritan. equals naiṣadha- n. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nalacarita n. Name of a poem and a drama. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nalacaritran. Name of a poem and a drama. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
namritamfn. bent down, made to sink View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandīcaritan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
narasiṃhabhūpālacaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
naravāhanadattacaritamayamf(ī-)n. containing the adventures of prince naravāhana-datta-
nārāyaṇacaritramālāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nātyucchritamfn. idem or 'mfn. not too high ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
navasāhasāṅkacāritn. "the 9 [or new?] deeds of king sāhasāṅka-", Name of a poem by śrī-harṣa-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nayanacaritan. play of the eyes, ogling, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nemicaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nemirājarṣicaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nidrāmudritamfn. fallen asleep, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nidrāntaritamfn. asleep View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nidritamfn. sleeping, asleep (see gaRa tārakādi-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nidritavatmfn. one who has slept View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
niḥsāritamfn. turned out expelled, dismissed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nimantritamfn. invited (especially to a feast, with instrumental case exempli gratia, 'for example' vivāhena- ; see ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nimantritamfn. summoned, called, convoked
nīrajīkāritamfn. nīrajīkṛ
nīrandhritamfn. thickly set with, abounding in (compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nīrandhritamfn. uninterrupted View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nirdāritaSee nir-dṝ-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nirdāritamfn. torn asunder, split open View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nirdhāritamfn. determined, ascertained, settled, accurately stated or told View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nirdhāritavya mfn. equals dhāraṇīya-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nirvāritamfn. (fr. Causal) warded off View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
niśrityaind. going to View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nityāritra(n/i-) mf(ā-)n. having its own oars (as a ship), moving by itself. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nivāritamfn. kept off, hindered, forbidden, prevented View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
niyantritamfn. restrained, checked, fettered, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
niyantritamfn. dammed up, embanked View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
niyantritamfn. restricted to a certain sense (as a word) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
niyantritamfn. governed by, depending on (instrumental case or compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nṛsiṃhacaritan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nṛsiṃhamahataścaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pādāṅguṣṭhaśritāvanimfn. touching the ground with the toes, on tip-toe View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pādanicritmfn. (a metre) wanting one syllable in each pāda- (wrong reading -ni-vrit-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
padārthatritayan. padārtha
pakvaharitalūnamfn. cut (grain), ripe but not dry View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pañcabhūtaparityaktamfn. deserted by the 5 elements (as a dead body) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pāṇḍavacaritan. Name of 2 poems. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paṇḍitaparitoṣam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pāṇḍukambalasaṃvritamfn. () View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pāṇḍuritamfn. white-coloured View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pāṇḍuritamfn. Balar. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paramārthasaritf. really a river View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paraparitamfn. forming an uninterrupted series, continuous View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parāritnamfn. belonging to the year before last, iv, 3, 23 vArttika View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parāśritamfn. = (and varia lectio for) prec. mfn. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parāśritamfn. a dependent, servant slave View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paretācaritamfn. frequented or inhabited by the departed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paricāritan. amusement, sport View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paricāritāf. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paricaritavyamfn. to be attended on or served or worshipped View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paricaritm. an attendant or servant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parikaritamfn. accompanied by (instrumental case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parimantritamfn. ( mantr-) charmed, consecrated, enchanted View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paripāṇḍuritamfn. made very pale View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paripūritamfn. filled or occupied by, furnished with (compound) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paripūritamfn. accomplished, finished, gone through, experienced View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parisphuritamfn. quivering, palpitating View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parisphuritamfn. dispersed, reflected on all sides View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parisphuritamfn. opened, expanded View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parisphuritamfn. shot, glanced View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pariśritf. plural "enclosers", Name of certain small stones laid round the hearth and other parts of an altar (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' śritka-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pariśritamfn. standing round View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pariśritamfn. surrounded by (instrumental case or compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pariśritamfn. wrong reading for śruta- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pariśritan. (p/ari--) equals p/ari-vṛta- n. (See under pari--1. vṛ-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paristaritm. one who strews or lays round View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritaḍP. -tāḍayati-, to strike against, touch View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritāḍinmfn. striking or hurting everywhere View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritāḍinmfn. ( tāḍ-) striking or hitting everywhere View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritakanan. ( tak-) running round or about View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritakmyamfn. wandering, unsteady, uncertain, dangerous View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritakmyāf. travelling, peregrination View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritakmyā according to to some also,"going round or overtaking an adversary's chariot". View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritakmyāf. night (as the wandering see ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritamP. -tāmyati-, to gasp for breath, be oppressed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritaṃs(only infinitive mood of Causal -taṃsay/adhyai-), to stir up View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritanP. A1. -tanoti-, nute- (Aorist -atanat-; ind.p. -tatya-), to stretch round, embrace, surround View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritapP. -tapati- (future -tapiṣyati- ; -tapsyati- ; ind.p. -t/apya- ), to burn all round, set on fire, kindle ; to feel or suffer pain ; (with tapas-) to undergo penance, practise austerities etc. etc.: Passive voice -tapyate- (ti-), to be purified (as by fire) ; to feel or suffer pain, do penance, practise austerities etc.: Causal -tāpayati-, to scorch, cause great pain, torment View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritāpam. glow, scorching, heat View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritāpam. pain, agony, grief, sorrow etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritāpam. repentance View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritāpam. Name of a particular hell View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritāpinmfn. burning hot, scorching View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritāpinmfn. causing pain or sorrow, tormenting View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritapta(p/ari--) mfn. surrounded with heat, heated, burnt, tormented, afflicted View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritaptamfn. scorched, singed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritaptamukhamfn. having the face overwhelmed with grief, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritaptif. great pain or torture, anguish View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritāraṇīyamfn. ( tṝ-, Causal) to be delivered or saved (?) (perhaps wrong reading for -cāraṇīya- equals -caraṇīya-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritarjCaus. -tarjayati-, to threaten, menace View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritarkP. -tarkayati-, to think about, reflect, consider View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritarkaṇan. consideration, reflection
paritarkitamfn. thought about, expected (a-parit-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritarkitamfn. examined (judicially) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritarpaṇamfn. satisfying, contenting View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritarpaṇan. the act of satisfying View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritarpaṇan. a restorative View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritasind. (fr. pari-) round about, all around, everywhere (na-paritaḥ-,by no means, not at all) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritasind. as preposition (with accusative,once with genitive case) round about, round, throughout View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritathyāf. (-tathya-) a string of pearls for binding the hair View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritatnumfn. embracing, surrounding View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritavatmfn. containing the word pāriśa-, or other forms of the Causal of pṝ-, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritiktamfn. extremely bitter, jātakam-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritiktam. Melia Azedarach View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritin gaRa iṣṭādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritīran. (prob.) equals pari-kūla- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritoṣam. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' f(ā-).) equals tuṣṭi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritoṣam. (with locative case or genitive case) delight in etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritoṣam. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritoṣakamfn. satisfying, pleasing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritoṣaṇamfn. idem or 'mfn. satisfying, pleasing ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritoṣaṇan. satisfaction, gratification View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritoṣavatmfn. satisfied, delighted View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritoṣayitṛmfn. any one or anything that gratifies, pleasing (varia lectio para-t-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritoṣikamf(ī-)n. (-toṣa-) gratifying, satisfactory View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritoṣikan. a reward, gratuity View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritoṣinmfn. contented or delighted with (compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritoṣitamfn. satisfied, gratified, delighted View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritraiP. A1. -trāti-, or -trāyate- (imperative -trāhi-, -trātu-, -trāyasva-; future -trāsyate-; infinitive mood -trātum-), to rescue, save, protect, defend (-trāyatām-or yadhvam-,help! to the rescue!) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritrāṇan. rescue, preservation, deliverance from (ablative), protection or means of protection, refuge, retreat etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritrāṇan. self-defence View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritrāṇan. the hair of the body View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritrāṇan. moustaches View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritrāsam. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' f(ā-).) terror, fright, fear View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritrastamfn. ( tras-) terrified, frightened, much alarmed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritrātamfn. protected, saved, rescued, preserved View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritrātam. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritrātavyamfn. to be protected or defended or saved from (ablative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritrātṛmfn. protecting, a protector or defender (with genitive case or accusative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritṛdP. -tṛṇatti- (imperative -tṛndhi-), to pierce or thrust through View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritrigartamind. round about or outside tri-garta-
paritṛpCaus. -tarpayati-, to satiate or satisfy completely View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritṛptamfn. completely satisfied or contented View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritṛptif. complete satisfaction View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritṛṣitamfn. ( tṛṣ-) anxiously longing for (compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paritudP. -tudati-, to trample down, pound, crush View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parituṣP. -tuṣyati- (te- ), to be quite satisfied with (genitive case or locative case or instrumental case), to be much pleased or very glad etc.: Causal -toṣayati-, to satisfy completely, to appease, delight, flatter View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parituṣṭamfn. completely satisfied, delighted, very glad etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parituṣṭārthamfn. completely satisfied View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parituṣṭātmanmfn. contented in mind View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parituṣṭif. complete satisfaction, contentment, delight View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parituṣyaind. being delighted or glad View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parityāgam. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' f(ā-).) the act of leaving, abandoning, deserting, quitting, giving up, neglecting, renouncing etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parityāgam. separation from (sakāśāt-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parityāgam. (plural) liberality, a sacrifice View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parityāgam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parityāginmfn. leaving, quitting, forsaking, renouncing (mostly in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parityajP. -tyajati- (te- ; ind.p. -tyajya-), to leave, quit, abandon, give up, reject, disregard, not heed etc. ; (with deham-) to forsake the body id est die ; (with prāṇān-,or jīvitam-) to resign the breath, give up the ghost ; (with nāvam-) to disembark : Passive voice -tyajyate-, to be deprived or bereft of (instrumental case) etc.: Causal -tyājayati-, to deprive or rob a person of (2 accusative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parityajmfn. idem or 'mfn. one who leaves or abandons, a forsaker ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parityajanan. abandoning, giving away, distributing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parityājanan. causing to abandon or give up View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parityajyaind. having left or abandoned etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parityajyaind. leaving a space, at a distance from (accusative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parityajyaind. with she exception of, excepting View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parityājyamfn. to be left or abandoned or deserted etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parityājyamfn. to be given up or renounced View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parityājyamfn. to be omitted View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parityaktamfn. left, quitted etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parityaktamfn. let go, let fly (as an arrow) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parityaktamfn. deprived of, wanting (instrumental case or compound) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parityaktan. anything to spare View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parityaktamind. without (compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parityaktṛmfn. one who leaves or abandons, a forsaker View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parivāritamfn. (fr. Causal) surrounded by, covered with, veiled in (instrumental case or compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paropakāritvan. paropakārin
pārśvanāthacaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paścānmukhāśritamfn. turned westwards View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
patañjalicaritan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pattritamfn. feathered (is an arrow) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pavitritamfn. purified, sanctified, blessed, happy
piṇḍaharitālan. a particular kind of orpiment View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
piñjaritamfn. coloured reddish-yellow View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pītaharitamfn. "yellowish-green" View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pītaharitacchāyamfn. of a yellow-green colour View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prabhuliṅgacaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pracaritamfn. followed, practised View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pracaritamfn. arrived at, visited View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pracaritamfn. current, publicly known View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pracāritamfn. allowed to wander or roam about View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pracāritamfn. made public or manifest (see gaRa tārakādi-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pracaritavyamfn. to be proceeded with or undertaken, to be performed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pracaritos infinitive mood (with purā-) before he (the adhvaryu-) sets to work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pracerita(?), . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pradyumnottaracaritan. " pradyumna-'s further deeds", Name of a poem. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
praharitamfn. of a beautiful greenish colour View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prahāritāf. striking, hitting View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prahlādacaritan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prajāpaticaritan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prakaritm. one who sprinkles (or seasons?) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pramūtritamfn. begun to be urined (n. impersonal or used impersonally) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prāṇaparityāgam. abandonment of life View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prapūritamfn. filled up, completed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prāpyakāritvan. prāpyakārin
praśāntacāritramatim. Name of a bodhi-sattva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prasāritamfn. (fr. Causal) held forth, stretched out, expanded, spread, diffused etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prasāritamfn. laid out, exhibited, exposed (for sale) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prasāritamfn. published, promulgated View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prasāritabhogamfn. (a serpent) with expanded coils View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prasāritagātramfn. with outstretched limbs (su-pr-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prasāritāgramfn. (fingers) with extended tips View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prasāritāṅgulimfn. (a hand) with extended fingers View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prasāritvan. prasārin
prasphuritamfn. become tremulous, quivering, vibrating etc. ( prasphuritādhara dhara- mfn.one whose lower lip quivers ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prasphuritamfn. clear, evident View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prasphuritādharamfn. prasphurita
praśritamfn. bending forward deferentially, humble, modest, courteous, well-behaved ( praśritam am- ind.humbly, deferentially) etc. (often wrong reading sṛta-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
praśritamfn. hidden, obscure (as a meaning) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
praśritam. Name of a son of ānaka-dundubhi- and śānti-deva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
praśritamind. praśrita
pratāritamfn. misled, deceived, imposed upon etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratāritamfn. persuaded or seduced to (dative case) (varia lectio pra-codita-). 1. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prātaritvanmfn. going out early View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prātaritvanm. a morning guest (vocative case tvas-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
praticāritamfn. (fr. Causal) circulated, proclaimed, published View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratigaritm. one who makes a responsive cry or chant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratikūlācaritan. an offensive action, injurious conduct View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratimantritamfn. consecrated with sacred texts View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratipūritamfn. filled with, full of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratipūritamfn. satisfied, contented View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisamāśritamfn. ( śri-) depending on (accusative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisāritamfn. (fr. Causal) repelled, removed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisāritamfn. dressed (as a wound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratiśritan. a place of refuge View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prativāritamfn. kept off, prohibited, prevented etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prativāritan. prohibition View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratyucchritamfn. rising View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prauḍhacaritanāmann. plural Name of work by vallabhācārya- on the titles of kṛṣṇa- derived from 128 of his exploits during adolescence. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pravāhemūtritan. pravāha
pravāritamfn. (for 2.See under pra--2. vṛ-) clothed with (instrumental case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pravāritamfn. (for 1.See above) offered, set out for sale (Bombay edition pra-codita-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
praveritamfn. cast, hurled (varia lectio) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pravicāritamfn. (fr. Causal) examined or investigated accurately View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prekṣakeritamfn. (a word) uttered by a spectator View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
preritamfn. urged, impelled, dispatched, sent View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
preritamfn. turned, directed (as the eye) (varia lectio) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
preritamfn. incited to speak View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
preritamfn. passed, spent (as time) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
preritmfn. one who urges or incites, an inciter View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
priyakāritvan. the act of showing kindness View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
proccāritamfn. (fr. Causal) caused to sound, sounding View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
procchritamfn. (pra-ucch-) lifted up, raised View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
procchritamfn. high, lofty View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
protsāritamfn. (fr. Causal) offered, granted, given View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
protsāritamfn. ejected, expelled View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
protsāritamfn. urged forwards, incited View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pūjyapādacaritran. pūjyapāda
puṇyabharitamfn. abounding in holiness or bliss View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
puraṃdaraharitf. indra-'s quarter of the sky, the east View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
puraṃjanacaritan. Name of drama. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
purāritvan. purāri
ritamfn. filled, completed etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritamfn. made full or strong, intensified (as a sound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritamfn. filled with wind, blown (as a conch) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritamfn. multiplied, overspread View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
puritat wrong reading for purītat- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
puruṣottamacaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pūrvācaritamfn. formerly done or followed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pūrvarātrakritamfn. done during the formerly previously of the night (equals tre kṛ- ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pūrvāvadhīritamfn. formerly disdained View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rāghavacaritran. Name of a modern abridgment of the rāmāyaṇa-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rāghavayādāvīyacaritan. Name of poems. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
raghunāthacaritan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
raghuvīracaritan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rājīmanmatīparityāgam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rāmabālacaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rāmacandracaritan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rāmacandracaritrasāram. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rāmacandrāśritapārijātam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rāmacaritan. " rāma-s's exploits", Name of various works. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rāmānujacaritan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rāmānujacaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rāmānujadivyacaritran. Name of work
ratnakalācaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rātritarāf. (Comparative degree of rātri-) the depth or dead of night View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rātritithif. a lunar night View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rāvaṇacaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rukmāṅgadacaritan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rukmāṅgadacaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rūpadhāritvan. the power of assuming any form or shape View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saccaritan. good conduct etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saccaritan. history or account of the good View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saccaritamfn. well-conducted, virtuous View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saccaritamimāṃsāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saccaritran. good conduct View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saccaritran. history of the good View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saccaritramfn. virtuous View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saccaritraparitrāṇan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saccaritrarakṣāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saccaritrasudhānidhim. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śādaharitamfn. green or fresh with young grass View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sadāśritamfn. (for sadāś-See) having recourse or attaching one's self to the virtuous, belonging to the good, virtuous View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sadāśrita(ś-) mfn. (for sad-āś-See under 1. sad-) always resorting to or dependent on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sādhāritamfn. supported View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sādhucaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sahacaritamfn. gone or going with etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sahacaritamfn. congruent, homogeneous ( sahacaritatva -tva- n.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sahacaritatvan. sahacarita
sahakāritāf. () concurrence, co-operation, assistance. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sahakāritvan. () concurrence, co-operation, assistance. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sāhasāṅkacaritan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sahasraraviṇacaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śākalyacaritan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śālibhadracaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śālivāhanacaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samācaritamfn. practised, performed, done, committed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samānavratacāritvan. samānavratacārin
samantacāritramatim. Name of a bodhi-sattva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samantritvan. samantrin
samāśritamfn. come together, assembled View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samāśritamfn. going or resorting to, living or dwelling in, fixed or staying or standing in or on, flowing into (accusative locative case,or compound) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samāśritamfn. (also -vat-,"one who has attained", with accusative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samāśritamfn. following or practising, leaning on, taking refuge with (accusative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samāśritamfn. resting or dependent on (locative case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samāśritamfn. relating to, concerning (compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samāśritamfn. stating, asserting View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samāśritamfn. (with pass. sense) leaned on (for support) , resorted to View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samāśritamfn. had recourse to, chosen on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samāśritamfn. endowed or provided or furnished with (instrumental case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samāśritamfn. visited or afflicted by (compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samāśritam. a dependant, servant (see āśrayaṇīya-), Raljat. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samāśritatvan. resort to, seeking refuge with (compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sāmavedaparitiṣṭan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samayasetuvāritamfn. restrained by the barrier of custom View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sāmbacaritan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śambhurājacaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śambhūrājacaritran. Name of work (see śambhur-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃcāritamfn. (fr. idem or 'm. (and saṃcārayitrī trī- f.fr. Causal) a leader, guide ') caused to go, set in motion, impelled, driven, guided View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃcāritamfn. transmitted, communicated (as a disease) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃcāritam. a person who carries out the intentions of his masters
saṃcāritāf. penetration into (compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃcaritran. coupling, procuring View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃcāritvan. transitoriness, inconstancy (of feeling) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃhatyakāritāf. common work or endeavour View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃhatyakāritvan. common work or endeavour View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃhvāritamfn. (fr. Causal of hvṛ-) crooked, curved, bent in (with madhye-,"thinner or more slender in the middle") View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samīritamfn. stirred, moved, tossed, thrown etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samīritamfn. sent forth, uttered (as a sound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śaṃkaracaritran. Name of work , View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śaṃkarācāryacaritan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃkaritain garbha-s- (q.v) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃkhyāparityaktamfn. "deserted by numeration", innumerable View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃkṣaritamfn. flowing, trickling View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sammantritamfn. deliberated, considered View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sammiśritamfn. mixed together, mingled, intermixed with (instrumental case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃniśritamfn. connected with, devoted to View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sampariśritamfn. covered over View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samparitoṣitamfn. (fr. Causal) fully satisfied, quite appeased View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samparituṣP. -tuṣyati-, to feel quite satisfied or content : Causal -toṣayati-, to satisfy completely, appease View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samparityajP. -tyajati-, to abandon, desert, leave View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samparityaktamfn. abandoned, given up View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samparityaktajīvitamfn. (a battle) in which expectation of life is abandoned View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samparivāritamf(ā-)n. (fr. Causal) surrounded, encompassed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sampradhāritamfn. fixed or determined upon, deliberated about View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sampraśritamfn. modest, humble, well-behaved View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sampūritamfn. filled quite full, filled with View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃsāraparitāpam. equals -duḥkha- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃsāritvan. saṃsārin
saṃsmāritamfn. caused to remember, reminded of (accusative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃsmāritamfn. recalled to the mind View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃśrayakāritamfn. caused by alliance View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃśritamfn. joined or united with (instrumental case or compound) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃśritamfn. leaning against, clinging to (accusative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃśritamfn. clung to, embraced View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃśritamfn. one who has gone or fled to any one for protection, one who has entered the service of (accusative or compound) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃśritamfn. one who has betaken himself to a place, living or dwelling or staying or situated or being in (locative case or compound) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃśritamfn. resorted to, sought for refuge or protection View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃśritamfn. one who is addicted to, indulging in (accusative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃśritamfn. one who has laid hold of or embraced or chosen View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃśritamfn. inherent in, peculiar to (accusative or compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃśritamfn. relating to, concerning (locative case or compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃśritamfn. suitable, fit, proper View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃśritam. a servant, adherent, dependant etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃśritānurāgam. the affection of dependants View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃśritavatmfn. one who has joined or united himself with (instrumental case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃśritavya wrong reading for srayitavya- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃtāritamfn. (fr. Causal) made to pass over, saved, rescued, delivered View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃtvaritamfn. greatly hurried, hastening View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃtvaritamind. in a hurry, in great haste, quickly View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samucchritamfn. well raised or elevated etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samucchritamfn. surging, high View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samucchritamfn. exalted, powerful View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samucchritabhujamf(ā-)n. having arms well raised View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samucchritadhvajavatmfn. having flags hoisted (in it, said of a town) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samucchritif. augmentation, increase, growth View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samudācaritamfn. addressed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samudīritamfn. (fr. Causal) set in motion, raised, uttered, pronounced View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samupāśritamfn. ( śri-) leaning against, supported by, resting on (accusative) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samupāśritamfn. resorted to, one who has recourse to (accusative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samupāśritamfn. occupied by (instrumental case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samupāśritamfn. visited or afflicted by (instrumental case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃvyapāśritamfn. ( śri-) relying on, resorting to (accusative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samyakcāritran. (with jaina-s) right conduct (See ratna-traya-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃyantritamfn. ( yantr-) fastened with bands, held in, stopped View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śānticaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śānticaritranāṭakan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śāntināthacaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sānusvaritamfn. (prob.) resounding, re-echoing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sapariśritkamind. up to the pariśrit-s (q.v) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saparitoṣamfn. possessing satisfaction, much pleased ( saparitoṣam am- ind.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saparitoṣamind. saparitoṣa
sapattritamfn. equals sa-pattrā-kṛta- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śāpayantritamfn. restrained by a curse View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śarabhojirājacaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saridāśritaSee arṇavasarid-āśrita-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saritf. a river, stream (saritāṃ varā-,"best of rivers") , the Ganges View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saritf. tāṃ nātha-,"lord of rivers", the ocean View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saritf. tām pati- idem or 'f. tāṃ nātha-,"lord of rivers", the ocean' , an expression for the number"four" etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saritf. a metre of 72 syllables View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saritf. a thread, string View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saritf. Name of durgā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śāritamfn. variegated, coloured View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saritamfn. flowing, fluent (as speech), View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saritkaphaocean View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saritsāgara(?) m. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saritsuraṅgāf. a channel of water
saritsutam. "river-son", Name of bhīṣma- (son of gaṅgā-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saritvatmfn. "possessed of rivers", the ocean View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sarvacaritan. Name of a drama. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sarvalokakritm. "Universe-maker", Name of śiva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sarvasaṅgaparityāgam. abandonment of all worldly affections or connections View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sarvasvaritamfn. having only the svarita- (q.v) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śāstritamfn. (fr. śāstra-) gaRa tārakādi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śāstritamfn. treated according to the śāstra-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śāstritārtham. a scientifically treated subject View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śatacandritamfn. equals -candra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śatamukharāvanacaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śatāritramf(ā-)n. hundred-oared View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śatruśalyacaritan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sattvocchritamfn. pre-eminent in courage View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
satvaritamind. hastily, quickly, forthwith View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
savrit(in a formula) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
savrittimfn. with a maintenance or salary View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śayanīyāśritamfn. gone to bed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śekharitamfn. made into or serving for a chaplet or diadem etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śekharitamfn. crested, peaked, tipped with (compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śeṣakāritamfn. unfinished, undone View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śibicarita n. the story of śibi- (occurring as an episode of the ). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śibicaritran. the story of śibi- (occurring as an episode of the ). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
siddhārthacaritan. Name of a poem View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
siddhasaritf. "river of the Blest", Name of the Ganges View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śīghrakāritvan. acuteness View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sindhuvāritam. () Vitex Negundo. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sindūritamfn. reddened, made red View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śiraḥśritmfn. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') being at the head or top of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śiśiritamfn. cooled View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sitacchattritamfn. turned into or representing a white umbrella View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sitacchattritam. having a white umbrella, possessed of the insignia of royalty View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sītādivyacaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śivacaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śivarājacaritran. Name of a poetical life of śiva-ji- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śliṣṭaparamparitarūpakan. a continuous series of words having a double meaning (a kind of metaphor) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
smāritamfn. (fr. Causal) reminded, called to mind, recalled to recollection View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śobhanācaritan. virtuous practice View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
spandacaritran. Name of work on twitching of the limbs (regarded as a branch of the science of augury or prognostication;See spandana-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sparitSee . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sparitmfn. See . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sparitmfn. one who injures or causes pain View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sphāritamfn. (fr. Causal) opened wide View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sphāritamfn. widely diffused View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sphāritamfn. throbbing, vibrating View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
spharitran. a particular instrument View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sphuritamfn. quivering, throbbing, trembling, palpitating, flashing etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sphuritamfn. struggling View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sphuritamfn. glittered, flashed (n. impersonal or used impersonally"it has been flashed by") View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sphuritamfn. broken forth, burst into view, suddenly arisen or appeared View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sphuritamfn. plainly displayed or exhibited View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sphuritamfn. swelled, swollen View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sphuritan. a tremulous or convulsive motion, quiver, throb, twitch, tremor, convulsion View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sphuritan. agitation or emotion of mind View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sphuritan. flash, gleam, glittering, radiance, sheen View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sphuritan. sudden appearance, coming into being View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sphuritādharamfn. having lips trembling with (compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sphuritaśatahradamfn. having flashing lightning (said of a cloud) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sphuritottarādharamfn. having trembling upper and under lip View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śrīdāmacaritan. Name of a drama View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śrīkaṇṭhacaritan. Name of a poem (written by maṅkha- who lived in kaśmīra- in the 12th century A.D.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śrīpālacaritan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śritmfn. going to, having gone or attained to in kṛcchre-śrit-, divi-śr/it-, nabhaḥ-śrit- etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śritamfn. clinging or attached to, standing or lying or being or fixed or situated in or on, contained in, connected with (locative case accusative,or compound) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śritamfn. one who has gone or resorted to (accusative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śritamfn. having attained or fallen or got into any condition (accusative or compound; see kaṣṭa-śr-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śritamfn. having assumed (a form) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śritamfn. gone to, approached, had recourse to, sought, occupied (as a place) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śritamfn. taken, chosen View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śritamfn. served, honoured, worshipped View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śritamfn. subservient, subordinate, auxiliary View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śritakṣamamfn. one who has had recourse to patience, composed, tranquil View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śritasattvamfn. one who has taken courage or resolution View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śritavatmfn. one who has taken refuge with (accusative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śritif. approach, recourse, entering (See ucchriti-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śritif. (-) equals śṛtyai-, śrayaṇārtham- (?) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śṛṅgāritamfn. affected by love, impassioned View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śṛṅgāritamfn. stained with red-lead, reddened View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śṛṅgāritamfn. adorned, decorated, embellished View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
stambakaritāf. formation of abundant sheaves or clusters of rice View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sthalacāritāf. sthalacārin
sthavirāvalīcaritan. Name of a jaina- work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sthiritind. having turned round (?) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
strīcaritran. the doings of women View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
stritamā stri-tarā- See stri-t- under strī-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sucaritamfn. well performed (See compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sucaritan. (s/u--; sg. and plural) good conduct or behaviour, virtuous actions etc. etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sucaritamf(ā-)n. well-conducted, moral, virtuous View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sucaritam. (with miśra-), Name of an author View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sucaritāf. a virtuous or faithful wife View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sucaritacaritamfn. one who leads a virtuous life View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sucaritārthapadamfn. (speech) containing well selected sense and words View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sucaritavratamfn. well performing religious observances View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sucaritinmfn. well-conducted, moral, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sucaritramf(ā-)n. well-conducted View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sucaritf. a virtuous wife View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sucaritf. coriander View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sucaritran. good conduct View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sūcchritamfn. well raised or lifted up or erected View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śucicaritamfn. virtuous or honest in conduct View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sudarśanasukarṇakacaritam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śukadevacaritran. Name of a chapter of the mahā-bhārata-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śukaharitamfn. idem or 'mfn. green like a parrot ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sukhasparśavihāritāf. an easy life or state of existence. () View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śuklaharitam. pale-greenness View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śuklaharitamf(ā-or iṇī-)n. pale-green View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sumantritamfn. well advised, wisely planned (am- impersonal or used impersonally) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sumantritan. good counsel (taṃ-kṛ-,"to take good counsel") View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
suparamaturitāf. (with Buddhists) Name of a deity View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
supattritamfn. well-feathered (as an arrow) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
suprasāritamf(ā-)n. widely extended View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
supratiṣṭhitacāritram. Name of a bodhi-sattva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
surasaritf. "river of the gods", the Ganges View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
surasaritsutam. metron. of bhīṣma- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sūrjanacaritan. a biography of king sūrjana- (by candraśekhara-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sūryaśrit varia lectio for -śv/it- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
susamāśritamfn. well stationed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
susaṃśrita wrong reading for prec. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sūtritamfn. strung, arranged etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sūtritamfn. directed or declared in a sūtra-, prescribed or delivered in aphorisms or axioms View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sūtritatvan. the being said or enjoined in a sūtra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
suvicāritamfn. well weighed, deliberately considered View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
suyantritamfn. fast bound ( suyantritatva -tva- n.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
suyantritamfn. well restrained or governed or self-controlled View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
suyantritatvan. suyantrita
śvabhritamfn. full of holes gaRa tārakādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svaḥsaritf. river of heaven, the Ganges, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svairitāf. wilfulness, independence View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śvāpadācaritamfn. overrun or infested by wild beast View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svapnatandritāf. languor produced by drowsiness View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svaraṃkritamfn. well arranged or prepared (as a sacrifice) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svaritamfn. caused to sound View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svaritamfn. sounded, having an accent, accentuated View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svaritamfn. having svarita- accent View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svaritamfn. added, admixed ( svaritatva -tva- n.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svaritam. n. the svarita- accent (a kind of mixed tone, produced by a combination of high and low tone, and therefore named in sam-āhāra-,the high and low tones being called ud-ātta-,"raised"or"acute", and an-udātta-,"low"or"grave";the svarita- corresponds to the Greek circumflex and is of four kinds, viz. kṣaipra-[as in vy-/āpta-for v/i-āpta-], jātya-[as in kv/a-for k/ua-], praśliṣṭa-[as in div/īva-for div/i iva-],or abhinihita-[as in t/e 'bruvan-for t/e abruvan-];it is marked in by a small upright stroke above a syllable;and when produced by an udātta-immediately preceding is sometimes called "a dependent svarita-", and, when it properly belongs to a word, an"independent svarita-") View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svaritatvan. the state of having the svarita- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svaritatvan. svarita
svaritavākyapaddhatif. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svaritavatmfn. containing the svarita- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svaritmfn. sounding, noisy, loud, boisterous View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svaritramf(-)n. having good oars, well rowed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svāśritamfn. self-dependent View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svastyarthacaritamfn. one who has happily attained his aim View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svatvavyabhicāritvan. svatvavyabhicārin
svavairitāf. hostility towards one's self (nijāyuṣaḥ sva-vairitāṃ-kṛ-,"to cause the destruction of one's own life") View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svayaṃguṇaparityāgam. spontaneous abandonment of"the thread"and of"virtue" View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ṭaṃkāritan. See jhaṃ-kārita- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tandritamfn. equals mūḍha- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tandritamfn. See a--. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tandritāf. lassitude, sleepiness View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tantritā varia lectio for ndri--. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tantritamfn. spoken (a spell) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tantritamfn. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') depending on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tantritamfn. a-- negative ,"independent" View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tantritamfn. for a-tandrita- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
taritāf. "leader", the fore-finger View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
taritāf. garlic (or"hemp"?) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
taritāf. a form of durgā- (see tvar-), Tantr. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritamfn. conveyed across View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
taritādhāraṇayantran. Name of a mystical diagram View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
taritāpūjāyantran. another diagram View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
taritavyan. impersonal or used impersonally it is to be crossed or passed over View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
taritmfn. one who crosses (a river) or who carries over View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritmfn. (fut.p. Causal tṝ-) being about to save View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
taritram. "a helmsman" (Scholiast or Commentator) or n. "an oar" ( ataritra a-taritra- mfn.without a t-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tattritīyamfn. doing that for the 3rd time View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritamfn. finished, settled View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tittiritvan. the condition of a partridge View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tribhuvanamāṇikyacaritan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
triṣaṣṭiśalākāpuruṣacaritan. "lives of the 63 great personages", Name of work by View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tritāf. a triad View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tritam. "third"(), Name of a Vedic deity (associated with the marut-s, vāyu-, and indra-;fighting like the latter with tvāṣṭra-, vṛtra-, and other demons;called āptya- [ q.v ],"water-deity", and supposed to reside in the remotest regions of the world, whence[ ]the idea of wishing to remove calamity to tvāṣṭra-, and the view of the trita-s being the keepers of nectar[ ] , similarly [ ]the notion of trita-'s bestowing long life;also conceived as an inferior deity conquering the demons by order and with the help of indra-[ ];fallen into a well he begged aid from the gods [ ];as to this last myth on relates that 3 ṛṣi-s, ekata-, dvita-, and trita-, parched with thirst, looked about and found a well, and when tvāṣṭra- began to draw water, the other two, desirous of his property, pushed him down and closed up the well with a wheel;shut up there, tvāṣṭra- composed a hymn to the gods, and managed miraculously to prepare the sacrificial soma-, that he might drink it himself, or offer it to the deities and so be extricated: this is alluded to in [ confer, compare ] and described in ;also makes him a ṛṣi-, and he is the supposed author of ;in epic legends[ ] ekata-, dvita-, and tvāṣṭra- are described as 3 brothers, sons of gautama- or of prajā-pati- or brahmā-;elsewhere tvāṣṭra- is one of the 12 sons of manu- cākṣuṣa- by naḍvalā- ; confer, compare traitan/a-; Zend Thrita;, , etc.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tritan. triplet of young (three-twin) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tritakṣan. an association of 3 carpenters View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tritakṣīf. idem or 'n. an association of 3 carpenters ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tritakūpam. " tvāṣṭra-'s well", Name of a tīrtha- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tritāmramfn. red on 3 parts of the body View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tritantimfn. having 3 chords (a lute) Scholiast or Commentator on and View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tritantrikāf. (a lute) having 3 chords. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tritantumfn. thrice woven (?) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tritasind. on 3 sides View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tritayan. () a triad View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tritrikamfn. ? (rāma-), 32, 13.
tritrikoṇan. (equals tri-k-) the 9th mansion View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tritvan. equals -- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tryāvritmfn. consisting of 3 series, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tvaritamfn. () hasty, quick, swift, expeditious etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tvaritan. impersonal or used impersonally hurried View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tvaritan. haste (See sa-tvaritam-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tvaritāf. durgā- and a magical formula called after her View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tvaritagatif. "swift motion", a metre View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tvaritakam. equals tūrṇaka- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tvaritakāf. idem or 'm. equals tūrṇaka- ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tvaritamind. quickly, swiftly View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tvaritaramind. more quickly View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tvaritatamfn. stepping quickly View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tvaritavikramamfn. of 4 x 10 syllables View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tvaritoditamfn. equals tūrṇod- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tvaritoditamfn. see tūrt/a-, rṇa-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uccaritamfn. gone up or out, risen View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uccaritamfn. uttered, articulated View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uccaritan. excrement, dung View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uccāritamfn. pronounced, uttered, articulated View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uccāritamfn. having excretion, one who has had evacuation of the bowels View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uccāritan. evacuation of the bowels View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ucchritamfn. raised, lifted up, erected etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ucchritamfn. rising, arising, mounting etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ucchritamfn. high, tall etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ucchritamfn. advancing, arisen, grown powerful or mighty etc.
ucchritamfn. wanton, luxuriant etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ucchritamfn. excited View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ucchritamfn. increased, grown, enlarged, large, huge View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ucchritamfn. born, produced View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ucchritam. Pinus Longifolia View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ucchritapāṇimfn. with out-stretched hand. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ucchritif. rising upwards, elevation View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ucchritif. increase, intensity View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ucchritif. the upright side of a triangle View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ucchritif. the elevation or height of a figure. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ucchritya ind.p. having erected or raised View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uccitritamfn. richly decorated or furnished with (instrumental case), ibidem or 'in the same place or book or text' as the preceding View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
udāracaritamfn. of generous behaviour, noble-minded, noble etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
udāracaritam. Name of a king View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
udayanacaritan. Name of a drama. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uḍḍamaritamfn. stirred up, excited. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uddhāritamfn. taken out, drawn forth, extricated View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uddhāritamfn. released. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uddhatiśritmfn. "towering and arrogant", . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
udīritamfn. excited, stirred up View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
udīritamfn. animated, agitated View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
udīritamfn. increased, augmented View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
udīritamfn. said, uttered, enunciated. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
udīritadhīmfn. one whose mind is active, acute-minded View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
udīritendriyamfn. one whose senses are excited View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upabhritamfn. brought near, procured for (dative case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upabhritamfn. destined to (dative case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upacaritamfn. approached, attended View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upacaritamfn. applied etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upacaritan. a particular rule of saṃdhi- (see upa-cāra-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upācaritam. (in grammar) a particular saṃdhi- rule (by which a visarga- in the pada-pāṭha- becomes s-before k-and p-in the saṃhitā- exempli gratia, 'for example' y/as p/atiḥ- ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upacaritavyamfn. to be attended or waited upon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upacaritavyamfn. to be treated View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upacaritavyamfn. to be respected or revered or treated with attention View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upacaritavyāf. service, attendance View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upacaritavyāf. attendance on a patient View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upacaritavyāf. practice of medicine. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upakāritvan. aid, succour, protection View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upamantritamfn. called near or hither etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upamantritamfn. summoned, invited, persuaded View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upamantritamfn. addressed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upāmantritamfn. addressed, called upon, summoned View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upaniḥśritya ind.p. having gone out to View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upapattiparityaktamfn. destitute of argument or proof. unproved, unreasonable View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uparitalan. the upper surface View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uparitanamf(ī-)n. upper (opposed to adhastana-) commentator or commentary on and View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uparitanamf(ī-)n. following, further on, subsequent (in a book) commentator or commentary on ., on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uparitasind. over, above View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upaśritamfn. placed near, brought to the attention of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upaśritamfn. leaning towards or upon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upāśritamfn. lying or resting upon, leaning against, clinging to View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upāśritamfn. having recourse to, relying upon, taking refuge with etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upāśritamfn. taking one's self to View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upāśritamfn. approached, arrived at, abiding in etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upāśritamfn. anything against which one leans or upon which one rests View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upayantritamfn. solicited or compelled to do anything, allured (erroneous for upa-ma- ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
urvaritamfn. left, left over (equals avaśiṣṭa- commentator or commentary) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uṣācaritan. Name (also title or epithet) of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
utsāritamfn. caused to move, driven away etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uttamacaritram. Name (also title or epithet) of a prince, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uttararāmacarita(or caritra-) n. "the further or later deeds of rāma-", Name of a drama of bhava-bhūti-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uttarāśritamfn. having gone to or being in the northern direction View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
utteritan. (said to be fr. uttṝ-), one of the five paces of a horse View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vairakāritāf. quarrelsomeness
vairitāf. enmity, hostility ("to", saha-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vairitāf. heroism View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vairitvan. enmity, hostility View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vairitvan. heroism View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaiśyacaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vakritamfn. curved, crooked, bent View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vakritamfn. entering on an apparently retrograde course (as a planet) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vālmīkicaritan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vāmanacitracaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaṃśacaritan. family history, the history of a race or dynasty, genealogy View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaṃśānucaritan. the history of a family or dynasty, a genealogical list (one of five distinguishing marks of a purāṇa-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaṃśānuvaṃśacaritan. the history of both old and recent families (See prec.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaṃśapattraharitālan. bamboo-leaved orpiment View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaṃśyānucarita varia lectio for vaṃśān- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
varasāvitrīcaritran. Name of a kavya-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
varavritamfn. received as a boon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vārijākṣacaritran. Name of a chapter of the brahmāṇḍa-purāṇa-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritamfn. (fr. Causal) warded off, prevented, hindered, impeded, restrained View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritamfn. forbidden (See next) . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritamfn. (fr. Causal) concealed, hidden, covered, surrounded, obstructed etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritamfn. prevented, prohibited, forbidden View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritaraṃgam. a wave View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritasind. "from water"(and"restrained"; see vārita-,) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritaskaram. "water-thief", Name of the sun (as absorbing water) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritaskaram. a cloud View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritavāmamfn. eager for forbidden things View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritimfn. growing near the water (said of water-plants) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
varitmfn. one who covers or screens (see 1. varītri-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
varitmfn. choosing, a chooser View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
varit varim/an-, v/ariṣṭha-. See . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
varit riman- etc. See ,
ritf. "protecting from rain", an umbrella View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ritran. observance of that which is forbidden View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
varṇacitritamfn. painted with colours View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
varṇakacitritamfn. painted with colours or with a brush (see varṇa-c-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
varṣādhritamfn. worn in the rainy season (as a garment) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vasantotsavacaritan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vasubharitamfn. full of treasures. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vasucaritan. Name of a campū-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vātāritaṇḍulāf. Embelia Ribes View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedāntācāryacaritram. Name of work (with vaibhava-prakāśikā-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vicaritamfn. moved in different directions etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vicaritan. wandering, roaming about View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vicāritamfn. deliberated, considered, discussed, judged etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vicāritamfn. anything which is under discussion, dubious, doubtful, uncertain View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vicāritamfn. anything which has been discussed or decided, ascertained, settled View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vicāritan. (also plural) deliberation, doubt, hesitation View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vicchuritamfn. bestrewed or powdered or covered or inlaid with (instrumental case or compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vicchuritam. a particular samādhi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vicitracaritramfn. behaving in a wonderful manner View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vicitritamfn. variegated, spotted, coloured, painted View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vicitritamfn. embellished by, adorned or decorated with (instrumental case or compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vicitritamfn. wonderful View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vidāritamfn. torn asunder, rent, split, broken open View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vidhitrayaparitrānan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vidhuritamfn. dejected, depressed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vidhuritan. plural adversities, calamities View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vighnatantritamfn. gaRa tārakādi- (perhaps for vighnita-and tantrita-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vihvaritaSee vi-hvṛ-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vihvaritamfn. staggered, fallen (Vedic according to to on ). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vikāritamfn. changed, rendered unfavourable or unfriendly View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vikāritāf. () change, alteration. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vikāritvan. () change, alteration. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vikramacaritan. Name of 32 stories describing the acts of vikramāditya- (also called siṃhāsana-dvātriṃśat- q.v) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vikramacaritran. Name of 32 stories describing the acts of vikramāditya- (also called siṃhāsana-dvātriṃśat- q.v) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vikramādityacaritran. vikramāditya
vikramārkacaritan. vikramārka
vikramārkacaritran. vikramārka
vimiśritamfn. mixed, mingled (with lipi- f.a particular mode of writing) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vimritP. -mrityati-, to fall to pieces, crumble away, decay View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vināyakacaritan. Name of the 73rd chapter of the krīḍā-khaṇḍa- or 2nd part of the gaṇeśa-- purāṇa-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vinivāritamfn. kept off, prevented, hindered, opposed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vinivāritamfn. screened, covered View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viparitap Passive voice -tapyate-, to be greatly distressed, suffer great pain View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vipratāritamfn. (fr. Causal) imposed upon, deceived View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vīracarita n. "exploits of the hero", Name of a celebrated drama by bhava-bhūti- (equals mahāvīra-carita- q.v) and of a legendary history of śāli-vāhana-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vīracaritran. "exploits of the hero", Name of a celebrated drama by bhava-bhūti- (equals mahāvīra-carita- q.v) and of a legendary history of śāli-vāhana-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vīranārāyaṇacaritan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viruddhamatikāritāf. a figure of speech which (by using ambiguous words) suggests contradictory notions (exempli gratia, 'for example' vidadhāti galagraham-,"she gives an embrace", where the word gala-graha-means also "a disease of the throat") View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
visāritamfn. (fr. Causal) made to go forth or spread, set on foot, occasioned, effected, performed
visāritāf. visārin
visāritāṅgamfn. one who has an expanded or extended body View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viśiṣṭacāritram. Name of a bodhi-sattva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vismāritamfn. (fr. Causal) caused to forget anything (accusative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vismāritamfn. caused to be forgotten, lost to memory View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
visphāritamfn. opened wide, torn or rent asunder etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
visphāritamfn. exhibited, manifested, displayed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
visphāritan. drawing or discharging (a bow) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
visphuritamfn. trembling, quivering, palpitating ( visphuritādhara dhara- mfn.having quivering lips ; visphuritekṣaṇa tekṣaṇa- mfn.having trembling eyes ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
visphuritamfn. flashing, glittering ( visphuritaśastra -śastra- mfn.with glittering weapons ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
visphuritamfn. swollen, enlarged View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
visphuritan. equals sphuraṇa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
visphuritādharamfn. visphurita
visphuritaśastramfn. visphurita
visphuritavyamfn. to be opened wide (as the eyes) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
visphuritekṣaṇamfn. visphurita
viśritamfn. (prob, = resounded)
vistāritamfn. (fr. idem or 'f. Name of a commentator or commentary on the kāvya-prakāśa-.') spread, extended View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vistāritamfn. fully stated, amplified View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viśuddhacāritram. "of virtuous conduct", Name of a bodhi-sattva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
visūritan. idem or 'n. ( sūr-) sorrow, distress (See the Prakrit) .' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
visūritāf. fever View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viśvanāthacaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viśvasritm. equals viśvasya sraṣṭā- (see prec.) or equals viśvasya pātā- (Scholiast or Commentator) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vitaritm. a granter, bestower (with genitive case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viviktacaritamfn. faultless in conduct or behaviour View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vrajendracaritan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vratacāritāf. vratacārin
vṛṣabhacaritamfn. done by bulls View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vṛṣabhacaritan. Name of a metre (commonly called hāriṇī-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyāghāghāritamfn. besprinkled, sprinkled with oil or ghee View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyājanidritamf(ā-)n. feigning sleep View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyāpāparitamfn. (fr. id.) , made to be busy, set to work, engaged, occupied View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyapāśrayapāśritamfn. one who has taken refuge with (accusative or comp.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyapāśrayapāśritamfn. having taken or assumed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyāsacaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyāsādritaraṃgiṇīf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyasanaprasāritakaramfn. having the hand stretched forth for (inflicting) calamity View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyatikaritamfn. mixed or joined with (instrumental case or compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyavahāritāf. vyavahārin
vyāvrityaSee vyā-vṛt-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyomasaritf. equals -gaṅgā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yantritaSee . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yantritamfn. restrained, curbed, bound, fettered, confined (literally and figuratively) etc. (see a--and su-y-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yantritamfn. subject to, compelled by, depending on (instrumental case ablative,or compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yantritamfn. bandaged, placed in splints View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yantritamfn. one who takes pains or strenuously exerts himself for (kṛte-, in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yantritakathamfn. restrained in speech, constrained to be silent View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yantritasāyakamfn. one who has fixed an arrow (in a kind of self-acting bow or machine which discharges itself when touched) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yathocchritamind. as raised or erected View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yatkiṃcanakāritāf. yatkiṃcanakārin
yayāticaritan. "the story of yayāti-", Name of a nāṭaka- (by rudra-deva-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yuddhakāritvan. yuddhakārin
Apte Search
200 results
aṅgārita अङ्गारित a. [अङ्गारम् अस्य संजातम्; तारका˚ इतच्] Charred, roasted, half-burnt. 'burnt' food is not accepted by Jain ascetics. -तः -तम् [अङ्गारमिव आचरति; अङ्गार-क्विप् ततः कर्तरि क्त] An early bud of the किंशुक tree. -ता 1 = अङ्गारधानी q. v. -2 A bud in general. -3 A creeper. (लतामात्रे). -4 N. of a river.
adhiśrita अधिश्रित a. Heated; Bhāg.1.9.5.
adhikāritā अधिकारिता त्वम् Authority, rightful claim, qualification &c.
adhyācarita अध्याचरित a. used शय्यासने$ध्याचरिते श्रेयसा न समाविशेत् Ms.2.119.
anāśrita अनाश्रित a. Not connected with, or dependent on, independent, detached; non-inherent.
anirdhārita अनिर्धारित a. Not determined or ascertained.
anucarita अनुचरित p. p. Followed &c. attended, विद्याधरानु- चरितं किन्नरीभिस्तथैव च Mb.3.158.39. -तम् Walk; walk in life; conduct.
anumantrita अनुमन्त्रित a. Consecrated.
antarita अन्तरित p. p. 1 Gone between, intervening. -2 Gone within, hidden, concealed, covered, screened, shielded, protected (from view) by something; पादपान्तरित एव विश्वस्तामेनां पश्यामि Ś.1 hid behind a creeper; सारसेन स्वदेहान्तरितो राजा H.3 screened; विटपान्तरितस्तिष्ठ Ś.3; नलिनीपत्रान्तरितं प्रियसहचरमपश्यन्ती Ś.4; शार्दूलचर्मान्तरितोरुपृष्ठम् Ku.7.37 covered; Dk.21,146; K.28,152,2; पर्व- तान्तरितो रविः set. Ak.; त्वगन्तरिततृतीयलोचनम् K.18, R.1. 8; उन्मादमोहान्तरितो$पि Māl.9; तल्पमन्तरितभूमिभिः कुथैः R. 19.2. -3 Gone in, reflected; स्फटिकभित्त्यन्तरितान् मृगशावकान् reflected in the crystal wall. -4 (a) Concealed, made dormant, impeded, hindered, prevented; त्वदभिप्रायापरि- ज्ञानान्तरित एवायमनुनयः Mu.2 prevented from being made; त्वद्वाञ्छान्तरितानि साध्यानि Mu.4.15 prevened from being actually effected &c.; द्विषत्प्रतापान्तरितोरुतेजाः Ki.3.45 obscured; नोपालभ्यः पुमांस्तत्र दैवान्तरितपौरुषः Pt.2.133. (b) Separated, lost to view, made invisible by interposition; मुहूर्तान्तरितमाधवा दुर्मनायमाना Māl.8; भर्तुरेतान्यक्ष- राणि बिम्बान्तरितानि M.3; धनमित्राख्ययान्तरितः Dk.36; चन्द्रा- पीडनामान्तरितस्य चन्द्रमसः K.338; प्रतिनिवर्तमानयात्राजनसंकुलेन अन्तरिते तस्मिन् Māl.2; क्रियतां कथमन्त्यमण्डनं परलोकान्तरितस्य ते मया Ku.4.22 separated (from me) by the next world, i. e. dead, deceased; मेघैरन्तरितः प्रिये तव मुखच्छा- यानुकारी शशी S. D. (c) Drowned, obscured removed, eclipsed; परलोकभयभैहिकदुःखेनान्तरितम् Dk.82. drowned, eclipsed, obscured; वीरलोकसाधुवादेनान्तरितः समरतूर्यरवः Ve. 4 drowned; विस्मयान्तरितशोकवृत्तान्ता K.322; कार्यान्तरितोत्कण्ठम् V.3.4 forgotten, removed; इन्दुप्रकाशान्तरितोडुतुल्याः R.16. 65 obscured by moon-light. -5 Disappeared, vanished, departed, retired, withdrawn; (महामृगः) आश्रमान्तरितः शीघ्रं प्लवमानो महाजवः Mb.3.311.9. अन्तरिते तस्मिञ्- शयरसेनापतौ K.33; नाथदेहस्पर्शेन अन्तरित एव सन्तापः U.6 has disappeared, has been removed. -6 Passed over, omitted; अये मध्यमाम्बावृत्तान्तो$न्तरित एवार्येण U. i; कथान्तरेणान्तरितमिदम् M.5 put off, delayed. -7 Slighted, despised. -8 (In Math.) That which remains, the remainder. -9 A technical term in architecture.
apacarita अपचरित p. p. Gone away, departed; deceased. -तम् A fault, wrong or wicked deed, misdeed; आहोस्वि- त्प्रसवो ममापचरितैर्विष्टम्भितो वीरुधाम् Ś.5.9.
apapātritaḥ अपपात्रितः [पात्रभोजनात् वहिष्कृतः] One who has lost his caste through some great sin or offence, and who is, therefore, not allowed by his relatives to eat or drink from a common vessel.
apavārita अपवारित p. p. Covered, concealed; ˚तं प्रवहणं तिष्ठति Mk.6 covered; vanished, disappeared; -तम्, -अपवारित- कम् Concealed or secret manner. -तम्, अपवारितकेन, अपवार्य ind. Frequently occurring in dramas in the sense of 'apart', 'aside to another' (opp. प्रकाशम्); it is speaking in such a way that only the person addressed may hear it; तद्भवेदपवारितम् । रहस्यं तु यदन्यस्य परावृत्त्य प्रकाश्यते । त्रिपताककरेणान्यमपवार्यान्तरा कथाम् S. D.6.
apāśrita अपाश्रित p. p. 1 (Passively used) (a) Restored to. (b) Girt round, fastened. (c) Inhabited by. -2 (Actively used) Resting or reposing on, resorting to, entering on or into, being in or under.
abhicarituḥ अभिचरितुः f. Ved. Enchanting.
abhisphurita अभिस्फुरित a. Expanded to the full, full-grown (as a blossom).
abhyucchrita अभ्युच्छ्रित a. Uplifted, upraised; elevated by, distinguished for अभ्युच्छ्रिता कर्मभिरप्यवन्ध्यैः R.16.2.
abhrita अभ्रित a. [अभ्राणि अस्य संजातानि; अभ्र-इतच् तारकादिगण] Overcast with clouds, clouded; ददर्श काले दिवमभ्रितामिव R.3.12.
ayantrita अयन्त्रित a. Unrestrained, unchecked, self-willed.
arit अरितृ [ऋ-तृच्-इडागमः] A rower, helmsman (Ved.).
aritra अरित्र a. [गच्छत्यनेन; ऋ-इत्र P.III.2.184.] Ved. 1 Propelling, urging onwards. -2 Protecting on all sides. -त्रम् An oar; लोलैररित्रैश्चरणैरिवाभितः Śi.12.17. -2 A rudder, helm; नावा चापि यथा प्राज्ञो विभागज्ञः स्वरित्रया Mb. 14.5.27. -3 A ship, boat. -4 A part of a carriage. -5 A Soma vessel. -त्रः A Soma vessel. [cf. L. aratrum Gr. cretmos]. -Comp. -गाध a. 'oardeep', shallow (water). -परण a. Ved. crossing by means of oars.
ābharita आभरित p. p. 1 Filled. -2 Decorated.
āmantrita आमन्त्रित p. p. 1 Invited, called. -2 Appointed to do a thing which is not obligatory. आमन्त्रणं कामचारानुज्ञा Sk. -3 Consecrated with a मन्त्र; शरणामामन्त्रितानाम् Mb.3.2.26. -Comp. -विभक्ति f. Vocative case; तत्र आमन्त्रितविभक्तिवचनं स्तुतये । ŚB. on MS.9.1.9. ˚वचनम् The employment of an expression in the vocative case; तत्र आमन्त्रितविभक्तिवचनं स्तुतये । ŚB. on MS.9.1.9. -तम् 1 Addressing. -2 Talk, conversation; V.2. -3 The vocative case; संबोधने या प्रथमा सामन्त्रितसंज्ञा स्यात् Sk.
āritrika आरित्रिक a. [P.IV.2.116] Pertaining to an oar &c.
āśrita आश्रित p. p. (Used actively) (with an acc.) 1 Resorting to, having recourse to; स किलाश्रममन्त्यमाश्रितः R.8.14; कृष्णाश्रितः = कृष्णमाश्रितः Sk.; मानुषीं तनुमाश्रितम् Bg.9.11; R.1.13. -2 Dwelling in, inhabiting, seated or resting on, stationing oneself at or on; इदं स्फटिकतल- माश्रितो भवामि M.4; so वातायनमाश्रितः पश्यति; द्रव्याश्रितो गुणः Ak.; R.12.21,1.75; हार˚, दुर्ग˚ &c. -3 Using, employing. -4 Following, practising, observing; माध्यस्थ्यम्, धर्मम्, प्रवज्याम्; कल्पवृक्षा इवाश्रिताः Ku.6.6; Bk.7. 42. -5 Receiving anything as an inherent or integral part. -6 Dependent on; राष्ट्रं बाहुबलाश्रितम् Ms.9.255. -7 Referring to, regarding; भीष्माश्रिताः कथाः Mb.; उवाच धर्मसंयुक्तमश्वमेधाश्रितं वचः Rām.7.91.6. -8 (Passively used) Resorted to, inhabited &c.; चटकाश्रिता शाखा Pt.1; R.3.11. -तः A dependent servent, follower; अस्मदाश्रितानाम् H.1; प्रभूणां प्रायश्चलं गौरवमाश्रितेषु Ku.3.1. -तम् (pl.) The objects perceived by the senses and mind.
āsūtrita आसूत्रित a. 1 Forming or wearing a garland. -2 Interwoven.
īrita ईरित p. p. 1 Sent, despatched. -2 Said, uttered &c.; ˚आकूतम् declared purpose or intention.
uccarita उच्चरित p. p. 1 Gone up or out, risen. -2 Uttered. pronounced &c. -तम् Excrement, fæces.
uccārita उच्चारित p. p. 1 Pronounced, uttered. -2 Having excrement. -तम् Evacuation of the bowels.
ucchrita उच्छ्रित p. p. 1 Raised, lifted up; नात्युच्छ्रितं नातिनीचं चैलाजिनकुशोत्तरम् Bg.6.11. H.2.123; R.17.33. -2 Gone up, risen; ˚सितांशुकर Śi.4.25; K.26 -3 High, tall, lofty, exalted; अभिययौ स हिमाचलमुच्छ्रितम् Ki.5.1; Bg.6.11;9.19; पञ्चयोजनमुच्छ्रिता Mb. -4 Produced, born. -5 Increasing, growing, Prosperous; अत्युच्छ्रितम् तथात्मानम् (मन्येत) Ms.7.17; उच्छ्रितान्द्वेष्टि दुर्मतिः Rām.1.15.8; increased (in size or bulk); grown. -6 Proud.
ucchritiḥ उच्छ्रितिः = उच्छ्रय q. v.
utteritam उत्तेरितम् One of the five paces of a horse.
uddhārita उद्धारित 1 a. Taken out, drawn forth, extricated, released.
upacaritam उपचरितम् A particular rule of Sandhi.
upācarita उपाचरित p. p. Attached to any one's service, obedient. -तः (In gram.) That rule of Sandhi by which the sound Visarga becomes स् before क् and प्.
upāśrita उपाश्रित a. 1 Relying or depending upon. -2 Supporting (fig. also), bearing, holding, protecting. चिन्तामपरिमेयां तां प्रलयान्तामुपाश्रिताः Bg.16.11. -3 An indirect dependent; (as against संश्रित direct. dependent); संश्रितोपाश्रितांस्तथा यथाशक्त्यनुकम्पेत Mb.12.87.24. -4 See उपाश्रय (4).
urvarita उर्वरित a. 1 Much, excessive. -2 Remaining after; भुक्त˚ Pt.5.
kaṭhorita कठोरित a. made to strive, strengthened; Hch.
rita कारित a. Caused to be done or effected. -ता Interest, the amount of which is fixed by the debtor (being forced to do so by the creditor). -तम् The causal form of a verb. कारितार्थ causal sense शेत्यर्थः कारि- तार्थो वा निर्देशो$यं समीक्षितः Mbh. on P.V.3.55.
kirmīrita किर्मीरित a. 1 Variegated, spotted. शर्मोर्मिकिर्मीरितधर्म- लिप्सुः N.6.97. -2 Mingled with; तत्रास्मि पत्युर्वरिवस्ययेह शर्मोर्मिकिर्मीरितधर्मलिप्सुः Hch.6.97; cf. also क्षुत्क्षामार्भक- संभ्रमोक्तिनिगडैः किर्मीरिताः ... Sūktisundara 5.1.
kuharitam कुहरितम् 1 Sound in general. -2 The cry of the (Indian) cuckoo. -3 A sound uttered in copulation.
korita कोरित a. Budded, sprouted. -2 Ground, pounded, reduced to small particles
kṣarita क्षरित p. p. Dropped, liquefied, oozed, melted &c.
kṣārita क्षारित a. 1 Distilled from saline matter. -2 Falsely accused (especially of adultery). -3 Accused of a crime, calumniated; कच्चिदार्यो$पि शुद्धात्मा क्षारितश्चापकर्मणा Rām.2.1.56.
garita गरित a. Poisoned.
gahvarita गह्वरित a. 1 Being in a hiding-place, concealed. -2 Absorbed (in one's thought); याज्ञसेन्या वचः श्रुत्वा कृष्णो गह्वरितोभवत् Mb.2.68.45 (here commentator Nīlakaṇṭha says गह्वरितः करुणातिशयाद्गद्गदकण्ठः).
ritram गारित्रम् Rice, corn.
ghargharitam घर्घरितम् The grunting of a hog; निशम्य ते घर्घरितं स्वखेदक्षयिष्णु मायामयसूकरस्य Bhāg.3.13.25.
carita चरित p. p. [चर् कर्मणि क्त] 1 Wandered or roamed over, gone. -2 Performed, practised. -3 Attained. -4 Known. -5 Offered; Ś.4.21. -6 Acted, behaved; Ś.5.16. -तम् 1 Going, moving, course. -2 Acting, doing, practice, behaviour, acts, deeds; उदारचरितानाम् H.1.7; सर्वं खलस्य चरितं मशकः करोति 1.81. -3 Life, biography, adventures, history उत्तरं रामचरितं तत्प्रणीतं प्रयुज्यते U.1.2; दिवौकसस्त्वच्चरितं लिखन्ति Ś.7.5; so दशकुमारचरितम् &c. -4 Nature. -5 Fixed law, due or proper observance. -Comp. -अर्थ a. 1 that has accomplished its end or desired object, successful; राम- रावणयोर्युद्धं चरितार्थमिवाभवत् R.12.87; चरितार्थैव भारती 1. 36; Ki.13.62. राज्ञां तु चरितार्थता दुःखोत्तरा एव Ś.5; चरि- तार्थत्वात् प्रधानविनिवृत्तेः Sāṅ. K.68. -2 satisfied, contented. -3 effected, accomplished. -4 significant, true to its sense; Ku.2.17. -5 appropriate, fit; Ku.4.45. ˚ता the attainment of the desired object; Ś.5.
caritavya चरितव्य pot. p. 1 To be gone. -2 To be followed, practised or performed &c.
caritram चरित्रम् [चर् इत्र] 1 Behaviour, habit, conduct, practice, acts, deeds. -2 Performance, observance. -3 History, life, biography, account, adventures. -4 Nature, disposition. -5 Duty, established or instituted observance; Ms.2.2,9.7. -6 A foot, leg. -7 Going. -त्रा The tamarind tree. -Comp. -बन्धकः a friendly pledge.
rita चारित a. 1 Caused to go. -2 Distilled &c.
ritārthyam चारितार्थ्यम् Attainment of an object, successfulness.
ritram चारित्रम् [चर्-णित्रन् Uṇ.4.171; चरित्रमेव स्वार्थे अण् वा] (also written चारित्र्यम्) 1 Conduct, behaviour, manner of acting; कुलाक्रोशकरं लोके धिक् ते चारित्रमीदृशम् Rām.3.53. 9. -2 Good manner or character, reputation, probity, uprightness, good conduct; अनृतं नाभिधास्यामि चारित्रभ्रंश- कारणम् Mk.3.26,25; चारित्र्यविहीन आढ्यो$पि च दुर्गतो भवति 1.43. -3 Chastity, purity of life (of women). -4 Disposition, temperament. -5 Peculiar observance or practice. -6 Hereditary observance. -त्रा The tamarind tree. -Comp. -कवच a. clad in the armour of chastity -देवता the presiding deity of virtue or chastity; U.7.
citrita चित्रित a. Variegated, spotted. -2 Painted.
rita चीरित a. Having strips, ragged.
corita चोरित a. Stolen, robbed. -तम् Theft.
coritakam चोरितकम् 1 Petty theft, larceny. -2 Anything stolen.
chidrita छिद्रित a. [छिद् कर्मणि क्त] 1 having holes. -2 Bored, perforated.
churitam छुरितम् A cut, a scratch; उरोजसीम्नि छुरितं वितन्वती क्षितीश्वरे सा$कृत मन्दसीत्कृतम् Rām. Ch.2.72.
churita छुरित p. p. [छुर्-क्त] 1 Set, inlaid. -2 Overspread, coated, covered over with; अनेकधातुच्छुरिताश्मराशेः Śi.3.4.7; इन्दुकिरणच्छुरितमुखीम् K.1. -3 Blended, intermixed; परस्परेणच्छुरितामलच्छवी Śi.1.22. -4 Besmeared, anointed; Ve.1.1. -5 Cut. छुरी churī छूरिका chūrikā छूरी chūrī छुरी छूरिका छूरी A knife.
jarita जरित a. [जरा-इतच्] 1 Old, aged. -2 Decayed, infirm; पाण्डुरस्यातपत्रस्य च्छायायां जरितं मया Rām.2.2.7.
jarjarita जर्जरित a. [जर्ज्-णिच् कर्मणि क्त] 1 Old, decayed, infirm. -2 Worn out, torn to pieces, shattered, splintered &c. -3 Completely overpowered, disabled; स्मरशरजर्जरितापि सा प्रभाते Gīt.8.
jāgarita जागरित a. One who has been long awake. -तम् Waking.
jāgarit जागरितृ a., (-त्री f.), जागरूक a. [जागृ-तृच् ऊक् वा] 1 Wakeful, waking, sleepless; स्वपतो जागरूकस्य याथार्थ्यं वेद कस्तव R.1.24. -2 Watchful, vigilant; वर्णाश्रमावेक्षण- जागरूकः R.14.85; Śi.3.36.
jvarita ज्वरित ज्वरिन् a. (-णी f.) Attacked with fever.
tandrita तन्द्रित a. Lazy; as in अतन्द्रित 'unremitting'; Ku.5.14; यदि ह्यहं न वर्तेयं जातु कर्मण्यतन्द्रितः Bg.3.23.
taritā तरिता 1 The fore-finger. -2 Garlic, or hemp. -3 A form of Durgā. -Comp. -धरण (-पूजा) यन्त्रम् N. of a mystical diagram.
rita तीरित a. Settled, adjusted, decided according to evidence; Ms.9.233. -तम् 1 Completion of any affair. -2 Non-infliction of a sentence owing to bribery or other unfair means.
rita तारित p. p. Made to cross, conveyed across, saved, rescued.
rit तारित् a. [तॄ-णिच्-णिनि] Enabling to cross, saving, delivering.
tritaya त्रितय a. (-यी f.) Consisting of three parts, three-fold. -यम् A triad, a group of three; श्रद्धा वित्तं विधिश्चेति त्रितयं तत्समागतम् Ś.7.29; R.8.78; Y.3.266.
tvarita त्वरित p. p. Quick, swift, speedy. -तम् Despatch, haste. -ind. Quickly, fast, speedily, hastily.
danturita दन्तुरित a. 1 Having long or projecting teeth. -2 Notched, serrated, bristling; केतकिदन्तुरिताशे Gīt.1; पुलक- भर˚ 11; K.216. -3 Besmeared, covered with; Māl.3.
darita दरित p. p. 1 Frightened, terrified. -2 Timid. -3 Torn, rent.
daridrita दरिद्रित a. Poor, pauper, distressed.
rita दारित p. p. Torn, divided, split, rent.
dauritam दौरितम् Mischief, evil, harm.
dharit धरित्री [धृ-इत्र गौरा ˚ङीप्] 1 The earth; नैतच्चित्रं यदयमुदधि- श्यामसीमां धरित्रीमेकः कृत्स्नां नगरपरिघप्राशुबाहुर्भुनक्ति Ś2.16; R.14.54; Ku.1.2,17. -2 Ground, soil. -Comp. -पुत्रः the planet Mars. -भृत् m. a king.
dhārita धारित a. Held, supported, maintained, &c. -तम् A horse's trot; also धारितकम्.
dhūsarita धूसरित a. Made grey, greyish.
dhoritam धोरितम् [धोर्-भावे क्त] 1 Injuring, hurting, striking. -2 Going, motion. -3 A horse's trot.
dhauritakam धौरितकम् A horse's trot; cf. धौरित.
namrita नम्रित a. Bent or bowed down, stooping.
niḥsārita निःसारित a. Expelled, dismissed, turned out.
nidrita निद्रित a. Asleep, slept.
niyantrita नियन्त्रित p. p. Curbed, restrained, checked. -2 Guided, governed. -3 Restricted, confined to (a particular sense, as a word).
nirdārita निर्दारित a. 1 Torn, rent. -2 Opened, split open; क्रूरनिर्दारिताक्षः Śi.18.28.
nirdhārita निर्धारित p. p. Determined, ascertained, fixed, settled, &c.
nirvārita निर्वारित a. Warded off; Prab.4.3/31.
paraṃparita परंपरित a. Continuous, forming a series.
paricarit परिचरितृ m. A servant, an attendant; Ch. Up.
paricāritam परिचारितम् Amusement, sport; Buddh.
paritakmya परितक्म्य a. Ved. Dangerous, risky, unsafe. -क्म्या 1 Error. -2 Night, darkness.
paritap परितप् 1 P. 1 To heat, burn, consume. -2 To inflame, set on fire. -3 To suffer pain. -4 To practise penance. -Caus. 1 To scorch. -2 To torment.
paritapta परितप्त p. p. 1 Heated, burnt. -2 Tormented, pained.
paritaptiḥ परितप्तिः f. Excessive pain, anguish.
paritāpaḥ परितापः 1 Extreme or scorching heat; (पादपः) शमयति परितापं छायया संश्रितानाम् Ś.5.7; गुरुपरितापानि गात्राणि 3.18; Ṛs.1.22. -2 Pain, agony, anguish, grief; प्रसक्ते निर्वाणे हृदय परितापं वहसि किम् M.3.1. -3 Lamentation, wailing; विरचितविविधविलापं सा परितापं चकारोच्चैः Gīt.7. -4 Trembling, fear. -5 N. of a hell.
paritāpin परितापिन् a. Harassing, agonising; आपातरम्या विषयाः पर्यन्तपरितापिनः Ki.11.12.
paritark परितर्क् 1 P. 1 To reflect, consider. -2 To examine (judicially).
paritarkaṇam परितर्कणम् Consideration, reflection; जिज्ञासा न तु कर्तव्या धर्मस्य परितर्कणात् Mb.13.162.21.
paritarkita परितर्कित a. 1 Expected. -2 Examined (judicially).
paritas परितस् ind. (Usually with a noun in the acc., sometimes by itself) 1 All around, on all sides, round about, in all directions, everywhere, on every side; रक्षांसि वेदीं परितो निरास्थत् Bk.1.12; Śi.5.26;9.36; Ś.4.8;3.26. Ki.1.14; गाहितमखिलं गहनं परितो दृष्टाश्च विटपिनः सर्वे Bv.1.21,29. -2 Towards, in the direction of, आपेदिरे$म्बरपथं परितः पतङ्गाः Bv.1.17; R.9.66.
parituṣ परितुष् 4 P. To be satisfied, be delighted or contented; अस्मत्कृते च परितुष्यति काचिदन्या Bh.2.2. (v. l.) -Caus. 1 To satisfy or please completely. -2 To appease. -3 To flatter.
parituṣṭa परितुष्ट p. p. 1 Completely satisfied; वयमिह परितुष्टा वल्कलैस्त्वं च लक्ष्म्या Bh.3.5.; so मनसि च परितुष्टे को$र्थवान् को दरिद्रः ibid. -2 Pleased, delighted.
parituṣṭiḥ परितुष्टिः f. 1 Contentment, complete satisfaction. -2 Delight, joy.
paritoṣaḥ परितोषः 1 Contentment, absence of desire (opp. लोभ); सम इह परितोषो निर्विशेषो विशेषः Bh.3.5. -2 Complete satisfaction, gratification; आपरितोषाद्विदुषां न साधु मन्ये प्रयोगविज्ञानम् Ś.1.2. -3 Pleasure, delight, delight in, liking for (with loc.); Ku.6.59; R.11.92; गुणिनि परितोषः &c.
paritoṣaṇa परितोषण a. Satisfying, gratifying. -णम् Satisfaction.
paritṛp परितृप् 4 P. To be pleased or contented. -Caus. 1 To satisfy, please, gratify. -2 To refresh.
paritarpaṇam परितर्पणम् 1 Gratifying. -2 A restorative; Charaka.
paritṛptiḥ परितृप्तिः f. Complete satisfation.
paritṛṣita परितृषित a. Anxiously longing for.
parityaj परित्यज् 1 P. 1 To leave, quit, abandon. -2 To resign, give up, discard, renounce; प्रारब्धमुत्तमगुणा न परित्यजन्ति Mu.2.17. -3 To except; तृणमप्यपरित्यज्य सतृणम् Sk. -4 To leave over, leave as a remainder. -5 To neglect, disregard. -6 To forsake (the body), die. -7 To disembark (with नावम्). -Caus. Te deprive a person of, rob any one of.
parityakta परित्यक्त p. p. 1 Left, quitted, abandoned. -2 Deprived or bereft of (with instr.). -3 Let go, discharged (as an arrow). -4 Wanting. -क्तम् n. Anything to spare. -ind. Without.
parityajanam परित्यजनम् Abandoning, giving up, leaving.
parityāgaḥ परित्यागः 1 Leaving, quitting, abandonment, desertion, repudiation (as a wife &c.); अपरित्यागमयाचतात्मनः- R.8.12; कृतसीतापरित्यागः 15.1. -2 Giving up, renouncing, discarding, renunciation, abdication &c.; स्वनाम- परित्यागं करोमि Pt.1. 'I shall forego my name'; प्रापणात् सर्वकामानां परित्यागो विशिष्यते Ms.2.95. -3 Neglect, omission; मोहात्तस्य (कर्मणः) परित्यागस्तामसः परिकीर्तितः Bg.18.7. -4 Giving away, liberality. -5 Loss, privation. -6 A sacrifice. -7 Separation from.
parityāgin परित्यागिन् a. Renouncing (a Saṁnyāsin); गच्छत्येव परित्यागी वानप्रस्थश्च गच्छति Mb.12.268.13.
parityājya परित्याज्य a. 1 To be abandoned, left. -2 To be omitted.
paritrasta परित्रस्त a. Frightened, afraid.
paritrāsaḥ परित्रासः Fear, terror, fright; न परित्रासः कर्तव्यः Rām.7.27.14.
paritrai परित्रै 1 Ā. To rescue, save, protect; परित्रायस्व परित्रायस्व (in dramas); परित्रायध्वम् Help ! to the rescue ! Mb.
paritrāṇam परित्राणम् Preservation, protection, rescue, defence, deliverance; परित्राणाय साधूनां विनाशाय च दुष्कृताम् Bg.4.8; रामापरित्राणविहस्तयोधं सेनानिवेशं तुमुलं चकार R.5.49. -2 Selfdefence. -3 Abstaining from. -4 The hair of the body; moustaches.
parivārita परिवारित p. p. Surrouded, encircled, encompassed, begirt.
pariśrit परिश्रित् f. Ved. Small stones laid round the altar.
pariśrita परिश्रित a. Standing around. -2 Surrounded by; समागमच्छिष्यगणैः परिश्रितः Bhāg.8.4.9.
ritathyā पारितथ्या A string of pearls for binding the hair; बालपाश्या पारितथ्या Abh. Chin.655.
ritoṣika पारितोषिक a. (-की f.) [परितोषः प्रयोजनमस्य ठञ्] Pleasing, gratifying, consolatory. -कम् A present, reward; गृह्यतां पारितोषिकमिदमङ्गुलीयकम् Mk.5.
piñjarita पिञ्जरित a. Coloured yellow, tinged brown; किरण- मञ्जरीपिञ्जरित...... शिखण्डबन्धनम् Dk.2.2.
rita पूरित p. p. 1 Filled, complete; को न याति वशं लोके मुखे पिण्डेन पूरितः Bh.1.118. -2 Overspread, covered over with. -3 Multiplied.
pracarita प्रचरित p. p. 1 Gone forth &c. -2 Practised, followed, pursued (as a profession); यैः कर्मभिः प्रचरितैः शुश्रूष्यन्ते द्विजातयः Ms.1.1. -3 Current, publicly known.
pracārita प्रचारित a. 1 Allowed to wander. -2 Made public or known, become current.
praticārita प्रतिचारित a. Proclaimed, published.
pratisārita प्रतिसारित a. 1 Repelled, removed. -2 Dressed (as a wound).
pratārita प्रतारित a. Deceived, defrauded.
prapūrita प्रपूरित p. p. Filled up.
pravicārita प्रविचारित p. p. Examined, investigated accurately.
praverita प्रवेरित a. Cast hither and thither, thrown about; नानाशस्त्रास्त्रवर्षैस्तान् वीर्यामर्षप्रवेरितैः (सायकैः) Mb.6.18.31.
prasārita प्रसारित p. p. 1 Expanded, spread, diffused, extended. -2 Stretched out (as hands.). -3 Exhibited, laid out, exposed (for sale). -4 Published, promulgated. -Comp. -गात्र a. With out-stretched limbs.
prasphurita प्रस्फुरित p. p. Quivering, trembling; vibrating, tremulous. -Comp. -अधर a. one whose lower lip quivers; Mb.
prerita प्रेरित p. p. 1 Impelled, urged, instigated. -2 Excited, stimulated, prompted; अभक्ष्यं मन्यते भक्ष्यं स्त्रीवाक्यप्रेरितो नरः Pt.2.144. -3 Sent, despatched. -4 Ordered. -5 Directed, cast; ततस्ततः प्रेरितलोललोचना Ś.1.23. -6 Touched. -तः An envoy, a messenger.
proccārita प्रोच्चारित a. Sounding loudly.
procchrita प्रोच्छ्रित p. p. High, lofty, elevated.
protsārita प्रोत्सारित p. p. 1 Removed, got rid of, expelled. -2 Urged forward, incited. -3 Relinquished. -4 Granted, given.
badhirita बधिरित a. Made deaf, deafened.
bandhurita बन्धुरित a. Inclined, bent, curved.
bharita भरित a. 1 Nourished, maintained. -2 Filled with, full of; जगज्जालं कर्ता कुसुमभरसौरभ्यभरितम् Bv.1.54,33. -3 Weighted; उत्कम्पो$ल्पो$पि पीनस्तनभरितमुरः क्षिप्तहारं दुनोति Ve.2.22. -4 Green. -तः The green colour.
bharitram भरित्रम् Ved. The arm; अंशुं दुहन्ति हस्तिनो भरित्रैः Ṛv. 3.36.7.
bhramarita भ्रमरित a. Turned blue; यदतिविमलनीलवेश्मरश्मिभ्रमरितभाः शुचिसौधवस्त्रवल्लिः N.2.13.
mañjarita मञ्जरित a. [मञ्जर्यः संजाता अस्य इतच्] 1 Furnished with or possessing clusters of blossoms. -2 Mounted on a stalk (as a bud).
madhurita मधुरित a. Sweetened, made sweet.
mantrita मन्त्रित p. p. [मन्त्र्-क्त] 1 Consulted. -2 Counselled, advised; कच्चित् ते मन्त्रितो मन्त्रो राष्ट्रं न परिधावति Rām.2. 1.18. -3 Said, spoken. -4 Charmed, consecrated by mantras. -5 Settled, determined. -तम् Advice, counsel; सुयुद्धं वानराणां च सुग्रीवस्य च मन्त्रितम् Rām.6.112.2.
mantritā मन्त्रिता त्वम् Ministership, office of a minister.
mantharita मन्थरित a. Made slow, lazy; relaxed.
rita मारित p. p. 1 Slain, killed. -2 Destroyed, ruined.
miśrita मिश्रित p. p. [मिश्र्-क्त] 1 Mixed, blended, combined. -2 Added. -3 Respectable. -4 Promiscuous, miscellaneous (as taste).
mukharita मुखरित a. Made noisy or resonant with, ringing or noisy with; गण्डोड्डीनालिमालामुखरितककुभस्ताण्डवे शूलपाणेः Māl.1.1.
mudrita मुद्रित a. 1 Sealed, marked, impressed, stamped; त्यागः सप्तसमुद्रमुद्रितमहीनिर्व्याजदानावधिः Mv.2.36; काश्मीरमुद्रित- मुरो मधुसूदनस्य Gīt.1; स्वयं सिन्दूरेण द्विपरणमुदा मुद्रित इव 11. -2 Closed, sealed up. -3 Unblown. -4 Printed.
mūtrita मूत्रित a. 1 Discharged or voided as urine. -2 Soiled with urine.
medurita मेदुरित a. 1 Thickened, made dense; मेघमेदुरितनीलिमा गिरिः U.1. -2 Unctuous.
yantrita यन्त्रित p. p. [यन्त्र्-क्त] 1 Restrained, checked, curbed, controlled, confined. -2 Fastened, bound; धन्या वयं यदस्माकं स्नेहकारुण्ययन्त्रिताः Mb.3.1.33. -3 Fettered, chained. -4 Subject to. -5 Instigated; तेनैव शत्रुं जहि विष्णु- यन्त्रितः Bhāg.6.11.2. -6 Disciplined by rules; ब्राह्मणं यन्त्रिता राजन्नुपस्थास्यामि पूजया Mb.3.34.1. -7 Drawn well (दृढाकृष्ट); ततः शरैर्दीप्तमुखैर्यन्त्रितैरनुमन्त्रितैः Mb.3.167.26. -8 Attracted; अथवा मदभिस्नेहाद् भवत्यो यन्त्रिताशयाः Bhāg. 1.29.23. -Comp. -कथ, -वाच् a. 'tongue-tied', forced to be silent.
vakrita वक्रित a. Bent, crooked.
vikārita विकारित a. Changed, perverted, corrupted.
vicaritam विचरितम् Wandering, roaming.
vicārita विचारित p. p. 1 Considered, inquired into, examined, discussed. -2 Decided, determined; परत्रेति विचारितम् Ms.11.28. -तम् Deliberation, thought.
vicitrita विचित्रित a. 1 Coloured, painted. -2 Adorned, decorated.
vicchurita विच्छुरित p. p. 1 Covered, overspread, coated. -2 Inlaid. -3 Besmeared, anointed.
vidhurita विधुरित a. Pale; लज्जाविधुरिताननम् Ve.1.26.
visūritam विसूरितम् Repentance, distress. -ता Fever.
visphārita विस्फारित p. p. 1 Made to vibrate. -2 Trembling, tremulous. -3 Twanged; विकृष्टविस्फारितचापमण्डलः Ki.14. 31. -4 Dilated, expanded. -5 Manifested, displayed. -6 Evident, apparent, manifest.
visphurita विस्फुरित p. p. 1 Tremulous, quivering. -2 Swollen, enlarged. -3 Flashing, glittering; एको$पि विस्पुरितमण्डल- चापचक्रम् Ve.2.26. विस्फु visphu (स्फू sphū) र्ज् rj विस्फु (स्फू) र्ज् 1 P. 1 To roar, thunder. -2 To resound. -3 To increase. -4 To shine, appear; अस्त्येवं जडधामता तु भवतो यद् व्योम्नि विस्फूर्जसे K. P. 1.444.
vyatikarita व्यतिकरित a. Pervaded, filled; व्यतिकरितदिगन्ताः श्वेत- मानैर्यशोभिः Māl.2.9.
vyāghārita व्याघारित p. p. Sprinkled with oil or ghee.
vyāpārita व्यापारित p. p. 1 Engaged, occupied, employed; appointed; अस्मिन्नहमद्रिकुक्षौ व्यापारितः R.2.38. -2 Placed, fixed, set.
śārita शारित a. Variegated, coloured; स्थिरद्विरेफाञ्जनशारितोदरैः Ki.8.11.
śṛṅgārita शृङ्गारित a. 1 Impassioned, affected by love. -2 Reddened. -3 Adorned.
śekharita शेखरित a. 1 Crested, tufted, peaked. -2 Made into a chaplet or diadem.
śrita श्रित p. p. [श्रि-क्त] 1 Gone to, approached, approached for refuse or protection. -2 Clung to, resting or sitting on. -3 United or joined with, connected with, -4 Protected. -5 Honoured, served. -6 Subservient, auxiliary. -7 Covered with, overspread. -8 Contained. -9 Assembled, collected. -1 Having, possessing. -Comp. -क्षम a. composed, tranquil. -सत्त्व a. one who has taken courage.
śritiḥ श्रितिः f. Resort, recourse, approach.
śrita श्रित = शृत q. v. Cooked; अयं सर्वः समस्ताङ्गः श्रितः कृष्ण- मृगो मया Rām.2.56.28.
śvabhrita श्वभ्रित a. Full of holes.
saṃyantrita संयन्त्रित a. Held in, stopped.
saṃśrita संश्रित p. p. 1 Gone to for refuge. -2 Supported, sheltered. -3 United, joined; चूतेन संश्रितवती नवमालिकेयम् Ś.4.13. -4 Clung to, embraced. -5 Inherent in, peculiar to. -तः A dependent, follower, servant.
saṃcārita संचारित p. p. 1 Moved, set in motion. -2 Impelled, driven onward, incited. -3 Conveyed; see संचर्.
samāśrita समाश्रित p. p. 1 Assembled. -2 Taking refuge, -3 Dependent on. -4 Relating to. -5 Furnished. -तः A servant.
samīrita समीरित p. p. 1 Stirred, moved. -2 Uttered.
samucchrita समुच्छ्रित p. p. 1 Well raised. -2 Surging high. -3 Exalted.
samucchritiḥ समुच्छ्रितिः Increase, growth. समुच्छ्वसितम् samucchvasitam समुच्छ्वासः samucchvāsḥ समुच्छ्वसितम् समुच्छ्वासः Sighing deeply, a heavy or deep sigh.
sarit सरित् f. [सृ-इति] 1 A river; अन्यसरितां शतानि हि समुद्रगाः प्रापयन्त्यब्धिम् M.5.19. A thread, string. -Comp. -नाथः, -पतिः (also सरितांपतिः); -भर्तृ m. the ocean. -वरा (also सरितांवरा) N. of the Ganges. -सुतः an epithet of Bhīṣma. <सरिद्वत् m. The ocean.
sindūrita सिन्दूरित a. Reddened, made red.
sūtrita सूत्रित p. p. [सूत्र-क्त] 1 Strung, arranged, methodised, systematized. -2 Prescribed in Sūtras, delivered in aphorisms.
sphārita स्फारित p. p. Opened, wide; कवलित इव कुत्स्नश्चक्षुषा स्फारितेन Māl.3.16.
sphurita स्फुरित p. p. 1 Trembling, throbbing. -2 Shaken. -3 Glittering, shining. -4 Unsteady. -5 Swollen. -6 Manifested, displayed; तत उदयगिरोरिवैक एव स्फुरितगुणद्युति- सुन्दरः कलावान् Māl.2.1. -तम् 1 A throb, palpitation, tremor; (बटुः) पुनर्विवक्षुः स्फुरितोत्तराधरः Ku.5.83. -2 Agitation or emotion of the mind. -3 Flash, gleam; विद्यु- द्दामस्फुरितचकितैर्यत्र पौराङ्गनानाम् Me.27. -4 Sudden appearance. स्फुर्च्छ् sphurcch स्फूर्च्छ् sphūrcch स्फुर्च्छ् स्फूर्च्छ् 1 P. (स्फूर्च्छति) 1 To spread, extend. -2 To forget.
svarita स्वरित a. [स्वरो जातो$स्य इतच्] 1 Sounded; caused to sound; स्वरितवेणुना सुष्ठु चुम्बितम् Bhāg.1.31.14. -2 Sounded as a note, pitched. -3 Articulated. -4 Circumflexed. -5 Accented. -6 Added, admixed -तः The third or mixed tone lying between high and low; समाहारः स्वरितः P.I.2.31; see Sk. thereon.
svaritatvam स्वरितत्वम् Connotation, significance; अयोविकारे स्वरित- त्वमिष्यते N.9.42.
harit हरित् a. [हृ-इति] 1 Green, greenish. -2 Yellow, yellowish. -3 Greenish-yellow. -m. 1 The green or yellow colour. -2 A horse of the sun, a bay horse; सत्यमतीत्य हरितो हरींश्च वर्तन्ते वाजिनः Ś.1.; दिशो हरिद्भिर्हरिता- मिवेश्वरः R.3.3; Ku.2.43. -3 A swift horse. -4 A lion. -5 The sun. -6 Viṣṇu. -7 The kidney-bean. -m., n. 1 Grass. -2 A quarter, region. -3 A quarter or point of the compass; प्रायात् प्रतीचीं हरितं वचिन्वंश्च ततस्ततः Rām.7.75.1; R.3.3. -4 Turmeric (usually f. only in the last 3 senses). -Comp. -अन्तः the end of the quarters (-दिगन्त); दृगन्तानाधत्से किमिति हरिदन्तेषु परुषान् Bv.1.6. -अन्तरम् different regions, various quarters; आमोदानथ हरिदन्तराणि नेतुम् Bv.1.15. -अश्वः 1 the sun; प्रविघाटयिता समुत्पतन् हरिदश्वः कमलाकरानिव Ki.2.46; R.3.22; 18.23; Śi.11.56. -2 the arka plant. -गर्भः green or yellowish Kuśa grass with broad leaves. -पर्णम् a radish. -पतिः the regent of a quarter. -मणिः (हरिन्मणिः) an emerald; हरिन्मणिश्यामतृणाभिरामैर्गृहाणि नीध्रैरिव यत्र रेजुः Śi.3.49. -रञ्जनी Turmeric. -वर्ण a. greenish, greencoloured.
harita हरित a. (-ता or -हरिणी f.) [हृ-इतच्] Green, of a green colour, verdant; रम्यान्तरः कमलिनीहरितैः सरोभिः Ś. 4.1; Ku.4.14; Me.21; Ki.5.38. -2 Tawny. -3 Dark-blue. -तः 1 The green colour. -2 A lion. -3 A kind of grass. -Comp. -अश्मन् m. 1 an emerald. -2 blue vitriol. -उपलः an emerald; प्रेक्षां क्षिपन्तं हरितोपलाद्रेः Bhāg.3.8.24. -उपलेपनम् green plastering or drawing. -कपिश a. yellowish brown. -छद a. green-leaved. -पण्यम् trading in vegetables; Kau. A.2.1. -हरिः the sun.
haritakam हरितकम् 1 A pot-herb, green grass; अन्नन् पुरो हरितकं मुदमादधानः Śi.5.58.
haritā हरिता 1 The Dūrvā grass. -2 Turmeric. -3 A browncoloured grape.
haritāla हरिताल &c. See under हरि. हरिद्रः haridrḥ हरिद्रकः haridrakḥ हरिद्रः हरिद्रकः The yellow sandal tree.
rita हारित p. p. 1 Caused to be taken or seized. -2 Presented, offered. -3 Attracted. -4 Robbed, carried. -5 Lost; हतः शत्रुः कृतं मित्रं रत्नमाला न हारिता Pt.5.85. -6 Surpassed, exceeded. -तः 1 The green colour. -2 A kind of pigeon; कांस्यं हृत्वा तु दुर्बुद्धिर्हारितो जायते नरः Mb.13.111.12.
ritakaḥ हारितकः A green vegetable.
Macdonell Vedic Search
13 results
acitra a-citrá, n. darkness, obscurity, iv. 51, 3.
asunīti ásu-nīti, f. spirit-guidance, x. 15, 14.
asura ásu-ra, m. divine spirit, i. 35, 7. 10; v. 83, 6 [Av. ahura].
upaśrita úpa-śrita, pp. impressed on (lc.), vii. 86, 8 [śri resort].
ṛtasprś ṛta-spṛ́ś, a. cherishing the rite, iv. 50, 3.
puṣṭi puṣ-ṭí, f. earnings, ii. 12, 5; prosperity, viii. 48, 6.
poṣa póṣ-a, m. prosperity, i. 1, 3 [puṣ thrive].
bhur bhur quiver, int. járbhurīti, v. 83, 5.
varivas vár-i-vas, n. wide space, vii. 63, 6; prosperity, iv. 50, 9 [breadth, freedom: vṛ cover].
viśvaśambhū viśvá-śambhū, a. beneficial to all, i. 160, 1. 4 [śám prosperity + bhū being for, conducing to].
śam śám, n. healing, ii. 33, 13; comfort, v. 11, 5; viii. 48, 4; health, x. 15, 4; prosperity, viii. 86, 82.
suvita suv-itá, n. welfare, v. 11, 1 [su well + itá, pp. of i go: opposite of duritá]. [254]
harita hár-ita, a. yellow, vii. 103, 4. 6. 10 [Av. zairita ‘yellowish’].
Macdonell Search
84 results
aṅkurita pp. sprouted, having sprouts; combined with (in.).
acarita n. abstention from food.
atitvarita pp. precipitate.
atyucchrita pp. raised too high.
adhikāritā f., -tva, n. authority.
anaṅkurita pp. not grown.
anākṣārita pp. blameless.
anāśrita pp. independent; re gardless of (ac.).
antarita pp. (√ i) retired; excluded, separated; intervening; distant; being in a state (--°ree;); hidden, by (in., -°ree;), obstructed by (--°ree;).
andhakārita pp. darkened, wrapt in darkness.
apañcīkṛta a-pañkî-krita, ˚bhūta pp. n. pl. not yet become five (elements).
aparituṣṭa pp. not pleased; -tosha, a. dissatisfied; m. dissatisfaction; -tyakta, pp. unforsaken; -tyagya, fp. not to be forsaken; -tyâga, m. non-abandonment; -tyâgya, fp. not to be abandoned; -nirvâna, pp. not quite extinguished or ended; -ni shthita, pp. not standing quite firm.
abhrita pp. clouded.
ayantrita pp. uncurbed, at large; un-self-controlled.
aritra a. driving; m. n. oar.
asamīrita pp. not raised (wind); -udyama, m. lack of exertion; sluggishness; -unnaddha, pp. modest; -riddha, pp. not successful, incomplete; -riddhi, f. failure; -eta, pp. not come, wanting, lacking.
asvarita a. not having the svarita accent: -tva, n. abst. n.
ākārita pp. having the form of (--°ree;).
ājarjarita pp. somewhat bruised or tattered.
ācchurita pp. scratched.
āśrita (pp.) m. dependent, retainer, servant; -tva, n. dependence.
udāracarita a. acting nobly; -ketas, a. high-minded; -tâ, f., -tva, n. gene rosity; -dhi, a. of exalted intellect; -bhâva, m. magnanimity; -vikrama, m. of eminent prowess; -sattva, a. of noble character.
urvarita pp. left over, escaped, saved.
rita pp. caused, produced by, re lating to (--°ree;); â, f. (sc. vriddhi) excessive in terest offered by debtor under pressure.
kṛtvāya kritvaNya, kṛtvī V. gd. of √ kri.
caritra n. foot, leg; going; ancient custom, usage; conduct, doings: -bandhaka, m. n. confidential pledge; -vat, a. having already performed (a sacrifice).
caritārthaya den. P. cause any one (ac.) to attain his object, satisfy.
caritārtha a. having obtained one's object; successful; satisfied: -tâ, f. at tainment of one's object, satisfaction; -tva, n. accomplishment.
caritavrata a. having fulfilled his vow.
caritavya fp. to be practised or performed.
caritave d. inf. to go, to move.
caritapūrva a. performed before; -maya, a. (î) containing the deeds of (--°ree;).
carita pp.; n. going, walking; way; procedure, behaviour, conduct, doings.
ritrin a. well-conducted; -ya, n.=kâritra.
ritra n. course of action, beha viour, good conduct, virtue.
ritārthya n. attainment of one's object.
coritaka n. stolen object.
jarjarita pp. become worn out or decrepit; bruised, mangled, lacerated or pierced.
jaritā (cs. pp.) f. N. of a fabulous bird: a½ari, m. N. of Garitâ's eldest son (whose foes are demolished).
jharjharita pp. bruised; withered.
jvarita pp. feverish; -in, a. id.
ṭaṃkārita n. humming; twanging; -krita, n. sound.
tritaya n. triad; -tâ, f., -tva, n. id.; -danda, n. triple staff of the Brâhman ascetic; triple control (of thought, word, and deed); -dandin, a. bearing the triple staff; controlling thought, word, and deed;m. Brâhman ascetic.
trita m. N. of a Vedic god, Third form of Agni (probably lightning), connected with Indra and the winds, represented as engaged in combat with meteoric demons; his dwelling-place is remote and hidden, and he is called Âptya, son of the waters (=clouds); N. of various Rishis: pl. a class of gods.
tvarita pp.; n. haste, hurry.
duṣkṛti dushkriti, ˚n a. sinning; m. miscreant, sinner.
durita (pp.) n. faring ill, distress, harm; misdeed, foul means, sin; a. difficult, evil, bad.
dūrodāracaritra a. being a stranger to noble conduct.
duritātman a. ill-disposed.
dharit f. supporter; earth.
dhūsarita pp. made grey.
nidrāntarita pp. fallen asleep; -½andha, a. blinded with sleep; -½alasa, a. drowsy, sleepy, sluggardly; -½âlasya, n. sleepi ness, sloth.
paritarkaṇa n. consideration; -tarpana, a. satisfying; n. satisfaction.
paritatnu a. embracing.
paritakmya a. agitating, unsafe, perilous; â, f. peril.
paritāpa m. heat, warmth; dis tress, anguish, sorrow, affliction; remorse; giving pain; -tâpin, a. burning hot; causing affliction or sorrow, distressing; -tushti, f. satisfaction; -tripti, f. perfect satisfaction; -tosha, m. satisfaction, gratification, glee; pleasure or delight in (g. or lc.); -toshayi tri, a. satisfying, gratifying; -tosha-vat, a. satisfied, gratified; -toshin, a. satisfied with, gratified by (--°ree;); -tyakta, pp.deserted, abandoned; -tyaktri, m. forsaker; -tyâga, m. abandonment, desertion; repudiation; re linquishment, renunciation, loss, privation, sacrifice: -sena, m. N. of a prince; -tyâgin, a. abandoning; resigning, renouncing (--°ree;); liberal; m. renouncer; -tyâgana, n. causing to abandon; depriving of (--°ree;); -tyâgya, fp. to be abandoned, -deserted, -renounced, avoided; -trâna, n. preservation, protection, help, deliverance, rescue from (ab.); shelter, refuge; preventive of (g.); -trâtavya, fp. to be protected from (ab.); -trâtri, m. pro tector, deliverer (with ac. or g.); -trâsa, m. fright, fear.
paritas ad. round about, on all sides, in every direction, everywhere; prp. w. ac. round.
prātaritvan a. (vc. -tvas) go ing out or coming early; m. morning guest.
bandhurita (den.) pp. inclined, bent; curved.
bharita den. pp. full, filled with (g.[or --°ree;).
bhramarita den. pp. covered with bees.
madhurita pp. sweetened (also fig.).
mantharita (den.) pp. rendered slack.
mudrita pp. of mudraya; n. im pressing a seal on (lc.).
vakrita den. pp. curved, crooked, bent; retrograde (planet); -ima (?), a. curved; -i-man, m. crookedness; equivocation, ambiguity.
vikārita cs. pp. √ kri; -kâri-tva, n. alteration, change; -kârin, a. liable to change, changeable; changing into (--°ree;); susceptible of emotion or love; becoming disloyal, rebellious; producing a change in, corrupting (the mind); -kârya, fp. liable to change; -kâla, m. evening; -kâsa, m. 1. brightness; 2. inaccurate spelling for -kâsa; -kâsin, a. shining, radiant; --°ree;, illustrating, explaining; -kâsa, m.[√ kas] expanding, blowing (of flowers); opening (of the mouth or eyes); opening of the heart, susceptibility; expansion, development: -ka, a. (--°ree;) expanding the mind=making wise; -kâsana, a. causing to expand; n. developing; -kâsi tâ, f. expansion, development; -kâsin, a. blossoming, blowing; open (eyes); expand ing, developing; extensive, great (fortune); abounding in (--°ree;).
vicitrita pp. den. made varie gated, many-coloured; adorned, with (in., --°ree;); -kintya, fp. to be thought of; -found out or devised; doubtful, questionable.
vairitā f. enmity, hostility, to (saha); -i-tva, n. id.; -in, a. inimical, hos tile; m. enemy: n-î, f. female enemy; -î-bhû, turn into enmity.
śārita den. pp. made variegated or speckled.
śṛṅgārita den. pp. adorned; -in, a. id.; beautifully dressed; enamoured; erotic.
śrita pp. √ srâ & √ sri.
śrit a. [√ sri] --°ree;, having acquired, in uddhati-srit, a. towering and arrogant.
śliṣṭaparaṃparitarūpaka n. continuous chain of ambiguities (a kind of metaphor); -rûpaka, n. ambiguity as a metaphor; -½âkshepa, m. expression of dissatisfaction by means of equivocation (rh.); -½ukti, f. ambiguous expression.
sarit f. [flow-er: √ sri] stream, river: -âm pati, m. lord or husband of rivers, ocean: -pati, m. id.; -suta, m. son of the river (Ganges), met. of Bhîshma.
svarita cs. pp. (√ svar) caused to sound etc.; m. n. Svarita accent (produced by a combined rise and fall of the voice): -tva, n. accentuation with the Svarita accent; addition.
haritopala m. green stone, emerald (P.).
haritāśman m. turquoise.
haritāla n. yellow orpiment: -maya, a. (î) formed of yellow orpiment.
haritāya den. P. Â. become or appear yellow or green.
haritā f. Dûrvâ grass.
harita a. (â, C.; hárinî, V.) yellowish, tawny; pale (with fright); greenish, green (C.); n. gold (V.); vegetable (C.): -ka, a. green; n. grass; vegetable; -kapisa, a. yellowish brown; -kkhada, a. having green leaves; -dhânya, n. green = unripe corn; -pattra-maya, a. (î) formed of green leaves; (hárita)-srag, a. bearing yellow (or green) festoons (trees; AV.); adorned with a golden chain (steed; Br.).
harit a. [√ 3. hri] yellowish, tawny; greenish (rare, P.); m. (C.) horse of the sun; emerald (rare, P.); f. tawny mare (V.); quarter of the sky (V., C.).
haritpati m. regent of a cardinal point.
rita pp. cs. √ 1. hri; m. kind of pigeon.
Bloomfield Vedic
Concordance
84 results0 results587 results
mahīva rītiḥ śavasāsarat pṛthak RV.2.24.14d; MS.4.14.10d: 230.13; TB.2.8.5.2d.
aṃśuṃ gabhasti (KS. babhasti) haritebhir āsabhiḥ # KS.35.14d; Apś.14.29.3d. See aṃśūn babhasti.
aṃśuṃ duhanti hastino bharitraiḥ # RV.3.36.7c.
aṃśūn babhasti haritebhir āsabhiḥ # AVś.6.49.2d. See aṃśuṃ gabhasti.
aktor vyuṣṭau paritakmyāyāḥ # RV.5.30.13d. Cf. next.
aktor vyuṣṭau paritakmyāyām # RV.6.24.9d. Cf. prec.
agnayaḥ sagarāḥ sagarā stha sagareṇa nāmnā raudreṇānīkena pāta māgnayaḥ pipṛta māgnayo gopāyata mā namo vo 'stu mā mā hiṃsiṣṭa # VS.5.34; (omitting gopāyata mā) VSK.5.8.5; (omitting māgnayo gopāyata and writing astu for 'stu) śś.6.13.1. P: agnayaḥ sagarāḥ Kś.9.8.24. See prec. two.
agnāv indra āditye viśveṣu ca deveṣu caritaṃ te brahmacaryam # śG.2.12.2.
agnir asi pṛthivyāṃ śritaḥ, antarikṣasya pratiṣṭhā, tvayīdam antaḥ, viśvaṃ yakṣaṃ viśvaṃ bhūtaṃ viśvaṃ subhūtam, viśvasya bhartā viśvasya janayitā # TB.3.11.1.7.
agnir aitu prathamo devatānām # AG.1.13.6a (crit. notes); PG.1.5.11a; HG.1.19.7a; ApMB.1.4.7a (ApG.2.5.2); JG.1.20a. P: agnir aitu Rvidh.2.21.3 (see Introd. p. xxv). See under agnir etu.
agnir gṛhe jaritā medhiraḥ kaviḥ # RV.10.100.6b.
agnir devo duṣṭarītur adābhyaḥ (MS.KS. adabdhaḥ) # AVP.15.1.1c; TS.4.4.12.1c; MS.3.16.4c: 187.15; KS.22.14c; Aś.4.12.2c.
agnir naḥ (VSK. mā) pātu duritād avadyāt # VS.4.15e; VSK.4.5.7e; śB.3.2.2.23e. See apa bādhatāṃ, and cf. pātu no duritād.
agnir mā pātu duritād etc. # see agnir naḥ etc.
agnir me vāci śritaḥ, vāg hṛdaye, hṛdayaṃ mayi, aham amṛte, amṛtaṃ brahmaṇi # TB.3.10.8.4.
agnir vaiśvānaraḥ saha paṅtyā śritaḥ # AVś.13.3.5b.
agne jaritar viśpatiḥ # RV.8.60.19a; SV.1.39a. P: agne jaritaḥ śś.14.55.1.
agne tvaṃ sūktavāg asy upaśruti (TB. upaśrito; śB.Aś.śś. upaśrutī) divas pṛthivyoḥ (TB. divaḥ pṛthivyoḥ) # MS.4.13.9: 211.14; śB.1.9.1.4; TB.3.5.10.1; Aś.1.9.1; śś.1.14.2,3. Fragment: upaśrito divaḥ pṛthivyoḥ TS.2.6.9.5.
agne 'dabdhāyo 'śītatano pāhi mādya divaḥ pāhi prasityai, pāhi duriṣṭyai, pāhi duradmanyai, pāhi duścaritāt # TS.1.1.13.3. P: agne 'dabdhāyo 'śītatano TB.3.3.9.9; Apś.3.10.1. See next two, and cf. adabdhāyo 'śītatano.
agne prāva jaritāraṃ yaviṣṭha # RV.10.80.7c.
agne mākir no duritāya dhāyīḥ # RV.1.147.5d.
agner edhate jaritābhiṣṭau # RV.10.6.1b; MS.4.4.15b: 241.2.
agne viśvāni duritā tarema # RV.6.15.15d. Cf. ati viśvāni etc.
agne suprīta idhyase # RV.5.21.2b.
aṅgāni ca ma āpyāyantāṃ vāk prāṇaś cakṣuḥ śrotraṃ yaśo balam # PG.2.4.8 (crit. notes; see Speijer, Jātakarma, p. 23).
aṅguṣṭhaṃ ca samāśritaḥ # TA.10.38.1b; MahānU.16.3b; BDh.2.7.12.11b. Cf. KṣurU.6.
acetayad dhiyā imā jaritre # RV.3.34.5c; AVś.20.11.5c.
achidrā śarma jaritaḥ purūṇi # RV.3.15.5a.
atandro yāsyan harito yad āsthāt # AVś.13.2.28a.
atikiriṭam (comm. atikirīṭam) atidanturam # TB.3.4.1.19.
atikrāmanto duritā padāni (N. duritāni viśvā) # AVś.12.2.28c; N.6.12d (see Roth's Erl"auterungen zum Nirukta, p. 80). Cf. ati viśvāni, aty enaṃ, antar dadhānā, apaghnā no, apa bādhatāṃ, and taranto viśvā.
ati krāmāmi duritaṃ yad enaḥ # AVP.9.24.5a; TB.3.7.12.5a. P: atikrāmāmi TA.2.3.1.
ati dhanveva duritā # RV.10.93.6d.
atiprayachan duritiṃ tareyam # TB.1.2.1.5d; Apś.5.2.1d.
ati viśvasya duritasya pāram # AVś.3.11.3d; AVP.1.62.3d. See indro neṣad, and indro viśvasya etc.
ati viśvā duritā pāriṣad dharī # RV.10.96.8d; AVś.20.31.3d.
ati viśvāni duritā # see next but three.
ati viśvāni duritā tarema # PB.5.8.6; 14.5.18. See e āti viśvāni, and cf. agne viśvāni etc., and for this and the next four under atikrāmanto duritāni.
ati viśvāni duritāni parṣan # RV.4.39.1d.
ati viśvāni duritā pipartana # RV.8.18.17c.
ati viśvāni duritā rājānaḥ (AVP. puts rājānaḥ with the following pāda) # RV.10.126.6c; AVP.5.39.6c.
ati viśvāni duritā svastaye # RV.10.63.13d.
ati śritī tiraścatā # RV.9.14.6a.
aty enaṃ neṣad duritāni viśvā # AVś.6.110.2c. Cf. under atikrāmanto duritāni.
athā dadhāti draviṇaṃ jaritre # RV.4.20.9d; KS.21.13d.
athāmṛtena jaritāram aṅdhi (Apś. aṅgdhi) # TB.2.5.8.12d; Apś.7.6.7d.
atho aharito bhuvat # AVś.1.22.2d. See atho 'harito, and cf. harimāṇaṃ ca.
atho haritabheṣajam # AVś.4.9.3e.
atho 'harito bhava # AVP.1.28.2d. See atho aharito, and cf. harimāṇaṃ ca.
adabdhāso aparītāsa udbhidaḥ # RV.1.89.1b; VS.25.14b; KS.26.11b.
ado yat te hṛdi śritam # AVś.6.18.3a.
adhārayad dharitor bhūri bhojanam # RV.3.44.3c.
adhi śravo māhinaṃ yaj jaritre # RV.4.17.20d; AB.3.38.11d.
adhiśritam adhyadhiśritam adhiśritaṃ hi3m # Aś.2.2.16. Cf. vaiśvānarasyādhiśritam.
adhvānayad duritā dambhayac ca # RV.6.18.10d.
anāryakarmann avakīrṇi duścaritaṃ nirākṛtam # Mś.7.2.7.13.
anāhanasyaṃ vasanaṃ cariṣṇu (PG. jariṣṇuḥ; HG.ApMB. jariṣṇu) # śG.2.1.30c; PG.2.2.10c (crit. notes; Speijer, Jātakarma, p. 22); HG.1.4.6c; ApMB.2.2.11c; VārG.5.9c.
anu tritasya yudhyataḥ # RV.8.7.24a.
anu svaṃ dhāma jaritur vavakṣa # RV.3.7.6d.
anṛtād duritād uta # AVP.7.8.8b.
anena taritavyam # AG.1.12.6.
antarikṣam asy agnau śritaṃ, vāyoḥ pratiṣṭhā, tvayīdam antaḥ, viśvaṃ yakṣaṃ viśvaṃ bhūtaṃ viśvaṃ subhūtam, viśvasya bhartṛ viśvasya janayitṛ # TB.3.11.1.8.
antarikṣaṃ purītatā (TS. puritatā; KS. pulitatā; MS. pulītatā) # VS.25.8; VSK.27.11; TS.5.7.16.1; MS.3.15.7: 179.12; KSA.13.6.
antarikṣān mā pāhi viśvasmai prāṇāyāpānāya vyānāyodānāya pratiṣṭhāyai caritrāya # MS.2.8.14: 118.2.
antarikṣe divi śritaḥ # AVP.5.13.2b.
antarikṣodaraḥ kośo bhūmibudhno na jīryati, diśo hy asya sraktayo dyaur asyottaraṃ bilam, sa eṣa kośo vasudhānas tasmin viśvam idaṃ śritam # ChU.3.15.1. Metrical.
antar dadhānā duritāni (AVP. bhuvanāni) viśvā # AVś.5.28.8d; AVP.2.59.6d. Cf. antas tiṣṭhāti, and under atikrāmanto du-.
antas tiṣṭhāti duritāni viśvā # AVś.6.53.2d. Cf. antar dadhānā, and under atikrāmanto.
anne bhāty apaśritaḥ # śB.10.5.2.18a.
apaghnā no duritāni viśvā # AVP.12.19.3c. Cf. under atikrāmanto duritā.
apa (TA.Apś. ava) bādhatāṃ duritāni viśvā # MS.1.2.3d: 12.6; TA.2.5.3b; Apś.10.18.3d. See agnir naḥ pātu duritād, and cf. atikrāmanto du-.
apa viśvā duritā bādhamānaḥ # RV.1.35.3d.
apasidhya duritaṃ dhattam āyuḥ # AVś.8.2.7d.
apasedhan (SV.JB. -dhaṃ) duritā soma mṛḍaya (SV.JB. no mṛḍa) # RV.9.82.2c; SV.2.668c; JB.3.259c.
apahataṃ rakṣaḥ # VS.1.9,16; MS.4.1.6: 8.8; KS.1.5; 31.4; śB.1.1.2.15; 4.21. P: apahatam Kś.2.3.17; 4.19. Cf. antaritaṃ etc., avabāḍhaṃ etc., avadhūtaṃ etc., and parāpūtaṃ etc.
apa hrītamukho jahi # Kauś.70.1d.
apām ūrmiṃ sacate sindhuṣu śritaḥ # RV.9.86.8b.
api nūnaṃ daivīr viśaḥ prāyāsiṣṭāṃ suprīte sudhite # MS.4.13.8: 209.15; KS.19.13; TB.3.6.13.1. See daivīr viśaḥ prā-.
apūtapā ādhūyamānaḥ # TS.4.4.9.1. See viṣṇur āprītapā.
apo na nāvā duritā tarema # RV.6.68.8d; 7.65.3d; KS.12.14d.
apo na vajrin duritāti parṣi bhūri # RV.8.97.15b.
apsu siṃham iva śritam # RV.3.9.4d.
apsv antaś ca yā śritāḥ # TB.3.12.6.2b.
abhi krandanti haritebhir āsabhiḥ # RV.10.94.2b; N.7.7.
abhi ṣṭana duritā bādhamānaḥ # AVś.6.126.2b; AVP.15.11.10b. See ni ṣṭanihi.
amukthā yakṣmād duritād avadyāt # AVś.2.10.6a. See amoci yakṣmād.
amoci yakṣmād duritād avartyai (AVP. avadyāt) # AVP.2.3.5a; TB.2.5.6.2a; ApMB.2.12.9a (ApG.6.15.4). See amukthā.
ayaṃ yo viśvān haritān kṛṇoṣi # AVś.5.22.2a. Cf. ayaṃ yo abhi-, and viśvā rūpāṇi haritā.
ayam agne jaritā tve abhūd api # RV.10.142.1a. P: ayam agne jaritā Rvidh.4.11.1. Cf. BṛhD.8.54.
ayam asmi jaritaḥ paśya meha # RV.8.100.4a. Cf. BṛhD.6.118.
ayukta yad dharito vītapṛṣṭhāḥ # RV.5.45.10b.
ayukta sapta haritaḥ sadhasthāt # RV.7.60.3a.
arandhayaḥ sākhyasya tritāya # RV.2.11.19d.
arātir in no (AVś. arātir no) mā tārīt # AVś.2.7.4c; AVP.8.3.4c. Cf. arātīvā mā nas.
arātīvā mā nas tarīt # RV.9.114.4c. Cf. arātir no.
arā nābhāv iva śritāḥ # AVś.10.8.34b. Cf. next.
ardhamāsāḥ stha māḥsu śritāḥ, ahorātrayoḥ pratiṣṭhā, yuṣmāsv idam antaḥ, viśvaṃ yakṣaṃ viśvaṃ bhūtaṃ viśvaṃ subhūtam, viśvasya bhartāro viśvasya janayitāraḥ # TB.3.11.1.17.
alābūni (śś. alābūni jaritaḥ) # AVś.20.134.1; Aś.8.3.21; śś.12.23.3; Vait.32.25.
avadyaṃ ca malaṃ ca yat # AVś.7.89.3b; AVP.1.33.3b; VS.6.17b; Lś.2.2.11b; Apś.7.21.6b. See yat kiṃ ca duritaṃ, and yat kiṃ cid duritaṃ.
avitā jaritṝṇām # RV.4.31.3b; AVś.20.124.3b; SV.2.34b; VS.27.41b; 36.6b; MS.2.13.9b: 159.8; 4.9.27b: 139.15; KS.39.12b; TA.4.42.3b; KA.1.219Jb; Apś.17.7.8b.
avobhir dasmā paritakmyāyām # RV.4.41.6d.
aśvatthapalāśam (śś. -śaṃ jaritaḥ) # AVś.20.134.3; Aś.8.3.21; śś.12.23.3; Vait.32.25.
aśvayeva haritā yāti dhārayā # RV.9.107.8c; SV.1.515c; 2.347c.
aśvāvantaṃ jaritṛbhyaḥ # RV.8.2.24b.
asat su me jaritaḥ sābhivegaḥ # RV.10.27.1a; ā.1.2.2.1; 5.1.1.8; śś.17.9.5. Cf. BṛhD.7.23.
asad yathā jaritra uta sūriḥ # RV.6.23.10c.
asan vibhājya dhīrītarā jahītāt # AVś.11.1.13d.
asi trito guhyena vratena # RV.1.163.3b; VS.29.14b; TS.4.6.7.1b; KS.40.6b.
asuraḥ krīyamāṇaḥ (KS. krītaḥ) # TS.4.4.9.1; KS.34.14. See next.
asurebhya starītave # AVś.2.27.3b,4b; AVP.2.16.2d. Cf. hantavā.
asmin pātre harite somapṛṣṭhe # SMB.2.5.10d.
asya tritaḥ kratunā vavre antaḥ # RV.10.8.7a. Cf. BṛhD.6.148.
asya trito nv ojasā vṛdhānaḥ # RV.10.99.6c.
asya priyo jaritā yasya śarman # RV.4.17.19c.
asya made ahim indro jaghāna # RV.2.15.1d. Cf. asya made jaritar indro 'him.
asya made jaritar indra iha śravad iha somasya matsat # śś.8.25.1.
asya made jaritar indra iha śravad upa giri (!) ṣṭhāt # śś.8.25.1.
asya made jaritar indra ud āryaṃ varṇam atirad ava dāsaṃ varṇam ahan # śś.8.25.1.
asya made jaritar indra ud dyām astabhnād aprathayat pṛthivīm # śś.8.25.1.
asya made jaritar indra ṛṣyāṃ iva pamphaṇataḥ parvatān prakupitāṃ aramṇāt # śś.8.25.1.
asya made jaritar indraḥ somasya matsat # śś.8.25.1.
asya made jaritar indro 'pāṃ vegam airayat # śś.8.25.1.
asya made jaritar indro 'pinvad apito 'jinvad ajuvaḥ # śś.8.25.1.
asya made jaritar indro vṛtram ahan # śś.8.25.1.
asya made jaritar indro vy antarikṣam atirad ā sūryaṃ divy airayat # śś.8.25.1.
asya made jaritar indro 'him ahan # śś.8.25.1. Cf. asya made ahim.
asya suvānasya mandinas tritasya # RV.2.11.20a.
asya stutiṃ jaritur bhikṣamāṇāḥ # RV.10.31.5c.
asyājarāso damām aritrāḥ # RV.10.46.7a; VS.33.1a; TB.2.7.12.1a. P: asyājarāsaḥ Apś.22.27.5.
ahorātre stho 'rdhamāseṣu śrite, bhūtasya pratiṣṭhe bhavyasya prathiṣṭhe, yuvayor idam antaḥ, viśvaṃ yakṣaṃ viśvaṃ bhūtaṃ viśvaṃ subhūtam, viśvasya bhartryau viśvasya janayitryau # TB.3.11.1.18.
ākare vasor jaritā panasyate # RV.3.51.3a; MS.4.12.3a: 184.1.
ā kāmaṃ jaritṝṇām # RV.1.30.15b; AVś.20.122.3b; SV.2.436b.
āgneyyāṃ balabhadraṃ ca # AG.1.2.2a (crit. notes).
ājā khelasya paritakmyāyām # RV.1.116.15b.
ā tiṣṭha haritaṃ ratham # RV.3.44.1d.
ā te garbho yonim etu (AG. aitu) # AVP.3.14.2a; AG.1.13.6a (crit. notes); ApMB.1.12.9a (ApG.3.8.13); HG.1.25.1a. See under ā garbho.
ā te vajraṃ jaritā bāhvor dhāt # RV.1.63.2b.
ātmā ma ātmani śritaḥ, ātmā hṛdaye, hṛdayaṃ mayi, aham amṛte, amṛtaṃ brahmaṇi # TB.3.10.8.9.
ā tvā pariśritaḥ (AVP. pariśrutaḥ; MG. parisṛtaḥ; PG.ApMB. parisrutaḥ) kumbhaḥ (ApMB. kumbhāḥ) # AVP.3.20.6c; AG.2.8.16c; PG.3.4.4c; MG.2.11.12b; ApMB.2.15.4c. See ā tvā hiraṇmayaḥ, enaṃ parisrutaḥ, emāṃ parisrutaḥ, and cf. pūrṇān parisrutaḥ.
ā tvā yachantu harito na sūryam # RV.1.130.2f.
ā tvā hiraṇmayaḥ kumbhaḥ # HG.1.27.4c. See under ā tvā pariśritaḥ.
ādityaṃ garbhaṃ payasā sam aṅgdhi (VS. aṅdhi; TS.KS. -añjan) # VS.13.41a; TS.4.2.10.1a; MS.2.7.17a: 101.17; KS.16.17a; śB.7.5.2.17. P: ādityaṃ garbham Kś.17.5.17; Mś.6.1.7.27; Apś.16.27.7; BṛhPDh.9.5.8; PG.1.13 (crit. notes; see Speijer, Jātakarma, p. 18).
ādityā ha jaritar aṅgirobhyo dakṣiṇām (JB.śś. 'śvaṃ dakṣiṇām) anayan # AVś.20.135.6; AB.6.35.5; GB.2.6.14 (bis); JB.2.116ab; Aś.8.3.25; śś.12.19.1. P: ādityā ha jaritaḥ Vait.32.28. Seems to be pādas a, b, of a stanza. AVś.20.135.6--10 are designated as devanītham AB.6.34.1 ff.; as ādityāṅgirasyaḥ (sc. ṛcaḥ) KB.30.6; śś.12.19.5.
ādityo 'si divi śritaḥ, candramasaḥ pratiṣṭhā, tvayīdam antaḥ, viśvaṃ yakṣaṃ viśvaṃ bhūtaṃ viśvaṃ subhūtam, viśvasya bhartā viśvasya janayitā # TB.3.11.1.11.
ād īṃ tritasya yoṣaṇaḥ # RV.9.32.2a; SV.2.121a. Cf. etaṃ tri-.
ā dhatta pitaro garbham # VS.2.33a; Aś.2.7.14a; śś.4.5.8a; Apś.1.10.11a; Mś.1.1.2.31a; Kauś.89.6a; SMB.2.3.16a; GG.4.3.27; JG.2.2. Ps: ā dhatta pitaraḥ PG.1.13 (crit. notes; see Speijer, Jātakarma, p. 19); ā dhatta Kś.4.1.22; KhG.3.5.32; BṛhPDh.5.284.
ā dhattāṃ (AVP.12.3.4d, dhattaṃ) puṣkarasrajau (RV.AVś.AVP.ApMBṃG. -srajā) # RV.10.184.2d; RVKh.10.151.2d; AVś.3.22.4f; 5.25.3d; AVP.2.9.5d; 5.11.6d; 8.10.9f,11d; 12.3.4d; śB.14.9.4.20d; TA.10.40.1d; MahānU.16.5d; BṛhU.6.4.20d; AG.1.15.2d; SMB.1.4.7d; 5.9d; PG.2.4.8f; ApMB.1.12.2d; 2.12.2d; HG.1.6.4d; 8.4d; 25.1d; MG.2.18.2d; JG.1.22d; PG.1.13d (crit. notes; see Speijer, Jātakarma, p. 19). See kṛṇutaṃ puṣkarasrajā, and kṛṇutāṃ puṣkarasrajā.
ānandaḥ kardamaśrītaḥ # RVKh.5.87.27a.
āpaḥ stha samudre śritāḥ, pṛthivyāḥ pratiṣṭhā, yuṣmāsv idam antaḥ, viśvaṃ yakṣaṃ viśvaṃ bhūtaṃ viśvaṃ subhūtam, viśvasya bhartryo viśvasya janayitryaḥ # TB.3.11.1.5. Cf. āpa stha.
āpo me retasi śritā reto hṛdaye hṛdayaṃ mayy aham amṛta amṛtaṃ brahmaṇi # TB.3.10.8.6.
āpo viśvataḥ (vḷ. vidyutaḥ) paripāntu sarvataḥ # AG.1.2.11d (crit. notes). See āpo vidyutaḥ.
āpyāyayantī duritāni viśvā # TB.3.1.1.12c.
ā mā sucarite (Mś. sucaritād) bhaja # VS.4.28b; TS.1.1.12.1b; KS.1.12; 31.11; śB.3.3.3.13; TB.3.3.7.9b; Apś.2.14.10b; Mś.1.3.1.18b.
āyantu naḥ pitaraḥ somyāsaḥ # VS.19.58a. P: āyantu naḥ (Kś.15.10.18; cf. Mahīdh. at VS.19.49); PG.1.13 (crit. notes; see Speijer, Jātakarma, p. 19); YDh.1.233; AuśDh.5.38; BṛhPDh.5.197. Cf. ā me yantu.
ā yāhi śatrūn duritāpaghnan # AVP.4.18.5c.
āyuṣyam agryaṃ pratimuñca śubhram # PG.2.2.10c (crit. notes, and see Speijer, Jātakarma, p. 22).
āre syāma duritasya bhūreḥ # RV.3.39.8b.
āre syāma duritād abhīke # RV.3.39.7b.
ā viśpatīva bīriṭa iyāte # RV.7.39.2b; VS.33.44b; N.5.28b.
ā vīro 'tra jāyatām (AG.ApMB. vīro jāyatām) # AVś.3.23.2c; AVP.3.14.2c; AG.1.13.6c (crit. notes); śG.1.19.6c; HG.1.25.1c; ApMB.1.12.9c.
ā siñcatu prajāpatiḥ # RV.10.184.1c; AVś.5.25.5c; AVP.12.3.3c; śB.14.9.4.20c; BṛhU.6.4.20c; SMB.1.4.6c; ApMB.1.12.1c; HG.1.25.1c; MG.2.18.2c; JG.1.22c; PG.1.13c (crit. notes; see Speijer, Jātakarma, p. 18).
ā smā kāmaṃ jaritur ā manaḥ pṛṇa # RV.8.24.6c.
iḍas patiṃ jaritar nūnam aśyāḥ # RV.5.42.14b.
itthā sate jaritra indra panthām # RV.6.47.20d.
idaṃ su me jaritar ā cikiddhi # RV.10.28.4a.
indra eṇaṃ parāśarīt # see indra enaṃ etc.
indra enaṃ (TB.Apś. eṇaṃ) parāśarīt # AVś.6.75.1d; TB.3.3.11.3d; Apś.3.14.2d. Cf. indro vo 'dya.
indraḥ pātalye dadatāṃ śarītoḥ # RV.3.53.17c.
indraṃ namasyā jarituḥ pananta # RV.10.104.7d.
indraṃ brahmaṇā jaritar navena # RV.6.50.6b.
indraḥ śmaśrūṇi haritābhi pruṣṇute # RV.10.23.4b; AVś.20.73.5b.
indrāgnī jarituḥ sacā # RV.3.12.2a; SV.2.20a.
indre kāmaṃ jaritāro vasūyavaḥ # RV.7.32.2c; SV.2.1026c.
indre ni rūpā haritā mimikṣire # RV.10.96.3d; AVś.20.30.3d.
indre ha viśvā bhuvanā śritāni # MS.4.14.7c: 225.4. Cf. kāle ha etc.
indro na śaktiṃ paritakmyāyām # RV.4.43.3b.
indro neṣad ati duritāni viśvā # TS.5.7.2.3d; SMB.2.1.9d; PG.3.1.2d. See under ati viśvasya duritasya.
indro me bale śrito balaṃ hṛdaye hṛdayaṃ mayy aham amṛte amṛtaṃ brahmaṇi # TB.3.10.8.8.
indro yaḥ pūrbhid āritaḥ # RV.8.33.5d.
indro viśvasya duritasya pāram # RV.10.161.3d; AVś.20.96.8d; KS.13.15d; Mś.1.6.4.21d. See under ati viśvasya etc.
imaṃ trito bhūry avindad ichan # RV.10.46.3a.
imāni ta uditā śaṃtamāni # AVś.7.68.2c; MS.4.12.6c: 198.11. See imāni te duritā.
imāni te duritā saubhagāni # TB.2.5.4.6c. See imāni ta uditā.
imā brahmāṇi jaritā vo arcat # RV.1.165.14d; MS.4.11.3d: 170.6; KS.9.18d.
ime sutā indavaḥ prātaritvanā # N.4.17a.
iyaṃ duruktāt (PG. duruktaṃ) paribādhamānā # śG.2.2.1a; SMB.1.6.27a; GG.2.10.37; PG.2.2.8a; ApMB.2.2.9a (ApG.4.10.11); MG.1.22.10a; JG.1.12a; VārG.5.7a. P: iyaṃ duruktāt KhG.2.4.19; JG.1.12. See yā duritā pari-.
iyarti vācam ariteva nāvam # RV.2.42.1b; 9.95.2b.
irasyā drugdho bhiyasā ni gārīt # RV.5.40.7b.
iṣaṃ vurītāvase # RV.6.14.1d; MS.4.10.2d: 145.15; KS.20.14d.
iṣaṃ jaritre nadyo na pīpeḥ # RV.4.16.21b.
iṣṭāḥ prītā āhutibhājo bhūtvā # MS.1.6.2d: 88.8; 1.6.7d: 97.7; Apś.5.18.1d. See tṛptāḥ prītāḥ.
īśāno me manyau śritaḥ, manyur hṛdaye, hṛdayaṃ mayi, aham amṛte, amṛtaṃ brahmaṇi # TB.3.10.8.9.
ucchiṣṭe devatāḥ śritāḥ # AVś.11.7.4d.
ucchiṣṭe 'dhi śritā divaḥ # AVś.11.7.14b.
ucchiṣṭe saṃśritā śritā # AVś.11.7.21d.
uta tyā harito daśa (SV. rathe) # RV.9.63.9a; SV.2.568a.
utedānīṃ bhagavantaḥ syāma # RV.7.41.4a; AVś.3.16.4a; AVP.4.31.4a; VS.34.37a; TB.2.8.9.8a; ApMB.1.14.4a (ApG.3.9.4). P: utedānīm PG.1.13 (crit. notes: see Speijer, Jātakarma, p. 19).
uto te vṛṣaṇā (ArS. haritau; JB. haritā) harī # RV.8.13.31b; ArS.4.9b; JB.2.403b.
uto te haritau harī # see uto te vṛṣaṇā harī.
uttarataḥ parīta # Apś.3.4.4; Mś.1.3.3.14.
ut tiṣṭha puruṣa harita piṅgala lohitākṣi (MahānU. puruṣāharitapiṅgala lohitākṣa) dehi dehi dadāpayitā me śudhyantām # TA.10.60.1; Tā.10.65; MahānU.20.24.
upa tritasya pāṣyoḥ # RV.9.102.2a; SV.2.364a.
upa bhūṣa jaritar mā ruvaṇyaḥ # RV.8.96.12c.
ubhayān antarā śritaḥ # AVś.12.2.44d.
uruśaṃsāya savitar jaritre # RV.2.38.11d; KS.17.19d.
uruśaṃso jaritre viśvadha syāḥ # RV.4.16.18d.
uruṣyataṃ jaritāraṃ yuvaṃ ha # RV.4.43.7c; AVś.20.143.7c.
ūrdhvacitaḥ śrayadhvam (VS. śna-) # VS.12.46; TS.4.2.7.4; śB.7.1.1.14; TA.6.6.2. See ūrdhvaśritaḥ.
ṛta iyaṃ pṛthivī śritā # GG.2.1.7c. See ṛte bhūmir, and cf. ṛte samudra.
ṛtaṃ piparty anṛtaṃ ni tārīt (AVś. pāti) # RV.1.152.3d; AVś.9.10.23d.
ṛtavaḥ stha saṃvatsare śritāḥ, māsānāṃ pratiṣṭhā, yuṣmāsv idam antaḥ, viśvaṃ yakṣaṃ viśvaṃ bhūtaṃ viśvaṃ subhūtam, viśvasya bhartāro viśvasya janayitāraḥ # TB.3.11.1.15.
ṛte bhūmir iyaṃ śritā # TB.1.5.5.1d; Apś.8.4.2d. See ṛta iyaṃ, and cf. samudreṇa pṛthivī.
ṛṣayaḥ pūrve jaritāro na (KS. pūrve janimāni) bhūnā # RV.10.82.4b; VS.17.28b; TS.4.6.2.2b; MS.2.10.3b: 134.6; KS.18.1b.
ṛṣibhiḥ somapaiḥ śritā # RVKh.10.127.6b.
e āti viśvāni duritā tarema # JB.2.385; 3.195. See ati viśvāni etc.
etat sūrpaṃ jaritar ā hara # AVP.11.11.3a.
etad vaco jaritar māpi mṛṣṭhāḥ # RV.3.33.8a.
etaṃ tyaṃ harito daśa # RV.9.38.3a; SV.2.629a.
etaṃ tritasya yoṣaṇaḥ # RV.9.38.2a; SV.2.625a. Cf. ād īṃ tri-.
ete me devāḥ prīyantāṃ prītā māṃ prīṇayantu tṛptā māṃ tarpayantu # MG.2.14.29.
enaṃ parisrutaḥ kumbhyā # śG.3.2.9c. See under ā tvā pariśritaḥ.
emāṃ parisrutaḥ kumbhaḥ # AVś.3.12.7c. See under ā tvā pariśritaḥ.
eṣa grāveva jaritā ta indra # RV.5.36.4a.
eṣo apaśrito valaḥ # RV.8.24.30c.
aindravāruṇavāyavyāḥ # AG.1.2.6a (crit. notes).
oṃ ha jaritaḥ # Aś.8.3.25; Vait.32.29.
othā modaiva (and other liturgical variations of form = atha mada eva) # Aś.5.9.4; 8.3.23,24,25,31; śś.12.13.4; 17.2; 19.6; 23.5; 24.6; 26.11; Mś.2.4.2.25; Vait.20.20; 32.18,32; Kś.9.13.29; othā mada iva Apś.12.27.14; 13.13.9,10; othā mo daivom Aś.7.11.15,17; 8.3.11; 4.3; othā modaivo3m Mś.2.4.2.25; othā moda ivom Apś.12.27.15. Cf. jaritar othā, and tathā ha jaritar.
oṣadhivanaspatayo me lomasu śritāḥ, lomāni hṛdaye, hṛdayaṃ mayi, aham amṛte, amṛtaṃ brahmaṇi # TB.3.10.8.7.
oṣṭhe jihvā carcarīti # AVś.20.127.4c. See naṣṭe etc.
auchat sā rātrī paritakmyā yā # RV.5.30.14a.
kakṣe muṣkāv apaśritau (AVP. apākṛtam) # AVś.6.127.2b; AVP.1.90.2b.
kathainam āhuḥ papuriṃ jaritre # RV.4.23.3d.
kambale duritaṃ vayam # AVś.14.2.67b.
kartā dhiyaṃ jaritre vājapeśasam # RV.2.34.6d.
karhi svit tad indra yaj jaritre # RV.6.35.3a.
kaś caritrāṇi pūruṣe # AVś.10.2.12d.
kāmā ye 'sya hṛdi sthitāḥ (BṛhU.KU. śritāḥ) # śB.14.7.2.9b; BṛhU.4.4.9b; KU.6.14c.
kālāḥ saṃvatsaraṃ śritāḥ # TA.1.2.2b.
kālair haritvam āpannaiḥ # TA.1.12.3e.
kāsmehitiḥ kā paritakmyāsīt # RV.10.108.1c; N.11.25c.
kṛta enaṃ manuṣyeṣv amṛṣṭa # AVP.1.70.3b. See tṛta enaṃ, and trita etan.
kṛte devā amṛjataina etat # AVP.1.70.3a. See tṛte devā, and trite devā.
kṛdhi kṣumantaṃ jaritāram agne # RV.2.9.5c.
kṛdhī jaritre maghavann avo mahat # RV.8.97.8c.
kṛdhī dhiyaṃ jaritre vājaratnām # RV.10.42.7d; AVś.20.89.7d; MS.4.14.5d: 222.4; TB.2.8.2.7d.
kṛṣṇam anyad dharitaḥ saṃ bharanti # RV.1.115.5d; AVś.20.123.2d; VS.33.38d; MS.4.14.4d: 220.10; TB.2.8.7.2d.
ko ha kasminn asi śritaḥ # RV.1.75.3c; SV.2.885c.
kratuprāvā jaritā śaśvatām avaḥ # RV.10.100.11a.
kratvā hy agnir amṛtāṃ atārīt # RV.7.4.5b.
krimikīṭapataṃgānām # AG.1.2.8a (crit. notes).
krītaḥ somo rājā # śB.3.3.3.3; Kś.7.8.13. P: krītaḥ Mś.2.1.4.10.
klībarūpāṃs tirīṭinaḥ # AVś.8.6.7d.
kva māsā ṛtavaḥ śritāḥ # TA.1.8.1d.
kṣadmevārtheṣu tartarītha ugrā # RV.10.106.7b.
kṣāmad devo 'ti duritāny (TAṃahānU. devo atiduritāty) agniḥ # AVś.7.63.1d; TA.10.2.1d; MahānU.6.6d.
kṣudhaṃ tarema duritiṃ duriṣṭim # TB.3.1.2.2d.
garbhaṃ te aśvinau devau (AVś. aśvinobhā; PGḥG. aśvināv ubhau) # RV.10.184.2c; AVś.5.25.3c; śB.14.9.4.20c; BṛhU.6.4.20c; SMB.1.4.7c; ApMB.1.12.2c; HG.1.25.1c; MG.2.18.2c; JG.1.22c; PG.1.13c (crit. notes; see Speijer, Jātakarma, p. 19). See garbhaṃ yuvam, and putraṃ te aśvinobhā.
garbhaṃ dhehi pṛthuṣṭuke # śB.14.9.4.20b; BṛhU.6.4.20b; PG.1.13b (crit. notes; see Speijer, Jātakarma, p. 19). See next.
garbhaṃ dhehi sinīvāli # RV.10.184.2a; AVś.5.25.3a; AVP.12.3.4a; śB.14.9.4.20a; BṛhU.6.4.20a; SMB.1.4.7a; GG.2.5.9; ApMB.1.12.2a (ApG.3.8.13); HG.1.25.1a; MG.2.18.2a; JG.1.22a; PG.1.13a (crit. notes; see Speijer, Jātakarma, p. 19). P: garbhaṃ dhehi KhG.1.4.16.
garbho yas te yajñiyaḥ # KS.13.9a,10. See yasyās te harito.
gobhiḥ śrītasya nṛbhiḥ sutasya # RV.9.109.15b.
gobhiḥ śrīto madāya kam # RV.8.82.5b.
gośapho jaritaḥ # Aś.8.3.23; śś.12.23.3; Vait.32.25. See gośaphaḥ.
ghaneva viṣvag duritāni vighnan # RV.9.97.16c.
ghṛtapruṣas tvā sarito vahanti (Aś. tvā harito vahantu) # TB.1.2.1.11c; Aś.5.19.3c; Apś.5.6.3c; 14.17.1c. See ghṛtapruṣo haritas.
ghṛtapruṣo haritas tvāvahantu # KS.35.1c. See ghṛtapruṣas tvā.
ghṛte śrito ghṛtam v (TA. uv) asya dhāma # RV.2.3.11b; VS.17.88b; TA.10.10.2b; Aś.5.19.3b; MahānU.9.11b.
ghnan vṛtrāṇi vi puro dardarīti # RV.6.73.2c; AVś.20.90.2c; KS.4.16c.
cakāra harito mṛgaḥ # RV.10.86.3b; AVś.20.126.3b.
cakre nābhir iva śritā # RV.8.41.6b.
candram agniṃ candrarathaṃ harivratam (Apś. haritvacam; Mś. harivṛtam, vḷ. harivratam) # RV.3.3.5a; KS.7.12a; Apś.5.10.4a; Mś.1.5.2.14a.
candramā asy āditye śritaḥ, nakṣatrāṇāṃ pratiṣṭhā, tvayīdam antaḥ, viśvaṃ yakṣaṃ viśvaṃ bhūtaṃ viśvaṃ subhūtam, viśvasya bhartā viśvasya janayitā # TB.3.11.1.12.
candramā me manasi śrito, mano hṛdaye, hṛdayaṃ mayi, aham amṛte, amṛtaṃ brahmaṇi # TB.3.10.8.5.
caritrāṃs te mā hiṃsiṣam # KS.3.6. See caritrān asya.
caritrān asya mā hiṃsīḥ # MS.1.2.16: 26.10; Mś.1.8.4.5. See caritrāṃs te mā.
jajñāno harito vṛṣā # RV.3.44.4a.
jantūnāṃ pāpacāriṇām # AG.1.2.8b (crit. notes).
jāgṛtāya svāhā # KSA.1.10. See jāgaritāya.
jihmaśye caritave maghonī # RV.1.113.5a.
jyotir akāri harito nāyase # RV.1.57.3d; AVś.20.15.3d.
taṃ vaḥ suprītaṃ subhṛtam akarma (KS. abhārṣam) # TS.1.4.45.3; KS.4.13. See taṃ suprītaṃ.
taṃ suprītaṃ subhṛtaṃ bibhṛta # VS.8.26; śB.4.4.5.21. See taṃ vaḥ suprītaṃ.
taṃ sūryaṃ haritaḥ sapta yahvīḥ # RV.4.13.3c.
taṃ ha jaritar na pratyagṛhṇan # JB.2.116d. See tāṃ ha jaritar na pratyagṛbhṇan.
taṃ ha jaritar na pratyāyan # JB.2.116c. See tāṃ etc.
taj juṣasva jaritur ghoṣi manma # RV.6.5.6d.
tatredaṃ viśvaṃ bhuvanam adhi śritam # KS.18.1d.
tat savitur vareṇyam # RV.3.62.10a; SV.2.812a; VS.3.35a; 22.9a; 30.2a; 36.3a; TS.1.5.6.4a; 8.4; 4.1.11.1a; MS.4.10.3a: 149.14; AB.4.32.2; 5.5.6; 13.8; 19.8; KB.23.3; 26.10; GB.1.1.34; DB.3.25a; śB.2.3.4.39a; 13.6.2.9; 14.9.3.11; TA.1.11.2a; 10.27.1a; Tā.10.35a; BṛhU.6.3.11; MahānU.15.2a; MU.6.7a,34; JUB.4.28.1; śvetU.4.18; Aś.7.6.6; 8.1.18; śś.2.10.2; 12.7; 5.5.2; 10.6.17; 9.16; Apś.6.18.1; śG.2.5.12; 7.19; 6.4.8; Kauś.91.6; SMB.1.6.29a (KhG.2.4.21); ApMB.2.4.13 (ApG.4.10.9--12); VārG.5.26; BDh.2.10.17.14a. Ps: tat savituḥ Apś.20.24.6; Mś.5.2.4.43; ApG.4.11.9; MG.1.2.3; 4.4,8; 5.2; tat MDh.2.77; Rvidh.1.12.5. Designated as sāvitrī, or gāyatrī, throughout Vedic and Sanskrit literature. Cf. vedāś.
tathā ha jaritar othā modaiva # Aś.8.3.25; śś.12.19.6. P: tathā ha jaritaḥ Vait.32.29. Cf. under othā.
tad anyasyām adhi śritam # AVś.1.32.4b; TB.3.7.10.3b; Apś.9.14.2b. See viśvam anyasyām etc.
tad ayaṃ rājā varuṇo 'numanyatām # AG.1.13.6c (crit. notes); SMB.1.1.10c; PG.1.5.11c; ApMB.1.4.7c; HG.1.19.7c; JG.1.20c. See tad idaṃ.
tad u sarvaṃ tvayi śritam # SMB.2.4.11b.
tad rodasī janayataṃ jaritre # RV.1.185.3c.
tad veṣāṃ hṛdi śritam # AVP.9.4.11d.
tapaḥśramāv antarau mat parītām # AVP.13.1.2a.
tapo 'si loke śritam, tejasaḥ pratiṣṭhā, tvayīdam antaḥ, viśvaṃ yakṣaṃ viśvaṃ bhūtaṃ viśvaṃ subhūtam, viśvasya bhartṛ viśvasya janayitṛ # TB.3.11.1.2.
taranto viśvā duritā syāma # RV.10.31.1d. Cf. under atikrāmanto duritā.
tava tye agne harito ghṛtasnāḥ # RV.4.6.9a.
tava rāṣṭraṃ divi śritam # AVP.10.2.2b.
tasmin viśvam idaṃ śritam # ChU.3.15.1f.
tasya na iṣṭasya prītasya draviṇehāgameḥ # VS.18.56. Cf. under tasya ta iṣṭasya.
tāṃ ha jaritaḥ pratyāyan # GB.2.6.14. Cf. tām u ha etc.
tāṃ ha jaritar na pratyagṛbhṇan # AVś.20.135.7a; AB.6.35.8; GB.2.6.14; śś.12.19.1e. See taṃ ha jaritar na pratyagṛhṇan.
tāṃ ha jaritar na pratyāyan # AVś.20.135.6c; AB.6.35.6; śś.12.19.1c. See taṃ etc.
no viśvāni jaritā ciketa (RV.10.59.2c, mamattu) # RV.10.59.2c,3c.
tāṃ te vācam āsya ādatte (read ādade) hṛdaya ādadhe # PG.3.13.6. See ā te vācam, and the critical note to PG.
tābhyāṃ piṇḍo mayā dattaḥ # AG.1.2.7c (crit. notes).
tām asya rītiṃ paraśor iva prati # RV.5.48.4a.
mā prītāḥ prīṇantu # TS.1.6.2.3; KS.4.14; Mś.1.4.1.27.
tām u ha jaritaḥ pratyagṛbhṇan (JB. pratyagṛhṇan) # AVś.20.135.7b; AB.6.35.9; JB.2.116f; śś.2.19.1f. See next but one.
tām u ha jaritaḥ pratyāyan # AVś.20.135.6d; AB.6.35.7; GB.2.6.14; JB.2.116e; śś.12.19.1d. Cf. tāṃ ha etc.
tām u ha jaritar naḥ pratyagṛbhṇan # GB.2.6.14. See prec. but one.
tiro viśvāni duritā nayanti # RV.6.51.10b.
tuvigraye vahnaye duṣṭarītave # RV.2.21.2c.
tūrvatāṃ narā duritād abhīke # RV.6.50.10d.
tṛtīye nāke adhi viṣṭapi śritā # AVP.14.6.2d.
tṛptāḥ prītāḥ punar astaṃ pareta # KS.7.14d. See iṣṭāḥ prītā.
tṛṣṇāvidaj jaritāram # RV.7.89.4b.
te kākāḥ pratigṛhṇantu # AG.1.2.6c (crit. notes).
tejo yaśasvi sthaviraṃ samiddham (śG. samṛddham; VārG. -viraṃ ca dhṛṣṇu) # śG.2.1.30b; PG.2.2.10b (crit. notes; see Speijer, Jātakarma, p. 22); HG.1.4.6b; ApMB.2.2.11b; VārG.5.9b.
tejo 'si tapasi śritam, samudrasya pratiṣṭhā, tvayīdam antaḥ, viśvaṃ yakṣaṃ viśvaṃ bhūtaṃ viśvaṃ subhūtam, viśvasya bhartṛ viśvasya janayitṛ # TB.3.11.1.3.
tebhyo baliṃ puṣṭikāmo (JG. annakāmo) harāmi (AG. dadāmi) # Tā.10.67.2c; MahānU.20.1c; AG.1.2.5c (crit. notes); JG.1.23c. Cf. under tebhya imaṃ baliṃ.
te mā rakṣantu visrasaś caritrāt # RV.8.48.5c.
te viśvasmād duritā yāvayantu # RV.7.44.3d; MS.4.11.1d: 162.3.
te sarve tṛptim āyāntu # AG.1.2.8c (crit. notes).
tau mā prītau prīṇītām # TS.1.6.2.3; Mś.1.4.1.27.
trayo 'varaparaṃ śritāḥ # AVś.11.3.20b.
trīṇi tritasya dhārayā # RV.9.102.3a; SV.2.365a.
tvaṃ sīṃ vṛṣann akṛṇor duṣṭarītu # RV.6.1.1c; MS.4.13.6c: 206.6; KS.18.20c; TB.3.6.10.1c.
tvaṃ sūro harito rāmayo nṝn # RV.1.121.13a.
tvaṃ tapaḥ paritapyājayaḥ svaḥ # RV.10.167.1d.
tvaṃ devānām asi sasnitamaṃ papritamaṃ juṣṭatamaṃ vahnitamaṃ devahūtamam # TS.1.1.4.1; TB.3.2.4.4. P: tvaṃ devānām asi sasnitamam Apś.1.17.7. See devānām asi.
tvam aṅga jaritāraṃ yaviṣṭha # RV.5.3.11a.
tvaṃ punīhi duritāny asmat # AVś.19.33.3d; AVP.11.13.3d; Kauś.2.1d.
tvaṃ prīto dadase dhanam # SMB.2.4.12b.
tvayā sarve paritaptāḥ purastāt # AVś.1.7.5c; AVP.4.4.5c.
tvayi gāvo adhi śritāḥ # AVP.10.2.7d.
tvayi yajño adhi śritaḥ # AVP.10.2.8b.
tvaṣṭā rūpāṇi piṃśatu # RV.10.184.1b; AVś.5.25.5b; AVP.9.12.8b; 12.3.3b; śB.14.9.4.20b; BṛhU.6.4.20b; SMB.1.4.6b; HG.1.25.1b; ApMB.1.12.1b; MG.2.18.2b; JG.1.22b; PG.1.13b (crit. notes; see Speijer, Jātakarma, p. 18).
tvām agne harito vāvaśānāḥ # RV.7.5.5a.
tvām achā jaritāraḥ # RV.1.2.2b.
tvāṣṭrasya cin niḥ sasṛje trito gāḥ # RV.10.8.8d.
tve hi kaṃ parvate na śritāni # RV.2.28.8c.
dakṣiṇata eta (Mś. -taḥ parīta) # Apś.3.4.2; Mś.1.3.3.14.
dadhikrāvṇaḥ sahorjā taritrataḥ # RV.4.40.3d; VS.9.15d; TS.1.7.8.3d; MS.1.11.2d: 163.5; KS.13.14d; śB.5.1.5.20d.
dadhi manthaṃ pariśrutam (śś. manthāṃ parisrutam) # AVś.20.127.9b; śś.12.17.1.3b. Cf. under ā tvā pariśritaḥ.
darbhaiḥ stṛṇīta haritaiḥ suparṇaiḥ (KS. suvarṇaiḥ) # KS.31.14c; Mś.1.3.5.26c. See hotṛṣadanaṃ, and hotṛṣadanā.
dātā jaritra ukthyam # RV.8.66.2d; SV.2.38d.
dikṣu śritāḥ sahasraśaḥ # AVP.14.3.9d; VS.16.6d; TS.4.5.1.3d; MS.2.9.2d: 121.9; KS.17.11d; NīlarU.9d.
divaṃ rudrā upaśritāḥ # VS.16.56b; TS.4.5.11.1b; MS.2.9.9b: 128.11; KS.17.16b.
divas tvā pātu haritam # AVś.5.28.9a; AVP.2.59.7a.
divi candramasi śritam # SMB.1.5.11b; PG.1.11.9b; 16.17b; ApMB.2.13.3b; HG.2.3.8b (bis); VārG.2.6b; KBU.2.8b.
divi devā iva śritāḥ # AVś.6.80.2b. Cf. divi vātā.
divi devā diviśritāḥ # AVś.11.7.23d--27d.
divi vātā iva śritāḥ # RV.1.187.4c; AVP.6.16.4c; KS.40.8c. Cf. divi devā iva.
divi somo adhi śritaḥ # RV.10.85.1d; AVś.14.1.1d; ApMB.1.6.1d.
divo na prītāḥ śaśayaṃ duduhre # RV.3.57.2b.
divo mā pāhi viśvasmai prāṇāyāpānāya vyānāyopānāya pratiṣṭhāyai caritrāya # MS.2.8.14: 118.6.
divo vṛṣṭir īḍyo rītir apām # RV.6.13.1d; Apś.5.23.9d.
diśo me śrotre śritāḥ, śrotraṃ hṛdaye, hṛdayaṃ mayi, aham amṛte, amṛtaṃ brahmaṇi # TB.3.10.8.6.
durniyantuḥ pariprīto na mitram # RV.1.190.6b.
duṣvapnyaṃ kāma duritaṃ ca kāma # AVś.9.2.3a.
duṣvapnyaṃ duritaṃ niḥ (AVś.7.83.4c, ni) ṣvāsmat # AVś.6.121.1c; 7.83.4c.
devaṃ barhir vāritīnām # VS.21.57a; 28.21a,44a; MS.3.11.5a: 148.1; 4.13.8 (bis): 210.18; 211.2; KS.19.13a; TB.2.6.10.6a; 14.5a; 20.5a; 3.6.13.1; 14.2; Aś.3.6.13; śś.5.20.4.
devānām asi vahnitamaṃ sasnitamaṃ papritamaṃ juṣṭatamaṃ devahūtamam # VS.1.8; MS.1.1.5: 3.1; 4.1.5: 6.12; KS.1.4; śB.1.1.2.12. Ps: devānām asi vahnitamam KS.31.3; Mś.1.2.1.25; devānām Kś.2.3.14. See tvaṃ devānām asi sasnitamaṃ.
devīṃ nāvaṃ svaritrām anāgasam # VS.21.6c. See daivīṃ etc.
devair avo mimīhi saṃ jaritre # RV.3.1.15c.
daivīṃ nāvaṃ svaritrām anāgasam (AVś. -saḥ) # RV.10.63.10c; AVś.7.6.3c; TS.1.5.11.5c; MS.4.10.1c: 144.9; KS.2.3c. P: daivīṃ nāvam PG.3.2.9. See devīṃ etc.
dyāvāpṛthivyor hiraṇmayaṃ saṃśritaṃ suvaḥ # TA.10.1.14; MahānU.5.9.
dyumnā vāṇīr iva tritaḥ # RV.5.86.1d.
dyaur asi vāyau śritādityasya pratiṣṭhā tvayīdam antar viśvaṃ yakṣaṃ viśvaṃ bhūtaṃ viśvaṃ subhūtaṃ viśvasya bhartrī viśvasya janayitrī # TB.3.11.1.10.
dyaur no devy abhayaṃ no astu (MG. abhayaṃ kṛṇotu) # AG.1.2.11b (crit. notes); 2.4.14b; MG.2.8.6b. See śaṃ no dyaur abhayaṃ.
dviṣatāṃ pātv aṃhasaḥ # RV.10.164.4d. See duritāt pātv.
dviṣo aṃhāṃsi duritā tarema # RV.6.2.11d.
dveṣoyuto na duritā # RV.5.9.6c.
dvau śyāmaśabalau śunau # AG.1.2.7b (crit. notes).
dhanur bibharṣi haritaṃ hiraṇyayam # AVś.11.2.12a.
dhanvan na tṛṣṇā sam arīta tāṃ abhi # RV.9.79.3c.
dhartri dharitri janitri yamitri # Apś.14.33.2.
dhartrī ca dharitrī ca mitrāvaruṇayor mitrasya dhātuḥ # TS.4.4.11.2.
dhartry asi dharitrī (Mś. dharuṇā) # TS.4.3.7.2; MS.2.8.3: 109.1; Mś.7.1.3.15.
dhātā garbhaṃ (KS. kṣatraṃ) dadhātu te # RV.10.184.1d; AVś.5.25.5d; AVP.12.3.3d,8b; KS.40.9d; śB.14.9.4.20d; BṛhU.6.4.20d; SMB.1.4.6d; HG.1.25.1d; ApMB.1.12.1d; MG.2.18.2d; JG.1.22d; PG.1.13d (crit. notes: see Speijer, Jātakarma, p. 18).
dhāman (AG. dhāmaṃ) te viśvaṃ bhuvanam adhi śritam # RV.4.58.11a; AVP.8.13.11a; VS.17.99a; KS.40.7a; Aś.2.13.7; Apś.17.18.1a; AG.3.5.7; śG.4.5.8.
dhūmas te ketur abhavad divi śritaḥ # RV.5.11.3d; TB.2.4.3.3d.
dhruvāsi dharitrī # VS.14.22; KS.17.3; śB.8.3.4.6,10.
nakṣatrāṇi stha candramasi śritāni, saṃvatsarasya pratiṣṭhā, yuṣmāsv idam antaḥ, viśvaṃ yakṣaṃ viśvaṃ bhūtaṃ viśvaṃ subhūtam, viśvasya bhartṝṇi viśvasya janayitṝṇi # TB.3.11.1.13.
nakṣann ṛtaṃ jaritāras ta indra # RV.7.23.4b; AVś.20.12.4b; VS.33.18b.
na tam aṃho na duritaṃ kutaś cana # RV.2.23.5a.
na tam aṃho na duritam # RV.10.126.1a; AVP.5.39.1a; SV.1.426a; VHDh.8.47. Ps: na tam aṃhaḥ VāDh.26.7; MDh.11.252; LAtDh.2.6; na tam Rvidh.4.4.4. Cf. BṛhD.8.44.
na tam aṃho na duritāṇi martyam # RV.7.82.7a.
namaḥ śuṣkyāya (MS. śuṣyāya) ca harityāya ca # VS.16.45; TS.4.5.9.1; MS.2.9.8: 126.12; KS.17.15.
nayanti duritā tiraḥ # RV.1.41.3c.
na rādhasa āmarītā maghasya # RV.4.20.7b.
navāś caranti saritaḥ purāṇīḥ # AVś.12.2.41d.
naṣṭe jihvā carcarīti # śś.12.15.1.1c. See oṣṭhe jihvā.
nāṃho aśnoti duritaṃ nakir bhayam # RV.10.39.11b.
nākasya pṛṣṭhe adhi tiṣṭhati śritaḥ # RV.1.125.5a.
nākasya pṛṣṭhe adhi viṣṭapi śritāḥ # AVś.18.4.4b.
nāvam aritraparaṇīṃ kṛṇudhvam # RV.10.101.2b.
nāveva sindhuṃ duritāty agniḥ # RV.1.99.1d; RVKh.10.127.8d; TA.10.2.1d; MahānU.6.2d; N.7d (Roth's edition, p. 201); 14.33d.
ni trito jarimāṇaṃ na (KS. trito no jarimāṇam) ānaṭ # MS.2.6.12d: 71.9; 4.4.6: 56.14; KS.15.8d.
ni pastyāsu trita stabhūyan # RV.10.46.6a.
ni mitrayur aratīn atārīt # MS.2.6.12b: 71.8; KS.15.8b. See vi mitra.
ni rāmaya jaritaḥ soma indram # RV.10.42.1d; AVś.20.89.1d.
nir ito haritasrajam # AVP.13.4.1a.
ni ṣṭanihi duritā bādhamānaḥ # RV.6.47.30b; VS.29.56b; TS.4.6.6.7b; MS.3.16.3b: 187.10; KSA.6.1b. See abhi ṣṭana.
nīthāvido jaritāraḥ # RV.3.12.5b; SV.2.925b,1053b; MS.4.11.1b: 159.7.
nūnaṃ sā te prati varaṃ jaritre # RV.2.11.21a; 15.10a; 16.9a; 17.9a; 18.9a; 19.9a; 20.9a; N.1.7a. P: nūnaṃ sā te AB.6.23.3; GB.2.6.5; Aś.7.4.10.
neha yo vo avāvarīt # RV.8.100.7b.
nairṛtyāṃ skandaṃ varuṇaṃ ca # AG.1.2.2b (crit. notes).
patnī yīyapsyate (śś. yīyapsyamānā; Vait. yad dṛśyate) jaritaḥ # Aś.8.3.24; śś.12.23.5; Vait.32.27.
panthāso yanti śavasāparītāḥ # RV.1.100.3b.
pari tritantuṃ vicarantam utsam # RV.10.30.9d.
pari tvā paritatnunā # AVś.1.34.5a; AVP.2.9.3a.
pari doṣād udarpithaḥ # Kś.25.11.21b. See paritoṣāt.
pari māgne duścaritād bādhasva # VS.4.28a; śB.3.3.3.13. P: pari māgne Kś.7.9.1. See pāhi māgne etc.
pari vrajaṃ svarita # AVP.2.31.6e.
pari śvabhreva duritāni vṛjyām # RV.2.27.5d.
parīto ṣiñcatā sutam # RV.9.107.1a; SV.1.512a; 2.663a; VS.19.2a; MS.3.11.7a: 149.18; KS.37.18a; JB.2.421; 3.252a; PB.15.3.3; śB.12.8.2.12; TB.2.6.1.1a; Apś.19.5.11; Mś.5.2.11.4; Svidh.1.4.3; 7.9. P: parīto ṣiñcata Kś.19.1.22.
parītya bhūtāni parītya lokān (TAṃahānU. parītya lokān parītya bhūtāni) # VS.32.11a; TA.10.1.4a; MahānU.2.7a. See vidhāya lokān.
parīdaṃ vājy ajinaṃ (PG. -daṃ vājinaṃ; VārG. -daṃ vājyaṃ vājinaṃ, read vājy ajinaṃ) dadhe 'ham (HG. ajinaṃ dhatsvāsau) # śG.2.1.30d; PG.2.2.10d (crit. notes; see Speijer, Jātakarma, p. 22); HG.1.4.6d; ApMB.2.2.11d; VārG.5.9d.
parjanyo me mūrdhni śrito mūrdhā hṛdaye hṛdayaṃ mayy aham amṛta amṛtaṃ brahmaṇi # TB.3.10.8.8.
parṇaśadaḥ (Aś. parṇaśado jaritaḥ; śś. parṇasado jaritaḥ) # AVś.20.135.2; Aś.8.3.23; śś.12.23.3; Vait.32.25.
parvateṣv apaśritaḥ # RV.5.61.19c.
parvateṣv apaśritam # RV.1.84.14b; AVś.20.41.2b; SV.2.264b; MS.2.13.6b: 154.13; KS.39.12b; JB.3.64b; TB.1.5.8.1b.
parṣad viśvāti duritā gṛṇantam # RV.3.20.4d.
pavamāno harita ā viveśa (JB. once viviśa [?]) # RV.8.101.14d; AVś.10.8.40d; JB.2.229d (ter); śB.2.5.1.5d; ā.2.1.1.4d,8.
paśupateḥ purītat # VS.39.9.
paśyanto andhaṃ duritād arakṣan # RV.1.147.3b; 4.4.13b; TS.1.2.14.5b; MS.4.11.5b: 174.3; KS.6.11b.
paśyanty asyāś caritaṃ pṛthivyām # AVś.9.1.3a.
pātām avadyād duritād abhīke # RV.1.185.10c.
pātu no duritād avadyāt # AVP.2.70.4d. Cf. agnir naḥ pātu duritād.
pāśe sa baddho durite ni yujyatām # AVś.2.12.2c; AVP.2.5.3c. P: pāśe saḥ Kauś.47.49.
pāhi duścaritāt # TS.1.1.13.3; TB.3.3.9.9.
pāhi māgne duścaritāt # TS.1.1.12.1a; KS.1.12; 31.11; TB.3.3.7.9a; Apś.2.14.10a; Mś.1.3.1.18a. See pari māgne.
pāhi vajrivo duritād abhīke # RV.1.121.14b.
piṅgalaṃ haritaṃ lohitaṃ ca # śB.14.7.2.12b; BṛhU.4.4.12b.
pipīlikāvaṭo jaritaḥ # Aś.8.3.21; śś.12.23.3. See pipīlakāvaṭaḥ.
putras te daśamāsyaḥ # AVś.3.23.2d; AVP.3.14.2d; AG.1.13.6d (crit. notes); śG.1.19.6d; ApMB.1.12.9d; HG.1.25.1d.
punantv asmān duritād avadyān # AVP.6.3.3c.
punas te pṛśniṃ jaritar dadāmi # AVś.5.11.8b; AVP.8.1.8b.
pumān bāṇa (AVP. vāṇa) iveṣudhim # AVś.3.23.2b; AVP.3.14.2b; AG.1.13.6b (crit. notes); śG.1.19.6b; HG.1.25.1b; ApMB.1.12.9b.
purāgne duritebhyaḥ # RV.8.44.30a.
purā no bādhād duritāti pāraya # RV.9.70.9c.
puruṣaṃ duritād adhi # AVś.8.7.7d,19d.
purū reto dadhire sūryaśvitaḥ (AVś. -śritaḥ) # RV.10.94.5d; AVś.6.49.3d; KS.35.14d.
pūrṇān parisrutaḥ kumbhān # JB.2.331c; śB.11.5.5.13c. Cf. under ā tvā pariśritaḥ.
pūrvapadyam id āritha # AVP.3.16.6b.
pūrvīr indraḥ śaradas tartarīti # RV.6.47.17d.
pūṣā naḥ pātu duritād ṛtāvṛdhaḥ # RV.6.75.10c; AVP.15.10.10c; VS.29.47c; TS.4.6.6.4c; MS.3.16.3c: 186.16; KSA.6.1c.
pūṣā bhagaṃ savitā me (TB. no) dadātu # śB.11.4.3.7b; TB.2.5.3.3b; śś.3.7.4b; Kś.5.12.21b; PG.1.13 (crit. notes; see Speijer, Jātakarma, p. 18). See bhagaṃ pūṣā.
pṛthivī me śarīre śritā, śarīraṃ hṛdaye, hṛdayaṃ mayi, aham amṛte, amṛtaṃ brahmaṇi # TB.3.10.8.7.
pṛthivy asy apsu śritā, agneḥ pratiṣṭhā, tvayīdam antaḥ, viśvaṃ yakṣaṃ viśvaṃ bhūtaṃ viśvaṃ subhūtam, viśvasya bhartrī viśvasya janayitrī # TB.3.11.1.6.
pṛthivyāḥ kakubhiḥ śritam # TB.3.3.2.1b; Apś.2.5.1b; Mś.1.2.5.8b.
pṛthivyāṃ śakrā ye śritāḥ # AVś.11.6.12c; AVP.15.14.7c.
pṛthivyām aparā śritā # TA.1.5.1b.
pṛthivyā mā pāhi viśvasmai prāṇāyāpānāya vyānāyodānāya pratiṣṭhāyai caritrāya # MS.2.8.14: 117.18.
pṛthivyā hṛdayaṃ śritam # SMB.1.5.13b.
pṛśnir adād dharito no vasūni # RV.7.103.10b.
pṛśnir eko harita eka eṣām # RV.7.103.6b.
pṛśniḥ saṃpṛṅkte haritena vācam # RV.7.103.4d.
pṛṣātakāni (Aś.śś. add jaritaḥ) # AVś.20.134.2; Aś.8.3.21; śś.12.23.3; Vait.32.25.
prajāpatir asi sarvataḥ śritaḥ # TB.3.7.6.11; Apś.4.8.2.
prajāpater yat sahajaṃ purastāt # PG.2.2.10b (crit. notes; see Speijer, Jātakarma, p. 22).
praṇenīr ugro jaritāram ūtī # RV.6.23.3b.
pra ṇo muñcataṃ duritād avadyāt # AVP.1.109.2c. Cf. under mumuktam asmān.
prati gṛbhṇāti viśritā varīmabhiḥ # RV.1.55.2b.
pratnaṃ pratnavat paritaṃsayadhyai # RV.6.22.7b; AVś.20.36.7b.
prapathintamaṃ paritaṃsayadhyai # RV.1.173.7b.
pra bodhaya jaritar jāram indram # RV.10.42.2b; AVś.20.89.2b.
pramuñcamānau duritāni viśvā # TB.3.1.1.4c.
pra yat stotā jaritā tūrṇyarthaḥ # RV.3.52.5c.
pra yaḥ sasrāṇaḥ śiśrīta yonau # RV.1.149.2c.
prāṇo 'gniḥ paramātmā vai pañcavāyuḥ samāśritaḥ, sa prītaḥ prīṇātu viśvaṃ viśvabhuk # MU.6.9. See prāṇo agniḥ.
prātā ratnaṃ prātaritvā dadhāti # RV.1.125.1a. Cf. BṛhD.3.140,150,153 (A).
prāvīn nu vīro jaritāram ūtī # RV.7.20.2b.
prāsmad eno duritaṃ supratīkāḥ # AVś.10.5.24b. Cf. next.
barhiṣmatī rātir viśritā gīḥ # RV.1.117.1c.
balim ichanto vitudasya (AG. vi tu tasya) preṣyāḥ (MahānU.AG. preṣṭhāḥ) # Tā.10.67.2b; MahānU.20.1b; AG.1.2.5b (crit. notes).
baliṃ bhakṣantu vāyasaḥ (!) # AG.1.2.8d (crit. notes).
bahiṣ kulāyād amṛtaś caritvā # śB.14.7.1.13b; BṛhU.4.3.13b.
bibharti yā prāṇabhṛto atandritā # PG.2.17.9b.
bṛhaspatiṣ ṭvā (TS.Apś. -tis tvā) sādayatu pṛthivyāḥ pṛṣṭhe jyotiṣmatīṃ viśvasmai prāṇāyāpānāya (MS. adds vyānāyodānāya pratiṣṭhāyai caritrāya) # TS.4.4.6.1; MS.2.7.16: 99.7. Ps: bṛhaspatis tvā sādayatu pṛthivyāḥ pṛṣṭhe jyotiṣmatīm Apś.16.24.7; bṛhaspatiṣ ṭvā sādayatu pṛthivyāḥ pṛṣṭhe MS.4.9.15: 134.12; bṛhaspatiṣ ṭvā sādayatu Mś.6.1.7.19. See prajāpatiṣ ṭvā sādayatu pṛṣṭhe.
bṛhaspate pratarītāsy āyuṣaḥ # RV.10.100.5b.
brahmaṇā vāṃ paritṛhya samantam # AVP.1.87.4c.
bhaga praṇetar bhaga satyarādhaḥ # RV.7.41.3a; AVś.3.16.3a; AVP.4.31.3a; VS.34.36a; TB.2.5.5.2a; 8.9.8a; ApMB.1.14.3a (ApG.3.9.4). P: bhaga praṇetar PG.1.13 (crit. notes; see Speijer, Jātakarma, p. 19).
bhadraṃ karṇebhiḥ śṛṇuyāma devāḥ # RV.1.89.8a; SV.2.1224a; VS.25.21a; MS.4.14.2a: 217.11; KS.35.1a; TA.1.1.1a; 21.3a; Aś.5.19.5; 8.14.18; Apś.14.16.1a; MG.1.1.19; NṛpU.1.1a; 2.4a; Nṛū.1a. P: bhadraṃ karṇebhiḥ ā.1, Introd.; TA.1.32.2; śG.3.8.6; 5.5.11; PG.2.6 (crit. notes; see Speijer, Jātakarma, p. 21). Cf. BṛhD.3.122.
bhadrā aśvā haritaḥ sūryasya # RV.1.115.3a; MS.4.10.2a: 147.3; TB.2.8.7.1a. P: bhadrā aśvāḥ MS.4.12.1: 177.13; 4.12.4: 190.11; 4.14.4: 220.8; Mś.5.1.9.5.
bhinad valaṃ vi puro (AVP. vi mṛdho) dardarīti # AVP.5.2.8c; TS.2.3.14.6c.
bhinad valasya paridhīṃr iva tritaḥ # RV.1.52.5d; MS.4.12.3d: 185.5.
bhuvat tritasya marjyaḥ # RV.9.34.4a.
bhūmir dhenur dharaṇī lokadhāriṇī (MahānU. dhenur dharitrī ca dharaṇī lokadhāriṇī) # TA.10.1.8a; MahānU.4.5cd.
bhūmiṣ ṭvā pātu haritena viśvabhṛt # AVś.5.28.5a; AVP.2.59.3a.
bhūmyāṃ piṇḍaṃ mayārpitam # AG.1.2.6d (crit. notes).
bhūmyās tavaṃ divi śritam # AVP.15.23.12d.
bhrūṇaghni pūṣan duritāni mṛkṣva (AVP. muṣṭāḥ) # AVś.6.112.3d; 113.2d; AVP.1.70.4d.
manuṣyalokāya prakaritāram # VS.30.12; TB.3.4.1.8.
mandrāḥ sujihvāḥ svaritāra āsabhiḥ # RV.1.166.11c.
mamāntar hṛdaye śritaḥ # TA.1.31.5b.
mayā dattena bhūtale # AG.1.2.8d (crit. notes).
mayi puṣṭiṃ puṣṭipatir (AVś.AVP. puṣṭaṃ puṣṭa-) dadhātu (AG. dadātu) # AVś.7.19.1d; 19.31.6b; AVP.10.5.6b; MS.2.13.23d: 169.5; KS.13.15d,16d; 40.1d; Tā.10.67.2d; MahānU.20.1d; Apś.14.28.4d; AG.1.2.5d (crit. notes); SMB.2.4.7c. Cf. next.
mayobhuvo jaritā johavīti # RV.5.43.1d.
marutvantā jaritur gachatho havam # RV.8.35.13b--15b.
marto vurīta (TS. vṛṇīta; KS. vareta) sakhyam # RV.5.50.1b; VS.4.8b; 11.67b; 22.21b; TS.1.2.2.1b; 4.1.9.1b; 6.1.2.5; MS.1.2.2b: 10.15; 2.7.7b: 82.10; 3.6.5: 65.9; KS.2.2b; 16.7b; śB.3.1.4.18b; 6.6.1.21b.
jasvane vṛṣabha no rarīthāḥ # RV.6.44.11a.
te bhayaṃ jaritāraṃ yaviṣṭha # RV.1.189.4c.
te mano viṣvadryag (TS. -driyag) vi cārīt # RV.7.25.1d; TS.1.7.13.2d; MS.4.12.3d: 186.3; KS.8.16d.
tvāyato jarituḥ kāmam ūnayīḥ # RV.1.53.3d; AVś.20.21.3d.
naḥ soma hvarito vihvaras tvam # Mś.2.5.4.24a. Cf. mā no gharma.
no gharma (KA. gharmo) vyathito vivyadhīt (TA.KA. vivyatho naḥ) # MS.4.9.12a: 133.1; TA.4.20.2a; KA.1.198.11a. P: mā no gharma (KA. gharmo) vyathitaḥ KA.3.235A; Apś.15.17.10. See next, and cf. mā naḥ soma hvarito.
no gharma hvaritaḥ # Mś.4.4.39. ūha of mā naḥ soma hvarito.
pṛṇanto duritam ena āran # RV.1.125.7a.
mā titīrṣan tārīt # MS.1.5.1c: 67.8.
māyaṃ grāmo duritam ena ārat # AVP.1.27.3c.
māyā vāṃ mitrāvaruṇā divi śritā # RV.5.63.4a.
māsāḥ sthartuṣu śritāḥ, ardhamāsānāṃ pratiṣṭhāḥ, yuṣmāsv idam antaḥ, viśvaṃ yakṣaṃ viśvaṃ bhūtaṃ viśvaṃ subhūtam, viśvasya bhartāro viśvasya janayitāraḥ # TB.3.11.1.16.
hiṃsīr deva preritaḥ (Apś. preṣitaḥ) # Aś.3.14.13a; Apś.9.16.11a.
mitraḥ krītaḥ # VS.8.55; TS.4.4.9.1.
mitrasya cakṣur dharuṇaṃ (VārG. dharaṇaṃ) balīyaḥ (HG. dharīyaḥ) # śG.2.1.30a; PG.2.2.10a (crit. notes; see Speijer, Jātakarma, p. 22); HG.1.4.6a; ApMB.2.2.11a (ApG.4.10.11); VārG.5.9a.
mimāti māyuṃ dhvasanāv adhi śritā # RV.1.164.29b; AVś.9.10.7b; JB.2.265b; N.2.9b.
mukṣīya duritād aham # AVP.5.14.5d.
mumuktam asmān duritād avadyāt # AVś.5.6.8a. See prec. but one, and cf. pra ṇo muñcataṃ.
mṛjmahe duritaṃ vayam # AVś.14.2.66d.
mṛḍā jaritre rudra stavānaḥ # RV.2.33.11c; AVś.18.1.40c; TS.4.5.10.4c; NṛpU.2.4c.
ya āritaḥ karmaṇi-karmaṇi sthiraḥ # RV.1.101.4b; N.5.15.
yaḥ kaś ca kakudi śritaḥ # AVś.7.76.3d.
yajñaṃ giro jarituḥ suṣṭutiṃ ca # RV.5.43.10c.
yajñopavītam asi yajñasya tvopavītenopa nahyāmi # śG.2.2.3; PG.2.2.10 (crit. notes; see Speijer, Jātakarma, p. 22). See upavītam asi.
yajñopavītaṃ paramaṃ pavitram # PG.2.2.10a (crit. notes: see Speijer, Jātakarma, p. 22).
yajñopavītaṃ balam astu tejaḥ # PG.2.2.10d (crit. notes; see Speijer, Jātakarma, p. 22).
yajño 'si sarvataḥ śritaḥ # TB.3.7.6.11; Apś.4.8.2.
yat kiṃ ca duritaṃ mayi # RV.1.23.22b; 10.9.8b; VSK.6.5.5b; TA.10.24.1e,25.1e; MahānU.14.3e,4e. See under avadyaṃ ca.
yat kiṃ cid (Mś. var. lect. ca) duritaṃ mayi # Tā.10.64d; MahānU.19.1d; Mś.1.8.4.40b. See under avadyaṃ ca.
yatra vaḥ preṅkhā haritā arjunā uta # AVś.4.37.4c. See yatra vo 'kṣā.
yatra vo 'kṣā haritā arjunāḥ # AVP.12.7.8a. See yatra vaḥ preṅkhā.
yat samudram anu śritam # AVś.13.2.14a.
yat subhṛtaṃ yat svāhā # VSK.7.6.4d; 7.5d. See yāḥ suprītāḥ.
yat sūryasya haritaḥ patantīḥ # RV.5.29.5c.
yathā krītvā dhanam āharāṇi # AVś.3.15.2d.
yathā cit pūrve jaritāra āsuḥ # RV.6.19.4c.
yathā tarema duritāni viśvā # TB.3.1.1.11d.
yathā trite chanda indra jujoṣasi # RV.8.52 (Vāl.4).1c.
yathā pūrvebhyo jaritṛbhya indra # RV.1.175.6a; 176.6a.
yatheyaṃ strī pautram aghaṃ na rodāt # AG.1.13.6d (crit. notes); SMB.1.1.10d; PG.1.5.11d; ApMB.1.4.7d; HG.1.19.7d; JG.1.20d. See yathedaṃ strī-.
yad ātmakṛtam āritha # AVP.2.24.3b; 5.18.6d.
yad āpo naktaṃ duritaṃ carāma # TB.3.7.12.6a. P: yad āpaḥ TA.2.3.1.
yad indro anayad ritaḥ # RV.6.57.4a; SV.1.148a; KS.23.11a. P: yad indro anayat Svidh.2.6.1.
yad īṃ sūryaṃ na harito vahanti # RV.10.31.8d.
yad īm aha trito divi # RV.5.9.5c.
yaded ayukta haritaḥ sadhasthāt # RV.1.115.4c; AVś.20.123.1c; VS.33.37c; MS.4.10.2c: 147.2; TB.2.8.7.2c; N.4.11c.
yad bhūmer hṛdayaṃ divi candramasi śritam # ApMB.2.13.3ab (ApG.6.15.5). See veda te bhūmi.
yad vā gha trita āptye # RV.8.12.16b; AVś.20.111.1b; SV.1.384b.
yad vā dudroha duritaṃ purāṇam # AVP.1.33.5b.
yad vā duścaritaṃ mama # TA.10.23.1b; BDh.2.5.8.10b; MahānU.14.2b; PrāṇāgU.1b.
yad vrateṣu duritaṃ nijagmima # Kauś.42.17c.
yaṃ te vahanti harito vahiṣṭhāḥ # AVś.13.2.6c,7c.
yann adhvānam apa vṛṅkte caritraiḥ # RV.10.117.7b.
yan mātalī rathakrītam # AVś.11.6.23a; Kauś.58.25. Cf. Kauś.55.1, note.
yamaṃ viṣṇuṃ ca dakṣiṇe # AG.1.2.2d (crit. notes).
yamena dattaṃ trita enam āyunak # RV.1.163.2a; VS.29.13a; TS.4.6.7.1a; KS.40.6a.
yamo 'si yamadūto 'si # AG.1.2.8a (crit. notes).
yayāti viśvā duritā tarema # RV.8.42.3c; TS.1.2.2.2c; MS.1.2.2c: 11.2; KS.2.3c; AB.1.13.29.
yayā babhūtha jaritṛbhya ūtī # RV.1.178.1b.
yaḥ śūrasātā paritakmye dhane # RV.1.31.6c.
yas te trita duḥsvapnyasya (Zehnder's edition duṣvapnyasya) bhāgaḥ # AVP.2.37.2c.
yas te havaṃ vivadat (AVP. paritiṣṭhāt) # AVś.3.3.6a; AVP.2.74.6a.
yas tvāyantaṃ vasunā prātaritvaḥ # RV.1.125.2c; N.5.19c.
yasmād yoner udārithā (KS. -tha) yaje (MS.KS. -jā) tam # RV.2.9.3c; VS.17.75c; TS.4.6.5.4c; MS.2.10.6c: 139.4; KS.18.4c; śB.9.2.3.39.
yasmiṃ lokā adhi śritāḥ # VS.20.32b.
yasmiṃ jyeṣṭham adhi śritam # AVś.10.8.19d.
yasminn idaṃ viśvaṃ bhuvanam adhi śritam # TS.4.6.2.3d. See yasmin viśvāni bhu-.
yasmin vāyur adhi śritaḥ # AVP.9.25.2b.
yasmin ṣaḍ urvīḥ pañca diśo adhi śritāḥ # AVś.13.3.6a.
yasya trito vy ojasā # RV.1.187.1c; AVP.6.16.1c; VS.34.7c; KS.40.8c; N.9.25c.
yasya mā harito rathe # RV.10.33.5a.
yasya vrate śaphavaj jarbhurīti # RV.5.83.5b.
yasyās te harito garbhaḥ # TS.3.3.10.1a; 4.1.1; Apś.9.19.2. See garbho yas.
yāḥ kāś ca pṛthivīṃ śritāḥ # TA.8.2.1b; TU.2.2.1b.
duritā paribādhamānā # HG.1.4.4a. See iyaṃ duruktāt.
dohate prati varaṃ jaritre # RV.10.133.7b.
yāmyā nairṛtikāś ca ye # AG.1.2.6b (crit. notes).
yāḥ suprītāḥ suhutā yat svāhā # VS.7.15d; śB.4.2.1.33. See yat subhṛtaṃ.
yukṣvā sute harito rohitaś ca # RV.7.42.2b.
yujāna indo haritaḥ suparṇyaḥ # RV.9.86.37b; SV.2.307b; JB.3.84.
yujāno haritā rathe # RV.6.47.19a; śś.18.11.2.
ye antarikṣa uta ye divi śritāḥ # MG.2.7.4b. See ye antarikṣe ye ca.
ye antarikṣe ye ca divi śritāsaḥ # Kauś.135.9d. See ye antarikṣa uta.
Dictionary of Sanskrit Search
"rit" has 679 results
rit(1)characterized by the mute consonant र् signifying the acute accent for the penultimate vowel;confer, compare उपोत्तमं रिति P. VI. I. 217; ( 2 ) the same as रिफित or रेफि, a visarga which is changeable into र् when euphonically combined; confer, compare विसर्जनीयो रिफितः V.Pr.I.160; confer, compare also भाव्युपधं च रिद्विसर्जनीयान्तानि रेफेण ; V.Pr. VII.9. The terms रिफित, रेफि and रित् are given in the Padapatha to a पद or word which ends in a Visarga which has originated from र् in the Samhitapatha; e. g. the Visarga in कः, प्रात: et cetera, and others; confer, compare R.Pr.I.30 to 32.
abhisvaritaprovided with a svarita or circumflex accent.
aāmantrita(1)a word in the vocative singular. confer, compare सामन्त्रितम् P.II.3.48: a tech. term in Pāṇini's grammar, the peculiar features of which are पराङ्गवद्भाव (confer, compare P.II.1.2), अविद्यमानवद्भाव (confer, compare P.VIII.1.72), द्वित्व (confer, compare P.VIII. 1.8), अद्युदात्तत्व (confer, compare P.VI.1.198), सर्वानुदात्तत्व(confer, compare P.VIII.1.19), splitting of ए into अा and इ, exempli gratia, for example अग्रे into अग्ना ३ इ (confer, compare P.VIII.2.107 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 3); (2) Vocative case, confer, compare ओकार अामन्त्रितजः प्रगृह्यः Ṛk. Prāt. I.28; Vāj. Pr. III.139: II.17: II.24 VI.1.
aāmantritakārakaa word connected with the verbal activity possessed by अामन्त्रित exempli gratia, for example कुण्डेन in कुण्डेनाटन्; confer, compare अामन्त्रिते या धातुवाच्या क्रिया तस्याः कारकम् Kaiyaṭa on P.II.1.2.
irita root ending with mute indicatary ending इर्. See इर्.
uccaritapronounced or uttered; the phrase उच्चरितप्रध्वंसिनः is used in connection with the mute indicatory letters termed इत् in Pāṇini's grammar, as these letters are not actually found in use in the language and are therefore supposed to vanish immediately after their purpose has been servedition The phrase 'उच्चरितप्रध्वंसिनोSनुबन्धा:' has been given as a Paribhāṣā by Vyāḍiparibhāṣāsūcana.(Pari.11), in the Cāndra Vyākaraṇa ( Par. 14), in the Kātantra Vyākaraṇa (Pari.54) and also in the Kalāpa Vyākaraṇa ( Par. 71). Patañjali has used the expression उच्चरितप्रध्वंसिनः in connection with ordinary letters of a word, which have existence for a moment and which also vanish immediately after they have been uttered; confer, compare उच्चरितप्रध्वंसिनः खल्वपि वर्णा: ...न वर्णो वर्णस्य सहायः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.4. 109.
uccaritapradhvaṃsinvanishing immediately after utterance. See उच्चरित.
upācarita(1)sibilation substitution of a sibilant letter for a visarga: confer, compare प्लुतोपाचरिते च R.Pr. XI.19; (2) name of the saṁdhi in which a visarga is changed into a sibilant letter; confer, compare सर्वत्रैवोपाचरितः स संधिः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.)IV.14 which corresponds to Pāṇini VIII.3.18 and 19.
rita(1)ancient term for the causal Vikaraṇa, (णिच् in Pāṇini's grammar and इन् in Kātantra); (2) causal or causative as applied to roots ending in णिच् or words derived from such roots called also 'ṇyanta' by the followers of Pāṇini's grammar; confer, compare इन् कारितं धात्वर्थे Kātantra vyākaraṇa Sūtra.III.2.9, explained as धात्वर्थक्रियानाम्न इन् परो भवति धात्वर्थे स च कारितसंज्ञक;।
caritakriyahaving kriya or verbactivity hidden in it. The term is used by Bhartrhari in connection with a solitary noun-word or a substantive having the force of a sentence, and hence which can be termed a sentence on account of the verbal activity dormant in it. exempli gratia, for example पिण्डीम्; confer, compare वाक्यं तदपि मन्यन्ते यत्पदं वरितक्रियम् Vakyapad.II. 326, and चरिता गर्भीकृता आख्यातक्रिया यस्य तद्गर्भीकृतक्रियापदं नामपदं वाक्यं प्रयुञ्जते ! Com. on Vakyapadya II.326.
caritārthawhich has got already a scope of application; the term is used by commentators in connection with a rule or a word forming a part of a rule which applies in the case of some instances and hence which cannot be said to be ब्यर्थ (superfluous) or without any utility and as a result cannot be said to be capable of allowing some conclusion to be drawn from it according to the dictum ब्यर्थं सज्ज्ञापयति confer, compare अपवादो यद्यन्यत्र चरितार्थस्तर्ह्यन्तरङ्गेण बाध्यते Par. Sek. Pari. 65.
ritārthyafulfilment of the object or the Purpose. The word is used in connection with a rule of grammar. See चरितार्थ.
sahacaritagoing together: occurring together; e. g. विपराभ्यां जेः ( where परा is taken as the preposition परा and not the pronoun परा which is the feminine. base of पर on account of the paribhasa सहचरितासहचरितयोः सहृचरितस्यैव ग्रहणम्): confer, compare Pari.Sek.Pari.103.
svaritathe circumflex accent, the accent between the acute (.उदात्त) and the grave ( अनुदात्त); for details see स्वर.
svaritakaraṇamarking or characterizing by.a svarita accent, as is supposed to have been done by Panini when he wrote down his sutras of grammar as also the Dhatupatha, the Ganapatha and other subsidiary appendixes. Although the rules of the Astadhyayi are not recited at present with the proper accents possessed by the various vowels as given by the Sutrakara, still, by convention and traditional explanation, certain words are to be believed as possessed of certain accents. In the Dhatupatha, by oral tradition the accents of the several roots are known by the phrases अथ स्वरितेतः, अथाद्युदाताः, अथान्तेादात्ताः, अथानुदात्तेत: put therein at different places. In the sutras, a major purpose is served by the circumflex accent with which such words, as are to continue to the next or next few or next many rules, have been markedition As the oral tradition, according to which the Sutras are recited at present, has preserevd no accents, it is only the authoritative word, described as 'pratijna' of the ancient grammarians, which now is available for knowing the svarita. The same holds good in the case of nasalization ( अानुनासिक्य ) which is used as a factor for determining the indicatory nature of vowels as stated by the rule उपदेशेजनुनासिक इत्; confer, compare प्रतिज्ञानुनासिक्याः पाणिनीयाः S. K. on P. I.3.2.
svaritapratijñāthe conventional dictum that a particular rule or part of a rule, is marked with the accent स्वरित which enables the grammarians to decide that that rule or that part of a rule is to occur in each of the subsequent Sutras, the limit of continuation being ascertained from convention. It is possible that Panini in his original recital of the Astadhyayi recited the words in the rules with the necessary accents; probably he recited every word, which was not to proceed further, with one acute or with one circumflex vowel, while, the words which were to proceed to the next rule or rules, were marked with an actual circumflex accent ( स्वरित ), or with a neutralization of the acute and the grave accents (स्वरितत्व), that is, probably without accents or by एकश्रुति or by प्रचय; cf स्वरितेनाधिकार: P. I.3.II and the Mahabhasya thereon.
svaritetmarked with a mute circumflex vowel; the term is used in connection with roots in the Dhatupatha which are said to have been so marked for the purpose of indicating that they are to take personal endings of both the padas; confer, compare स्वरितञित: कर्त्रभिप्राये क्रियाफले P. I.3.72.
haritādia class of words headed by the word इरित to which the taddhita affix फक् ( अायन ) is added in the sense of a descendant after the affix अ ( अञ् ) has already been added to them by P. IV. 1. 104, the word so formed possessing the sense of the great grandchild (युवापत्य) of the individuals denoted by इरित and others; e. g. हारितायनः; confer, compare इह् तु गोत्राधिकारेपि सामर्थ्याद् यूनि प्रत्ययोभिघीयते Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P, IV.1.100
ritāname given to a kind of Svarabhakti when the consonant ल् is followed by श् and the conjunct consonant ल्श् is read as लूलृश् or ल् इ श् ; confer, compare बनस्पते शतवल्शा विरोह Tait. Samh. 1.
a(1)the first letter of the alphabet in Sanskrit and its derived languages, representing the sound a (अ): (2) the vowel a (अ) representing in grammatical treatises, except when Prescribed as an affix or an augment or a substitute,all its eighteen varieties caused by accentuation or nasalisation or lengthening: (3) personal ending a (अ) of the perfeminine. second.pluraland first and third person.singular.; (4) kṛt affix c (अ) prescribed especially after the denominative and secondary roots in the sense of the verbal activity e. g. बुभुक्षा, चिन्ता, ईक्षा, चर्चा et cetera, and othersconfer, compare अ प्रत्ययात् et cetera, and others (P.III 3.102-106); (5) sign of the aorist mentioned as añ (अङ्) or cañ (चङ्) by Pāṇini in P. III i.48 to 59 exempli gratia, for example अगमत्, अचीकरत्; (6) conjugational sign mentioned as śap (शप्) or śa (श) by Pāṇini in P. III.1.68, 77. exempli gratia, for example भवति, तुदति et cetera, and others; (7) augment am (अम्) as prescribed by P. VI.1.58; exempli gratia, for example द्रष्टा, द्रक्ष्यति; (8) augment aṭ (अट्) prefixed to a root in the imperfeminine. and aorist tenses and in the conditional mood e. g. अभवत्, अभूत्, अभविष्यत् confer, compare P. VI.4.71; (8) kṛt affix a (अ) prescribed as अङ्, अच्, अञ्, अण्, अन्, अप्, क, ख, घ, ञ, ड् , ण, et cetera, and others in the third Adhyāya of Pāṇini's Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī.; (9) taddhita affix. affix a (अ) mentioned by Pāṇini as अच्, अञ् अण्, अ et cetera, and others in the fourth and the fifth chapters of the Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. of Pāṇini; (10) the samāsānta affix a (अ), as also stated in the form of the samāsānta affixes (डच् , अच्, टच्, ष्, अष् and अञ्) by Pāṇini in V.4.73 to 121;(11) substitute a (अश्) accented grave for इदम before case-affixes beginning with the inst. instrumental case. case: (12) remnant (अ) of the negative particle नञ् after the elision of the consonant n (न्) by नलोपो नञः P. vi.3.73.
aṃ(ं)nasal utterance called अनुस्वार and written as a dot a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. the vowel preceding it. confer, compare स्वरमनु संलीनं शब्द्यते इति; it is pronounced after a vowel as immersed in it. The anusvāra is considered (l) as only a nasalization of the preceding vowel being in a way completely amalgamated with it. confer, compare Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.V. 11,31; XV. 1; XXII. 14 ; (2) as a nasal addition to the preceding vowel, many times prescribed in grammar as nuṭ (नुट् ) or num (नुम् ) which is changed into anusvāra in which case it is looked upon as a sort of a vowel, while, it is looked upon as a consonant when it is changed into a cognate of the following consonant (परसवर्ण) or retained as n (न्). confer, compare P. VIII.4.58; (3) as a kind cf consonant of the type of nasalized half g(ग्) as described in some treatises of the Yajurveda Prātiśākhya: cf also Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.)1.22 V.Pr.14.148-9. The vowel element of the anusvāra became more prevalent later on in Pali, Prkrit, Apabhraṁśa and in the spoken modern languages while the consonantal element became more predominant in classical Sanskrit.
aḥ( : )visarga called visarjanīya in ancient works and shown in writing by two dots, one below the other, exactly of the same size, like the pair of breasts of a maiden as jocularly larly expressed by Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti.. confer, compare अः ( : ) इति विसर्जनीयः । अकार इह उच्चारणार्थः । कुमारीस्तनयुगाकृतिर्वर्णो विसजर्नीयसंज्ञो भवति ( दुर्गसिंह on कातन्त्र I.1.16). विसर्ग is always a dependent letter included among the Ayogavāha letters and it is looked upon as a vowel when it forms a part of the preceding vowel; while it is looked upon as a consonant when it is changed into the Jihvāmūlīya or the Upadhmānīya letter.
a,k(ೱ),(ೱ)जिह्वामूलीय, represented by a sign like the वज्र in writing, as stated by Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti. who remarks वज्राकृतिर्वर्णो जिह्वामूलीयसंज्ञो भवति. the Jihvāmūlīya is only a voiceless breath following the utterance of a vowel and preceding the utterance of the guttural letter क् or ख् . It is looked upon as a letter (वर्ण), but dependent upon the following consonant and hence looked upon as a consonant. e. g. विष्णु ೱ करोति.
akālaka(1)not limited by any time-factors for its study such as certain periods of the day or the year. (2) not characterized by any technical terms expressive of time such as adyatanī, parokṣā occurring in the ancient Prātiśākhya and grammar works. The term akalika is used by the writers of the Kāśikāvṛtti in connection with the grammar of Pāṇini. confer, compare “पाणिन्युपज्ञमकालकं व्याकरणम्” Kās. on P. II.4.21 explained by the writer of the Padamañjarī, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Haradatta. as पूर्वाणि व्याकरणानि अद्यतनादिकालपरिभाषायुक्तानि तद्रहितम् ।
akṣaraa letter of the alphabet, such as a (अ) or i (इ) or h (ह) or y (य्) or the like. The word was originally applied in the Prātiśākhya works to vowels (long, short as also protracted), to consonants and the ayogavāha letters which were tied down to them as their appendages. Hence अक्षर came later on to mean a syllable i. e. a vowel with a consonant or consonants preceding or following it, or without any consonant at all. confer, compare ओजा ह्रस्वाः सप्तमान्ताः स्वराणामन्ये दीर्घा उभये अक्षराणि R Pr. I 17-19 confer, compareएकाक्षरा, द्व्यक्षरा et cetera, and others The term akṣara was also applied to any letter (वर्ण), be it a vowel or a consonant, cf, the terms एकाक्षर, सन्ध्यक्षर, समानाक्षर used by Patañjali as also by the earlier writers. For the etymology of the term see Mahābhāṣya अक्षरं न क्षरं विद्यात्, अश्नोतेर्वा सरोक्षरम् । वर्णे वाहुः पूर्वसूत्रे । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Āhnika 2 end.
agniveśyaan ancient writer of Vedic grammar mentioned in the Taittirīya prātiśākhya. confer, compare कपवर्गपरश्च (विसर्ग:) अग्निवेश्यवाल्मीक्योः ( मतेन ऊष्माणं न आपद्यते ) T.Pr. IX. 4.
agniveśyāyanawriter of Vedic grammar, mentioned in the Taittirīya prātiśākhya. confer, compare नाग्निवेश्यायनस्य ( मते उदात्तपरः स्वरितपरो वा अनुदात्तः स्वरितं नापद्यते इति न) Tait. Pr. XIV.32.
agravāla(Vasudeva-Śarana Agravāla), a modern scholar of Sanskrit grammar, the author of "India as known to Pāṇini".
atantraimplying no specific purpose: not intended to teach anything, अविवक्षित; exempli gratia, for example ह्रस्वग्रहणमतन्त्रम् Kāś and Si. Kau. on तस्यादित उदात्तमर्धह्रस्वम् P.1.2.32: confer, compare also अतन्त्रं तरनिर्देशः ( the use of तरप् does not necessarily convey the sense of the comparative degree in Pāṇini's rules) Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I.2.33. This statement has been given as a distinct Paribhāṣa by Vyāḍiparibhāṣāsūcana.and Sākaṭāyana. The author of the Mahābhāṣya appears to have quoted it from the writings of Vyāḍiparibhāṣāsūcana.and the earlier grammarians See also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on अल्पाच्तरम् P. II.2.34.
atideśaextended application; transfer or conveyance or application of the character or qualities or attributes of one thing to another. Atideśa in Sanskrit grammar is a very common feature prescribed by Pāṇini generally by affixing the taddhita affix. affix मत् or वत् to the word whose attributes are conveyed to another. e. g. लोटो लङ्वत् P. III. 4.85. In some cases the atideśa is noticed even without the affix मत् or वत्; exempli gratia, for exampleगाङ्कुटादिभ्योऽञ्णिन् ङित् P. 1.2.1 . Atideśa is generally seen in all grammatical terms which end with 'vadbhāva' e. g. स्थानिवद्भाव (P.I.1.56-59), सन्वद्भाव (P.VII.4.93), अन्तादिवद्भाव (P. VI.1.85), अभूततद्भाव (P.IV.60) and others. Out of these atideśas, the स्थानिवद्भाव is the most important one, by virtue of which sometimes there is a full representation id est, that is substitution of the original form called sthānin in the place of the secondary form called ādeśa. This full representation is called रूपातिदेश as different from the usual one which is called कार्यातिदेश, confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). VIII.1.90 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 1 and VIII.1.95. Vart.3. Regarding the use of अतिदेश there is laid down a general dictum सामान्यातिदेशे विशेषानतिदेशः when an operation depending on the general properties of a thing could be taken by extended application, an operation depending on special properties should not be taken by virtue of the same : e. g. भूतवत् in P. III.3.132 means as in the case of the general past tense and not in the case of any special past tense like the imperfect ( अनद्यतन ) , or the perfect ( परोक्ष ). See Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 101, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. III. 3. 132. There is also a general dictum अतिदेशिकमनित्यम्whatever is transferred by an extended application, need not, be necessarily taken. See Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. 93.6 as also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I.1.123 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini).4, I.2.1 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 3, II.3.69 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini).2 et cetera, and others, Kaiyaṭa on II. 1.2 and VI.4.22 and Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa. on P. I.1.56 and P. I.2.58 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 8. The dictum अातिदेशिकमनित्यम् is given as a Paribhāṣā by Nāgeśa confer, compare Pari. Śek. 93. 6.
atharvaprātiśākhyathe Prātiśākhya work of the Atharva veda believed to have been written by Śaunaka. It consists of four Adhyāyās and is also called शौनकीया चतुरध्यायिका.
adhikāragoverning rule consisting of a word (exempli gratia, for example प्रत्ययः, धातोः, समासान्ताः et cetera, and others) or words (exempli gratia, for example ङ्याप्प्रातिपदिकात्, सर्वस्य द्वे et cetera, and others) which follows or is taken as understood in every following rule upto a particular limit. The meaning of the word अधिकार is discussed at length by Patañjali in his Mahābhāṣya on II.1.1, where he has given the difference between अधिकार and परिभाषा; confer, compare अधिकार: प्रतियोगं तस्यानिर्देशार्थ इति योगे योगे उपतिष्ठते। परिभाषा पुनरेकदेशस्था सती सर्वं शास्त्रमभिज्वलयति प्रदीपवत् । See also Mahābhāṣya on I.3.11, I. 4.49 and IV. I.83. The word or wording which is to repeat in.the subsequent rules is believed to be shown by Pāṇini by characterizing it with a peculiarity of utterance known as स्वरितोच्चार or स्वरितत्वेन उच्चारणम्. The word which is repeated in the following Sūtras is stated to be अधिकृत. The Śabda Kaustubha defines adhikāra as एकंत्रोपात्तस्यान्यत्र व्यापार: अधिकारः Śab. Kaus. on P.1.2.65. Sometimes the whole rule is repeated e. g. प्रत्यय: P.III.1.1, अङ्गस्य P.VI.4.1 समासान्ताः P.V.4.68 while on some occasions a part only of it is seen repeatedition The repetition goes on upto a particular limit which is stated as in असिद्धवदत्राभात् P.VI.4.22, प्राग्रीश्वरान्निपाताः P.I.4.56. Many times the limit is not stated by the author of the Sūtras but it is understood by virtue of a counteracting word occurring later on. On still other occasions, the limit is defined by the ancient traditional interpreters by means of a sort of convention which is called स्वरितत्वप्रतिज्ञा. This अधिकार or governance has its influence of three kinds: ( 1 ) by being valid or present in all the rules which come under its sphere of influence, e. g. स्त्रियाम् or अङ्गस्य; (2) by showing additional properties e. g. the word अपादान being applied to cases where there is no actual separation as in सांकाश्यकेभ्यः पाटलिपुत्रका अभिरूपतराः: (3) by showing additional force such as setting aside even subsequent rules if opposingular. These three types of the influence which a word marked with स्वरित and hence termed अधिकार possesses are called respectively अधिकारगति, अधिक क्रार्य and अधिक कार. For details see M.Bh. on I.3.11. This अधिकार or governing rule exerts its influence in three ways: (1) generally by proceeding ahead in subsequent rules like the stream of a river, (2)sometimes by jumps like a frog omitting a rule or more, and (3)rarely by proceeding backward with a lion's glance; confer, compare सिंहावलोकितं चैव मण्डूकप्लुतमेव च ।; गड्गाप्रवाहवच्चापि अधिकारास्त्रिधा मताः ॥
anavakāśatvaabsence of any opportunity of taking effect, scopelessness considered in the case of a particular rule, as a criterion for setting aside that general rule which deprives it of that opportunity confer, compare अनवकाशत्वं निरवकाशत्वं वा बाधकत्वे बीजम्. This अनवकाशत्व is slightly different from अपवादत्व or particular mention which is defined usually by the words सामान्यविधिरुत्सर्गः । विशेषविधिरपवादः ।
anahvatech. term used by the writers; of the Prātiśākhya works for frequentative formations such as रीरिष:, चाक्लृपत् et cetera, and others; cf Atharvaveda Prātiśākhya. 4.86.
aniṭkārikā(1)name given to Stanzas giving a complete list of such roots as do not allow the augment इ ( इट् ) to be prefixed to an ārdhadhātuka affix placed after them. For such Kārikās see Sid. Kaum. on VII.1.5 as also Kāśikā on VII. 2.10; ( 2 ) a short treatise enumerating in 11 verses the roots which do not admit the augment इट् before the ārdhadhatuka affixes. The work is anonymous, and not printed so far, possibly composed by a Jain writer. The work possibly belongs to the Kātantra system and has got short glosses called व्याख्यान, अवचूरि, विवरण, टीका, टिप्पणी and the like which are all anonymous.
anirdaprathamaan underived word: an ancient term used by writers of the Prātiśākhyas to signify 'original' words which cannot be subjected to निर्वचन.
anudāttanon-udatta, absence of the acute accent;one of the Bāhyaprayatnas or external efforts to produce sound. This sense possibly refers to a stage or a time when only one accent, the acute or उदात्त was recognized just as in English and other languages at present, This udatta was given to only one vowel in a single word (simple or compound) and all the other vowels were uttered accentless.id est, that is अनुदात्त. Possibly with this idea.in view, the standard rule 'अनुदात्तं पदमेकवर्जम्'* was laid down by Panini. P.VI.1.158. As, however, the syllable, just preceding the accented ( उदात्त ) syllable, was uttered with a very low tone, it was called अनुदात्ततर, while if the syllables succeeding the accented syllable showed a gradual fall in case they happened to be consecutive and more than two, the syllable succeeding the उदात्त was given a mid-way tone, called स्वरितः confer, compare उदात्तादनुदात्तस्य स्वरितः. Thus, in the utterance of Vedic hymns the practice of three tones उदात्त, अनुदात्त and स्वरित came in vogue and accordingly they are found defined in all the Prātiśākhya and grammar works;confer, compare उच्चैरुदात्तः,नीचैरनुदात्तः समाहारः स्वरितः P.I.2.29-31, T.Pr.I.38-40, V.Pr.I.108-110, Anudātta is defined by the author of the Kāśikāvṛtti as यस्मिन्नुच्चार्यमाणे गात्राणामन्ववसर्गो नाम शिथिलीभवनं भवति, स्वरस्य मृदुता, कण्ठविवरस्य उरुता च स: अनुदात्तः confer, compare अन्ववसर्गो मार्दवमुरुता स्वस्येति नीचैःकराणि शब्दस्य Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.2.29,30. Cfeminine. also उदात्तश्चानुदात्तश्च स्वरितश्च त्रयः स्वराः । अायामविश्रम्भोक्षपैस्त उच्यन्तेSक्षराश्रयाः ॥ Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) III.1. The term anudātta is translated by the word 'grave' as opposed to acute' (udātta,) and 'circumflex' (svarita); (2) a term applied to such roots as have their vowel अनुदात्त or grave, the chief characteristic of such roots being the non-admission of the augment इ before an ārdhadhātuka affix placed after them. ( See अनिट्, ).
anunyāsaa commentary on न्यास (काशिकाविवरणपञ्जिका by जिनेन्द्रबुद्धि). The work is believed to have been written by इन्दुमित्र. It is not available at present except in the form of references to it which are numerous especially in Siradeva's Paribhāṣāvṛtti.
anubandhaa letter or letters added to a word before or after it, only to signify some specific purpose such as (a) the addition of an afix (e. g. क्त्रि, अथुच् अङ् et cetera, and others) or (b) the substitution of गुण, वृद्धि or संप्रसारण vowel or (c) sometimes their prevention. These anubandha letters are termed इत् (literally going or disappearing) by Pāṇini (confer, compare उपदेशेजनुनासिक इत् et cetera, and others I.3.2 to 9), and they do not form an essential part of the word to which they are attached, the word in usage being always found without the इत् letter. For technical purposes in grammar, however, such as आदित्व or अन्तत्व of affixes which are characterized by इत् letters, they are looked upon as essential factors, confer, compare अनेकान्ता अनुबन्धाः, एकान्ता:, etc, Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 4 to 8. Although पाणिनि has invariably used the term इत् for अनुबन्ध letters in his Sūtras, Patañjali and other reputed writers on Pāṇini's grammar right on upto Nāgeśa of the 18th century have used the term अनुबन्ध of ancient grammarians in their writings in the place of इत्. The term अनुबन्ध was chosen for mute significatory letters by ancient grammarians probably on account of the analogy of the अनुबन्ध्य पशु, tied down at sacrifices to the post and subsequently slaughteredition
anubhūtisvarūpācāryaa writer of the twelfth century who wrote a work on grammar called सरस्वती-प्रक्रिया or सारस्वतप्रक्रिया, He has also written धातुपाठ and आख्यातप्रक्रिया. The grammar is a short one and is studied in some parts of India.
antaḥstha,antaḥsthāfeminine., also writen as अन्तस्थ, अन्तस्था feminine., semivowel; confer, compare अथान्तस्थाः । यिति रेिन लेिति वितिः; Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.VIII.14-15: confer, compare चतस्रोन्तस्थाः explained by उव्वट as स्पर्शोषमणामन्तः मध्ये तिष्ठन्तीति अन्तस्थाः R.Pr.I.9, also पराश्चतन्नान्तस्थाः Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.I. 8. The ancient term appears to be अन्तस्थाः feminine. used in the Prātiśākhya works. The word अन्तःस्थानाम् occurs twice in the Mahābhāṣya from which it cannot be said whether the word there is अन्तःस्थ m. or अन्तःस्था feminine. The term अन्तस्थ or अन्तस्था is explained by the commentators on Kātantra as स्वस्य स्वस्य स्थानस्य अन्ते तिष्ठन्तीति ।
apakarṣa(1)deterioration of the place or instrument of the production of sound resulting in the fault called निरस्त; confer, compare स्थानकरणयेारपकर्षेण निरस्तं नाम दोष उत्पद्यते, Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XIV.2; (2) drawing back a word or words from a succeeding rule of grammar to the preceding one; confer, compare "वक्ष्यति तस्यायं पुरस्तादपकर्षः, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II.2.8. (3) inferiority (in the case of qualities) न च द्रव्यस्य प्रकर्षापकर्षौ स्तः ।
appayadīkṣitaअप्पदीक्षित A famous versatile writer of the sixteenth century A. D. (1530-1600 ), son of रङ्गराजाध्वरीन्द्र a Dravid Brāhmaṇa. He wrote more than 60 smaller or greater treatises mainly on Vedānta, Mimāṁsā, Dharma and Alaṁkāra śāstras; many of his works are yet in manuscript form. The Kaumudi-prakāśa and Tiṅantaśeṣasaṁgraha are the two prominent grammatical works written by him. Paṇdit Jagannātha spoke very despisingly of him.
abhyatilakaa Jain writer of the thirteenth century who wrote a commentary on the Śabdāśāsana Grammar of Hemacandra.
abhyaṃkara(BHASKARASHASTRI Abhyankar 1785-1870 A. D. )an eminent scholar of Sanskrit Grammar who prepared a number of Sanskrit scholars in Grammar at Sātārā. He has also written a gloss on the Paribhāṣenduśekhara and another one on the Laghu-Śabdenduśekhara. (VASUDEVA SHASTRI Abhyakar 863-1942 A. D.) a stalwart Sanskrit Pandit, who, besides writing several learned commentaries on books in several Sanskrit Shastras, has written a commentary named 'Tattvādarśa' on the Paribhāṣenduśekhara and another named 'Guḍhārthaprakāśa' on the Laghuśabdenduśekhara. (KASHINATH VASUDEVA Abhyankar, 1890-) a student of Sanskrit Grammar who has written महाभाष्यप्रस्तावना-खण्ड, and जैनेन्द्रपरिभाषावृत्ति and compiled the परिभाषासंग्रह and the present Dictionary of Sanskrit Grammar.
amaracalled अमरसिंह an ancient grammarian mentioned in the कविकल्पद्रुम by बोपदेव. He is believed to have written some works on grammar such as षट्कारकलक्षण his famous existing work, however, being the Amarakoṣa or Nāmaliṅgānuśāsana.
amaracandraa Jain grammarian who is believed to be the writer of स्यादिशब्दसमुच्चय, परिमल et cetera, and others
amṛtabhāratīa grammarian who is believed to have written सुबोधिका, a gloss on the सारस्वतव्याकरण.
avagraha(1)separation of a compound word into its component elements as shown in the Pada-Pāṭha of the Vedic Saṁhitās. In the Padapāṭha, individual words are shown separately if they are combined by Saṁdhi rules or by the formation of a compound in the Saṁhitāpāṭha; exempli gratia, for example पुरोहितम् in the Saṁhitāpāṭha is read as पुरःsहितम्. In writing, there is observed the practice of placing the sign (ऽ) between the two parts, about which nothing can be said as to when and how it originatedition The AtharvaPrātiśākhya defines अवग्रह as the separation of two padas joined in Saṁhitā. (Atharvaveda Prātiśākhya. II.3.25; II.4.5). In the recital of the pada-pāṭha, when the word-elements are uttered separately, there is a momentary pause measuring one matra or the time required for the utterance of a short vowel. (See for details Vāj. Prāt. Adhāya 5). (2) The word अवग्रह is also used in the sense of the first out of the two words or members that are compounded together. See Kāśikā on P.VIII.4.26; confer, compare also तस्य ( इङ्ग्यस्य ) पूर्वपदमवग्रहः यथा देवायत इति देव-यत. Tai. Pr. I. 49. The term अवग्रह is explained in the Mahābhāṣya as 'separation, or splitting up of a compound word into its constitutent parts; confer, compare छन्दस्यानङोवग्रहो दृश्येत पितामह इति ।(Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on IV.2.36); also confer, compare यद्येवमवग्रहः प्राप्नोति । न लक्षणेन पदकारा अनुवर्त्याः। पदकारैर्नाम लक्षणमनुवर्त्यम् । यथालक्षणं पदं कर्तव्यम् (Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on III.1.109) where the Bhāṣyakāra has definitely stated that the writers of the Padapāṭha have to split up a word according to the rules of Grammar. (3) In recent times, however, the word अवग्रह is used in the sense of the sign (ऽ) showing the coalescence of अ (short or long) with the preceding अ (short or long ) or with the preceding ए or ओ exempli gratia, for example शिवोऽ र्च्यः, अत्राऽऽगच्छ. (4) The word is also used in the sense of a pause, or an interval of time when the constituent elements of a compound word are shown separately; confer, compare समासेवग्रहो ह्रस्वसमकालः (Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.V.1). (5) The word is also used in the sense of the absence of Sandhi when the Sandhi is admissible.
avarṇathe letter अ; the first letter of the Sanskrit alphabet, comprising all its varieties caused by grades, ( ह्रस्व, दीर्घ, प्लुत) or accents of nasalization. The word वर्ण is used in the neuter gender in the Mahābhāṣya; confer, compare सर्वमुखस्थानमवर्णम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). I.1.9, मा कदाचिदवर्णं भूत् M.Bh. I.1.48 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 1; cf also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.50 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 18 and I.1.51 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 2: confer, compare also ह्रस्वमवर्णं प्रयोगे संवृतम् Sīradeva's ParibhāṣāvṛttiPari. 17. 6
avyayārthanirūpaṇaa work on the meanings of indeclinable words written in the sixteenth century A. D. by Viṭṭhala Śeṣa, grandson of Ramacandra Śeṣa the author of the Prakriyā Kaumudi.
avyayībhāvaname of a compound so called on account of the words forming the compound, being similar to indeclinables: e. g. निर्मक्षिकम् , अधिहरि, यथामति, यावज्जीवम् et cetera, and others; confer, compare अनव्ययं अव्ययं भवतीत्यव्ययीभावः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II.I.5. The peculiarity of the avyayībhāva compound is that the first member of the compound plays the role of the principal word; confer, compare पूर्वपदार्थप्रधानोऽव्ययीभावः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II.1.6.
asamarthasamāsaa compound of two words, which ordinarily is inadmissible, one of the two words being more closely connected with a third word, but which takes place on the authority of usage, there being no obstacle in the way of understanding the sense to be conveyed; e. g. देवदत्तस्य गुरुकुलम् । देवदत्तस्य दासभार्या । असूर्यंपश्यानि मुखानि, अश्राद्धभोजी ब्राह्मणः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II.1.1.
asārūpyadissimilarity in apparent form (although the real wording in existence might be the same) e. g. टाप्, डाप् , चाप्; confer, compare नानुबन्धकृतमसारूप्यम् । Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 8.
akhyātaprakriyāa work dealing with verbs, written by Anubhūtisvarūpācārya on the Sārasvata Vyākaraṇa.
āgastyaname of an ancient writer of Vedic grammar and Prātiśākhya works; confer, compare Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.)I.2.
ācāryadeśīyaa partisan of the preceptor Pāṇini or the Sūtrakāra who is looked upon as having approxmately the same authority as the Sūtrakāra; confer, compare अाचार्यदेशीय अाहन वक्तव्य इति l Kaiyaṭa on I.4.105, Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 2.
aātmanebhāṣaa technical term used for such roots as speak for the agent himself; the term अात्मनेभाष means the same as the term अात्मनेपदिन्. The term अात्मनेभाष is not mentioned by Pāṇini; but the writer of the Vārtikas explains it, confer, compare आत्मनेभाषपरस्मैभाषयोरुपसंख्यानम् P. VI.3.7 and 8 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 1; confer, compare also आत्मनेपदिनश्च धातवो वैयाकरणैरात्मनेभाषशब्देन व्यवह्रियन्ते,Kaiyaṭa on VI.3.7.The term is found in the Atharva-Prātiśākhya. III. 4.7. It cannot be said whether the term came in use after Pāṇini or, although earlier, it belonged to some school other than that of Pāṇini or, Pāṇini put into use the terms Ātmanepada and Parasmaipada for the affixes as the ancient terms Ātmanebhāṣa and Parasmaibhāṣa were in use for the roots.
ādhikyasuperfluity, superiority, notion of surplus; cf यदत्राधिक्यं वाक्यार्थः सः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II.3.46, II.3. 50.
ānupūrvyasuccessive order, as prescribed by tradition or by the writer; confer, compare ऋतुनक्षत्राणामानुपूर्व्येण समानाक्षराणां पूर्वनिपातः । शिशिरवसन्तौ उदगयनस्थौ । कृत्तिकारोहिण्यः । M.Bh. II.2.34 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini).3;also वर्णानामानुपूर्व्येण ब्राह्मणक्षत्रियविट्शूद्राः M.Bh. on II.2.34 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 6: confer, compare पदानुपूर्व्येण प्रश्लिष्टान् संधीन् कुर्यात् । इन्द्र अा इहि । आदौ इन्द्र आ इत्येतयोः; न तु अा इहि इत्येतयाः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) II.2; confer, compare also आनुपूर्व्यात् सिद्धम् Sīra. Pari. 6.
abādha(1)similarity of one phonetic element, for instance, in the case of ऐ with आ resulting from Saṁdhi: e. g. प्रजाया अरातिं निर्ऋत्या अकः where प्रजाया and निर्ऋत्या stand for प्रजायै and निर्ऋत्यै confer, compare एकारान्तानि अाकारबाधे Āth. Pr. II.1.4; (2) Similarity of accent of words in the Saṁhitāpāṭha and Padapāṭha; (3) followed by confer, compare Atharvaveda Prātiśākhya. II.1.14; (4) distress; confer, compare आबाधे च, P. VIII.1.10.
āśubodha(1)name of a work on grammar written by Tārānātha called Tarka-vācaspatī, a reputed Sanskrit scholar of Bengal of the 19th century A.D. who compiled the great Sanskrit Dictionary named वाचस्पत्यकेाश and wrote commentaries on many Sanskrit Shastraic and classical works. The grammar called अाशुबोध is very useful for beginners; (2) name of an elementary grammar in aphorisms written by रामकिंकरसरस्वती, which is based on the Mugdhabodha of Bopadeva.
āśvalāyanaprātiśākhyaan authoritative Prātiśākhya work attributed to Śaunaka the teacher of Āśvalāyana, belonging prominently to the Sakala and the Bāṣkala Śakhās of the Ṛgveda. it is widely known by the name Ṛk-Prātiśākhya. It is a metrical composition divided into . 18 chapters called Paṭalas, giving special directions for the proper pronunciation, recitation and preservation of the Ṛksaṁhita by laying down general rules on accents and euphonic combinations and mentioning phonetic and metrical peculiarities. It has got a masterly commentary written by Uvvaṭa.
iṅgyaa separable word as opposed to अनिङ्ग्य; part of a compound word which is separated or may be separated from the remaining part when the word is split up into its constituent parts. Generally the word is applied to the first part of a compound word when it is split up in the recital of the padapāṭha. The 'iṅgya' word is shown by a pause or avagraha after it which is shown in writing by the sign (ऽ): confer, compare इङ्गयेत विभागेन चाल्यते इति इङ्गयम् । इङ्गयमिति विभागपदस्य संशा commentary on Tait. Prāt. 1.48. सावग्रहं पदमिङ्गयम् Com.on T.Pr. I.48.
it(1)a letter or a group of letters attached to a word which is not seen in actual use in the spoken language: cf अप्रयोगी इत्, Śāk. I.1.5, Hemacandra's Śabdānuśāsana.1.1.37. The इत् letters are applied to a word before it, or after it, and they have got each of them a purpose in grammar viz. causing or preventing certain grammatical operations in the formation of the complete word. Pāṇini has not given any definition of the word इत् , but he has mentioned when and where the vowels and consonants attached to words are to be understood as इत्; (confer, compare उपदेशेजनुनासिक इत् , हलन्त्यम् । et cetera, and others P. I.3.2 to 8) and stated that these letters are to be dropped in actual use, confer, compareP.I.3.9. It appears that grammarians before Pāṇini had also employed such इत् letters, as is clear from some passages in the Mahābhāṣya as also from their use in other systems of grammar as also in the Uṇādi list of affixes, for purposes similar to those found served in Pāṇini 's grammar. Almost all vowels and consonants are used as इत् for different purposes and the इत् letters are applied to roots in the Dhātupāṭha, nouns in the Gaṇapāṭha, as also to affixes, augments and substitutes prescribed in grammar. Only at a few places they are attached to give facility of pronunciation. Sometimes the इत् letters, especially vowels, which are said to be इत्, when uttered as nasalized by Pāṇini, are recognised only by convention; confer, compare प्रतिज्ञानुनासिक्याः पाणिनीयाः(S.K.on P.I.3.2).The word इत्, which literally means going away or disappearing, can be explained as a mute indicatory letter. In Pāṇini's grammar, the mute vowel अ applied to roots indicates the placing of the Ātmanepada affixes after them, if it be uttered as anudātta and of affixes of both the padas if uttered svarita; confer, compare P.I.3. 12, 72. The mute vowel आ signifies the prevention of इडागम before the past part, affixes; confer, compare P. VII. 2. 16. Similarly, the mute vowel इ signfies the augment न् after the last vowel of the root; confer, compareP.VII.1.58; ई signifies the prevention of the augment इ before the past participle.affixes cfP.VII.2.14;उ signifies the inclusion of cognate letters; confer, compareP.I.1.69, and the optional addition of the augment इ before त्वा; confer, compare P.VII.2. 56; ऊ signifies the optional application of the augment इट्;confer, compareP.VII. 2.44; क signifies the prevention of ह्रस्व to the vowel of a root before the causal affix, confer, compareVII.4.2: लृ signifies the vikarana अङ् in the Aorist cf P.III.1.55; ए signifies the prevention of vrddhi in the Aorist,confer, compare P.VII.2.55; ओ signifies the substitution of न् for त् of the past participle. confer, compare P VIII.2.45; क् signifies the Prevention of गुण and वृद्धि, confer, compareP, I. 1.5; ख् signifies the addition of the augment मुम्(म्)and the shortening of the preceding vowel: confer, compareP.VI.3 65-66: ग् signifies the prevention of गुण and वृद्धि, confer, compare P.I.1.5 घ् signifies कुत्व, confer, compare P.VII.3.62; ङ्, applied to affixes, signifies the prevention of गुण and वृद्धि, confer, compare P.I.1.5; it causes संप्रसारणादेश in the case of certain roots, confer, compare P. VI.1.16 and signifies आत्मनेपद if applied to roots; confer, compare P.I. 3.12, and their substitution for the last letter if applied to substitutes. confer, compare P I.1.53. च् signifies the acute accent of the last vowel;confer, compareP.VI.1. 159; ञ् signifies उभयपद i.e the placing of the affixes of both the podas after the root to which it has been affixed;confer, compareP.I.3.72, ट् in the case of an augment signifies its application to the word at the beginning: confer, compareP I.1.64, while applied to a nominal base or an affix shows the addition of the feminine. affix ई (ङीप्) confer, compareP.IV.1. 15;ड् signifies the elision of the last syllable; confer, compare P.VI.4.142: ण् signifies वृद्धि, confer, compareP.VII.2.115;त् signifies स्वरित accent, confer, compare VI.1.181, as also that variety of the vowel ( ह्रस्व, दीर्ध or प्लुत) to which it has been applied confer, compare P.I.1.70; न् signifies आद्युदात्त, confer, compare P.VI.1.193:प् signifies अनुदात्त accent confer, compare अनुदात्तौ सुप्पितौ P. III.1.4. as also उदात्त for the vowel before the affix marked with प् confer, compare P.VI.1.192: म् signifies in the case of an augment its addition after the final vowel.confer, compareP.I.1.47,while in the case of a root, the shortening of its vowel before the causal affix णि,confer, compare P.VI.4.92: र् signifies the acute accent for the penultimate vowel confer, compare P.VI.1.217,ल् signifies the acute accent for the vowel preceding the affix marked with ल्; confer, compareP.VI. 193; श् implies in the case of an affix its सार्वधातुकत्व confer, compare P. II1.4.113, while in the case of substitutes, their substitution for the whole स्थानिन् cf P.I.1.55; प् signifies the addition of the feminine. affix ई ( ङीप् ) confer, compareP.IV-1.41 ;स् in the case of affixes signifies पदसंज्ञा to the base before them, cf P.I.4.16. Sometimes even without the actual addition of the mute letter, affixes are directed to be looked upon as possessed of that mute letter for the sake of a grammatical operation exempli gratia, for example सार्वधातुकमपित् P.I.2.4; असंयेागाल्लिट कित् P.I.2.5: गोतो णित् P.VII.1.90 et cetera, and others (2) thc short vowel इ as a substitute: confer, compare शास इदङ्हलोः P.VI.4.34.
indraname of a great grammarian who is believed to have written an exhaustive treatise on grammar before Pāṇini; confer, compare the famous verse of Bopadeva at the commencement of his Dhātupāṭha इन्द्रश्चन्द्र: काशकृत्स्नापिशली शाकटायनः । पाणिन्यमरजैनेन्द्रा जयन्त्यष्टादिशाब्दिका: ॥ No work of Indra is available at present. He is nowhere quoted by Pāṇini. Many quotations believed to have been taken from his work are found scattered in grammar works, from which it appears that there was an ancient system prevalent in the eastern part of India at the time of Pāṇini which could be named ऐन्द्रव्याकरणपद्धति, to which Pāṇini possibly refers by the word प्राचाम्. From references,it appears that the grammar was of the type of प्रक्रिया, discussing various topics of grammar such as alphabet, coalescence, declension, context, compounds, derivatives from nouns and roots, conjugation, and changes in the base. The treatment was later on followed by Śākaṭāyana and writers of the Kātantra school.For details see Mahābhāṣya edition by D. E. Society, Poona, Vol. VII pages 124-127.
īyastad-affix ईयसुन् , showing superiority or excellence of one individual over another in respect of a quality, added to a substantive expresive of quality; when the substantive ends in the affix तृ, that affix तृ is removed: exempli gratia, for example पटीयान्, लघीयान्, गरीयान्, दोहीयसी (धेनुः) confer, compareP.V.3.57-64.
uktipadaउक्तिपदानि a short anonymous treatise on case-relations, compounds et cetera, and others written mostly in Gujarati.
uktiratnākara'a short grammar work, written by साधुसुन्दर, explaining declension, cases and their meanings, compounds, et cetera, and others and giving a list of Prākṛta words with their Sanskrit equivalents.
ukhyaa writer on Vedic phonetics and euphony quoted in the Taittirīya Prātiśākhya; confer, compare उख्यस्य सपूर्वः Tai. Pra. VIII. 22.
ugrabhūtior उग्राचार्य writer of a gloss on the Nirukta, called Niruktabhāṣya believed to have lived in the 18th century A. D; writer also of a grammatical work Śiṣyahitāvṛtti or Śiṣyahitānyāsa, which was sent to kāshmir and made popular with a large sum of money spent upon it, by his pupil Ānanadpāla.
uṇādisūtradaśapādīthe text of the Uṇādi Sūtras divided into ten chapters believed to have been written by शाकटायन. It is printed at the end of the Prakriyā Kaumud and separately also, and is also available in manuscripts with a few differences. Patañjali in his Bhāṣya on P.III.3.1, seems to have mentioned Sakaṭāyana as the author of the Uṇādi Sūtras although it cannot be stated definitely whether there was at that time, a version of the Sūtras in five chapters or in ten chapters or one, completely different from these, as scholars believe that there are many interpolations and changes in the versions of Uṇādi Sūtras available at present. A critical study of the various versions is extremely desirable.
uṇādisūtrapañcapādīthe text of the Uṇādi Sūtras divided into five chapters which is possessed of a scholarly commentary written by Ujjvaladatta. There is a commentary on it by Bhaṭṭoji Dīkṣita also.
uṇādisūtravṛttia gloss on the Uṇādi Sūtras in the different versions. Out of the several glosses on the Uṇādi Sūtras, the important ones are those written by Ujjvaladatta, Govardhana, Puruṣottamadeva's Paribhāṣāvṛtti.adeva, Rāmacandra Dīkṣita and Haridatta. There is also a gloss called Uṇādisūtrodghātana by Miśra. There is a gloss by Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti. on the Kātantra version of the Uṇādi Sūtras.
udayaṃkarasurnamed pāṭhaka who wrote a commentary on the Laghuśabdenduśekhara named Jyotsna and a very critical work on Paribhāṣās similar to Sīradeva's Paribhāṣāvṛtti; the work is incomplete.
uddyotathe word always refers in grammar to the famous commentary by Nāgeśabhaṭṭa written in the first decade of the 18th century A. D. om the Mahābhāṣyapradīpa of Kaiyaṭa. The Mahābhāṣya-Pradīpoddyota by Nāgeśa.appears to be one of the earlier works of Nāgeśa. It is also called Vivaraṇa. The commentary is a scholarly one and is looked upon as a final word re : the exposition of the Mahābhāṣya. It is believed that Nāgeśa wrote 12 Uddyotas and 12 Śekharas which form some authoritative commentaries on prominent works in the different Śāstras.
upagrahaa term used by the ancient grammarians in the sense of the Parasmaipada and the Ātmanepada affixes. The word is not found in Pāṇini's Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī.. The Vārttikakāra has used the word in his Vārttika उपग्रहप्रतिषेधश्च on P. III.2.127 evidently in the sense of Pada affixes referring to the Ātmanepada as explained by Kaiyaṭa in the words उपग्रहस्य आत्मनेपदसंज्ञाया इत्यर्थ: । The word occurs in the Ślokavārttika सुप्तिङुपग्रहलिङ्गनराणां quoted by Patañjali in his Mahābhāṣya on व्यत्ययो बहुलम् P. III. 1.85, where Nāgeśa writes लादेशव्यङ्ग्यं स्वार्थत्वादि । इह तत्प्रतीतिनिमित्ते परस्मै-पदात्मनेपदे उपग्रहशब्देन लक्षणयोच्येते । The word is found in the sense of Pada in the Mahābhāṣya on P. III. 1.40. The commentator on Puṣpasūtra explains the word as उपगृह्यते समीपे पठ्यते इति उपग्रहः. The author of the Kāśikā on P. VI. 2.134 has cited the reading चूर्णादीन्यप्राण्युपग्रहात् instead of चूर्णादीन्यप्राणिषष्ठ्याः and made the remark तत्रेापग्रह इति षष्ठ्यन्तमेव पूर्वाचार्योपचारेण गृह्यते. This remark shows that in ancient times उपग्रह meant षष्ठ्यन्त i. e. a word in the genitive case. This sense gave rise to, or was based upon, an allied sense, viz. the meaning of 'षष्ठी' i. e. possession. Possibly the sense 'possession' further developed into the further sense 'possession of the fruit or result for self or others' referring to the तिङ् affixes which possessed that sense. The old sense 'षष्ठ्यन्त' of the word 'उपग्रह' having gone out of use, and the sense 'पद' having come in vogue, the word षष्ठी' must have been substituted for the word 'उपग्रह' by some grammarians before the time of the Kāśikākāras. As Patañjali has dropped the Sūtra (VI. 2.134), it cannot be said definitely whether the change of reading took place before Patañjali or after him.
upajīvyaa term used by later grammarians in connection with such a rule on which another rule depends confer, compare उपजीव्यादन्तरङ्गाच्व प्रधानं प्रबलम् Pari. Śekh. on Pari. 97, as also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on हेतुमति च P. III.1.26. The relationship known as उपजीव्योपजीवकभाव occurs several times in grammar which states the inferiority of the dependent as noticed in the world.
upamanyu(1)the famous commentator on the grammatical verses attributed to Nandikeśvarakārikā. which are known by the name नन्दिकेश्वरकारिका and which form a kind of a commentary on the sūtras of Maheśvara; (2) a comparatively modern grammarian possibly belonging to the nineteenth century who is also named Nandikeśvarakārikā.kārikābhāṣya by Upamanyu.and who has written a commentory on the famous Kāśikāvṛtti by Jayāditya and Vāmana. Some believe that Upa-manyu was an ancient sage who wrote a nirukta or etymological work and whose pupil came to be known as औपमन्यव.
upavarṣaan ancient grammarian and Mīmāmsaka believed to have been the brother of Varṣa and the preceptor of Pāṇini. He is referred to, many times as an ancient writer of some Vṛttigranthas.
upasargapreposition, prefix. The word उसपर्ग originally meant only 'a prefixed word': confer, compare सोपसर्गेषु नामसु Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XVI. 38. The word became technically applied by ancient Sanskrit Gratmmarians to the words प्र, परा, अप, सम् et cetera, and others which are always used along with a verb or a verbal derivative or a noun showing a verbal activity; confer, compare उपसर्गाः क्रियायोगे P. I. 4.59. 'These prefixes are necessariiy compounded with the following word unless the latter is a verbal form; confer, compare कुगतिप्रादयः P.II. 2.18. Although they are not compounded with a verbal form, these prepositions are used in juxtaposition with it; sometimes they are found detached from the verbal form even with the intervention of one word or more. The prefixes are instrumental in changing the meaning of the root. Some scholars like Śākaṭāyana hold the view that separated from the roots, prefixes do not express any specific sense as ordinary words express, while scholars like Gārgya hold the view that prefixes do express a sense e. g. प्र means beginning or प्रारम्भ; confer, compare न निर्बद्धा उपसर्गा अर्थान्निराहुरिति शाकटायनः । नामाख्यातयोस्तु कर्मोपसंयोगद्योतका भवन्ति । उच्चावचाः पदार्था भवन्तीति गार्ग्यः । तद्य एषु पदार्थः प्राहुरिमं तं नामाख्यातयोरर्थविकरणम् Nirukta of Yāska.I. 8. It is doubtful, however, which view Pāṇini himself held. In his Ātmanepada topic, he has mentioned some specific roots as possessing some specific senses when preceded by some specific prefixes (see P. I. 3.20, 24, 25, 40, 4l, 46, 52, 56, et cetera, and others), which implies possibly that roots themselves possess various senses, while prefixes are simply instrumental in indicating or showing them. On the other hand, in the topic of the Karmapravacanīyas,the same words प्र, परा et cetera, and others which, however, are not termed Upasargas for the time being, although they are called Nipātas, are actually assigned some specific senses by Pāṇini. The Vārttikakāra has defined उपसर्ग as क्रियाविशेषक उपसर्गः P. I. 3.I. Vārt 7, leaving it doubtful whether the उपसर्ग or prefix possesses an independent sense which modifies the sense of the root, or without possessing any independent sense, it shows only the modified sense of the root which also is possessed by the root. Bhartṛhari, Kaiyaṭa and their followers including Nāgeśa have emphatically given the view that not only prefixes but Nipātas, which include प्र, परा and others as Upasargas as well as Karmapravacanīyas, do not denote any sense, but they indicate it; they are in fact द्योतक and not वाचक. For details see Nirukta of Yāska.I. 3, Vākyapadīya II. 190, Mahābhāṣya on I. 3.1. Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 7 and Kaiyaṭa's Mahābhāṣyapradīpa.and Mahābhāṣya-Pradīpoddyota by Nāgeśa.thereon. The Ṛk Prātiśākhya has discussed the question in XII. 6-9 where, as explained by the commentator, it is stated that prefixes express a sense along with roots or nouns to which they are attachedition It is not clear whether they convey the sense by denotation or indication, the words वाचक in stanza 6 and विशेषकृत् in stanza 8 being in favour of the former and the latter views respectively; cf उपसर्गा विंशतिरर्थवाचकाः सहेतराभ्यामितरे निपाताः; क्रियावाचकभाख्यातमुपसर्गो विशेषकृत्, सत्त्वाभिधायकं नाम निपातः पादपूरणः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XII. st. 6 and 8. For the list of upasargas see Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XII. 6, Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.I. 15, Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.VI.24, and S. K. on P. I.4.60.
upottamaliterallyone near or before the last; the term is generally used in connection with words having two or more syllables, where it means the vowel before the last (vowel); confer, compare उपोत्तमं रिति P. VI.1.217 and योपधाद्गुरूपोत्तमाद्वुञ् P.V.1.132 where the writer of the Kāśikā explains it as त्रिप्रभृतीनामन्त्यमुत्तमं तस्य समीपमुपोत्तमम् । giving रमणीय and वसनीय as examples where the long ई is upottama; confer, compare also T.Pr. XI.3. and Nir.I.19 where the word refers to the third out of the four feet of the verse.
uvaṭaalso उव्वट or ऊअट a reputed Kaāśmirian scholar and writer who was the son of Vajrata. He wrote many learned commentaries, some of which are known as Bhasyas. Some of his important works are Ṛkprātiśākhyabhāṣya, Vājasaneyī prātiśākhyabhāṣya, Vājasaneyīsamhitābhāṣya, Vedārthadīpika et cetera, and others
ṛktantraa work consisting of five chapters containing in all 287 sūtras. It covers the same topics as the Prātiśākhya works and is looked upon as one of the Prātiśākhya works of the Sāma Veda. Its authorship is attributed to Śākaṭāyana according to Nageśa, while औदिव्राज is held as its author by some, and कात्यायन by others. It bears a remarkable similarity to Pāṇini's Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. especially in topics concerning coalescence and changes of स् and न् to ष् and ण् respectively. It cannot be definitely said whether it preceded or followed Pāṇini's work.
ṛkprātiśākhyaone of the Prātiśākhya works belonging to the Aśvalāyana Śākha of the Ṛg Veda. The work available at present, appears to be not a very old one,possibly written a century or so after Pāṇini's time. It is possible that the work, which is available, is based upon a few ancient Prātiśākhya works which are lost. Its authorship is attributed to Śaunaka.The work is a metrical one and consists of three books or Adhyāyas, each Adhyāya being made up of six Paṭalas or chapters. It is written, just as the other Prātiśākhya works, with a view to give directions for the proper recitation of the Veda. It has got a scholarly commentary written by Uvaṭa and another one by Kumāra who is also called Viṣṇumitra. See अाश्वलायनप्रातिशाख्य.
ekaśeṣaa kind of composite formation in which only one of the two or more words compounded together subsists, the others being elided; confer, compare एकः शिष्यते इतरे निवर्तन्ते वृक्षश्च वृक्षश्च वृक्षौ । Kāśikā on सरूपाणामेकशेष एक-विभक्तौ P.I.2.64; confer, compare also सुरूपसमुदायाद्धि विभक्तिर्या विधीयते । एकस्तत्रार्थवान् सिद्धः समुदायस्य वाचकः ।। Bhāṣāvṛtti on P. I. 2.64. There is a dictum of grammarians that every individual object requires a separate expression to convey its presence. Hence, when there is a dual sense, the word has to be repeated, as also the word has to be multiplied when there is a plural sense. In current spoken language, however, in such cases the word is used only once. To justify this single utterance for conveying the sense of plurality, Pāṇini has laid down a general rule सरूपाणामेकशेष एकविभक्तौ and many other similar rules to cover cases of plurality not of one and the same object, but plurality cased by many objects, such as plurality caused by ideas going in pairs or relations such as parents, brothers and sisters, grand-father and grand-son, male and female. For example, see the words वृक्षश्च वृक्षश्च वृक्षौ; Similarly वृक्षाः for many trees, पितरौ for माता च पिता च; देवौ for देवी च देवश्च; confer, compare also the words श्वशुरौ, भ्रातरौ, गार्ग्यौ (for गार्ग्य and गार्ग्यायण),आवाम् (for त्वं च अहं च), यौ (for स च यश्च) and गावः feminine. अजा feminine. अश्वाः masculine gender. irrespective of the individuals being some males and some females. Pāṇini has devoted 10 Sūtras to this topic of Ekaśeṣa. The Daiva grammar has completely ignored this topic. Patanjali has very critically and exhaustively discussed this topic. Some critics hold that the topic of एकशेघ did not exist in the original Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. of Pāṇini but it was interpolated later on, and adduce the long discussion in the Mahābhāṣya especially the Pūrvapakṣa therein, in support of their argument. Whatever the case be, the Vārttikakāra has commented upon it at length; hence, the addition must have been made immediately after Pāṇini, if at all there was any. For details see Mahābhāṣya on I.1.64 to 73 as also,Introduction p. 166-167, Vol.7 of the Mahābhāṣya published by the D. E. Society, Poona.
ekaśrutithat which has got the same accent or tone; utterance in the same tone; monotone. The word is applied to the utterance of the vocative noun or phrase calling a man from a distance, as also to that of the vowels or syllables following a Svarita vowel in the Saṁhitā id est, that is the continuous utterance of Vedic sentences; confer, compare एकश्रुति दूरात्संबुद्वौ and the foll. P.I.2.33-40 and the Mahābhāṣya thereon. In his discussion on I.2.33 Patañjali has given three alternative views about the accent of Ekaśruti syllables : (a) they possess an accent between the उदात्त (acute) and अनुदात्त (grave), (b) they are in the same accent as is possessed by the preceding vowel, (c) Ekaśruti is looked upon as the seventh of the seven accents; confer, compare सैषा ज्ञापकाभ्यामुदात्तानुदात्तयोर्मध्यमेकश्रुतिरन्तरालं ह्रियते। ... सप्त स्वरा भवन्ति | उदात्तः, उदात्ततर:, अनुदात्तः, अनुदात्ततर:, स्वरितः स्वरिते य उदात्तः सोन्येन विशिष्टः, एकश्रुतिः सप्तमः । M.Bh. on P.I.2.33.
egeliṃg( Eggeling )a well-known German scholar of Sanskrit Grammar who flourished in the l9th century and who edited the Kātantra Vyākaraṇa with the commentary of Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti. and many appendices in 1876.
ejarṭan[Edgerton, Dr. Franklin]an American Sanskrit scholar and author of ’Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Grammar and Dictionary.'
aikasvaryahaving only one principal accent (Udātta or Svarita) for the whole compound word which is made up of two or more individual words confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I.1.29.
aindraname of an ancient school of grammar and of the treatise also, belonging to that school, believed to have been written under instructions of Indra. The work is not available. Patañjali mentions that Bṛhaspati instructed Indra for one thousand celestial years and still did not finish his instructions in words': (Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). I.1.1 ). The Taittirīya Saṁhitā mentions the same. Pāṇini has referred to some ancient grammarians of the East by the word प्राचाम् without mentioning their names, and scholars like Burnell think that the grammar assigned to Indra is to be referred to by the word प्राचाम्. The Bṛhatkathāmañjarī remarks that Pāṇini's grammar threw into the background the Aindra Grammar. Some scholars believe that Kalāpa grammar which is available today is based upon Aindra,just as Cāndra is based upon Pāṇini's grammar. References to Aindra Grammar are found in the commentary on the Sārasvata Vyākaraṇa, in the Kavikalpadruma of Bopadeva as also in the commentary upon the Mahābhārata by Devabodha.Quotations, although very few, are given by some writers from the work. All these facts prove that there was an ancient pre-Pāṇinian treatise on Grammar assigned to इन्द्र which was called Aindra-Vyākaraṇa.For details see Dr.Burnell's 'Aindra School of Sanskrit Grammarians' as also Vol. VII pages 124-126 of Vyākaraṇa Mahābhāṣya, edited by the D.E.Society, Poona.
opperṭ[Gustav Oppert 1836-1908 ]a German scholar of Sanskrit who edited the Śabdānuśāsana of Śākaṭāyana.
oraṃbhaṭṭa scholar of grammar of the nineteenth century who wrote a Vṛtti on Pāṇini sūtras called पाणिनिसूत्रवृत्ति. He has written many works on the Pūrvamīmāmsa and other Śāstras.
{{c|-( anusvāra ) ṃanusvāraor nasal (l) looked upon as a phonetic element, independent, no doubt, but incapable of being pronounced without a vowel Preceding it. Hence, it is shown in writing with अ although its form in writing is only a dot a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. the line cf अं इत्यनुस्वारः । अकार इह उच्चारणर्थ इति बिन्दुमात्रो वर्णोनुस्वारसंज्ञो भवति Kātantra vyākaraṇa Sūtra.Vyāk I.1.19; (2) anusvāra,showing or signifying Vikāra id est, that is अागम and used as a technical term for the second विभक्ति or the accusative case. See the word अं a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. on page 1.
or विसर्गः literally letting out breath from the mouth; sound or utterance caused by breath escaping from the mouth; breathing. The Visarjanīya, just like the anusvāra, is incapable of being independently utteredition Hence, it is written for convenience as अः although its form for writing purposes is only two dots after the vowel preceding it; confer, compare अः इति विसर्जनीयः । अकार इह उच्चारणार्थः इति कुमारीस्तनयुगाकृतिर्वर्णो विसर्जनीयसंज्ञो भवति । Kātantra vyākaraṇa Sūtra.Vyāk. I.1.16. See अः a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. on page 2.
ᳶ upadhmānīyaliterally blowing; a term applied to the visarga when followed by the consonant प् or फ्. The upadhmānīya is looked upon as a letter or phonetic element, which is always connected with the preceding vowel. As the upadhmānīya is an optional substitute for the visarga before the letter प् or फ्, when, in writing, it is to be shown instead of the visarga, it is shown as ᳶ, or as w , or even as x just as the Jihvāmūlīya; confer, compare उपध्मायते शब्दायते इति, उप समीपे ध्मायते शब्द्यते इति वा commentary on Kātantra vyākaraṇa Sūtra.I:; : confer, compare also कपाभ्यां प्रागर्धविसर्गसदृशो जिह्वामूलीयोपध्मानीयौः:S.K.on P.VIII.2.1.
karṣaṇaextension; protraction, defined as kālaviprakarṣa by commentators; a peculiarity in the recital as noticed in the pronunciation of ट् when followed by च् , or ड् when followed by ज् exempli gratia, for example षट्चै; षड्जात. confer, compare Nār. Śik. I.7.19.
kalāpa(कलाप-व्याकरण)alternative name given to the treatise on grammar written by Sarvavarman who is believed to have lived in the days of the Sātavāhana kings. The treatise is popularly known by the namc Kātantra Vyākaraṇa. The available treatise,viz. Kalpasūtras, is much similar to the Kātantra Sūtras having a few changes and additions only here and there.It is rather risky to say that Kalāpa was an ancient system of grammar which is referred to in the Pāṇini Sūtra कलापिनोण् P. IV.3.108. For details see कातन्त्र.
kavikalpadrumaa treatise on roots written by Bopadeva, the son of Keśava and the pupil of Dhaneśa who lived in the time of Hemādri, the Yādava King of Devagiri in the thirteenth century. He has written a short grammar work named Mugdhabodha which has been very popular in Bengal being studied in many Tols or Pāṭhaśālās.
kavikalpadrumaṭīkāa commentary on the Kavikalpadruma, written by the author ( बोपदेव ) himselfeminine. It is known by the name Kāvyakāmadhenu; (2) a commentary on Kavikalpadruma by Rāmatarkavāgīśa.
kaśyapaname of a writer on the Cāndra Vyākaraṇa.
kāṇḍamāyananame of an ancient writer of a Prātiśākhya work who held that Visarga before the consonant स् is dropped only when स् is followed by a surd consonant; confer, compare Tai.Pr. IX. 1.
kātantraname of an important small treatise on grammar which appears like a systematic abridgment of the Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. of Pāṇini. It ignores many unimportant rules of Pāṇini, adjusts many, and altogether omits the Vedic portion and the accent chapter of Pāṇini. It lays down the Sūtras in an order different from that of Pāṇini dividing the work into four adhyāyas dealing with technical terms, saṁdhi rules,declension, syntax compounds noun-affixes ( taddhita affixes ) conjugation, voice and verbal derivatives in an order. The total number of rules is 1412 supplemented by many subordinate rules or Vārttikas. The treatise is believed to have been written by Śarvavarman, called Sarvavarman or Śarva or Sarva, who is said to have lived in the reign of the Sātavāhana kings. The belief that Pāṇini refers to a work of Kalāpin in his rules IV. 3.108 and IV.3.48 and that Patañjali's words कालापम् and माहवार्तिकम् support it, has not much strength. The work was very popular especially among those who wanted to study spoken Sanskrit with ease and attained for several year a very prominent place among text-books on grammar especially in Bihar, Bengal and Gujarat. It has got a large number of glosses and commentary works, many of which are in a manuscript form at present. Its last chapter (Caturtha-Adhyāya) is ascribed to Vararuci. As the arrangement of topics is entirely different from Pāṇini's order, inspite of considerable resemblance of Sūtras and their wording, it is probable that the work was based on Pāṇini but composed on the models of ancient grammarians viz. Indra, Śākaṭāyana and others whose works,although not available now, were available to the author. The grammar Kātantra is also called Kālāpa-vyākaraṇasūtra.. A comparison of the Kātantra Sūtras and the Kālāpa-vyākaraṇasūtra. Sūtras shows that the one is a different version of the other. The Kātantra Grammar is also called Kaumāra as it is said that the original 1nstructions for the grammar were received by the author from Kumāra or Kārttikeya. For details see Vol. VII Patañjala Mahābhāṣya published by the D.E. Society, Poona, page 375.
kātantrakaumudī(1)a commentary on the Kātantra Sūtras written by Govardhana in the 12th century. A. D.; (2) a commentary on the Kātantra Sūtras ascribed to Gaṅgeśaśarman.
kātantrapañjikāa name usually given to a compendium of the type of Vivaraṇa or gloss written on the Kātantra Sūtras. The gloss written by Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti. on the famous commentary on the Kātantra Sūtras by Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti. ( the same as the the famous Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti. or another of the same name ) known as दौर्गसिंही वृत्ति is called Kātantra Pañjika or Kātantravivaraṇa. A scholar of Kātantra grammar by name Kuśala has written a Pañjika on दुर्गसिंहृ's वृत्ति which is named प्रदीप, Another scholar, Trivikrama has written a gloss named Uddyota.
kātantraparibhāṣāpāṭhaname given to a text consisting of Paribhāṣāsūtras, believed to have been written by the Sūtrakāra himself as a supplementary portion to the main grammar. Many such lists of Paribhāṣāsūtras are available, mostly in manuscript form, containing more than a hundred Sūtras divided into two main groups-the Paribhāṣā sūtras and the Balābalasūtras. See परिभाषासंग्रह edition by B. O. R. I. Poona.
kātantraparibhāṣāvṛtti(1)name of a gloss on the Paribhāṣāpaṭha written by Bhāvamiśra, probably a Maithila Pandit whose date is not known. He has explained 62 Paribhāṣās deriving many of them from the Kātantra Sūtras. The work seems to be based on the Paribhāṣā works by Vyāḍiparibhāṣāsūcana.and others on the system of Pāṇini, suitable changes having been made by the writer with a view to present the work as belonging to the Kātantra school; (2) name of a gloss on the Paribhāṣāpaṭha of the Kātantra school explaining 65 Paribhāṣās. No name of the author is found in the Poona manuscript. The India Office Library copy has given Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti. as the author's name; but it is doubted whether Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti. was the author of it. See परिभाषासंग्रह edition by B. O. R. I. Poona.
kātantrapariśiṣṭaascribed to Śrīpatidatta, whose date is not known; from a number of glosses written on this work, it appears that the work was once very popular among students of the Kātantra School.
kātantrapariśiṣṭacandrikāa gloss on the Kātantra-Pariśiṣṭa ascribed to a scholar named Ramadāsa-cakravartin who has written another...work also named Kātantravyākhyāsāra.
kātantrapariśiṣṭaṭīkāa gloss on the Kātantra-Pariśiṣṭa written by a Kātantra scholar Puṇḍarīkākṣa.
kātantrapariśiṣṭasiddhāntaratnāṅkuraa gloss on the Kātantra-pariśiṣṭa by Śivarāmendra, who is believed to have written a gloss on the Sūtras of Pāṇini also.
kātantraprakriyāa name given to the Kātantra Sūtras which were written in the original form as a Prakriyāgrantha or a work discussing the various topics such as alphabet, euphonic rules, declension, derivatives from nouns, syntax, conjugation derivatives from roots et cetera, and others et cetera, and others
kātantrapradīpaa grammar work written by a scholar named Kuśala on the Kātantrasūtravṛtti by Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti.. See कातन्त्रपञ्जिका.
kātantravistaraa famous work on the Kātantra Grammar written by Vardhamāna a Jain Scholar of the twelfth century who is believed to be the same as the author of the well-known work Gaṇaratnamahodadhi.
kātantravṛttiname of the earliest commentary on the Kātantra Sūtras ascribed to Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti.. The commentary was once very popular as is shown by a number of explanatory commentaries written upon it, one of which is believed to have been written by Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti. himselfeminine. See Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti..
kātantravṛttiṭippaṇīa gloss on दौर्गसिंहीवृत्ति written by Guṇakīrti in the fourteenth century A.D.
kātantravṛttivyākhyānamed Aṣṭamaṅgalā on Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti.'s Kātantravṛtti written by Rāmakiśora Cakravartin who is believed to have written a grammatical work शाब्दबोधप्रकाशिका.
kātantravyākhyāsāraa work of the type of a summary written by Rāmadāsa Cakravartin of the twelfth century.
kātantrottaraa treatise on the Kātantra Grammar believed to have been written by Vidyānanda.
kātthakyaan ancient writer of Nirukta quoted by Yāska in his Nirukta.
kātya(1)another name sometimes given to Katyāyana to whom is ascribed the composition of the Vārttikas on Pāṇini-sūtras; (2) an ancient writer Kātya quoted as a lexicographer by Kṣīrasvāmin, Hemacandra and other writers.
kātyāyanathe well-known author of the Vārttikas on the sūtras of Pāṇini. He is also believed to be the author of the Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya and many sūtra works named after him. He is believed to be a resident of South India on the strength of the remark प्रियतद्धिता दाक्षिणात्याः made by Patañjali in connection with the statement 'यथा लौकिकवैदिकेषु' which is looked upon as Kātyāyana's Vārttika. Some scholars say that Vararuci was also another name given to him, in which case the Vārttikakāra Vararuci Kātyāyana has to be looked upon as different from the subsequent writer named Vararuci to whom some works on Prakrit and Kātantra grammar are ascribedition For details see The Volume of the introduction in Marathi to the Pātañjala Mahābhāṣya, written by K. V. Abhyankar and published by the O. E. Society, Poona.. pages I93-223 published by the D. E.Society, Poona.See also वार्तिकपाठ below.
kārakaliterally doer of an action. The word is used in the technical sense ; 1 of ’instrument of action'; cf कारकशब्दश्च निमित्तपर्यायः । कारकं हेतुरिति नार्थान्तरम् । कस्य हेतुः । क्रियायाः Kāś. on P.I. 4.23: confer, compare also कारक इति संज्ञानिर्देशः । साधकं निर्वर्तकं कारकसंज्ञं भवति । M.Bh. on P. I. 4.28. The word 'kāraka' in short, means 'the capacity in which a thing becomes instrumental in bringing about an action'. This capacity is looked upon as the sense of the case-affixes which express it. There are six kārakas given in all grammar treatises अपादान, संप्रदान, अधिकरण, करण , कर्मन् and कर्तृ to express which the case affixes or Vibhaktis पञ्चमी, चतुर्थी, सप्तमी, तृतीया, द्वितीया and प्रथमा are respectively used which, hence, are called Kārakavibhaktis as contrasted with Upapadavibhaktis, which show a relation between two substantives and hence are looked upon as weaker than the Kārakavibhaktis; confer, compare उपपदविभक्तेः कारकविभक्तिर्बलीयसी Pari. Śek. Pari.94. The topic explaining Kārakavibhaktis is looked upon as a very important and difficult chapter in treatises of grammar and there are several small compendiums written by scholars dealing with kārakas only. For the topic of Kārakas see P. I. 4.23 to 55, Kat, II. 4.8-42, Vyākaraṇa The Volume of the introduction in Marathi to the Pātañjala Mahābhāṣya, written by K. V. Abhyankar and published by the O. E. Society, Poona.. pp.262-264 published by the D. E. Society, Poona.
kārakakārikāpossibly another name for the treatise on Kārakas known as कारकचक्र written by Puruṣottamadeva's Paribhāṣāvṛtti.adeva the reputed grammarian of Bengal who lived in the latter half of the twelfth century A. D. See कारकचक्र.
kārakakhaṇḍanamaṇḍanaalso called षट्कारक-खण्डनमण्डन which is a portion of theauthor's bigger work named त्रिलो-चनचन्द्रिका. The work is a discourse on the six kārakas written by Maṇikaṇṭha, a grammarian of the Kātantra school. He has also written another treatise named Kārakavicāra
kārakacakra(1)written by Puruṣotta madeva a reputed grammarian of Bengal who wrote many works on grammar of which the Bhasavrtti, the Paribhāṣāvṛtti and Jñāpakasamuccya deserve a special mention. The verse portion of the Kārakacakra of which the prose portion appears like a commentary might be bearing the name Kārakakaumudī.
kārakatattvaa treatise on the topic of Kārakas written by Cakrapāṇiśeṣa, belonging to the famous Śeṣa family of grammarians, who lived in the seventeenth century A. D.
kārakanirṇayaa work discussing the various Kārakas from the Naiyāyika view-point written by the well-known Naiyāyika, Gadādhara Chakravartin of Bengal, who was a pupil of Jagadīśa and who fourished in the 16th century A. D. He is looked upon as one of the greatest scholars of Nyāyaśāstra. His main literarywork was in the field of Nyāyaśāstra on which he has written several treatises.
kārakavāda(1)a treatise discussing the several Kārakas, written by Kṛṣṇaśāstri Ārade a famous Naiyāyika of Benares who lived in the eighteenth century A. D; (2) a treatise on syntax written by Jayarāmabhaṭṭācārya which is called कारकविवेक also, which see below. a treatise on syntax written by Jayarāmabhaṭṭācārya which is called कारकविवेक also, which see below.
kārakavivekaknown as कारकवाद also; a short work on the meaning and relation of words written by Jayarāmabhaṭṭācārya who lived in the beginning of the eighteenth century. The work forms the concluding portion of a larger work called कारकविवेक which was written by शिरोमणिभट्टाचार्य.. The work कारकवाद has a short commentary written by the author himselfeminine.
kārakavyākhyāthe same as कारकवादव्याख्या written by जयरामभट्टाचार्य. See कारकविवेक.
kāśikā(1)name given to the reputed gloss (वृत्ति) on the Sūtras of Pāṇini written by the joint authors.Jayāditya and Vāmana in the 7th century A.D. Nothing definitely can be said as to which portion was written by Jayāditya and which by Vamana, or the whole work was jointly written. Some scholars believe that the work was called Kāśikā as it was written in the city of Kāśī and that the gloss on the first five Adhyāyas was written by Jayāditya and that on the last three by Vāmana. Although it is written in a scholarly way, the work forms an excellent help to beginners to understand the sense of the pithy Sūtra of Pāṇini. The work has not only deserved but obtained and maintained a very prominent position among students and scholars of Pāṇini's grammar in spite of other works like the Bhāṣāvṛtti, the Prakriyā Kaumudi, the Siddhānta Kaumudi and others written by equally learned scholars. Its wording is based almost on the Mahābhāṣya which it has followed, avoiding, of course, the scholarly disquisitions occurring here and there in the Mahābhāṣya. It appears that many commentary works were written on it, the wellknown among them being the Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā or Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa. written by Jinendrabuddhi and the Padamañjari by Haradatta. For details see Vyākaraṇamahābhāṣya Vol.VII pp 286-87 published by the D. E. Society, Poona. ( 2 ) The name Kāśikā is sometimes found given to their commentaries on standard works of Sanskrit Grammar by scholars, as possibly they were written at Kāśī; as for instance, (a) Kāśikā on Vaiyākaraṇabhūṣaṇasāra by Hari Dīkṣita, and ( b ) Kāśikā on Paribhāṣenduśekhara by Vaidyanātha Pāyaguṇḍe.
kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikāalso called Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa., the well-known commentary written by Jinendrabuddhi on the Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. See Kāśikā a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
kīlhārnKielhorn F., a sound scholar of Sanskrit Grammar who brought out excellent editions of the Pātañjala Mahābhāṣya and the Paribhāṣenduśekhara and wrote an essay on the Vārttikas of Kātyāyana. For details see Pātañjala Mahābhāṣya Vol VII.p.40, D. E society edition, Poona.
kumāra(1)Kārtikeya who is believed to havegiven inspiration to the Katantra-sūtrakāra to write the Kātantra-sūtras; (2) named Viṣṇumitra who wrote a commentary on the ऋक्प्रातिशाख्य,
kṛṣṇakiṃkaraprakriyāan alternative name for the well-known grammar-work क्रियाकौमुदी written by Rāmacandra Śeṣa. See प्रक्रियाकौमुदी.
kṛṣṇapaṇḍitacalled also शेषकृष्ण, a sholar of Sanskrit Vyākaraṇa who wrote गूढभावविवृत्ति,a commentary on the Prakriyā-Kaumudī of Rāmacandra Śeṣa.
keśavawriter of a commentary named प्रकाश on the Śikṣā of Pāṇini. He lived in the 17th century.
keśavadattawriter of the commentary named दुर्धटोद्धाट on the grammar संक्षिप्तसार written by Goyicandra,
kaiyaṭaname of the renowned commentator on the Mahābhāṣya, who lived in the 11th century. He was a resident of Kashmir and his father's name was Jaiyaṭa. The commentary on the Mahābhāṣya was named महाभाष्यप्रदीप by him, which is believed by later grammarians to have really acted as प्रदीप or light, as without it, the Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali would have remained unlit, that is unintelligible, at several places. Later grammarians attached to प्रदीप almost the same importance as they did to the Mahābhāṣya and the expression तदुक्तं भावकैयटयोः has been often used by commentators. Many commentary works were written on the Kaiyaṭa's Mahābhāṣyapradīpa.out of which Nageśa's Mahābhāṣya-Pradīpoddyota by Nāgeśa.is the most popular. The word कैयट came to be used for the word महाभाष्यप्रदीप which was the work of Kaiyaṭa. For details see Vyākaraṇa Mahābhāṣya published by the D. E. Society, Poona, Vol. VII. pp. 389-390.
kaiyaṭaprakāśaa commentary on the Mahābhāṣyapradīpa of Kaiyaṭa written by Nīlakaṇṭha of the Draviḍa country. Nīlakaṇṭha lived in . the 17th century and wrote works on various subjects.
kaiyaṭaprakāśikāa commentary on the Mahābhāṣyapradīpa of Kaiyaṭa written by Pravartakopādhyāya.
kaiyaṭavivaraṇa(1)a commentary on the Mahābhāṣyapradīpa of Kaiyaṭa written by Iśvarānanda, in the 16th century; (2) a commentary on Kaiyaṭa's Kaiyaṭa's Mahābhāṣyapradīpa.by Rāmacandra-Sarasvatī, who lived in the 16th century.
koṇḍabhaṭṭaa reputed grammarian who wrote an extensive explanatory gloss by name Vaiyākaraṇabhūṣaṇa on the Vaiyākaraṇasiddhāntakārikā of Bhaṭṭoji Dīkṣita. Another work Vaiyākaraṇabhūṣaṇasāra. which is in a way an abridgment of the Bhūṣaṇa, was also written by him. Koṇḍabhaṭṭa lived in the beginning of the l7th century. He was the son of Raṅgojī and nephew of Bhaṭṭojī Dīkṣita. He was one of the few writers on the Arthavicāra in the Vyākaraṇaśāstra and his Bhūṣaṇasāra ranks next to the Vākyapadīya of Bhartṛhari. Besides the Bhūṣaṇa and Bhūṣaṇasāra, Koṇḍabhaṭṭa wrote two independent works viz. Vaiyākaraṇsiddhāntadīpika and Sphoṭavāda.
kodṇḍarāmaa scholar of Sanskrit Vyākaraṇa who composed शब्दसिद्धान्तमञ्जरी a small treatise dealing with the declension of nouns.
kaumāra,komāravyākaraṇa(1)an alternative name of the Kātantra Vyākaraṇa given to it on the strength of the traditional belief that the original inspiration for writing it was received by Sarvavarman from Kumara or Kārtikeya; (2) small treatises bearing the name Kaumāravyākaraṇa written by Munipuṅgava and Bhāvasena. The latter has written Kātantrarūpamāla also.
kramapāṭharecital of the Vedic Saṁhitā by means of separate groups of two words, repeating each word except the first of the Vedic verseline; see क्रम a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. The various rules and exceptions are given in detail in Paṭalas ten and eleven of the Ṛk Prātiśākhya. The Vedic Saṁhitā or Saṁhitāpāṭha is supposed to be the original one and the Padapāṭha prepared later on, with a view to preserving the Vedic text without any change or modification of a letter, or accent; confer, compare न लक्षणेन पदकारा अनुवर्त्याः । पदकारैर्नाम लक्षणमनुवर्त्यम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on III. 1.109, VI. 1.207 and VIII. 2.16, where Patañjali clearly says that grammar-rules are not to follow the Padapāṭha, but, the writer of the Padapāṭha is to follow the rules already laid down. The Jaṭāpāṭha, the Ghanapāṭha and the other recitals are later developments of the Padapāṭha as they are not mentioned in the Prātiśākhya works.
kriyākalāpaa grammatical work on the conjugation of roots written by Vijayānanda.
kroṣṭrīyaan ancient school of grammarians who are believed to have written rules or Vārttikas on some rules of Pāṇini to modify them; the क्रोष्ट्रीय school is quoted in the Mahābhāṣya; confer, compare परिभाषान्तरमिति च मत्वा क्रोष्ट्रीयाः पठन्ति । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I.1.3.
kṣitīśacandra(चक्रवर्तिन्)or K. C. CHATTERJI a scholar of Sanskrit grammar who has written a work on technical terms in Sanskrit, who has edited several grammar works and is at present editing the Cāndra Vyākaraṇa and conducting the Sanskrit journal named Mañjūṣa at Calcutta.
kṣīrataraṅgiṇīa kind of commentary on the Dhātupāṭha of Pāṇini written by Kṣīrasvāmin.
kṣaipra(1)another name of the क्षिप्रसंधिSee the word क्षिप्र a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.; (2) name given to the Svarita accent borne by the vowel following the semivowel which results from the Kṣiprasaṁdhi; confer, compare Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) II. 8; III.7,10; VIII. 22: confer, compare इवर्णोकारयोर्यवकारभावे क्षैप्र उदात्तयोः V.Pr. XX. 1; confer, compare also युवर्णौ यवौ क्षैप्रः V.Pr.I.115: उदात्तस्वरितयोर्यणः स्वरितोनुदात्तस्य P.VIII.2.4.
gaṅgādhara[GANGADHARA SHASTRI TELANG] (l)a stalwart grammarian and Sanskrit scholar of repute who was a pupil of Bālasarasvatī of Vārāṇaśī and prepared in the last century a host of Sanskrit scholars in Banaras among whom a special mention could be made of Dr. Thebaut, Dr. Venis and Dr. Gaṅgānātha Jhā. He was given by Government of India the titles Mahāmahopādhyāya and C. I.E. His surname was Mānavallī but he was often known as गङाधरशास्त्री तेलङ्ग. For details, see Mahābhāṣya, D.E. Society Ed.Poona p.p.33, 34; (2)an old scholar of Vyākarana who is believed to have written a commentary on Vikṛtavallī of Vyādi; (3) a comparatively modern scholar who is said to have written a commentary named Induprakāśa on the Śabdenduśekhara; (4) author of the Vyākaraṇadīpaprabhā, a short commentary on the Vyākaraṇa work of Cidrūpāśramin. See चिद्रूपाश्रमिन्.
gaṅgeśaśarmāwriter of Kātantra-kaumudī possibly different from the reputed Gaṅgeśa Upādhyāa who is looked upon as the founder of the Navyanyāya school of modern Naiyāyikas, and who lived in the twelfth century A. D.
gaṇapāṭhathe mention individually of the several words forming a class or gaṇa, named after the first word said to have been written by Pāṇini himself as a supplementary work to his great grammar called Aṣṭaka or Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī., the Sikṣā,the Dhātupātha and the Lingānuśāsana being the other ones. Other grammarians such as शाकटायन, अापिशलि and others have their own gaṇapāthās. The gaṇapāthā is traditionally ascribed to Pāṇini; the issue is questioned, however, by modern scholars. The text of the gaṇapāṭha is metrically arranged by some scholars. The most scholarly and authoritative treatise on gaṇapāṭha is the Gaṇaratnamahodadhī of Vardhamāna.
gaṇaratnamahodadhia grammar work, consisting of a metrical enumeration of the words in the Gaṇapāṭha of Pāṇini, written by Vardhamāna, a Jain grammarian of the 12th century, who is believed to have been one of the six gems at the court of Lakṣmaṇasena of Bengal. Vardhamāna has written a commentary also, on his Gaṇaratnamahodadhi. Besides Vardhamāna's commentary, there are other commentaries written by गोवर्धन and गङ्गाधर.
gaṇaratnamahodadhiṭīkāalso called गणरत्नमहोदधिवृति, a commentary on the गणरत्नमहोदधि of Vardhamāna written by the author himselfeminine. See गणरत्नमहोदधि.
gaṇasūtravicāraa commentary on the Gaṇapāṭha of Pāṇini written by Mannudeva who flourished in the nineteenth century.
gadāa popular name given to the scholarly commentary written by Vaidyanātha Pāyaguṇḍe on the Paribhāṣenduśekhara. The commentary is called काशिका also, as it was written in the town of Kāśī (Vārāṇasī).
gadādharacakravartinthe reputed Naiyāyika who wrote numerous works on the Navyanyaya; he has written a few works like व्युत्पत्तिवाद, उपसर्गविचार, कारकनिर्णय, सर्वनामविचार, प्रत्ययविचार on Vyākaraṇa themes although the treatment, as also the style, is logical.
gārgyaan ancient reputed grammarian and possibly a writer of a Nirukta work, whose views, especially in.connection with accents are given in the Pratisakhya works, the Nirukta and Panini's Astadhyayi. Although belonging to the Nirukta school, he upheld the view of the Vaiyakaranas that all words cannot be derived, but only some of them: cf Nirukta of Yāska.I. 12.3. cf, also Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.IV. 167, Nirukta of Yāska.I. 3.5, III. 14.22: Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I. 13; XIII. 12: P. VII. 3.99, VIII. 3.20, VIII. 4.69.
giridharawriter of विभक्त्यर्थनिर्णय, a work on syntax.
gīrvāṇapadamañjarīa grammatical work written by वरदराज, pupil of Bhattoji Diksita in the 17th century who wrote many works on grammar such as मध्यकौमुदी, लघुकौमुदी et cetera, and others
guṇakīrtia Jain writer of the thirteenth century who wrote a commentary named कातन्त्रवृत्तिटिप्पणी on दुर्गसिंहवृत्ति.
gopāla( देव )known more by the nickname of मन्नुदेव or मन्तुदेव who lived in the eighteenth century and wrote several commentary works on well-known grammatical treatises such as the Vaiyakaranabhusanasara, Laghusabdendusekhara, Paribhasendusekhara et cetera, and others He is believed to have written a treatise on Ganasutras also; (2) a grammarian different from the a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. मन्नुदेव who has written an explanatory work on the Pratisakhyas;.(3) a scholar of grammar, different from the a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. who is believed to have written a gloss named Visamarthadipika on the Sarasvata Vyakarana at the end of the sixteenth century.
gopīcandraknown also by the name गेयींचन्द्र who .has written several commentary works on the grammatical treatises of the Samksipatasara or Jaumāra school of Vyakarana founded by Kramdisvara and Jumaranandin in the 12th century, the well-known among them being the संक्षिप्तसाटीका, संक्षितसारपरिभात्रासूत्रटीका and तद्धितपरिशिष्टटीका. He is believed to have lived in the thirteenth century A. D.
gopīnāthaa Bengali scholar of Katansutra Grammar who is believed to have written Katantraparisistapraddyota.
golḍsṭyūkaraa well known German scholar who made a sound study of Paini's Sanskrit Vyakarana and wrote a very informative treatise entitled 'Panini, his place in Sanskrit Literature.' He lived in the latter half of the 19th century.
govardhanaa grammarian who has written a work on Katantra Grammar called कातन्त्रकौमुदी and also a commentary on the Ganaratnamahodadhi of Vardhamana. A gloss on the Unadisutras is also assigned to Govardhana who is likely to be the same as a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
govindawriter of a commentary known as अम्बाकर्त्री by reason of that work beginning with the stanza अम्बा कर्त्रींó, on the Paribhasendusekhara of Nagesa.
gotrinda( चक्रवर्तिन् )writer of Samasavada, a short treatise on the sense conveyed by compound words.
govindarāmawriter of 'Sabdadipika,' a commentary on the Mugdhabodha Vyakarana of Bopadeva.
cakoraa grammarian who .wrote a commentary on the 'Sabdalingarthacandrika of Sujanapandita. चक्कनशर्मा a grammarian who is said to have written a work named Dhatusamgraha.
cakrina grammarian who has written a small disquisition on the correctness of the form जाग्रहीता. See जाग्रहीतेतिवाद.
caṅgadāsaa grammarian who has written a work on the topic of the five vrttis. The work is named चङ्गवृति.
caṅgavṛttia short treatise written by वङ्गदास, dealing with the topic of the five compact expressions or Vrttis viz. कृत्, तद्वित, समास, एकशेष, and सनादिधातु.
caṅgudāsaor चाड्गुदास a scholar of grammar who has written an independent work on Sanskrit Vyakaana called वैयाकरणजीवातु. The treatise is also known as चाङ्गुसूत्र or चाङ्गु-व्याकरण.
caṇḍapaṇḍitawriter of a Prakrta grammar.He was known also as चन्द्र and hence identified by some with Candragomin.
candraa famous Buddhist Sanskrit grammarian whose grammar existing in the Tibetan script, is now available in the Devanagar script. The work consists of six chapters or Adhyayas in which no technical terms or sanjnas like टि, घु are found. There is no section on Vedic Grammar and accents. The work is based on Panini's grammar and is believed to have been written by Candra or Candragomin in the 5th centnry A. D. Bhartrhari in his Vakyapadiya refers to him; confer, compare स नीतो बहुशाखत्वं चन्द्राचार्यादिभिः पुनः Vakyapadiya II. 489. A summary of the work is found in the Agnipurana, ch. 248-258.
candrakīrtia Jain grammarian of the twelfth century A.D. who has written a commentary named Subodhini on the Sarasvata Vyakaraha.
candragominnamed also चन्द्र, a Buddhist scholar who has written an easy Sanskrit Grammar based on the Astadhyayi of Panini. He is believed to have lived in North India in the fifth century A.D. See चन्द्र.
carmaśirasname of a Nirukta writer quoted by Yaska; confer, compare Nir.III.15.
cāṅgusūtraa treatise on the grammar Written by चाडगुदास in the Sutra form,which was named वैयाकरणजीवातु by him.
cātuḥsvāryathe view that there are four accents-the udatta, the anudatta, the svarita and the pracaya held by the Khandikya and the Aukhiya Schools.
cāndraname of a treatise on grammar written by Candra, who is believed to have been the same as Candragomin. The Grammar is based upon that of Panini, but it does not treat Vedic forms and accents. See the word चन्द्र a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. For details see pp. 375376 Patanjali Mahabhasya. Vol. VII, D.E. Society's Edition.
cāndravyākaraṇapaddhatiname of a conmentary on the चान्द्रव्याकरण written by अानन्ददत्त.
ciccandrikāname of a commentary on the Paribhasendusekhara written by Vishnu Shastri Bhat, in reply to the treatise named दूषकरदोद्भेदः See विष्णुशास्त्रिन्. For details see pp. 39, 40 of Vyakarana Mahabhasya Vol. VII. published by the D.E. Society, Poona.
cintāmaṇiname of a commentary on the Sutras of the Sakatayana Vyakarana written by यक्षवर्मन्, It is also called लधुवृत्ति.
cintāmaṇiprakāśikāa commentary on the चिन्तामाणि of यक्षवर्मन्, written by अाजतसेन in the twelfth century. See विन्तामणि.
cullibhaṭṭia grammarian who is supposed to have written a gloss ( वृत्ति ) on the Sutras of Panini; confer, compare तत्र च वृतिः पाणिनिप्रणीतानां सूत्राणां विवरणं चुल्लिभट्टिनल्लूरादि( V. 1. निर्लूरादि-) विरचितम् , Nyasa, on the benedictory verse of Kasika: वृत्तौ भाष्ये तथा घातुनामपारायणादिषु at the very beginning.
chāyāa learned commentary on Nagesa's Mahabhasyapradipoddyota written by his pupil बाळंभट्ट (possibly the same as, or the son of, वैद्यनाथ पायगुण्डे) who lived in the eighteenth century.
jagannātha(1)the well-known poet and scholar of Vyakarana and Alam kara who wrote many excellent poetical works. He lived in the sixteenth century. He was a pupil of कृष्णशेष and he severely criticised the views of Appaya Diksita and Bhattoji Diksita. He wrote a sort of refutation of Bhattoji's commentary Praudha-Manorama on the Siddhānta Kaumudi, which he named प्रौढमनेारमाखण्डन but which is popularly termed मनोरमाकुचमर्दन. His famous work is the Rasagangadhara on Alankrasastra; (2) writer of a commentary on the Rk-Pratisakhya by name Varnakramalaksana; (3) writer of Sarapradipika, a commentary on the Sarasvata Vyakarana.
jayantaauthor of तत्वचन्द्र a commentary on पाणिनिसूत्रवृत्ति written by Vitthala; (2) writer of a commentary named Vadighatamudgara on the Sarasvataprakriya.
jayarāmabhaṭṭācārya(1)a famous Bengalee scholar of Vyakarana and Nyaya who has written a small treatise dealing with syntax. The treatise is named कारकवाद.
jayādityaone of the famous joint authors ( जयादित्य and वामन ) of the well-known gloss ( वृत्ति ) on the Sutras of Panini, popularly called काशिकावृत्ति. As the काशिकावृत्ति is mentioned by It-sing, who has also mentioned Bhartrhari's Vakyapadiya, as a grammer treatise Written some 40 years before his visit, the time of काशिकावृत्ति is fixed as the middle of the 7th century A.D. Some scholars believe that जयादित्य was the same as जयापीड a king of Kasmira and बामन was his minister. For details, see pp. 386388 of the Vyakarana Mahabhasya Vol. VII published by the D.E. Society, Poona. See काशिका.
jāgrahitetivādaa short disguisition on the correctness of the word जाग्रहीता, written by a grammarian named Cakrin; confer, compare भट्टोजिदीक्षितग्राहग्रस्तं माधवदिग्गजम्। अमूमुचत् सत्यवर्यश्चक्री चक्रिप्रसादभाक्, colophon.
jātyaname of a variety of the Svarita or circumflex accent; the original svarita accent as contrasted with the svarita for the grave which follows upon an acute as prescribed by P. in VIII. 4.67, and which is found in the words इन्द्रः, होता et cetera, and others The jatya svarita is noticed in the words स्वः, क्व, न्यक्, कन्या et cetera, and others; .confer, compare उदात्तपूर्वं स्वरितमनुदात्तं पदेक्षरम्। अतोन्यत् स्वरितं स्वारं जात्यमाचक्षते पदे॥ जात्या स्वभावेनैव उदात्तानुदात्तसंगतिं विना जातो जात्यः । तं जात्यमाचक्षतै व्याडिप्रभृयः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) and commentary III. 4.
jinendrabuddhia reputed Buddhist Grammarian of the eighth century who wrote a scholarly commentary on the Kasikavrtti ofJayaditya and Vamana. The commentary is called न्यास or काशिकाविवरणपञ्जिका and the writer is referred to as न्यासकार in many later grammar works Some scholars identify him with पूज्यपाददेवनन्दिन् the writer of the जैनेन्द्रव्याकरण, but this is not possible as पूज्यपाददेवनन्दिन् was a Jain Grammarian who flourished much earlier.
jainendravyākaraṇaname of a grammar work written by Pujyapada Devanandin, also called Siddhanandin, in the fifth century A.D. The grammar is based on the Astadhyay of Panini,the section on Vedic accent and the rules of Panini explaining Vedic forms being,of course, neglectedition The grammar is called Jainendra Vyakarana or Jainendra Sabdanusasana. The work is available in two versions, one consisting of 3000 sutras and the other of 3700 sutras. it has got many commentaries, of which the Mahavrtti written by Abhayanandin is the principal one. For details see Jainendra Vyakarana, introduction published by the Bharatiya Jnanapitha Varadasi.
jainendravyākaraṇamahāvṛttiname of a commentary on the Jainendra Vyakarana, written by Abhayanandin in the ninth century A. D. see जैनेन्द्रव्याकरण a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
jaumāra( व्याकरण )a treatise on vya'karana written by Jumaranandin. See जुमरनन्दिन् a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. The Jaumara Vyakarana has no Vedic section dealing with Vedic forms or accents,but it has added a section on Prakrita just as the Haima Vyakaraha.
jaumārapariśiṣṭaa supplement to the Jaumara Vyakarana written by Goyicandra. See गीयीचन्द्र.
jaumārasaṃskaraṇathe revised version by Jumuranandin of the original grammar treatise in verse called संक्षिप्तसार written by KramadiSvara, The Jaumarasamskarana is the samc as.jaumara Vyakarana, which see a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
jauhotyādikaa root belonging to the जुहोत्यादिगण or the third conjugation. ज्ञानदीपिका name of a commentary on Amarasimha’s Amarakosa written by Sripati (Chakravartin) in the 14th century.
jñāpakasamuccayaa work giving a collection of about 400 Jñāpakas or indicatory wordings found in the Sūtras of Pānini and the conclusions drawn from them. It was written by Purușottamadeva, a Buddhist scholar of Pāņini's grammar in the twelfth century A. D., who was probably the same as the famous great Vaiyākaraņa patronized by Lakșmaņasena.See पुरुषेत्तमदेव.
tthe first consonant of the dental class of consonants which has got the properties श्वासानुप्रदान, अघोष, विवृतकण्ठत्व and अल्पप्राणत्व. When used as a mute letter by Panini, त् signifies the Svarita accent of the vowel of that affix or so, which is marked with it: e. g. कार्यम्, हार्यम्, पयस्यम् confer, compare P. VI.1.185. When appied to a vowel at its end, त् signifies the vowel of that grade only, possessed by such of its varieties which require the same time for their utterance as the vowel marked with त् , e. g. अात् stands for अा with any of the three accents as also pure or nasalised; अात् does not include अं or अ 3 confer, compare तपरस्तत्कालस्य P. I. 1. 70. The use of the indicatory mute त् for the a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. purpose is seen also in the Pratis akhya works; confer, compare Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.I. 114 Ṛktantra Prātiśākhya. 234.
tattvabodhinīname of the well-known commentary on Bhattoji's Siddhnta Kaumudi written by his pupil Jnanendrasarasvati at Benares. Out of the several commentaries on the Siddhantakaumudi, the Tattvabodhini is looked upon as the most authoritative and at the same time very scholarly.
tattvādarśaname of a commentary on the Paribhasendusekhara written by M. M. Vasudev Shastri Abhyankar in 1889 A. D. The commentary is more critical than explanatory,wherein the author has given the purpose and the gist of the important Paribhasas and has brought out clearly the differences between the school of Bhattoji and the school of Nagesa in several important matters.
taddhitakośaa work on the taddhita section written by Siromani Bhattacarya, who has also written तिङन्तशिरोमणि.
tantrapradīpaname of the learned commentary_written by मैत्रेयरक्षित, a famous Buddhist grammarian of the 12th century A. D. on the काशिकाविवरणपञ्जिका ( न्यास ) of Jinendrabuddhi। The work is available at Present only in a manuscript form, and that too in fragments. Many later scholars have copiously quoted from this work. The name of the work viz. तन्त्रप्रदीप is rarely mentioned; but the name of the author is mentioned as रक्षित, मैत्रेय or even मैत्रेयरक्षित. Ther are two commentaries on the तन्त्रप्रदीप named उद्द्योतनप्रभा and आलोक,
tavai(1)krt affix तवै for the infinitive affix तुम् in Vedic Literature. The affix तवै has a peculiarity of accent, namely that the word ending in तवै has got both the initial and ending vowels accented acute (उदात्त); exempli gratia, for example सोममिन्द्राय पातवै, हर्षसे दातवा उ; confer, compare P.III.4.9; and VI. 1.200; (2) krtya affix in Vedic Literature, exempli gratia, for example परिघातवै for परिघातव्यम्; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. III. 4.14.
tāthābhāvyaname given to the grave (अनुदात्त) vowel which is अवग्रह id est, that is which occurs at the end of the first member of a compound and which is placed between two acute vowels id est, that is is preceded by and followed by an acute vowel; exempli gratia, for example तनूSनप्त्रे, तनूSनपत्: confer, compare उदाद्यन्तो न्यवग्रहस्ताथाभाव्यः । V.Pr.I.120. The tathabhavya vowel is recited as a kampa ( कम्प ) ; confer, compare तथा चोक्तमौज्जिहायनकैर्माध्यन्दिनमतानुसारिभिः'अवग्रहो यदा नीच उच्चयॊर्मध्यतः क्वचित् । ताथाभाव्यो भवेत्कम्पस्तनूनप्त्रे निदर्शनम्'. Some Vedic scholars hold the view that the ताथाभाव्य vowel is not a grave ( अनुदात्त ) vowel, but it is a kind of स्वरित or circumflex vowel. Strictly according to Panini "an anudatta following upon an udatta becomes Svarita": confer, compare P.VIII.4.66, V.Pr. IV. 1.138: cf also R.Pr.III. 16.
tārānāthacalled तर्कवाचस्पति; a Bengali modern Sanskrit scholar and grammarian of the nineteenth century who has written a commentary called Sarala on the Siddhanta Kaumudi. He has edited many important Sanskrit works consisting of many kosas.
tiṅantaśiromaṇia work dealing with verbal forms written by शिरोमणिभट्टाचार्य.
tirumallaa southern writer of the commentary named सुमनोरमा on the Siddhānta Kaumudi of Bhattoji Diksita.
taittirīyaprātiśākhyacalled also कृष्णयजुःप्रातिशाख्य and hence representing possibly all the different branches or Sakhas of the कृष्णयजुर्वेद, which is not attributed definitely to a particular author but is supposed to have been revised from time to time and taught by various acaryas who were the followers of the Taittiriya Sakha.The work is divided into two main parts, each of which is further divided into twelve sections called adhyayas, and discusses the various topics such as letters and their properties, accents, euphonic changes and the like, just as the other Pratisakhya works. It is believed that Vararuci, Mahiseya and Atreya wrote Bhasyas on the Taittiriya Pratisakhya, but at present, only two important commentary works on it are available(a) the 'Tribhasyaratna', based upon the three Bhasyas mentioned a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. as the title shows, written by Somayarya and (b) the 'Vaidikabharana' written by Gopalayajvan. For details see Introduction to 'Taittiriya Pratisakhya' edition Govt Oriental Library Series, Mysore.
tairovyañjanaa kind of svarita or circumflex-accented vowel which follows an acute-accented vowel, with the intervention of a consonant between the acute accented vowel and the circumflex vowel which (vowel) originally was grave. e. g. इडे, रन्ते, हव्ये, काम्ये; here the vowel ए is तैरोव्यञ्जनस्वरित; confer, compare स्वरो व्यञ्जनयुतस्तैरोव्यञ्जनः, Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.I. 117.
tolappadīkṣitaa southern grammarian who has written a gloss called प्रकाश on the Siddhāntakaumudi of Bhattoji Diksita.
tripathagāname of a commentary on the Paribhasendusekhara written by Raghavendracarya Gajendragadkar, a resident of Satara and a pupil of Nilakanthasastri Thatte. He lived in the second half of the eighteenth and first half of the nineteenth century and wrote comentaries on important grammar works.
tripādīterm usually used in connection with the last three Padas (ch. VIII. 2, VIII. 3 and VIII. 4) of Panini’s Ashtadhyayi, the rules in which are not valid by convention to rules in the first seven chapters and a quarter, as also a later rule in which (the Tripadi) is not valid to an earlier one; confer, compare पूर्वत्रासिद्धम् P. VIII.2.1; (2) name of a critical treatise on Panini's grammar ("The Tripadi") written by Dr. H. E. Buiskool recently.
tribhāṣyaratnaname of a commentary on the Taittiriya Pratisakhya written by Somayarya. The commentary is said to have been based on the three Bhasya works attributed to the three ancient Vedic scholarsVararuci, Mahiseya and Atreya.
trilaॊcanaa scholar of grammar who has written a small work named अव्ययशब्दवृत्ति on the uses of indeclinables.
triśikhāname of a commentary on the Paribhasendusekhara written by Laksminrsimha in the 18th century.
tryambakaa grammarian of the nineteenth century, who resided at Wai in Satara District and wrote a commentary on the Paribhasendusekhara which is named त्र्यम्बकी after the writer.
thīma(THIEME, PAUL)a sound scholar of the present day, well versed in Sanskrit Grammar and Vedic Literature, who has written a critical treatise named "Panini and the Veda."
dayānandasarasvatia brilliant Vedic scholar of the nineteenth century belonging to North India who established on a sound footing the study of the Vedas and Vyakarana and encouraged the study of Kasikavrtti. He has written many books on vedic studies.
dayāpālaa.Jain writer who wrote a treatise named रूपसिद्धि.
dayāratnaa.Jain scholar who has written a grammar treatise on the Sarasvata Grammar called सारस्वतपरिभाषा.
dayārāmawriter of a commentary on the Mugdhabodha Vyakarana of Bopadeva.
darpaṇaname of a commentary on Kondabhatta's Vaiyakaranabhusanasara, written by a grammarian named Harivallabha.
darpaṇāname of a commentary on the Sabdakaustubha, written by Mannudeva or Mantudeva of the nineteenth century.
daśakaa name given to the treatise on grammar written by व्याघ्रपाद which consisted of 10 chapters; confer, compare दशकं वैयाघ्रपदीयम् Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P V. 1.58. The word also means students reading the work दशक; confer, compare दशका वैयाघ्रपदीया: Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV.2.65.
dākṣāyaṇaname, by which व्याडि, the author of the grammar work संग्रह is referred to. The word दाक्षायण indicates that व्याडि was a descendant of दक्ष, and, as Panini is called दाक्षीपुत्र, critics say that Panini and Vyadi were relatives; confer, compare शोभना खलु दाक्षायणस्य दाक्षायणेन वा संग्रहस्य कृतिः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. II.3.66.
dākṣāyaṇaname, by which व्याडि, the author of the grammar work संग्रह is referred to. The word दाक्षायण indicates that व्याडि was a descendant of दक्ष, and, as Panini is called दाक्षीपुत्र, critics say that Panini and Vyadi were relatives; confer, compare शोभना खलु दाक्षायणस्य दाक्षायणेन वा संग्रहस्य कृतिः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. II.3.66.
durghaṭavṛttiname of a grammar work explaining words which are difficult to derive according to rules of Panini. The work is written in the style of a running commentary on select sutras of Panini, devoted mainly to explain difficult formations. The author of it, Saranadeva, was an eastern grammarian who, as is evident from the number of quotations in his work, was a great scholar of the 12th or the 13th century.
durvalācāryaa grammarian who wrote a treatise on grammar दुर्वलीयव्याकरण, named after him. Besides this treatise, he has written commentaries on Nagesa's Laghumanjusa and Paribhasendusekhara.
dūṣakaradodbhedaname of a commentary, on the Paribhasendusekhara of Nagesa, believed to have been written by Gopalacārya Karhadkar, a grammarian of the 19th century and attributed to Bhimacarya. This commentary, which was written to criticize the commentary written by Visnusastri Bhat, was again criticized in reply by Visnusastri Bhat in his Ciccandrika ( चिच्चन्द्रिका ). See विष्णुशास्त्री भट.
dūṣaṇafault, objection; the word is used in connection with a fault found with, or objection raised against an argument advanced by, a writer by his opponent or by the writer himself who replies it to make his argument well established; confer, compareनित्यवादी कार्यपक्षे दूषणमाह-कार्येष्विति Maha. Prad. on P.I. 1.44 Vart.!6. hed; confer, compareनित्यवादी कार्यपक्षे दूषणमाह-कार्येष्विति Maha. Prad. on P.I. 1.44 Vart.!6.
devatādvandvaa compound word called द्वन्द्व whose members are names of deities; the peculiarities of this Dvandva compound are (a) that generally there are changes at the end of the first member, by virtue of which it appears similar to a word ending in the dual number, and (b) that both the words retain their original accents.exempli gratia, for example इन्द्रासोमौ, सौमापूषणा, अग्नीषोमाभ्यां, मित्रावरुणाभ्याम् ; for changes, confer, compare P. VI.3.25-31; for accent, confer, compare देवताद्वन्द्वानि चानामन्त्रितानि (द्विरुदात्तानिं) । इन्द्राबृहस्पतिभ्याम्, इन्द्राबृहस्पती इति त्रीणि Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.II.48, 49; confer, compare also देवताद्वन्द्वे च P. VI, 2.141.
devanandincalled also पूज्यपाद or पूज्यपाददेवनन्दिन् believed to have lived in the fifth century A. D. and written the treatise on grammar, of course based om Panini Sutras, which is known as जैनेन्द्र-व्याकरण or जैनेन्द्रशब्दानुशासन. The writer of this grammar is possibly mentioned as जैनेन्द्र in the usually guoted verse of Bopadeva :इन्द्रश्चन्द्रः काशकृत्स्नापिशली शाकटायनः पाणिन्यमरजैनेन्द्र जयन्त्यष्टादेिशाब्दिकाः. देवनन्दिन् was a great Jain saint and scholar who wrote many works on Jain Agamas of which सर्वार्थसिद्धि, the commentary on the तत्त्वार्थाधिगमसूत्र, is well-known.
devaśarmana grammarian who has written a disquisition on the philosophy of Vyakarana in verse, and added a commentary of his own on it which he has named as समन्वयप्रदीपसंकेत.
devanandina Jain grammarian of the eighth century who is believed to have written a grammar work, called सिद्धान्तसारस्वत-शब्दानुशासन. It is likely that देवनन्दिन् is the same as देवानन्दि-पूज्यपाद and the grammar work is the same as जैनेन्द्रशब्दानुशासन for which see देवनन्दिन् .
devīdīnamodern grammarian of the 19th century who has written a gloss on the Asādhyāyi of Panini.
devendraa Jain grammarian of the 13th century who has written a commentary named लघुन्यास on the शब्दानुशासन of Hemacandra. He has written many works on the Jain Agamas, of which a commentary on the Uttaradhyanasutra can be specially mentionedition He is called देवेन्द्रसूरि also.
daivaname of a system of grammar or a work on grammar the peculiarity of which is the omission of the एकशेष topic; confer, compare अनेकशेषं दैवं स्यात्
devendraname given to a work on grammar, presumably the same as जैनेद्र-शब्दानुशासन written by पूज्यपाददेवनन्दिन्. See जेनेन्द्रव्याकरण.
doṣoddharaṇaname of a commentary on Nagesa's Paribhisendusekhara written by मन्नुदेव of the eighteenth century.
doṣoddhāraname of a commentary on Nagesa's Laghusabdendusekhara written by मन्नुदेव of the eighteenth century.
drutabodhaname of a treatise on grammar written for beginners by Bharatasena or Bharatamalla of Bengal in the sixteemth century.
dharmadefined as ऋषिसंप्रदाय, the traditional practices laid down by the sages for posterity; confer, compareकेवलमृषिसंप्रदायो धर्म इति कृत्वा याज्ञिक्राः शास्त्रेण अनुविदधते Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). I. 1. Ahnika I ; cf also धर्मशास्त्रं in एवं च कृत्वा धर्मशास्त्रं प्रवृत्तम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 2.64, as also धर्मसूत्रकाराः in नैवेश्वर आज्ञापयति नापि धर्मसूत्रकाराः पठन्ति अपवादैरुत्सर्गा बाध्यन्तामिति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I. l.47; (2) religious merit, confer, compare धर्मोपदेशनमिदं शास्त्रमस्मिन्ननवयवेन शास्त्रार्थः संप्रतीयते , Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. VI. I. 84, cf also ज्ञाने घमै इति चेत्तथाSधर्मः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). I. 1. Ahnika l ; ' 3) property possessed by a thing or a letter or a word. e. g. वर्णधर्म; cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. I. 2.29; cf also Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. II. 1, 55, II. 3.33, VIII. 1. 4. confer, compare also Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) III. 8, 13 XIV. 1 et cetera, and others: ( 4 ) the characteristic of being in a substance; in the phrase अयं घटः the dharma viz.घटत्व is predicated of this (इदम्) or, in other words the designation pot ( घटसंज्ञा ) is the predication; the explanation in short, can be given as घटत्ववान् इदंपदार्थः or घटाभिन्नः इदंपदार्थ:
dhātua root; the basic word of a verbal form,defined by the Bhasyakara as क्रियावचनो धातुः or even as भाववचने धातु:, a word denoting a verbal activity. Panini has not defined the term as such, but he has given a long list of roots under ten groups, named dasagani, which includes about 2200 roots which can be called primary roots as contrasted with secondary roots. The secondary roots can be divided into two main groups ( l ) roots derived from roots ( धातुजधातवः ) and (2) roots derived from nouns ( नामधातवः ). The roots derived from roots can further be classified into three main subdivisions : (a) causative roots or णिजन्त, (b) desiderative roots or सन्नन्त, (c) intensive roots or यङन्त and यङ्लुगन्त: while roots derived from nouns or denominative roots can further be divided into क्यजन्त, काम्यजन्त, क्यङन्त, क्यषन्त, णिङन्त, क्विबन्त and the miscellaneous ones ( प्रकीर्ण ) as derived from nouns like कण्डू( कण्ड्वादि ) by the application of the affix यक् or from nouns like सत्य,वेद, पाश, मुण्ड,मिश्र, et cetera, and others by the application of the affix णिच्. Besides these, there are a few roots formed by the application of the affix अाय and ईय (ईयङ्). All these roots can further be classified into Parasmaipadin or Parasmaibhasa, Atmanepadin or Atmanebhasa and Ubhayapadin. Roots possessed of a mute grave ( अनुदात्त ) vowel or of the mute consonant ङ् added to the root in the Dhatupatha or ending in the affixes यड्, क्यङ् et cetera, and others as also roots in the passive voice are termed Atmanepadin: while roots ending with the affix णिच् as also roots possessed of a mute circumflex vowel or a mute consonant ञ़़् applied to them are termed Ubhayapadin. All the rest are termed Parasmaipadin. There are some other mute letters or syllables applied by Panini to the roots in his Dhatupatha for specific purposes; exempli gratia, for example ए at the end to signify prohibition of vrddhi to the penultimate अ in the aorist, exempli gratia, for example अकखीत् confer, compare P. VII.2.5; इर् to signify the optional substitution of अ or अङ् for the affix च्लि of the aorist, exempli gratia, for example अभिदत्, अभैत्सीत् ; confer, compare P.III. 1.57; उ to signify the optional application of the augment इ ( इट् ) before क्त्वा exempli gratia, for example शमित्वा, शान्त्वा; confer, compare P.VII. 2. 56; ऊ to signify the optional application of the augment इ ( इट् ) exempli gratia, for example गोप्ता, गेीपिता, confer, compare P.VII.2.44; अा to signify the prohibition of the augment इट् in the case of the past passive voice. participle. exempli gratia, for example क्ष्विण्णः, स्विन्नः, confer, compare P. VII.2.16; इ to signify the addition of a nasal after the last vowel e. g. निन्दति from निदि, confer, compare P. VII.1.58: ऋ to signify the prohibition of ह्रस्व to the penultimate long vowel before णिच्, e. g. अशशासत्, confer, compare P.VII. 4.2;लृ to signify the substitution of अङ् for च्लि in the aorist, exempli gratia, for example अगमत् confer, compare P. III.1.55: ओ to signify the substitution of न् for त् of the past passive voice.participle. exempli gratia, for example लग्नः, अापीनः, सूनः, दून: et cetera, and others; confer, compare P. VIII. 2.45. Besides these,the mute syllables ञि, टु and डु are prefixed for specific purposes; confer, compare P. III.2.187, III.3.89 and III. 3.88. The term धातु is a sufficiently old one which is taken by Panini from ancient grammarians and which is found used in the Nirukta and the Pratisakhya works, signifying the 'elemental (radical)base' for nouns which are all derivable from roots according to the writers of the Nirukta works and the grammarian Siktaayana; confer, compare नाम च धातुजमाह निरुक्ते व्याकरणे शकटस्य च तोकम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. III.3.1. Some scholars have divided roots into six categories; confer, compare तत्र धातवः षोढा (a) परिपठिताः भूवादयः, (b) अपरिपठता अान्दोलयत्यादयः, (c) परिपठितापरिपठिताः ( सूत्रपठिताः ) स्कुस्कम्भस्तम्भेत्यादयः, (d) प्रत्ययधातवः सनाद्यन्ताः, (e) नामघातवः कण्ड्वादयः, (f) प्रत्ययनामधातवः होडगल्भक्ली. बप्रभृतयः; cf Sringara Prak. I. For details see M.Bh. on P.I.3.I as also pp 255, 256 Vol. VII Vyakarana-Mahabhasya published by the D.E. Society, Poona.
dhātukalpalatikāa short treatise on the roots of the different conjugations written by a grammarian named Dhananjaya.
ghātukārikāvalīa grammatical work in verse written by Varadarja, the pupil of Bhattoji Diksita who lived in the 17th century, Besides Karikvali, Varadarja wrote लघुकौमुदी and मध्यकौमुदी also.
dhātupāṭha(1)name given in general to the several collections of roots given generally with their meanings by grammarians belonging to the various different schools of grammar. These collections are given as necessary appendices named खिल to their grammars by the well known grammarians of Sanskrit such as Panini, Sakatayana, and others; (2) a small treatise on roots written by Bhimasena of the 14th century.
dhātupārāyaṇaa grammatical treatise dealing with roots written as a supplementary work by Jumaranandin to his grammar work called Rasavati,which itself was a thoroughly revised and enlarged edition of the रसवती a commentary written by Kramadisvara on his own grammar named संक्षिप्तसार.Jumaranandin is believed to have been a Jain writer who lived in the fifteenth century A.D.
ghātuprakāśaa work dealing with roots Written as a supplementary work by Balarama-Pancanana to his own grammar named PrabodhaPrakasa.
dhātupratyayapañjikāa work dealing with verbal forms written by Dharmakirti, a Jain grammarian of the eighth century.
dhātupradīpaa work dealing with verbal forms written by Maitreya Raksita, a Buddhist writer and a famous grammarian belonging to the eastern part of India who lived in the middle of the twelfth century. He is believed to have written many scholarly works in connection with Panini's grammar out of which the Tantrapradipa is the most important one. The work Dhatupradipa is quoted by Saranadeva, who was a contemporary of Maitreya Raksita, in his Durghatavrtti on P. II. 4. 52.
dhāturatnamañjarīa treatise dealing with roots believed to have been written by Ramasimhavarman.
dhāturatnākaraa work dealing with roots believed to have been written by Narayana who was given the title वन्द्य. He lived in the seventeenth century; a work named सारावलि व्याक्ररण is also believed to have been written by him.
dhātuvṛttia general term applied to a treatise discussing roots, but specifically used in connection with the scholarly commentary written by Madhavacārya, the reputed scholar and politician at the court of the Vijayanagara kings in the fourteenth century, on the Dhatupatha ot Panini. The work is generally referred to as माधवीया-धातुवृति to distinguish it from ordinary commentary works called also धातुवृत्ति written by grammarians like Wijayananda and others.
dhātuvyākaraṇaa grammar dealing with Verbs believed to have been written by Vangasena.
nañsvarabalīyastvathe superiority, or strength of the accent caused by नञ्समास which sets aside the accent caused by the case affix; confer, compare विभक्तिस्वरान्नञ्स्वरो बलीयान् P. VI. 2.158 Vart. 13,
nandikeśvaraan ancient grammarian who has written a short work in verses on grammar in general, which is named नन्दकेश्वरकारिकासूत्र. There is a scholarly commentary upon it written by उपमन्यु.
nandikeśvarakārikāvivaraṇacalled also नन्दिकेश्वरकारिकाटीका a gloss written by Nandikeśvarakārikā.kārikābhāṣya by Upamanyu.on नन्दिकेश्वरकारिका.See नान्द्वेश्वरकारिका.
narendrasūrian old grammarian believed to have been the original writer of the Sarasvata Vyakarana, on the strength of references to him in the commentary on the Sarasvata Vyakarana written by क्षेमेन्द्र as also references in the commentary on the Prakriykaumudi by Vitthalesa. He is believed to have lived in the tenth century A;D.
navāhnikīname given to the first nine Ahnikas or lessons of the Mahabhasya which are written in explanation of only the first pada of the first Adhyaya of Panini's Astadhyayi and which contain almost all the important theories, statements and problems newly introduced by Patanjali.
nāgeśathe most reputed modern scholar of Panini's grammar, who was well-versed in other Sastras also, who lived in Benares in the latter half of the seventeenth and the first half of the eighteenth century. He wrote many masterly commentaries known by the words शेखर and उद्द्योत on the authoritative old works in the different Sastras, the total list of his small and big works together well nigh exceeding a hundredition He was a bright pupil of Hari Diksita, the grandson of Bhattoji Diksita. He was a renowned teacher also, and many of the famous scholars of grammar in Benares and outside at present are his spiritual descendants. He was a Maharastriya Brahmana of Tasgaon in Satara District, who received his education in Benares. For some years he stayed under the patronage of Rama, the king of Sringibera at his time. He was very clever in leading debates in the various Sastras and won the title of Sabhapati. Out of his numerous works, the Mahābhāṣya-Pradīpoddyota by Nāgeśa.on Kaiyata's Mahabhasyapradipa, the Laghusabdendusekhara on the Siddhanta Kaumudi and the Paribhasendusekhara are quite wellknown and studied by every one who wishes to get proficiency in Panini's grammar. For details see pp. 21-24 and 401-403, Vol. VII of the Patanjala Mahabhasya edition D. E. Society, Poona.
nārāyaṇa(1)name of a grammarian who wrote a commentary on the Mahabhsya-Pradipa; (2) a grammarian who is said to have written a gloss named Sabdabhusana on the Sutras of Panini as also some minor works named शब्दमञ्जरी, शब्दभेदनिरूपण, et cetera, and others
nityānandaparvatīyaa scholar of Sanskrit Grammar who wrote glosses on the Mahabhasyapradipa, on the Laghusabdendusekhara and on the Paribhasendusekhara. He was a resident of Benares where he coached many pupils in Sanskrit Grammar. He lived in the first half of the nineteenth century.
nipātaa particle which possesses no gender and number, and the case termination after which is dropped or elidedition Nipata is given as one of the four categories of words viz नामन्, आख्यात, उपसर्ग and निपात by all the ancient writers of Pratisakhya, Vyakarana and Nirukta works;confer, compare Nirukta of Yāska.I. 4, M.Bh. on I. 1. Ahnika l, Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XII. 8 et cetera, and others The word is derived from the root पत् with नि by Yaska who has mentioned three subdivisions of Niptas उपमार्थे, कर्मोपसंग्रहार्थे and पदपूरणे; confer, compare अथ निपाताः । उच्चावचेष्वर्थेषु निपतन्ति । अप्युपमार्थे । अपि कर्मोपसंग्रह्यार्थे । अपि पदपूरणाः । Nirukta of Yāska.I. 4. The Nipatas are looked upon as possessed of no sense; confer, compare निपातः पादपूरणः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XII. 8, Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.VIII. 50, ( commentary by Uvvata ). Panini has not given any definition of the word निपात, but he has enumerated them as forming a class with च at their head in the rule चादयोऽसत्वे where the word असत्वे conveys an impression that they possess no sense, the sense being of two kinds सत्त्व and भाव, and the Nipatas not possesssing any one of the two. The impression is made rather firm by the statement of the Varttikakra'निपातस्यानर्थकस्य प्रातिपदिकत्वम्' P. I. 2. 45 Vart. 12. Thus, the question whether the Nipatas possess any sense by themselves or not, becomes a difficult one to be answeredition Although the Rkpratisakhya in XII.8 lays down that the Nipatas are expletive, still in the next verse it says that some of them do possess sense; confer, compare निपातानामर्थवशान्निपातनादनर्थकानामितरे च सार्थकाः on which Uvvata remarks केचन निपाताः सार्थकाः, केचन निरर्थकाः । The remark of Uvvata appears to be a sound one as based on actual observation, and the conflicting views have to be reconciledition This is done by Bhartrhari who lays down that Nipatas never directly convey the sense but they indicate the sense. Regarding the sense indicated by the Nipatas, it is said that the sense is never Sattva or Dravya or substance as remarked by Panini; it is a certain kind of relation and that too, is not directly expressed by them but it is indicatedition Bhoja in his Srngaraprakasa gives a very comprehensive definition of Nipata as:-जात्यादिप्रवृत्तिनिमित्तानुपग्राहित्वेनासत्त्वभूतार्थाभिधायिनः अलिङ्गसंख्याशक्तय उच्चावचेष्वर्थेषु निपतन्तीत्यव्ययविशेषा एव चादयो निपाताः । He gives six varieties of them, viz. विध्यर्थ, अर्थवादार्थ, अनुवादार्थ, निषेधार्थ, विधिनिषेधार्थ and अविधिनिषेधार्थ, and mentions more than a thousand of them. For details see Bhartrhari's Vakyapadiya II. 189-206.
nipātanaa word given, as it appears, without trying for its derivation,in authoritative works of ancient grammarians especially Panini;confer, compareदाण्डिनायनहास्तिनयनo P. VI.4.174, as also अचतुरविचतुरo V.4.77 et cetera, and others et cetera, and others The phrase निपातनात्सिद्धम् is very frequently used by Patanjali to show that some technical difficulties in the formation of a word are not sometimes to be taken into consideration, the word given by Panini being the correct one; confer, compare M.Bh.on I.1.4, III.1.22 et cetera, and others et cetera, and others; cf also the usual expression बाधकान्येव निपातनानि. The derivation of the word from पत् with नि causal, is suggested in the Rk Pratisakhya where it is stated that Nipatas are laid down or presented as such in manifold senses; cf Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.)XII.9; cf also घातुसाधनकालानां प्राप्त्यर्थं नियमस्य च । अनुबन्घविकाराणां रूढ्यर्थ च निपातनम् M. Bh Pradipa on P. V.1.114: confer, comparealso Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II.1.27.
nipātāvyayopasargavṛttiashort treatise explaining and illustrating the use of indeclinables, written by a grammarian named तिलक who probably lived in Kasmira.
niravakāśapossessed of no scope of, or occasion for, application; the word अनवकाश is also used in this sense. The niravakasa rules always set aside the general rules which are always present wherever they i. e. the niravakasa rules are possible to be appliedition Niravakasatva is looked upon as one of the two criteria for बाध or sublation, the other one being सामान्यविशेषभाव as illustrated by the usual maxim, known as तक्रकौण्डिन्यन्याय. See तक्रकौण्डिन्यन्याय; confer, compare also अनवकाशा हि विधयो बाधका भवन्ति Par. Sek. on Pari. 64.
niruktaname of a class of works which were composed to explain the collections of Vedic words by means of proposing derivations of those words from roots as would suit the sense. The Nirukta works are looked upon as supplementary to grammar works and there must have been a good many works of this kind in ancient times as shown by references to the writers of these viz. Upamanyu, Sakatayana,Sakapuni,Sakapurti and others, but, out of them only one work composed by Yaska has survived; the word, hence has been applied by scholars to the Nirukta of Yaska which is believed to have been written in the seventh or the eighth century B. C. i. e. a century or two before Panini. The Nirukta works were looked upon as subsidiary to the study of the Vedas along with works on phonetics ( शिक्षा ), rituals ( कल्प ), grammar (व्याकरण) prosody (छन्दस्) and astronomy(ज्योतिष)and a mention of them is found made in the Chandogyopanisad. As many of the derivations in the Nirukta appear to be forced and fanciful, it is doubtful whether the Nirukta works could be called scientific treatises. The work of Yaska, however, has got its own importance and place among works subsidiary to the Veda, being a very old work of that kind and quoted by later commentators. There were some glosses and commentary works written upon Yaska's Nirukta out of which the one by Durgacarya is a scholarly one.It is doubtful whether Durgacarya is the same as Durgasimha, who wrote a Vrtti or gloss on the Katantra Vyakarana. The word निरुक्त is found in the Pratisakhya works in the sense of 'explained' and not in the sense of derived; confer, compare Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XV 6; V.Pr. IV. 19, 195.
niruktabhāṣyaa gloss on Yaska's Nirukta written by a modern scholar of grammar named Ugracarya in the eighteenth century A. D.
nirlūraname of a grammarian who is believed to have written a gloss ( वृत्ति ) on the Sutras of Panini on the strength of a reference to him in the Nyasa of Jinendrabuddhi; confer, compare वृत्तिः पाणिनीयसूत्राणां विवरणं चुल्लिभट्टिनिर्लूरादिप्रणीतम् Nyasa on I.1.1.
nīlakaṇṭhadīkṣitaa famous grammarian of the seventeenth century who wrote an independent work on the Paribhasas in Vyakarana named Paribhasavrtti. This Vrtti is referred to in the Paribhsendusekhara by Nagesabhatta and the views expressed in it are severely criticised in the commentary गदा.
nīlakaṇṭhamakhinnephew of Appaya Diksita who has written a commentary on Kaiyata's Mahabhasyapradipa.
nairukta(1)obtained by derivation, etymological; (2) etymologist, writer of a Nirukta work.
nyāyaratnamañjūṣāa work dealing with Vyākarana Paribhāsas or maxims as found in Hemacandra's system of grammar, written bv Hemahamsaganin, a pupil of Ratnasekhara, in 1451. The author has written a commentary also on the work, named Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa..
nyāyasaṃgrahaa work enumerating the Paribhāsas in Hemacandra's grammar, numbering 140 nyāyas out of which 57 nyāyas are said to have been given by Hemacandra himself at the end of his comment बृहद्वृत्ति on his Śabdānuśāsana. The work is written by हेमहंसगणि who has added a commentary to it called Nyayārthamaňjūșa by him, which is also known by the name न्यायरत्नमञ्जूषा which see a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
nyāyyaproper; fully justified न्यायादनपेतम् confer, compare P.IV.4.92; correct; regular; confer, compare यञञ्भ्यामुक्तत्वादर्थस्य न्याय्योत्पत्तिर्न भविष्यति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II.3.1 where Kaiyata however, explains the word differently. Kaiyata states that न्याय्य means a general rule; confer, compareउत्सर्गः पूर्वाचार्यप्रसिद्ध्या न्याय्य उच्यते Kaiyata on P. II. 3.1. By Pūrvācārya he possibly refers to the writers of the Prātiśākhyas and other similar works by ancient grammarians, where the word nyāya is used in the sense of 'a general rule '. See the word न्याय a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
nyāsa(1)literally position, placing;a word used in the sense of actual expression or wording especially in the sūtras; confer, compare the usual expression क्रियते एतन्न्यास एव in the Mahābhāșya, confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I. 1.11, 1.1.47 et cetera, and others; (2) a name given by the writers or readers to works of the type of learned and scholarly commentaries on vŗitti-type-works on standard sūtras in a Śāstra; e. g. the name Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa. is given to the learned commentaries on the Vŗtti on Hemacandra's Śabdānuśasana as also on the Paribhāşāvŗtti by Hemahamsagani. Similarly the commentary by Devanandin on Jainendra grammar and that by Prabhācandra on the Amoghāvŗtti on Śākatāyana grammar are named Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa.. In the same way, the learned commentary on the Kāśikāvŗtti by Jinendrabuddhi, named Kāśikāvivaranapaňjikā by the author, is very widely known by the name Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa.. This commentary Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa. was written in the eighth century by the Buddhist grammarian Jinendrabuddhi, who belonged to the eastern school of Pānini's Grammar. This Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa. has a learned commentary written on it by Maitreya Rakșita in the twelfth century named Tantrapradipa which is very largely quoted by subsequent grammarians, but which unfortunately is available only in a fragmentary state at present. Haradatta, a well-known southern scholar of grammar has drawn considerably from Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa. in his Padamañjarī, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Haradatta., which also is well-known as a scholarly work.
nyāsoddyotaa learned commentary on Jinendrabuddhi's Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa. written by Mallinātha, the standard commentator of prominent Sanskrit classics.
pañjikāa popular name given to critical commentaries by scholars; confer, compare काशिकाविवरणपञ्जिका by Jinendrabuddhi which is popularly known by the name न्यास.
paṇḍitawriter of Citprabhā, a commentary on the Paribhāșenduśekhara. A commentary on the Laghuśabdenduśekhara is also ascribed to him. He was a Gauda Brāhmaņa whose native place was Kurukșetra. He lived in the beginning of the nineteenth century.
patañjalithe reputed author of the Mahābhāșya, known as the Pātañjala Mahābhāșya after him. His date is determined definitely as the second century B.C. on the strength of the internal evidence supplied by the text of the Mahābhāșya itselfeminine. The words Gonardiya and Gonikāputra which are found in the Mahābhāșya are believed to be referring to the author himself and, on their strength he is said to have been the son of Goņikā and a resident of the country called Gonarda in his days. On the strength of the internal evidence supplied by the Mahābhāșya, it can be said that Patañjali received his education at Takșaśila and that he was,just like Pāņini, very familiar with villages and towns in and near Vāhika and Gāndhāra countries. Nothing can definitely be said about his birthplace, and although it might be believed that his native place was Gonarda,its exact situation has not been defined so far. About his parentage too,no definite information is available. Tradition says that he was the foster-son of a childless woman named Gonikā to whom he was handed over by a sage of Gonarda, in whose hands he fell down from the sky in the evening at the time of the offering of water-handfuls to the Sun in the west; confer, compareपतत् + अञ्जलि, the derivation of the word given by the commentators. Apart from anecdotes and legendary information, it can be said with certainty that Patañjali was a thorough scholar of Sanskrit Grammar who had studied the available texts of the Vedic Literature and Grammar and availed himself of information gathered personally by visiting the various schools of Sanskrit Grammar and observing the methods of explanations given by teachers there. His Mahābhāșya supplies an invaluable fund of information on the ways in which the Grammar rules of Pāņini were explained in those days in the various grammar schools. This information is supplied by him in the Vārttikas which he has exhaustively given and explainedition He had a remarkable mastery over Sanskrit Language which was a spoken one at his time and it can be safely said that in respect of style, the Mahābhāșya excels all the other Bhāșyas in the different branches of learning out of which two, those of Śabaraswāmin and Śańkarācārya,are selected for comparison. It is believed by scholars that he was equally conversant with other śāstras, especially Yoga and Vaidyaka, on which he has written learned treatises. He is said to be the author of the Yogasūtras which,hence are called Pātañjala Yogasūtras, and the redactor of the Carakasamhitā. There are scholars who believe that he wrote the Mahābhāșya only, and not the other two. They base their argument mainly on the supposition that it is impossible for a scholar to have an equally unmatching mastery over three different śāstras at a time. The argument has no strength, especially in India where there are many instances of scholars possessing sound scholarship in different branches of learning. Apart from legends and statements of Cakradhara, Nāgesa and others, about his being the author of three works on three different śāstras, there is a direct reference to Patañjali's proficiency in Grammar, Yoga and Medicine in the work of King Bhoja of the eleventh century and an indirect one in the Vākyapadīya of Bhartŗhari of the seventh century A. D. There is a work on the life of Patañjali, written by a scholar of grammar of the South,named Ramabhadra which gives many stories and incidents of his life out of which it is difficult to find out the grains of true incidents from the legendary husk with which they are coveredition For details,see Patañjala Mahābhāșya D.E.Society's edition Vol. VII pages 349 to 374. See also the word महाभाष्य.
padakāraliterally one who has divided the Samhitā text of the Vedas into the Pada-text. The term is applied to ancient Vedic Scholars शाकल्य, आत्रेय, कात्यायन and others who wrote the Padapātha of the Vedic Samhitās. The term is applied possibly through misunderstanding by some scholars to the Mahābhāsyakāra who has not divided any Vedic Samhitā,but has, in fact, pointed out a few errors of the Padakāras and stated categorically that grammarians need not follow the Padapāțha, but, rather, the writers of the Padapāțha should have followed the rules of grammar. Patañjali, in fact, refers by the term पदकार to Kātyāyana, who wrote the Padapātha and the Prātiśākhya of the Vājasaneyi-Samhitā in the following statement--न लक्षणेन पदकारा अनुवर्त्याः। पदकारैर्नाम लक्षणमनुवर्त्यम्। यथालक्षणं पदं कर्तव्यम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. III.1. 109; VI. 1. 207; VIII. 2.16; confer, compare also अदीधयुरिति पदकारस्य प्रत्याख्यानपक्षे उदाहरणमुपपन्नं भवति ( परिभाषासूचन of व्याडि Pari. 42 ) where Vyādi clearly refers to the Vārtika of Kātyāyana ' दीधीवेव्योश्छन्दोविषयत्वात् ' P. I. 1.6 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). I. The misunderstanding is due to passages in the commentary of स्कन्दस्वामिन् on the Nirukta passage I. 3, उब्वटटीका on ऋक्प्रातिशाख्य XIII. 19 and others where the statements referred to as those of Patañjali are, in fact, quotations from the Prātiśākhya works and it is the writers of the Prātiśākhya works who are referred to as padakāras by Patañ jali in the Mahābhāsya.
padacandrikāa grammar work on the nature of words written by कृष्णशेष of the sixteenth century.
padavyavasthāsūtrakārikāṭīkāa short gloss on the पदव्यवस्थासूत्रकारिका written by Udayakīrti, a Jain grammarian
paratvaposteriority; mention afterwards; the word is frequently used in works on grammar in connection with a rule which is mentioned in the treatise after another rule; the posterior rule is looked upon as stronger than the prior one, and is given priority in application when the two rules come in conflict although technically they are equally strong: confer, compare परत्वादल्लोप: ; Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I. 1.4 Vaart 7; 'परत्वाच्छीभाव: I. 1.11 et cetera, and others
paribhāṣāan authoritative statement or dictum, helping (1) the correct interpretation of the rules (sūtras) of grammar, or (2) the removal of conflict between two rules which occur simultaneously in the process of the formation of words, (पदसिद्धि), or (3) the formation of correct words. Various definitions of the word परिभाषा are given by commentators, the prominent ones beingपरितो व्यापृतां भाषां परिभाषां प्रचक्षते(न्यास);or, परितो भाष्यते या सा परिभाषा प्रकीर्तिता. The word is also defined as विधौ नियामकरिणी परिभाषा ( दुर्गसिंहवृत्ति ). परिभाषा can also be briefiy defined as the convention of a standard author. Purusottamadeva applies the word परिभाषा to the maxims of standard writers, confer, compare परिभाषा हिं न पाणिनीयानि वचनानि; Puru. Pari. 119; while Haribhaskara at the end of his treatise परिभाषाभास्कर, states that Vyaadi was the first writer on Paribhaasas. The rules तस्मिन्निति निर्दिष्टे पूर्वस्य, तस्मादित्युत्तरस्य and others are in fact Paribhaasa rules laid down by Panini. For the difference between परिभाषा and अधिकार, see Mahabhasya on II.1.1. Many times the writers of Sutras lay down certain conventions for the proper interpretation of their rules, to which additions are made in course of time according to necessities that arise, by commentators. In the different systems of grammar there are different collections of Paribhasas. In Panini's system, apart from commentaries thereon, there are independent collections of Paribhasas by Vyadi, Bhojadeva, Purusottamadeva, Siradeva, Nilakantha, Haribhaskara, Nagesa and a few others. There are independent collections of Paribhasas in the Katantra, Candra, Sakatayana,Jainendra and Hemacandra systems of grammar. It is a noticeable fact that many Paribhasas are common, with their wordings quite similar or sometimes identical in the different systemanuscript. Generally the collections of Paribhasas have got scholiums or commentaries by recognised grammarians, which in their turn have sometimes other glosses or commentaries upon them. The Paribhaasendusekhara of Nagesa is an authoritative work of an outstanding merit in the system of Paninis Grammar, which is commented upon by more than twenty five scholars during the last two or three centuries. The total number of Paribhasas in the diferent systems of grammar may wellnigh exceed 500. See परिभाषासंग्रह.
paribhāṣāprakāśāan independent treatise explaining the various Paribhasas in the system of Panini's grammar, written by Visnusesa of the famous SeSa family.
paribhāṣāpradīpārcisa scholarly independent treatise on Vyakarana Paribhasas written by Udayamkara Pathaka, called also Nana Pathaka, a Nagara Brahmana, who lived at Benares in the middle of the 18th century A. D. He has also written commentaries on the two Sekharas of Naagesa.
paribhāṣābhāskara(1)a treatise on the Paribhasas in Panini's grammar written by Haribhaskara Agnihotri, son of Appajibhatta Agnihotri, who lived in the seventeenth century : (2) a treatise on Paniniparibhasas, as arranged by Siradeva, written by Sesadrisuddhi,
paribhāṣārthasaṃgrahṛa treatise on the Paribhasas in the system of Panini's grammar written by Vaidyanatha Sastrin.
paribhāṣāvṛttia general name given to an explanatory independent work on Paribhasas of the type of a gloss on a collection of Paribhasas,irrespective of the system of grammar, whether it be that of Panini, or of Katantra, or of Jainendra or of Hemacandra. The treatises of Vyadi (Panini system), Durgasimha and BhavamiSra (Katantra system), Purusottamadeva and Siradeva (Panini system), Abhyankar (Jainendra system) and others are all known by the name Paribhasavritti.
paribhāṣāvṛttiṭippaṇīa very brief commentary on the Paribhasavrtti of Siradeva written by Srimanasarman of Campahatti.
paribhāṣāvṛttiṭīkāa commentary on the Paribhasavrtti of Siradeva written by Ramabhadra Diksita who lived in the seventeenth century A. D.
paribhāṣāsegraha'a work containing a collection of independent works on Paribhasas in the several systems of Sanskrit Grammar, compiled by M. M. K. V. Abhyankar. The collectlon consists of the following works (i) परिभाषासूचन containing 93 Paribhasas with a commentary by Vyadi, an ancient grammarian who lived before Patanjali; ( ii ) ब्याडीयपरिभाषापाठ, a bare text of 140 Paribhaasaas belonging to the school of Vyadi (iii) शाकटायनपरिभाषासूत्र a text of 98 Paribhasa aphorisms, attributed to the ancient grammarian Saka-tayana, or belonging to that school; [iv) चान्द्रपरिभाषासूत्र a text of 86 Paribhasa aphorisms given at the end of his grammar work by Candragomin; (v) कातन्त्रपरिभाषासूत्रवृत्ति a gloss on 65 Paribhas aphorisms of the Katantra school by Durgasimha; (vi) कातन्त्रपारभाषासूत्रवृत्ति a short gloss on 62 Paribhasa aphorisms of the Katantra school by Bhavamisra; (vii) कातन्त्रपरिभाषासूत्र a text of 96 Paribhasa rules belonging to the Katantra school without any author's name associated with it; (viii) कालापपरिभाषासूत्र a text of 118 Paribhasa rules belonging to the Kalapa school without any author's name associated with it; (ix) जैनेन्द्रपरिभाषावृत्ति a gloss written by M. M. K. V. Abhyankar ( the compiler of the collection), on 108 Paribhasas or maxims noticeable in the Mahavrtti of Abhayanandin on the Jainendra Vyakarana of Pujyapada Devanandin; (x) भोजदेवकृतपरि-भाषासूत्र a text of 118 Paribhasa rules given by Bhoja in the second pada of the first adhyaaya of his grammar work named Sarasvatikanthabharana; (xi) न्यायसंग्रह a bare text of 140 paribhasas(which are called by the name nyaya) given by Hema-hamsagani in his paribhasa.work named न्यायसंग्रह; (xii) लधुपरिभाषावृत्ति a gloss on 120 Paribhasas of the Panini school written by Puruso-ttamadeva; (xiii) वृहत्परिभाषावृत्ति con-taining 130 Paribhasas with a commentary by Siradeva and a very short,gloss on the commentary by Srimanasarman ( xiv ) परिभाषावृत्ति a short gloss on 140 Paribhasas of the Panini school written by Nilakantha; (xv) परिभाषाभास्कर a collection of 132 Paribhasas with a commentary by Haribhaskara Agnihotri; (xvi) bare text of Paribhasa given and explained by Nagesabhatta in his Paribhasendusekhara. The total number of Paribhasas mentioned and treated in the whole collection exceeds five hundredition
paribhāṣāsūcanaan old work on the Paribhasas in the system of Panini's Grammar, believed to have been written by Vyaadi, who lived after Kaatyayana and before Patanjali. The work is written in the old style of the MahabhaSya and consists of a short commentary on 93 Paribhasas.
paribhāṣenduśekharathe reputed authoritative work on the Paribhasas in the system of Paanini's grammar written by Nagesabhatta in the beginning of the 18th century A.D. at Benares. The work is studied very widely and has got more than 25 commentaries written by pupils in the spiritual line of Nagesa. Well-known among these commentaries are those written by Vaidyanatha Payagunde ( called गदा ), by BhairavamiSra ( called मिश्री), by Raghavendraacaarya Gajendragadakara ( called त्रिपथगा ), by Govindacarya Astaputre of Poona in the beginning of the nineteenth century (called भावार्थदीपिका), by BhaskaraSastri Abhyankar of Satara (called भास्करी ), and by M. M. Vaasudevasaastri Abhyankar of Poona (called तत्त्वादर्श ). Besides these, there are commentaries written by Taatya Sastri Patawardhana,Ganapati Sastri Mokaate, Jayadeva Misra, VisnuSastri Bhat, Vishwanatha Dandibhatta, Harinaatha Dwiwedi Gopaalacarya Karhaadkar, Harishastri Bhagawata, Govinda Shastri Bharadwaja, Naarayana Shastri Galagali, Venumaadhava Shukla, Brahmaananda Saraswati, ManisiSeSaSarma,Manyudeva, Samkarabhatta, Indirapati, Bhimacarya Galagali, Madhavacarya Waikaar, Cidrupasraya, Bhimabhatta, LakSminrsimha and a few others. Some of these works are named by their authors as Tikaas, others as Vyaakhyaas and still others as Tippanis or Vivrtis.
paśyantīname of the second out of the four successive stages in the origination or utterance of a word from the mouth. According to the ancient writers on Phonetics, sound or word ( वाक् ) which is constituted of air ( वायु ) originates at the Mulaadhaaracakra where it is called परा. It then springs up and it is called पश्यन्ती in the second stage. Thence it comes up and is called मध्यमा in the third stage; rising up from the third stage when the air strikes against the vocal chords in the glottis and comes in contact with the different parts of the mouth, it becomes articulate and is heard in the form of different sounds. when it is called वैखरी; confer, compare वैखर्या मध्यमायाश्च पश्यन्त्याश्चैतदद्भुतम् । अनेकतीर्थभेदायास्त्रय्या वाचः परं पदम् Vaakyapadiya I. 144, and also confer, compare पश्यन्ती तु सा चलाचलप्रतिबद्धसमाधाना संनिविष्टज्ञेयाकारा प्रतिलीनाकारा निराकारा च परिच्छिन्नार्थप्रत्ययवभासा संसृष्टार्थप्रत्यवभासा च प्रशान्तसर्वार्थप्रत्यवभासा चेत्यपरिमितभेदा । पश्यन्त्या रूपमनपभ्रंशामसंकीर्ण लोकव्यवह्यरातीतम् । commentary on Vaakyapadiya I. 144. confer, compare also तत्र श्रोत्रविषया वैखरी । मध्यमा हृदयदशेस्था पदप्रत्यक्षानुपपत्त्या व्यवहारकारणम् । पश्यन्ती तु लोकव्यवहारातीता। योगिनां तु तत्रापि प्रकृतिप्रत्ययविभागावगतिरस्ति | परायां तु न इति त्रय्या इत्युक्तम् । Mahābhāṣya-Pradīpoddyota by Nāgeśa.on चत्वारि वाक्परिमिता पदानि । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Ahnika 1.
pāṭha(1)recital of a sacred Vedic or Sastra work; the original recital of an authoritative text;(2) the various artificial ways or methods of such a recital; c.g. पदपाठ, क्रमपाठ et cetera, and others in the case of Vedic Literature: (3) an original recital such as the सुत्रपाठ, धातुपाठ, गणपाठ, वार्तिकपाठ and परिभाषापाठ in the case of the several systems of Sanskrit Grammar; the five Paathas are called पञ्चपाठी; (4) recitation; confer, compare नान्तरेण पाठं स्वरा अनुबन्धा वा शक्या विज्ञातुम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I.3.1 Vaart. 13; (5) reading, variant: confer, compare चूर्णादीनि अप्राण्युपग्रहादिति सूत्रस्य पाठान्तरम् Kaas. on P.V.2.134.
pāṭhakaor उदयंकरपाठक name of a scholar of Sanskrit Grammar who wrote an independent work on Paribhaasaas and commentaries on the ParibhaaSendusekhara and Laghu5abdendusekhara. See उदयंकर and परिभाषाप्रदीपार्चिस्.
pāṭhakīname popularly given to the commentaries written byउदयंकरपाठक. See पाठक.
pāṇinithe illustrious ancient grammarian of India who is wellknown by his magnum opus, the Astaka or Astaadhyaayi which has maintained its position as a unique work on Sanskrit grammar unparalleled upto the present day by any other work on grammar, not only of the Sanskrit language, but ofany other language, classical as well as spoken. His mighty intelligence grasped, studied and digested not only the niceties of accentuation and formation of Vedic words, scattered in the vast Vedic Literature of his time, but those of classical words in the classical literature and the spoken Sanskrit language of his time in all its different aspects and shades, noticeable in the various provinces and districts of the vast country. The result of his careful study of the Vedic Literature and close observation ofeminine.the classical Sanskrit, which was a spoken language in his days, was the production of the wonderful and monumental work, the Astaadhyaayi,which gives an authoritative description of the Sanskrit language, to have a complete exposition of which,several life times have to be spent,in spite of several commentaries upon it, written from time to time by several distinguished scholars. The work is a linguist's and not a language teacher's. Some Western scholars have described it as a wonderful specimen of human intelligence,or as a notable manifestation of human intelligence. Very little is known unfortunately about his native place,parentage or personal history. The account given about these in the Kathaasaritsaagara and other books is only legendary and hence, it has very little historical value. The internal evidence, supplied by his work shows that he lived in the sixth or the seventh century B. C., if not earlier, in the north western province of India of those days. Jinendrabuddhi, the author of the Kaasikavivaranapanjikaa or Nyasa, has stated that the word शलातुर् mentioned by him in his sUtra ( IV. 3.94 ) refers to his native place and the word शालातुरीय derived by him from the word शलातुर by that sUtra was, in fact his own name, based upon the name of the town which formed his native placcusative case. Paanini has shown in his work his close knowledge of, and familiarity with, the names of towns, villages, districts, rivers and mountains in and near Vaahika, the north-western Punjab of the present day, and it is very likely that he was educated at the ancient University of Taksasilaa. Apart from the authors of the Pratisaakhya works, which in a way could be styled as grammar works, there were scholars of grammar as such, who preceded him and out of whom he has mentioned ten viz., Apisali, Saakataayana, Gaargya, Saakalya, Kaasyapa, Bharadwaja, Gaalava, Caakravarmana Senaka and Sphotaayana. The grammarian Indra has not been mentioned by Paanini, although tradition says that he was the first grammarian of the Sanskrit language. It is very likely that Paanini had no grammar work of Indra before him, but at the same time it can be said that the works of some grammarians , mentioned by Panini such as Saakaatyana, Apisali, Gaargya and others had been based on the work of Indra. The mention of several ganas as also the exhaustive enumeration of all the two thousand and two hundred roots in the Dhaatupaatha can very well testify to the existence of systematic grammatical works before Paarnini of which he has made a thorough study and a careful use in the composition of his Ganapaatha and Dhaatupatha. His exhaustive grammar of a rich language like Sanskrit has not only remained superb in spite of several other grammars of the language written subsequently, but its careful study is felt as a supreme necessity by scholars of philology and linguistics of the present day for doing any real work in the vast field of linguistic research. For details see pp.151154 Vol. VII of Paatanjala Mahaabhsya, D. E. Society's Edition.
pāṇinisūtracalled also by the name अष्टक or पाणिनीय-अष्टक; name given to the SUtras of Paanini comprising eight adhyaayaas or books. The total number of SUtras as commented upon by the writers of the Kasika and the Siddhaantakaumudi is 3983. As nine sUtras out of these are described as Vaarttikas and two as Ganasutras by Patanjali, it is evident that there were 3972 SUtras in the Astaka of Paanini according to Patanjali. A verse current among Vaiyakarana schools states the number to be 3996; confer, compare त्रीणि सूत्रसहस्राणि तथा नव शतानि च । षण्णवतिश्च सूत्राणां पाणिनिः कृतवान् स्वयम् । The traditional recital by Veda Scholars who look upon the Astadhyayi as a Vedaanga, consists of 3983 Sutras which are accepted and commented upon by all later grammarians and commentators. The SUtras of Paanini, which mainly aim at the correct formation of words, discuss declension, conjugation, euphonic changes, verbal derivatives, noun derivatives and accents. For details see Vol.VII, Vyaakarana Mahaabhaasya, D. E. Society's edition pp. 152-162.
pāṇinisūtravārtikaname given to the collection of explanatory pithy notes of the type of SUtras written. mainly by Kaatyaayana. The Varttikas are generally written in the style of the SUtras, but sometimes they are written in Verse also. The total number of Varttikas is well-nigh a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. 5000, including Varttikas in Verse.There are three kinds of Varttikas; confer, compareउक्तानुक्तदुरुक्तानां चिन्ता यत्र प्रवर्तते । तं ग्रन्थं वार्तिकं प्राहुर्वार्तिकज्ञा मनीषिणः । Naagesa appears to have divided Varttikas into two classes as shown by his definition 'सूत्रेऽ नुक्तदुरुक्तचिन्ताकरत्वं वार्तिकत्वम् '. If this definition be followed, many of the Vaarttikas given in the Maahibhaasya as explaining and commenting upon the Sutras will not strictly be termed as Vaarttikaas, and their total number which is given as exceeding 5000, will be reduced to about 1400 or so. There are some manuscript copies which give this reduced number, and it may be said that only these Vārttikas were written by Kātyāyana while the others were added by learned grammarians after Kātyāyana. In the Mahābhāșya there are seen more than 5000 statements of the type of Vārttikas out of which Dr. Kielhorn has marked about 4200 as Vārttikas. At some places the Mahābhāșyakāra has quoted the names of the authors of some Vārttikas or their schools, in words such as क्रोष्ट्रीयाः पठन्ति, भारद्वाजीयाः पठन्ति, सौनागाः पठन्ति. et cetera, and others Many of the Vārttikas given in the Mahābhāșya are not seen in the Kāśikāvŗtti, while some more are seen in the Kāśikā-vŗtti, which, evidently are composed by scholars who flourished after Patańjali, as they have not been noticed by the Mahābhāșyakāra. It is very difficult to show separately the statements of the Bhāșyakāra popularly named 'ișțis' from the Vārttikas of Kātyāyana and others. For details see Vol. VII Mahābhāșya, D.E. Society's edition pp. 193-224.
pāṇinisūtravṛttia gloss on the grammer rules of Pāņini. Many glosses were written from time to time on the Sûtras of Pāņini, out of which the most important and the oldest one is the one named Kāśikāvŗtti, written by the joint authors Jayāditya and Vāmana in the 7th century A.D. It is believed that the Kāśikāvŗtti was based upon some old Vŗttis said to have been written by कुणि, निर्लूर, चुल्लि, श्वोभूति, वररुचि and others.Besides Kāśikā,the famous Vŗtti, and those of कुणि,निर्लूर and others which are only reported, there are other Vŗttis which are comparatively modern. Some of them have been printed, while others have remained only in manuscript form. Some of these are : the Bhāșāvŗtti by Purusottamadeva, Vyākaranasudhānidhi by Viśveśvara, Gūdhārthadīpinī by Sadāsivamiśra, Sūtravŗtti by Annambhatta, Vaiyākaraņasarvasva by Dharaņīdhara, Śabdabhūșaņa by Nārāyaņa Paņdita, Pāņinisūtravŗtti by Rāmacandrabhațța Tāre and Vyākaranadīpikā by Orambhațța. There are extracts available from a Sūtravŗtti called Bhāgavŗtti which is ascribed to Bhartŗhari, but, which is evidently written by a later writer (विमलमति according to some scholars) as there are found verses from Bhāravi and Māgha quoted in it as noticed by Sīradeva's Paribhāṣāvṛttiin his vŗtti on Pari.76. Glosses based upon Pāņini Sūtras, but having a topical arrangements are also available, the famous ones among these being the Praķriyākaumudī by Rāmacandra Śeșa and the Siddhāntakaumudī by Bhațțojī Dĩkșita. The मध्यमकौमुदी and the लघुकौमुदी can also be noted here although they are the abridgments of the Siddhānta Kaumudī. There are Vŗttis in other languages also, written in modern times, out of which those written by Bōhtlingk, Basu and Renou are well-known.
pāṇinīyaśikṣāa short work on phonetics which is taken as a Vedāņga work and believed to have been written by Pāņini. Some say that the work was written by Pińgala.
pāyaguṇḍa,pāyaguṇḍeA learned pupil of Nāgeśabhațța who lived in Vārǎņasī in the latter half of the 18th century A.D. He was a renowned teacher of Grammar and is believed to have written commentaries on many works of Nāgeśa, the famous among which are the 'Kāśikā' called also 'Gadā' on the Paribhāșenduśekhara,the'Cidasthimālā' on the Laghuśabdenduśekhara and the 'Chāyā' on the Mahābhāṣya-Pradīpoddyota by Nāgeśa.Bālambhațța Pāyaguņde, who has written a commentary on the Mitākșarā (the famous commentary on the Yajňavalkyasmŗti), is believed by some as the same as Vaidyanātha: while others say that Bālambhațța was the son of Vaidyanātha.
pāraskarādigaṇaor पारस्करप्रभृति, words headed by the word पारस्कर which have got some irregularity, especially the insertion of स् between the constituent words. For details see पारस्करप्रभृतीनि च संज्ञायाम् P. VI. 1.153 and the commentary thereon.
pārṣada​vyākhyāname given to the commentary written by विष्णुमित्र on the Ŗk Prātiśākhya.
pārṣadasūtravṛtiname given to the works of the type of commentaries written by उव्व​ट on the old Prātiśākhya books.
piṅgalācāryaan ancient scholar who is believed to be the first writer on Prosody, his work being known as छन्दःशास्त्र of पिङ्गल. Some scholars believe that he wrote a work on Phonetics which is now popularly called पाणिनीयशिक्षा.
piśel[ PISCHELL, RICHARD]a famous European Grammarian of the nineteenth century who wrote many articles on grammatical subjects and wrote a work entitled 'Prakrit Grammar.'
puñjarājaa famous grammarian of the 12th century who wrote a learned commentaty on a part of the Vāky apadīya of Bhartŗhari in which he has quoted passages from famous writers and grammarians such as भामह, कुन्तक, वामन, हेमच​न्द्र and others. The name is found written as पुण्यराज also.
puṇyasundaragāṇia jain grammarian who has written a commentary work । on the धातुपाठ of हेमच​न्द्र.
punarvacanause of the same word or expression, which, if noticed in the writing of the Sūtrakāra, is indicative of something in the mind of the Sūtrakāra; confer, compare अणः पुनर्वचनमपवादविषये अनिवृत्त्यर्थम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). of P III. 3. 12 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini).1; cf also पुनर्वचनमनित्यत्वज्ञापनार्थम् । Kāś. on P. I. 41"
puruṣottamadevaa famous grammarian believed to have been a Buddhist, who flourished in the reign of Lakșmaņasena in the latter half of the twelfth century in Bengal. Many works on grammar are ascribed to him, the prominent ones among which are the Bhāșāvŗtti and the Paribhāșāvŗtti, the Gaņavŗtti and the Jñapakasamuccaya and a commentary on the Mahābhāșya called Prāņapaņā of which only a fragment is available. Besides these works on grammar, he has written some lexicographical works of which Hārāvalī, Trikāņdaśeșa, Dvirūpakosa, and Ekaaksarakosa are the prominent ones. The Bhasavrtti has got a lucid commentary on it written by Srstidhara.
puruṣottamavidyāvāgīśaa famous grammarian of Bengal, who wrote the grammar work Prayogaratnamala in the fifteenth century. The work betrays a deep study and scholarship of the writer in the Mantrasāstra.
puṣādia class of roots headed by the root पुष् of the fourth conjugation whose peculiarity is the substitution of the aorist sign अ ( अङ्) for च्लि ; exempli gratia, for example अपुषत्, अशुषत्, अनुषत् et cetera, and others ofeminine. पुषादिद्युताद्यलृदितः परस्मैपदेषु P. III. 1.55.
pūrvanipātaplacing first (in a compound); priority of a word in a compound, as in the case of an adjectival word, For special instructions in grammar about priority see P. II.2.30 to 38.
pṛṣodarādia group of words, with irregularity in the coalescence of the two constituent members, collected together by Panini and mentioned together with the word पृषोदर at the head; confer, compare पृषोदरादीनि यथोपदिष्टम् P.VI. 3. 109; confer, compare also येषु लोपागमवर्णविकारः शास्त्रेण न विहिताः, दृश्यन्ते च तानि, यथोपदिष्टानि साधूनि भवन्ति । पृषोदरम् , बलाहकः, जीमूतः, पिशाचः, वृसी, मयूरः,पयोपवसनानाम्, दूढ्यः et cetera, and others Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.VI. 3.109.
pedubhaṭṭaa grammarian.who has written a treatise named औणादिकपदार्णव on the Unadi sutras.
paurastyavaiyākaraṇaa grammarian of the eastern school which is believed to have been started by जिनेन्द्रबुद्धि the writer of the gloss called न्यास on the Kasikavrtti. The school practically terminated with पुरुषोत्तमदेव and सीरदेव at the end of the twelfth century A.D. Such a school existed also at the time of Panini and Patanjali, a reference to which is found made in प्राचां ष्फ ताद्धतः P. IV. 1.17 and प्राचामवृद्धात्फिन् बहुलम् IV.1. 160 and प्राचामुपादेरडज्वुचौ च V.3.80 where the word is explained as प्राचामाचार्याणां by the writer of the Kasika.
pauṣkarasādian ancient grammarian who belonged to the dynasty of पुष्करसद्, whose views are quoted by the Varttikakara and the writers of the Pratisakhya works: cf चयो द्वितीयाः शारि पौष्करसादेः P. VIII. 4.48 Vart. 3; confer, compare also व्यञ्जनपरः पौष्करसादेर्न पूर्वश्च ञकारम् Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.V: confer, compare also Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XIII. 16; XIV. 2, XVII. 6.
prakampadepression of the voice after raising it as noticed in connection with the utterance of the svarita vowels in certain cases and in certain Vedic schools with a view to show the svarita nature of the vowel distinctly, in spite of the fact that such a depression is generally looked upon as a.fault; confer, compare असन्दिग्धान् स्वरान् ब्रूयादविकृष्टानकाम्पितान् Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) III.18 as also जात्योभिानिहितश्चैव क्षैप्रः प्रश्लिष्ट एव च । एते स्वराः प्रकम्पन्ते यत्रोच्चस्वरितोदयाः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) III. 19.
prakāra(l)attribute, attribute which differentiates, manner, difference; differentiating description: confer, compare कंचित्प्रकारं प्राप्तः इत्थंभूत: Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.II.3.21: (2) resemblance, similarity of one thing with another with slight deficiency: confer, compare प्रकारे गुणवचनस्य । प्रक्रारो भेदः सादृश्यं च। तदिह सादृश्यं प्रकारो गृह्यते । प्रकारे वर्तमानस्य गुणवचनशब्दस्य द्वे भवतः । पटुपटुः मृदुमृदुः । अपरिपूर्णगुण इत्यर्थः । परिपूर्णगुणेन न्यूनगुणस्य उपमाने सत्येवं प्रयुज्यते Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. VIII.1.12; (3) differentiating attribute; confer, compare प्रकारवचने थाल् V. 3.23, प्रकारवचने जातीयर् V. 3.69, स्यूलादिभ्यः प्रकारवचने कन् V. 4.3 where Kasika defines the word प्रकार as सामान्यस्य भेदको विशेषः प्रकार: Ka, on V. 3.23 and 69; (4) type, confer, compare इतिशब्दः प्रकारार्थः Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on V. 2.93: confer, compare also अदिशब्दः प्रकारे Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on देवपथादिभ्यश्च P.V.3.100; cf also अादिइाब्दः प्रकारे वर्तते । देवदत्तादय आढ्याः । देवदत्तप्रकारा इत्यर्थः M.Bh. on I.3.1 Vart. 11.
prakrama(l)the place of articulation, the place of the production of sound, such as throat, chest, palate and the like; confer, compare प्रक्रम्यन्ते अस्मिन्वर्णा इति प्रक्रमः स्थानमुच्यते Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Pradipa on सिद्धं तु समानप्रक्रमवचनात् P.I.2.30 Vart.2; (2) recital of Veda, described as क्रमपाठ confer, compare उभयथा च प्रक्रमे दोषो भवति M.Bh.on P. VIII. 4.28 confer, compare also "अष्टसु प्रक्रमेषु दोषो भवति"quoted in the Mahabhasya on P.VI. 1.172; (3) regularity in the position of words, regular order of words.
prakriyākaumudīa well-known work on Sanskrit Grammar by रामचन्द्रशेष of the 15th century, in which the subject matter of the eight chapters of Panini's grammar is arranged into several different sections forming the different topics of grammar. It is similar to, and possibly. the predecessor of, the Siddhanta Kaumudi which has a similar arrangement. The work was very popular before the Siddhinta Kaumudi was written. it has got many commentaries numbering about a dozen viz. प्रक्रियाप्रसाद, प्रक्रियाप्रकाश, प्रक्रियाप्रदीप, अमृतस्तुति, प्रक्रियाव्याकृति,निर्मलदर्पण,तत्वचन्द्र, प्रक्रियारञ्जन, प्रक्रियाविवरण and others of which the Prasada of Vitthalesa and the Prakasa of Srikrsna are the wellknown ones.
prakriyākaumudīvṛtticalled also प्रक्रियाकौमुदीव्याख्या or even कृष्णपण्डिता ( वृत्ति ) written by a learned grammarian named Krsnapandita belonging to the famous Sesa family of grammarians.
pakriyāpradīpaname of a commentary on the प्रक्रियाकौमुदी, written by चक्रपाणिदत्त.
prakriyāprasādaname of the scholarly commentary on Ramacandra's Prakriyakaumudi, written by Vitthalesa, the grandson of Ramachandra.
pratiṣedhabalīyastvathe priority of consideration given to rules laying down a prohibition, for instance, the prohibition of guna or vrddhi by the rule ङ्किति च P. I. 1.5 after giving due consideration to which, the injunctions i. e the guna and vidhi rules are to be applied; confer, compare निषेधाश्च बलीयांसः Par. Sek. Pari. 112; confer, compare also. एवमप्युभयोः सावकाशयोः प्रतिषेधबलीयस्त्वात्प्रतिषेधः प्राप्नोति, M.Bh. P. on III. 1.30.
pratyāhārasūtravicāraa short treatise explaining the pratyharas अण् , अट्, अश् et cetera, and others in the grammar of Panini; one such work is written by a southern grammarian named तिमण्णा.
pradīpapopular name of the famous commentary on the Mahabhasya of Patanjali written by the reputed grammarian Kaiyata in the eleventh century A. D. The cornmentary is a very scholarly and critical one and really does justice to the well-known compliment given to it, viz. that the Pradipa has kept the Mahabhasya alive which otherwise would have remained unintelligible and consequently become lost. The commentary प्रदीप is based on the commentary महाभाष्यदीपिका,or प्रदीपिका written by Bhartrhari, which is available at present only in a fragmentary form. The Pradipa is to this day looked upon as the single commentary on the Mahabhasya in spite of the presence of a few other commentaries on it which are all thrown into the back-ground by it.
pradīpavivaraṇacalled also उद्द्योत written by the well-known grammarian Nagesabhatta of Varanasi who flourished in the first half of the eighteenth century.
pradeśaliterally district; sphere of application, place of the application of a rule. The word is frequently used in this sense in the Kasika Vritti; confer, compare प्रत्ययप्रदेशाः प्रत्ययलोपे प्रत्ययलक्षणमित्येवमादयः Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. III.1.1 . confer, compare also अनुदात्तप्रदेशाः अनुदात्तौ सुप्पितौ इत्यादयः Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. I. 2.30. The word प्रदेश is also used in the sense of the place of use or utility; confer, compare संज्ञाशास्त्रस्य तु कार्यकालपक्षे न पृथग्वाक्यार्थबोधः किं तु प्रदेशवाक्येन सहैव । ... कार्यज्ञानं च प्रदेशदेश एव Par. Sek. Pari. 3.
prapāṭhakaa term used for a division of a work by an ancient writer, as for instance in the case of the Atharvapratisakhya.
pramāṇa(1)authority; authoritative proof; confer, compare लोकः अवश्यं शब्देषु प्रमाणम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I. 2.64 Vart. 29; (2) measurement, measure; confer, compare प्रमाणे द्वयसज्दघ्नत्र्मात्रचः P. V. 2.37; प्रमाणत; अकारो गुणः प्राप्तः Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. I. 1.50.
prayogapallavaa small treatise in verses on the conjugation of roots, written by Bhavanatha Misra, son of Ramapati.
prayogaratnamālāname of a recognised treatise on grammar written by पुरुषोत्तमविद्यावागीश of Bengal in the fourteenth century. The treatise explains many words which, although current in language and literature, cannot be easily formed by rules of grammar. The author has tried to form them by applying rules of grammar given in the grammatical systems of Panini and Katantra. The alphabet given in this treatise is according to the system of the Tantra Sastra which shows a scholarship of the author in that branch The grammar was studied much in Bengal and Assam.
pravaṇacircumflex accent; possessed of svarita accent; confer, compare सुर्वः प्रवण इत्येके । प्रकर्षेण वन्येत व्युत्क्षिप्यते इति प्रवणः स्वरितस्वरः Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.I. 47; confer, compare also प्रवणे यष्टव्यम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on VI. 2.33.
pravartakopādhyāyaa grammarian who wrote an explanatory gloss named कैयटप्रकाशिका on the महाभाष्यप्रदीप written by Kaiyatabhatta.
pravādinaḥscholars who explain the changes ( प्रवाद ) mentioned a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.; possibly the Padakaras or writers of the पदपाठ;cf प्रवादिनो दूणाशदूढ्यदूलभान् ... महाप्रदेशं स्वधितीव चानयेन्नुदच्च R Pr. XI. 20. Apparently प्रवादिनः ( nominative case. singular.) seems to be the word in the explanation of Uvvata.
prācīnamatathe view or doctrine of the former or rather older grammarians. The word is used in many commentary books and the meaning of the word is to be decided according to the context. For example in the works of Ramacandra, the author of the Prakriyakaumudi and his followers, the word refers to the view given by the writers of the Kasikavrtti and the commentaries thereon in the works of Bhattoji and his pupils, it refers to the writer of the Prakriyakaumudi in addition to the writers of the Kasika, while in the works of Nagesa it refers to the writings of Bhattoji and his pupils. For details see Vyakarana Mahabhasya Vol. V1I pp. 23-24 D. E. Society's Edition.
prācyāvaiyākaraṇaan eastern grammarian; the term प्राच्य (eastern) being a relative term, the east is to be taken with respect to the place in the context. The word प्राचां occurs many times in Panini's Sutras and the term प्राक् may refer to countries east of the river शरावती or सरस्वती in the Punjab. See प्राग्देश a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. प्राचां is understood by some commentators as referring to time, in which case, the word may refer to ancient grammarians आपिशलि, शाकटायन, इन्द्र and others who lived before Panini; confer, compare प्राचीनवैयाकरणतन्त्रे वाचनिकानि ...Par. Sek. Pari. 1. The word प्राचीन is, of course, mostly used in the sense of ancient, rather than the word प्राच्. For specific peculiarities of the eastern grammarians see pp. 148-149 Vyakarana Mahabhasya Vol. VII. D. E. Society's Edition.
prāṇapaṇāa gloss on the Mahabhasya of Patanjali, written by the famous easterm grammarian Purusottamadeva of the 12th century A. D., of which only a fragment of a few pages is available. As the legend goes, the name प्राणपणा was given to the gloss as it was accompanied by an oath on the part of the author that his life was at stake if he did even the slightest injustice to the author of the Mahabhasya.
prātiśākhyaa work on Vedic grammar of a specific nature, which is concerned mainly with the changes, euphonic and others, in the Pada text of the Samhita as compared with the running text, the Samhita itselfeminine. The Pratisakhya works are neither concerned with the sense of words, nor with their division into bases and affixes, nor with their etymology. They contain, more or less,Vedic passages arranged from the point of view of Samdhi. In the Rk Pratisakhya, available to-day, topics of metre, recital, phonetics and the like are introduced, but it appears that originally the Rk Pratisakhya, just like the Atharva Pratisakhya, was concerned with euphonic changes, the other subjects being introduced later on. The word प्रातिशाख्य shows that there were such treatises for everyone of the several Sakhas or branches of each Veda many of which later on disappeared as the number of the followers of those branches dwindledition Out of the remaining ones also, many were combined with others of the same Veda. At present, only five or six Pratisakhyas are available which are the surviving representatives of the ancient ones - the Rk Pratisakhya by Saunaka, the Taittiriya Pratisakhya, the Vajasaneyi PratiSakhya by Katyayana, the Atharva Pratisakhya and the Rk Tantra by Sakatayana, which is practically a Pratisakhya of the Sama Veda. The word पार्षद or पारिषद was also used for the Pratisakhyas as they were the outcome of the discussions of learned scholars in Vedic assemblies; cf परिषदि भवं पार्षदम्. Although the Pratisakhya works in nature, are preliminary to works on grammar, it appears that the existing Pratisakhyas, which are the revised and enlarged editions of the old ones, are written after Panini's grammar, each one of the present Prtisakhyas representing, of course, several ancient Pratisakhyas, which were written before Panini. Uvvata, a learned scholar of the twelfth century has written a brief commentary on the Rk Pratisakhya and another one on the Vajasaneyi Pratisakhya. The Taittiriya PratiSakhya has got two commentaries -one by Somayarya, called Tribhasyaratna and the other called Vaidikabharana written by Gopalayajvan. There is a commentary by Ananta bhatta on the Vajasaneyi Pratisakhya. These commentaries are called Bhasyas also.
prāthamyafirst preference; first place; priority; confer, compare कुतः पुनः प्राथम्यं किं शब्दतः आहोस्विदर्थतः । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I. 3. 1. Vart. 11.
prāmāṇikaauthoritative; those that talk with authority; confer, compare प्रामाणिकमतमेतत्, a phrase often used by commentators.
prāmāṇyaauthority; confer, compare यथोत्तरं मुनीनां प्रामाण्यम् S. K. on न वहुव्रीहौ P. I. 1.29; confer, compare also the usual expression वचनप्रामाण्यात् Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. VII. 2.7.
prauḍhamanoramāpopularly called मनोरमा also; the famous commentary on the Siddhantakaumudi of Bhattoji Diksita written by the author himself to explain fully in a scholarly manner the popular grammar written by him; , the word प्रौढमनेारमा is used in contrast with बालमनोरमा another commentary on the Siddhantakaumudi by Vasudevadiksita. On account of the difficult nature of it, it is usual to read the प्रौढमनेारमा upto the end of the Karaka-prakarana only in the Sanskrit PathaSalas before the study of the Sabdendusekhara and the Paribhsendusekhara is undertaken.
prauḍhamanoramākhaṇḍana(1)a grammatical work written by a grammarian named Cakrapani of the Sesa family of grammarians. The work is meant to refute the arguments of Bhattoji Diksita in his Praudhamanorama; (2) a grammar work written by the famous poet and rhetorician Jagannātha in refutation of the doctrines and explanations given in the Praudhamanorama by the stalwart Grammarian Bhattoji Diksita. The work is not a scholarly one and it has got a tone of banter. It was written by Jagannatha to show that he could also write works on Grammar and the bearded pedant Bhattoji should not be proud of his profound scholarship in Grammar. The work of Jagannatha was named मनोरमाकुचमर्दन possibly by his followers or even by himselfeminine.
prauḍhamanoramāṭīkāa commentary on Bhattoji DikSita's Praudhamanorama written by Bhattoji's grandson Hari Diksita. The commentary is called लघुशब्दरत्न or simple शब्दरत्न which is an abridgment of the author's work बृहच्छब्दरत्न. The Laghusabdaratna is widely studied along with the Praudhamanorama in the Pathasalas.
plākṣian ancient writer of a Pratisakhya work quoted in the Taittiriya Pratisakhya.See प्लाक्षायण a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. The words प्लाक्षि and प्लाक्षायण as also प्लाक्षी ( feminine ) occur in the Mahabhasya also, but not in the Ganapatha of Panini.
plutaprotracted, name given to vowels in the protracted grade. The vowels in this grade which are termed protracted vowels are possessed of three matras and in writing they are marked with the figure 3 placed after them. In pronunciation they take a longer time than the long or दीर्घ vowels; confer, compare ऊकालोज्झ्रस्वदीर्घप्लुतः P. I.2.27. The word is derived from प्लु (प्रु also) I Atmane to go, and explained as प्लवते इति, The word प्लवते is often found for प्लुतो भवति in the Pratisakhya works; cf also मात्रा ह्रस्वरतावदवग्रहान्तरं, द्वे दीर्धस्तिस्रः प्लुत उच्यते स्वरः । अधः स्विदासी३दुपरि स्विदासी३द् अर्थे प्लुतिर्भीरिव विन्दती३त्रिः ll Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I.16.
phaḍegan[ FADDEGON, BAREND ]a scholar of Sanskrit Grammar, who has written a book 'Studies in Panini's Grammar'.
barnel[ BURNELL., Dr.]a European Sanskrit scholar who has written a learned booklet 'Aindra School of Sanskrit Grammarians' which discusses the problem of the Aindra grammar. See ऐन्द्र.
barsvya(written as बर्त्स्व्य or बर्त्स्य possibly through mistake in the printed Calcutta Edition)connected with the socket of the teeth. As the utterance of र् proceeds from the socket of the teeth, र् is called बर्स्व्य. confer, compare उपसंहृततरे च जिह्वाग्रमृकारर्कारल्कारेषु बर्स्वेषूपसंहरति T.Pr.II.18.बर्स्व is explained here by the commentator as दन्तपङ्क्तेरुपरिष्टादुच्चप्रदेशेषु ऋकारस्य ॠकारस्य ऌकारस्य च बर्स्वाः स्थानम् । The word उपरिष्टात् in the explanation given a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. is questionable;the explanation given by Uvvata in his comment on वर्त्स्यमेकं इच्छन्ति रेफम् Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I. 20.viz. वर्त्सशब्देन दन्तमूलादुपरिष्टादुच्छूनः प्रदेश उच्यते appears better although apparently वर्त्स is written in the text for बर्स्व or वर्त्स्व.
balarāmawriter of a gloss named धातुप्रकाश on the Dhatupatha of Panini.
balīyastvarelative superiority in strength possessed by rules of grammar or by operations based on rules of grammar. This Superiority is decided generally on any one or more of the four recognised criteria such as परत्व, नित्यत्व, अन्तरङ्गत्व and अपवादत्व. The phrase अन्तरङ्गबलीयस्त्वात् very frequently occurs in the varttikas and in the Mahabhasya; confer, compare M.Bh. on P. III. 1.67, VI.i.17, 85 Vart. 15, VI. 4.62 and VII.1.1.
bahuvrīhia compound similar in meaning to the word बहुव्रीहि ( possessed of much rice ) which, in sense shows quite a distinct object than those which are shown by the constituent members of the compound; a relative or adjective compound. There are various kinds of the Bahuvrihi compound such as समानाधिकरणबहुव्रीहि, व्यधिकरणबहुव्रीहि, संख्याबहुव्रीहि, दिग्बहुव्रीहि, सहबहुव्रीहि, नञ्बहुव्रीहि, and अनेकपदबहुव्रीहि which depend upon the specific peculiarity noticed in the various cases. Panini in his grammar has not given any definition of बहुव्रीहि, but has stated that a compound other than those already given viz. अव्ययीभाव, द्वन्द्व and तत्पुरुष, is बहुव्रीहि and cited under Bahuvrihi all cases mentioned a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.; cf शेषो बहुव्रीहिः II. 3.23-28; also confer, compare अन्यपदार्थप्रधानो बहुव्रीहिः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. II. 1.6; II. 1.20; II. 1.49.
bālaṃbhaṭṭa( बाळंभट्ट )surnamed Payagunda or Payagunde, who has written a commentary on the commentary Mitaksara on the याज्ञवल्क्यस्मृति. Some scholars say that he was also a great grammarian and identical with वैद्यनाथ पायगुंडे who has written the commentary काशिका or गदा on the Paribhasendusekhara, the Cidasthimala on the Laghusabdendusekhara and commentaries on the Vaiyakaranabhusana,Sabdakaustubha and Bhasyapradipoddyota. Other scholars believe that Balambhatta was the son of Vaidyanatha and that he wrote only the commentary on Mitaksara called Balambhatti after him. (2) There was also a comparatively modern grammarian of Tanjore who has written small grammar works बालबोधिनी and बालरञ्जनी.
bālamanoramāname of a commentary on the Siddhanta-kaumudi of Bhattoji Diksita by Vasudeva Diksita, a grammarian of Tanjore. There is also another commentary called Balamanorama written by Anantadeva on the Siddhantakaumudi.
bālarañjanīname of a grammar work written by Balambhatta of Tanjore. See बालंभट्ट (2).
bāhulakathe application of a grammatical rule as a necessity to arrive at some forms in literature especially in the Vedic Literature as also in the works of standard writers, which cannot be explained easily by the regular application of the stated rules; confer, compare सुप्तिङुपग्रहलिदनराणां कालहलच्स्वरकर्तृयङां च । व्यत्ययमिच्छति शास्त्रकृदेषां सोपि च सिध्यति बाहुलकेन M.Bh. on P. III. 1.85; also confer, compare बाहुलकं प्रकृतेस्तनुदृष्टेः प्रायसमुच्चयनादपि तेषाम् । कार्यसशेषविधेश्च तदुक्तं नैगमरूढिभवं हि सुसाधु M.Bh. on P. III.3.1. In many sutras, Panini has put the word बहुलम् to arrive at such forms; e.g see P.II.1.32,57; II.3.62. II.4.39,73,76,84 et cetera, and others
binduanusvara, letter pronounced only through the nose; a dot to indicate the nasal phonetic element shown in writing a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. or sometimes after that letter or vowel, after which it is uttered; confer, compare अं इत्यनुस्वारः । अकार इह उच्चारणार्थः इति बिन्दुमात्रो वर्णोनुस्वारसंज्ञो भवति ।। Kat. I.1.19.
buiskūla[ BUISKOOL H. E. )A European grammarian who has written an essay on the last three Padas of Panini's Astadhyayi (त्रिपादी) under the title 'The Tripadi'.
buddhisāgarawriter of a grammar work who lived in the 11th century.
bṛhacchabdaratnaa learned commentary on the commentary मनोरमा of भट्टोजीदीक्षित; the commentary was written by हरिदीक्षित the grandson of Bhattoji. The work is called बृहच्छब्दरत्न in contrast with the लघुशब्दरत्न of the same author (हरिदीक्षित) which is generally studied at the Pathasalas all over the country. The work बृहच्छब्दरत्न is only in a Manuscript form at present. Some scholars believe that it was written by Nagesabhatta, who ascribed it to his preceptor Hari Diksita, but the belief is not correct as proved by a reference in the Laghusabdaratna, where the author himself remarks that he himself has written the बृहच्छब्दरत्न, and internal evidences show that लबुशब्दरत्न is sometimes a word-forword summary of the बृहच्छब्दरत्न. confer, compareविस्तरस्तु अस्मत्कृते बृहच्छब्दरत्ने मदन्तेवासिवृतलधुशब्देन्दुशेखरे च द्रष्टव्यः Laghusabdaratna. For details see Bhandarkar Ins. Journal Vol. 32 pp.258-60.
bṛhacchabdaratnaṭīkācalled बृहच्छब्दरत्नव्याख्या written by भवदेव.
bṛhadvyākaraṇasiddhāntamañjūṣāa grammar work written by Ramanatha Chobhe.
belavalakara[ SHRIPAD KRISHNA BELVALKAR ]a well-known Sanskrit scholar of the present day who has been the General Editor of the Mahabharata published by the Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute, Poona. He has written a book on grammar reviewing very briefly the various systems of Sanskrit grammar, which is named "Systems of Sanskrit Grammar".
bothaliṃgka[BOHTLINGK, OTTO]a German Sanskrit scholar and Grammarian of St.Petersberg, who has written a short gloss in German on Panini's Astadhyayi under the title "Panini's Grammatik" with an introduction and various indexes at the end. He has also critically edited Mugdhabodha of Bopadeva.
baॉpa[ BOPP, FRANZ ]a German Sanskrit scholar who has written the famous volumes of "The Comparative Sanskrit Grammar".
bopadevaa great Sanskrit scholar and grammarian belonging to Devagiri in the greater Maharastra who was supported by Hemadri of Devagiri. He resided at सार्थग्राम on the river Varada in the first half of the thirteenth century. He wrote a short treatise on Sanskrit Grammar, which has a number of peculiar abbreviations for the usual well-known grammatical termanuscript. His grammar had a wide spread in Bengal and it is today a very common text on Grammar Bengal. On this account some scholars believe that he lived in Bengal. He was the son of Kesava and pupil of Dhanesa. He is also the author, of the well-known work कविकल्पद्रुम on which he has written a commentary named कामधेनु or काव्यकामधेनु.
brahmakāṇḍaname given to the first section or Kanda of Bhartrhari's Vakyapadiya. It deals with Sphota, and in a way it contains in a nutshell the philosophy of Sanskrit Grammar.
brahmarāśithe sacred Sanskrit alphabet given in the fourteen sutras of Mahesvara, named Aksarasamamnaya which is called ब्रह्मराशि as it contains the basic letters of शब्द which is Brahma according to Grammarians; confer, compare सोयमक्षरसमाम्नायो वाक्यसमाम्नायः पुष्पितः फलितश्चन्द्रतारकवत् प्रतिमण्डितो वेदितव्यो ब्रह्मराशिः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Ahnika 2 end; confer, compare also एते पञ्चषष्टिवर्णा ब्रह्मराशिरात्मवाचः V. Pr.VIII. 25.
bhaṭṭojīsurnamed Diksita; a stalwart grammarian of the Panini system who flourished in the first half of the seventeenth century and wrote many independent books and commentaries such as the Siddhantakaumudi, the Praudhamanorama, the Vaiyakaranasiddhantakarika, the Sabdakaustubha and others. The most reputed work out of these, however, is the Siddhantakaumudi which is very popular even today and which has almost set aside other works of its kind such as the Prakriyakaumudi and others. Bhattoji was a Telagu Brahmana, as generally believed, and although he belonged to the South, he made Varanasi his home where he prepared a school of learned Grammarians. Although he carried on his work silently in Varanasi, he was envied by the reputed rhetorician of his time Pandita Jagannātha, who criticised his work ( Bhattojis work ) named Manorama very severely. See प्रौढमनोरमा a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. The Siddhāntakaumudi has got many commentaries of which the Tattvabodhini written by Bhattoji's pupil Jnanendrasarasvati is appreciated much by learned grammarians.
bhartṛharia very distinguished Grammarian who lived in the seventh century A. D. He was a senior contemporary of the authors of the Kasika, who have mentioned his famous work viz. The Vakyapadiya in the Kasika. confer, compare शब्दार्थसंबन्धोयं प्रकरणम् | वाक्यपदीयम् Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV.3.88. His Vyakarana work "the Vakyapadiya" has occupied a very prominent position in Grammatical Literature. The work is divided into three sections known by the name 'Kanda' and it has discussed so thoroughly the problem of the relation of word to its sense that subsequent grammarians have looked upon his view as an authority. The work is well-known for expounding also the Philosophy of Grammar. His another work " the Mahabhasya-Dipika " is a scholarly commentary on Patanjali's Mahabhasya. The Commentary is not published as yet, and its solitary manuscript is very carelessly written. Nothing is known about the birth-place or nationality of Bhartrhari. It is also doubtful whether he was the same person as king Bhartrhari who wrote the 'Satakatraya'.
bhavadevaa scholar of grammar who has written a commentary on the Brhacchabdaratna of Hari Diksita.
bhāgavata hariśāstrīa modern scholar of grammar who has written a commentary named Vakyarthacandrika on the Paribhasendusekhara of Nagesa; he lived in the first half of the eighteenth century.
bhāgavṛttione of the oldest commentaries on the Sutras of Panini, which, although not available at present, has been profusely quoted by Purusottamadeva and other Eastern Grammarians of the twelfth and later centuries. The authorship of the work is attributed to Bhartrhari, but the point is doubtful as Siradeva in his Paribhasavrtti on Pari. 76 has stated that the author of the Bhagavrtti has quoted from Maghakavya; confer, compare अत एवं तत्रैव सूत्रे भागवृत्तिः पुरातनमुनेर्मुनितामिति पुरातनीनेदिरिति च प्रमादपाठावेतौ गतानुगतिकतया कवयः प्रयुञ्जते न तेषां लक्षणे चक्षुरिति | Some scholars attribute its authorship to Vimalamati. Whosoever be the author, the gloss ( भागवृत्ति ) was a work of recognised merit; confer, compare काशिकाभागवृत्त्योश्चेत् सिद्धान्तं वेत्तुमस्ति धी: | तदा विचिन्त्यतां भातभीषावृत्तिरियं मम Bhasavrtti at the end. सृष्टिघर in his commentary on the Bhasavrtti also says " सा हि द्वयोर्विवरणकर्त्री."
bhāṇḍārakara[ Sir Ramakrishna Gopal Bhandarkar 1837-1925 A. D. ]a well-known scholar of Sanskrit Grammar who has written learned articles on many grammatical topics. He was a distinguished Professor of Sanskrit in the latter half of the nineteenth century. He was one of the pioneers of Sanskrit studies in India.
bhāvadevaa grammarian who has written a commentary on the Bŗhacchabdaratna of Hari Dīkșita; possibly the same as भवदेव.See भवदेव.
bhāṣāṃmañjarīa small treatise on grammar written by Vyaṅkaṭa Subbā Shastrī.
bhāṣāvṛttia short gloss on the Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. of Pāṇini in the l2th century by Puruṣottamadeva's Paribhāṣāvṛtti.adeva, a reputed scholar belonging to the Eastern school of grammarians which flourished in Bengal and Behar in the 10th, 11th and 12th centuries, The gloss is very useful for beginners and it has given a clear explanation of the different sūtras without going into difficult niceties and discussions. The treatise does not comment upon Vedic portions or rules referring to Vedic Language because, as the legend goes, king Lakṣmaṇa Sena, for whom the gloss was written, was not qualified to understand Vedic Language; confer, compare वैदिकभाषानर्हत्वात् Com. on Bhāṣāvṛtti by Sṛṣṭidhara. There is a popular evaluation of the Bhāṣāvṛtti given by the author himself in the stanza "काशिकाभागवृत्त्योश्चेत्सिद्धान्तं बोद्धुमस्ति धीः ! तदा विचिन्त्यतां भ्रातर्भाषावृत्तिरियं मम " at the end of his treatise; for details see पुरुषोत्तमदेव.
bhāṣyaa learned commentary on an original work, of recognised merit and scholarship, for which people have got a sense of sanctity in their mind; generally every Sūtra work of a branch of technical learning (or Śāstra) in Sanskrit has got a Bhāṣya written on it by a scholar of recognised merit. Out of the various Bhāṣya works of the kind given a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page., the Bhāṣya on the Vyākaraṇa sūtras of Pāṇini is called the Mahābhāṣya, on the nature of which possibly the following definition is based "सूत्रार्थो वर्ण्यते यत्र पदैः सूत्रानुकारिभिः| स्वपदानि च वर्ण्यन्ते भाष्यं भाष्यविदो विदुः ।" In books on Sanskrit Grammar the word भाष्य is used always for the Mahābhāṣya. The word भाष्य is sometimes used in the Mahābhāṣya of Patanjali (confer, compare उक्तो भावभेदो भाष्ये III.3.19, IV.4.67) where the word may refer to a work like लघुभाष्य which Patañjali may have written, or may have got available to him as written by somebody else, before he wrote the Mahābhāṣya.
bhīmabhaṭṭawriter of the commentary, named भैमी after him, on the Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa.
bhugnaname of a Saṁdhi or coalescence given by the writers of the Prātiśākhya works where the diphthong vowels ओ and औ, followed by any vowel which is not labial, are turned respectively into अव् and आव्: exempli gratia, for example ऋतेन मित्रावरुणावृतावृधावृतस्पृशा (Ṛ. Saṁh.I.2.8); confer, compare ओष्ठ्ययोन्योर्भुग्नमनोष्ठये वकारोत्रान्तरागमः । यथा ऋतेन मित्रावरुणावृतावृधावृतस्पृशा | अनोष्ठये इति किम्| वायो उक्थेभि: 2.2. (R.Saṁh. I.2.2). इत्यतः वाय उक्थेभि confer, compare Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) II.11.
bhaimavyākaraṇaa grammar treatise written by भौमसेन in the fourteenth century A. D.
bhaimīname of a commentary on the Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa written by Bhīmabhaṭṭa in the latter half of the eighteenth century.
bhairavamiśraone of the reputed grammarians of the latter half of the eighteenth century and the first half of the nineteenth century who wrote commentaries on several prominent works on grammar. He was the son of भवदेव and his native place was Prayāga. He has written the commentary called Candrakalā on the Laghuśabdenduśekhara, Parikṣā on the Vaiyākaraṇabhũṣanasāra, Gadā called also Bhairavī or Bhairavīgadā on the Paribhāṣenduśekhara and commentaries (popularly named Bhairavī) on the Śabdaratna and Lingānuśāsana. He is reported to have visited Poona, the capital of the Peśawas and received magnificent gifts for exceptional proficiency in Nyāya and Vyākaraṇa. For details see pp. 24 and 25 Vol. VII . Pātañjala Mahābhāṣya D. E. Society's Edition.
bhairavīname given to a commentary in general written by Bhairavamiśra, which see a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. The commentary on the Paribhāṣenduśekhara is more popularly known as Bhairavī.
bhojathe well-known king of Dhārā who was very famous for his charities and love of learning. He flourished in the eleventh century A.D. He is said to have got written or himself written several treatises on various śāstras. The work Sarasvatīkaṇṭhābharaṇa which is based on the Astādhyāyi of Pāṇini, but which has included in it the Vārttikas and Paribhāṣās also, has become in a way a Vyākaraṇa or a general work in grammar and can be styled as Bhoja-Vyākaraṇa.
bholānāthaa grammarian who has written a commentary named Saṁdarbhāmṛta on Bopadeva's Mugdhabodha.
mañjūṣāa popular name given to the work परमलघुमञ्जूषा of Nāgeśa on अर्थप्रक्रिया (science or method of interpretation) in Vyākaraṇa, which is generally read by advanced students. Nāgeśa has also written a bigger work on the same subject लघुमञ्जूषा which sometimes is also referred to by the word मञ्जूषा.
matonmajjāname of a commentary on Koṇḍabhaṭṭa's Vaiyākaraṇabhūṣaṇa written by a grammarian named वनमालिन्.
madhyakaumudīcalled also मध्यमकौमुदी a work on grammar which is an abridgment, to a certain extent, of Bhaṭṭojī's Siddhāntakaumudī. The treatise was written by Varadarāja, a pupil of Bhaṭṭojī for facilitating the study of the Siddhānta-kaumudi.
madhyama(1)the middle person ( मध्यमपुरुष ), confer, compare युष्मद्युपपदे...मध्यम: P. I. 4.105; confer, compare also Nirukta of Yāska.VII. 7; (2) middling tone or effort confer, compare मध्यमेन स वाक्ययोग: Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XVIII. 4, where the commentator explains the word as उच्चनीचसमाहारविलक्षण: वाक्प्रयोगः | the word मध्यमा is used in this sense as qualifying a mode of utterance. वृत्ति; confer, compare अभ्यासार्थे द्रुतां वृत्तिं प्रयोगार्थे तु मध्यमाम् ! Ṟ. Pr. XIII. 19; cf also चतुष्कला मध्यमायार्म् Ṛktantra Prātiśākhya. 32; (3) one of the seven modes of speech or tones. cf सप्त वाचः स्थानानि भवन्ति | उपांशुध्वाननिमदेापव्दिमन्मन्द्रमध्यमताराणि Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XXIII.4 and 5 and also कण्ठे मध्यमम् XVIII.11 where the commentatator explains मध्यम as यत्र कण्ठे स्थाने प्रयोग उपलभ्यते तन्मध्यमं नाम षष्ठं वाचस्स्थानम् | (4) one of the seven musical notes originating or proceeding from the Svarita accent confer, compare, स्वारतप्रभवा ह्येते षड्जमध्यमपञ्चमाः Pāṇ Śikṣā.
manoramā(1)the popular name given to the commentary प्रौढमनेारमा on the Siddhāntakaumudī of भट्टोजीदीक्षित by the author himself the commentary is a scholarly one and very extensive; and its first portion only upto the end of Kāraka is generally read in the Sanskrit Pāṭhaśālās;(2) name of a commentary on the Madhyasiddhāntakaumudī by Rāmasarman; (3) name given to a treatise discussing roots given in the Kātantra Grammar written by रमानाथशर्मा in the sixteenth century. The work is called कातन्त्रधातुवृत्ति also.
manoramākucamardananame given in a bantering tone to the treatise प्रौढमनोरमाखण्डन written by जगन्नाथपण्डित:
mantudevaknown also as मन्नुदेव, a famous grammarian of the eighteenth century who has written a commentary named दर्पणा on the Vaiyākaraṇabhūṣaṇasāra of Koṇḍabhaṭṭa and a commentary named दोषोद्धरण on Nāgeśa's Paribhāṣenduśekhara.
mallināthaa reputed commentator on many classical poetic and dramatic works, who flourished in the fourteenth century. He was a scholar of Grammar and is believed to have written a commentary on the Śabdenduśekhara and another named न्यासोद्योत on the न्यास of जिनेन्द्रबुद्धि.
mahādevaa grammarian of the Kātantra school who has written a gloss on the कातन्त्रवृत्ति of दुर्गसिंह.
mahānandaa grammarian of the eighteenth century who has written a gloss on Koṇḍabhaṭṭṭa's Vaiyākaraṇabhūṣanasāra.
mahābhāṣyaliterally the great commentary. The word is uniformly used by commentators and classical Sanskrit writers for the reputed commentary on Pāṇini's Sūtras and the Vārttikas thereon by Patañjali in the 2nd century B. C. The commentary is very scholarly yet very simple in style, and exhaustive although omitting a number of Pāṇini's rules. It is the first and oldest existing commentary on the Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. of Pāṇini, and, in spite of some other commentaries and glosses and other compendia, written later on to explain the Sutras of Panini, it has remained supremely authoritative and furnishes the last and final word in all places of doubt: confer, compare the remarks इति भाष्ये स्थितम्, इत्युक्तं भाष्ये, इत्युक्तमाकरे et cetera, and others scattered here and there in several Vyaakarana treatises forming in fact, the patent words used by commentators when they finish any chain of arguments. Besides commenting on the Sutras of Paanini, Patanjali, the author, has raised many other grammatical issues and after discussing them fully and thoroughly, given his conclusions which have become the final dicta in those matters. The work, in short, has become an encyclopedic one and hence aptly called खनि or अकर. The work is spread over such a wide field of grammatical studies that not a single grammatical issue appears to have been left out. The author appears to have made a close study of the method and explanations of the SUtras of Paanini given at various academies all over the country and incorporated the gist of those studies given in the form of Varttikas at the various places, in his great work He has thoroughly scrutinized and commented upon the Vaarttikas many of which he has approved, some of which he has rejected, and a few of which he has supplementedition Besides the Vaarttikas which are referred to a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page., he has quoted stanzas which verily sum up the arguments in explanation of the difficult sUtras, composed by his predecessors. There is a good reason to believe that there were small glosses or commentaries on the SUtras of Paanini, written by learned teachers at the various academies, and the Vaarttikas formed in a way, a short pithy summary of those glosses or Vrttis. . The explanation of the word वृत्तौ साधु वार्तिकम् given by Kaiyata may be quoted in support of this point. Kaiyata has at one place even stated that the argument of the Bhaasyakaara is in consonance with that of Kuni, his predecessor. The work is divided into eighty five sections which are given the name of lesson or आह्लिक by the author, probably because they form the subject matter of one day's study each, if the student has already made a thorough study of the subject and is very sharp in intelligence. confer, compare अह्ला निर्वृत्तम् आह्लिकम्, (the explanation given by the commentatiors).Many commentary works were written on this magnum opus of Patanjali during the long period of twenty centuries upto this time under the names टीका, टिप्पणी, दीपिका, प्रकाशिका, व्याख्या, रत्नावली, स्पूर्ति, वृत्ति, प्रदीप, व्याख्यानं and the like, but only one of them the 'Pradipa' of कैयटीपाध्याय, is found complete. The learned commentary by Bhartrhari, written a few centuries before the Pradipa, is available only in a fragment and that too, in a manuscript form copied down from the original one from time to time by the scribes very carelessly. Two other commentaries which are comparatively modern, written by Naarayanasesa and Nilakantha are available but they are also incomplete and in a manuscript form. Possibly Kaiyatabhatta's Pradipa threw into the background the commentaries of his predecessors and no grammarian after Kaiyata dared write a commentary superior to Kaiyata's Pradipa or, if he began, he had to abandon his work in the middle. The commentary of Kaiyata is such a scholarly one and so written to the point that later commentators have almost identified the original Bhasya with the commentary Pradipa and many a time expressed the two words Bhasya and Kaiyata in the same breath as भाष्यकैयटयोः ( एतदुक्तम् or स्पष्टमेतत् ).
mahābhāṣyadīpikāa very learned old commentary on the Mahabhasya of Patanjali written by the reputed grammarian Bhartrhari or Hari in the seventh century A. D. The commentary has got only one manuscript preserved in Germany available at present, of which photostat copies or ordinary copies are found here and there. The first page of the manuscript is missing and it is incomplete also, the commentary not going beyond the first seven Aahnikas. For details see page 383 Vol. VII Vyaakarana Mahabhasya D. E. Society's edition.
mahābhāṣyapradīpaa very scholarly commentary on Patanjali's MahabhaSya written by Kaiyatabhatta in the eleventh century, The commentary has so nicely explained every difficult and obscure point in the Mahabhasya, and has so thoroughly explained each sentence that the remark of later grammarians that the torch of the Mahabhasya has been kept burning by the Pradipa appears quite apt and justifiedition Kaiyata's commentary has thrown much additional light on the original arguments and statements in the Mahabhasya. There is a learned commentary on the Pradipa written by Nagesabhatta which is named vivarana by the author but which is well known by the name 'Uddyota' among students and teachers of Vyakarana. For details see pp. 389, 390 Vol VII, Patanjala Mahabhasya, D. E. Society's Edition.
mahābhāṣyapradīpaṭīkaname given to each of the various commentaries on the Pradipa of Kaiyata written by grammarians, out of which the commentaries of चिन्तामणि,रामचन्द्रसरस्वती, नारायण, नित्यानन्दपर्वतीय and one or two more are available in a manuscript form and those too quite incomplete.
mahābhāṣyapradīpaprakāśacalled also कैयटप्रकाश, name of the commentary on the Pradipa of Kaiyata by Nilankanthamakhi a versatile writer of the 17th century.
mahābhāṣyapradīpavivaraṇa(1)original name of the learned commentary on the 'Pradipa' of Kaiyata written by Nagesabhatta, a stalwart and epoch-making grammarian of the 18th century. The commentary is known popularly by the name 'Uddyota' or Pradipoddyota; (2) name of the commentary on Kaiyata's Pradipa by Nityaananda Parvatiya. The commentary is also known by the name दीपप्रभा.
mahābhāṣyalaghuvṛttiname given to the short gloss on the Mahabhasya written by the famous eastern grammar-scholar Maitreya-Raksita of the twelfth century.
mahābhāṣyavyākhyāname given to each of the explanatory glosses on the Mahabhasya written by grammarians prominent of whom were Purusottamadeva, Narayana Sesa, Visnu, Nilakantha and others whose fragmentary works exist in a manuscript form. महामिश्र name of a grammarian who wrote a commentary on Jinendrabuddhi's Nyasa. The commentary is known by the name Vyakaranaprakasa. महाविभाषा a rule laying down an option for several rules in a topic by being present in every rule: confer, compare महाविभाषया वाक्यमपि. विभाषा (P.II.1.11) and समर्थानां प्रथमाद्वा (P. IV.1.82) are some of the rules of this kindeclinable
maheśanandina Jain Grammarian who has written a work on the karaka topic of grammar, named षट्कारक.
mākṣavyaname of an ancient writer of Pratisakhya works mentioned in the Rk Pratisakhya: confer, compare R.Pr.I.2.
mācākīyaan ancient writer of a Pratisakhya work, who is quoted in the Taittiriya Pratisakhya as one, holding the view that य and व् preceded by अ and followed by उ and ओ respectively, are dropped provided they stand at the beginning of a Pada ( word ). माचाकीय, who belonged to the Yajurveda school, is said to have held this view which is generally held by the followers of the Rgveda: confer, compare उकारौकारपरौ लुप्यते माचाकी यस्य(Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.X.29) on which the commentator adds वह्वृचानामयं पक्षः.
māṇikyadevaa Jain writer who has written a gloss on the Unadisutras consisting of ten chapters popularly called उणादिसूत्रदशपादी.
māṇḍūkeyaname of an ancient writer of a Pratisakhya work referred to in the Rk Pratisakhya, confer, compare R.Pr.I.2. मातृकावर्ण letters of the alphabet. See अक्षरसमाम्नाय.
mādhavathe well-known epoch-making scholar of the 14th century who has written a number of treatises in various Saastras. His धातुवृम्त्ति is a well-known work in grammar
mitākṣarāname of a commentary on the Saarasvatasaara, written by Harideva.
miśrīa popular name given to the commentary written by मैरवमिश्र on the Paribhaasendusekhara in popular use by grammarians.
mugdhabodhaliterally instructions to the ignorant: a treatise on grammar similar to the Astadhyayi of Panini but much shorter, written by Bopadeva or Vopadeva an inhabitant of the greater Maharastra in the Vardha district, in the thirteenth century. After the fall of the Hindu rulers in Bengal, treatises like भाषावृत्ति and others written by eastern grammarians fell into the back-ground and their place was taken up by easier treatises written by Bopadeva and others.Many commentaries were written upon the Mugdhabodha, of which the Vidyanivsa is much known to grammarians
mugdhabodhaṭīkāa commentary work on Mugdhabodha;the name is given to commentaries written by Ramatarkavagisa(called मुग्धबोधपरिशिष्ट }, by Radhavallabha (called सुबोधिनी), . by Gangadhara (called सेतुसंग्रह ), by Durgadasa, by Dayarama and by Ramananda.
makḍonel[MACDONELL,ARTHUR ANTHONY ]a deep scholar of Vedic Gram. and Literature who has written an exhaustive Vedic Grammar; in treatment, at places he differs from Panini and follows a different method, but the manner of thinking and argument is on original lines.
meghavijayaa Jain grammarian of the seventeenth century who has written a grammar work, similar to the Siddhanta Kaumudi, on the Sabdanusasana of Hemacandra. The grammar work is called हैमकौमुदी, or चन्द्रप्रभा also.
maitrāyaṇīya prātiśākhyaa Pratiskhya or :Parsada work giving the peculiarities of Sandhi, accent and the like, in changing the Maitrayaniya Samhitaapatha into the Padapatha.
metreyarakṣitaa recognised scholar of Paninis' grammar who belonged to the Eastern part of India and fourished in the beginning of the twelfth century. As it appears from the name Maitreya Raksita he appears to have been a Buddhist grammarian. Subsequent writers in their works refer to him by the name Raksita alone, as also by the name Maitreya, but very rarely by the name Maitreya Raksita.He wrote many works on grammar of which the 'tantrapradipa'a learned commentary on Jinendrabuddhi's Nyasa on Kasika was a reputed one, which, although available in a fragmentary manuscript form today, has been profusely quoted by prominent grammarians after him.
mokṣeśvaraa grammarian of the fourteenth century who has written a commentary on the Katantra Vrtti of Durgasimha. He has written a commentary on the Akhyatavrtti of the Katantra school as also a short treatise dealing with the krt affixes called Krdvrtti.
yaḍlugantaśiromaṇia grammar work dealing with the frequentative roots written by Pandita Sesakrsna.
yathānyāsaṃas it is actually put in the rule or a treatise by the author. The phrase is often used in the Mahaabhaasya when after a long discussion, involving further and further difficulties, the author reverts to the original stand and defends the writing of the sUtra as it stands. सिध्यत्येवमपाणिनीयं तु भवति or सूत्रं भिद्यते । तर्हि यथान्यासमेवास्तु is the usual expression found in the Mahaabhaasya; cf, M.Bh. I.1. Aahnika 1, I.1.1, 9, 20, 62, 65 et cetera, and others
yadṛcchāśabdliterally a chance-word: Samjna-sabda or proper noun which is given accidentally without any found used attention to derivation or authority confer, compare अयं , तर्हि यदृच्छाशब्दोsपरिहार्यः। लृफिङ्: लृफिङ्ङ् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ).on Siva Stra2.
yāskaa reputed ancient Niruktakara or etymologist, of the 6th century B.C. or even a few centuries before that, whose work, the Nirukta, is looked upon as the oldest authoritative treatise regarding derivation of Vedic words. Yaska was preceded by a number of etymologists whom he has mentioned in his work and whose works he has utilisedition Yaska's Nirukta threw into the back-ground the older treatises on etymology, all of which disappeared gradually in the course of time.
yugapatprasaṅgasimultaneous possibility of the application of two rules or operations, when in grammar no option re : their application is admissible as it is admissible according to Mimamsa rules re : two operations enjoined by Vedic behests. In Grammar, only one of such rules applies, the priority of application being based upon the criteria of परत्व, नित्यत्व, अन्तरङ्गत्व and अपवादत्व: confer, compare शब्दपरविप्रतिषेधो नाम भवति यत्रोभयोर्युगप्रसङ्ग: | M.Bh. on VI. 1.158 Vart, 12.
yogavibhāgadivision of a rule which has been traditionally given as one single rule, into two for explaining the formation of certain words, which otherwise are likely to be stamped as ungrammatical formations. The writer of the Varttikas and the author of the Mahabhasya have very frequently taken recourse to this method of योगविभाग; confer, compare P.I.1.3 Vart. 8, I.1.17 Vart.1,I.1.61, Vart. 3; I. 4.59 Vart. 1, II. 4. 2. Vart.2, III.1.67 Vart. 5, III.4.2. Vart. 6, VI.I. I Vart. 5, VI.1.33 Vart.1 et cetera, and others Although this Yogavibhaga is not a happy method of removing difficulties and has to be followed as a last recourse, the Varttikakara has suggested it very often, and sometimes a sutra which is divided by the Varttikakara into two,has been recognised as a couple of sutras in the Sutrapatha which has come down to us at present.
yogārambhalaying down or citing a rule as done by the writers of sutras; confer, compare नैकं प्रयोजनं योगारम्भं प्रयोजयति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. III.1.67 Vart. 5; P. VII. 1.96 Vart. 2.
yaugapadyasimultaneity of occurrence; simultaneous possibility of the application of two rules which evidently cannot apply simultaneously, but scope has to be given to one of the two, the priority being decided on the criteria of परत्व, नित्यत्व, अन्तरङ्गत्व and अपवादत्व;confer, compare न चास्ति यौगपदद्येन संभव: Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I.1.57; cf also M.Bh. on I. 4.1 , I. 4.2, II. 1.3 et cetera, and others
ratnārṇavaname of a commentary on the Siddhantakaumudi written by Krsnamitra, a famous grammarian and Naiyayika who lived in the eighteenth century and wrote many commentary works on books in the Vyakarana and Nyāya Sastras.
ranu[RENOU,LOUIS]a sound Sanskrit scholar of France of the present time who has written some treatises and many articles on Sanskrit grammar out of which his works on the Terminology of Sanskrit Grammar, Kasika and Durghatavrtti reguire a special mention.
rapratyāhārakhaṇḍanaa small article showing that the short term र for the consonants र् and ल् need not be advocated as done by the learned old grammarians.The treatise was Written by Vaidyanatha Paya-gunde, the prominent pupil of Nagesabhatta.
rājārāmaśāstrī( कार्लेकर )a reputed scholar of Sanskrit grammar who resided at Varanasi and established a school of Sanskrit Grammarians there in the nineteenth century. He wrote a treatise on grammar named शब्दव्युत्पत्तिकौमुदी.
rāmakṛṣṇānandawriter of a commentary on the Mahabhasya which is available in a fragmentary form.
rāmacandra(1)रामन्वन्द्राचार्य (son of कृष्णाचार्य) the well-known author of the Prakriyakaumudi. He belonged to the Sesa family and the latter half of the fifteenth century is assigned as his date. He is believed to have been a resident of Andhra. His work, the Prakriyakaumudi, was a popular grammar treatise for some time before Bhattoji's SiddhantaKaumudi got its hold, and it had a number of commentaries written upon it especially by his descendants and members of his family which became well-known as the Sesa family of grammarians. The Prakriyakaumudi is named कृष्णर्किकरप्राक्रिया also. (2) There was a grammarian named Ramacandra who wrote a small treatise on grammar named विदग्धबोध. (3) There was another grammarian of the same name who was a pupil of Nagesabhatta of the eighteenth century and who wrote a small commentary called वृतिसंग्रह on Panini's Astadhyayi. (4) There was also another Ramacandra who was a scholar of Vedic grammar and who wrote the commentary named ज्योत्स्ना on the Vjasaneyi-Pratisakhya.
rāmacandrasarasvatīpupil of वासुदेवेन्द्रसरस्वती of the sixteenth century who has written a gloss named विवरण on the Mahabhasyapradipa of Kaiyata.
rāmanātha( विद्यावाचस्पति )a Sanskrit scholar of the 17th century who studied Vyakarana,. Dharma, Alamkara and other Sastras and wrote a grammar work कातन्त्ररहस्य, besides many books on other Sastras.
rāmanārāyaṇawriter of a commentary on the Sarasvataprakriya.
rāmabhadṛwriter of a commentary on the Prakriyakaumudi.
rāmabhadra dīkṣitason of यज्ञराम दीक्षित, a grammarian of Tanjore of the seventeenth century who wrote a commentary on the Paribhasavrtti of Siradeva named परिभाषावृत्तिव्याख्या. He has also written the ' life of Patanjali' ( पतञ्जलिचरित ) and many miscellaneous works, such as उणादिमणिदीपिका and others.
rāmarāmaa grammarian who has written a commentary on the Kavikalpadruma of Bopadeva.
rāmasiṃhṛvarmāpossibly the same king of Sringaberapura who patronised Nagesabhatta. He is said to have written some Small comments on " the Ramayana and a small grammar work named धातुरत्नमञ्जरी.
rudradevaa grammarian who has written a commentary on the Vaiyākaraņa-Siddhānta-Bhūșaņa of Koņdabhațța.
rūpamālā(1)an elementary work on Sanskrit grammar composed by Vimalasarasvatī, in which the Sūtras of Pāņini are arranged in different topics many of which are called माला, such as अजन्तमाला, हलन्तमाला, छान्दसमाला, अव्ययमाला and so on.(2) the name रूपमाला is also found given to a work giving collections of formed words written by Puņyanandana.
rūpasiddhiliterally the formation of words; the name रूपासिद्वि is given to a small literary work on the formation of words written by Dayānandasarasvatī.
rūpāvatāraa well-known work on word formation written by धर्मकीर्ति a Jain grammarian of the twelfth century. Scholars believe that this work was the first work of the form of topics which was taken as a model by the authors of the Prakriyākaumudī and the Siddhāntakaumudī.
lakṣaṇasaṃgrahaa work on grammar written by a grammarian named रत्नेश.
lakṣmaṇasūria grammarian who has written a booklet on the six dialects, which is named षड्भाषाचन्द्रिका.
lakṣmīnṛsiṃhaa grammarian of the eighteenth century who has written (1) Siddhāntakaumudīvilāsa, a commentary on the Siddhāntakaumudī and (2)Triśikhā, a commentary on Nāgeśa's Paribhāşenduśekhara.
laghu(1)a term used in the sense of light or short as contrasted with गुरु meaning heavy or long, which is applied to vowels like अ, इ et cetera, and others confer, compare ह्रस्वं लघु P.I. 4. 10; (2) brevity; brief expression;confer, compare लघ्वर्थे हि संज्ञाकरणम् M.Bh. on P.I.2,27 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 6 also संज्ञा हि नाम यतो न लघीय:; (3) small, as qualifying an effort in writing or explaining something as also in utterance; confer, compare व्यॊर्लघुप्रयत्नतरः शाकटायनस्य P.VIII.3.18.
laghukaumudīknown as लघुसिद्धान्तकौमुदी also, an abridged work based upon the Siddhāntakaumudi of Bhațțojī Dīkşita, written by Bhațțojī's pupil Varadarāja. The work is very valuable and helpful to beginners in grammar. It has got the same topics as the Siddhāntakaumudī, but arranged differently. The work, named सारसिद्धान्तकौमुदी is the same as लघुसिध्दान्तकौमुदी. Possibly सारसिद्धान्तकौमुदी was the original name given by the author.
laghunyāsa(1)short writing, brief putting in, brief expression; confer, compare सोयमेवं लघुना न्यासेन सिद्धे et cetera, and others; (2) the word is given as a name to a grammatical work, written by देवेन्द्रसूरि on the शब्दानुशासन of Hemacandra, possibly in contrast with the बृहन्न्यास written by Hemacandra himself or with Kāśikāvivaranapańjikā popularly called न्यास written by Jinendrabuddhi on the Kāśikāvŗti of Jayāditya and Vāmana. See न्यास.
laghuparibhāṣāvṛttian independent work on Paribhāşās written by Puruşottamadeva in the twelfth century A. D. called लघुपरिभाषावृत्ति in contrast with the बृहत्परिभाषावृत्ति of सीरदेव. The Vŗtti is named ' Lalitā ' also, by the author.
laghuprakriyāname of a grammar treatise based on the Sabdānuśāsana of Hemacandra written by Vinayavijaya where the sūtras of Hemacandra are arranged in different topics as in the Siddhāntakaumudī of Bhoțțojī.
ghumañjūṣāname of an independent work on the meaning of words and their interpretation written by Nāgeśa of which the परमलघुमञ्जूषा is a popular short extract by the author himselfeminine.
laghuśabdaratnaname of a commentary on Bhațțoji's Manoramā by his grandson Hari Dīkşita, which is generally read together with the Manoramā, by students upto the end of the Kāraka Chapter after they have completely read and mastered the Siddhāntakaumudī. The commentary is called लघुशब्दरत्न which dlfferentiates it from the बृहच्छब्दरत्न written by the same author viz. Hari Dīkşita.
laghuśabdenduśekharaname of a commentary on Bhațțojī's Siddhāntakaumudī written by Nāgeśa Bhațța, the stalwart Grammarian of the eighteenth century. The work is named लघुशब्देन्दुशेखर which differentiates it from the author's another work बृहच्छब्देन्दुशेखर of which the former is an abridgment. As the study of the Laghuśabdenduśekhara is very common and as the Bŗhatśabdenduśekhara is seldom studied, it is always the Laghuśabdenduśekhara that is understood by the simple and popular name Śekhara.
lalitāvṛttiname given to the Paribhāșāvŗtti written by Purușottamadeva, a famous grammarian of the Eastern branch of Pāņini's system which prevailed in Bengal from the eighth to the end of the twelfth century A.D. See पुरुषोत्तमदेव.
lāghavanyāyalaw of minimisation, parsimony in the use of words or parsimony in expression, followed generally by the Sūtra writers.
liṅga(1)sign or characteristic mark; generally the mute letter prefixed or suffixed to roots,affixes, or augments and their substitutes with a specific purpose; confer, compare किंचिल्लिङ्गमासज्य वक्ष्यामि Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ).on I.1.1 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini).7, अवयवे कृतं लिङ्ग समुदायस्य विशेषकं भवति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I.3.62 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 5; (2) proof, evidence ( प्रमाण ); the word is often used in the Paribhāșendușekhara and other works in connection with a rule or part of a rule quoted as an evidence to deduce some general dictum or Paribhāșā; (3) gender; confer, compare लिङ्ग स्त्रीलिङ्गपुंलिङ्गनपुंसकानि Kāś. on P. II. 3. 46; confer, compare also प्रातिपदिकग्रहणे लिङ्गविशिष्टस्यापि ग्रहणम्. Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa.Pari.71.The gender of a word in Sanskrit language does not depend on any specific properties of a thing; it simply depends on the current usage; confer, compare लोकाश्रयत्वाल्लिङ्गस्य which is often quoted in the Mahābhāsya; confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. II. 1.36, II.2.29, II.4.12, IV. 1.3, V.3.66, V.4.68, VIII.1.15. For details see Mahābhāșya on P.IV.1. 3 where after a long enlightening discussīon the definition संस्त्यानप्रसवौ लिङ्गम् is given.
lībiś[ LIEBICH, BRUNO ]a European grammarian belonging to Breslau who lived in the last quarter of the nineteenth and the first quarter of the twentieth century. He made a critical study of Sanskrit grammar and edited | the Cāndra Vyākaraņa and the Kșīratarańgiņī.
lopabalīyastvathe superior strength or superiority of elision as a grammatical operation in contrast with other operations, by virtue of which the elision, which is prescribed, takes place first and then other operations get a scope for their application; confer, compare सर्वविधिभ्यो लोपविधिर्बलीयान् Par.Śek. Pari. 93.
v(1)fourth letter of the class of consonants headed by य्, which are looked upon as semi-vowels; व् is a dental, soft, non-aspirate consonant pronounced as ब् in some provinces and written also sometimes like ब्, especially when it stands at the beginning of a word; (2) substitute for उ which is followed by a vowel excepting उ; e. g, मधु+अरि: = मध्वरि:; confer, compare इको यणचि P. VI. I. 77; (3) the consonant व्, which is sometimes uttered with very little effort when it is at the end of a word and followed by a vowel or a semivowel, or a fifth, fourth or third consonant or the consonant ह्. In such cases it is called लघूच्चारण; confer, compare यस्योच्चारणे जिह्वाग्रोपाग्रमध्यमूलानां शैथिल्यं जायते स लघूच्चारण: S. K. on P.VIII.3. 18;(4) solitary remnant of the affixes क्विप्,क्विन्, ण्वि and the like, when the other letters which are mute are dropped and the affix क्वप् or the like becomes a zero affix. This व् also is finally dropped; confer, compare वेरपृक्तस्य P. VI.1.67.
vacana(1)literally statement; an authoritative statement made by the authors of the Sutras and the Varttikas as also of the Mahabhasya; confer, compare अस्ति ह्यन्यदेतस्य वचने प्रयोजनम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on Siva Sutra 1 Vart. 1 The word is also used predicatively in the sense of वक्तव्यम् by the Varttikakara; confer, compare ऌति ऌ वावचनम् , ऋति ऋ वावचनम् ; (2) number, such as एकवचन, द्विवचन, बहुवचन et cetera, and others; confer, compare वचनमेकत्वद्वित्वबहुत्वानि Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana.on P.I.2.51 ; cf लुपि युक्तिवद् व्यक्तिवचने | लुकि अभिधेयवल्लिङ्गवचनानि भवन्ति। लवणः सूपः। लवणा यवागू:। M.Bh.on P.I. 2.57; (3) expressive word; confer, compare गुणवचनब्राह्मणादिभ्यः कर्मणि च P. V.1.124 where the Kasika explains the word गुणवचन as गुणमुक्तवन्तो गुणवचनाः; confer, compare also the terms गुणवचन, जातिवचन, क्रियावचन et cetera, and others as classes of words; confer, compare also अभिज्ञावचने लृट् P.III.2.112; (4) that which is uttered; confer, compare मुखनासिकावचनोनुनासिक:। मुखसहिता नासिका मुखनासिका । तया य उच्चार्यते असौ वर्ण: Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. I.1.8.
vajrākṛtithe form of वज्र or thunderbolt, in which ( form ) the Jihvamuliya ( letter ) is shown in writing; confer, compare वज्राकृतिजिह्वामूलीयः Kat. I.1.17. See जिह्वामूलीय.
vararuci(1)a reputed ancient grammarian who is identified with Katyayana, the prominent author of the Varttikas on the Sutras of Panini. Both the names वररुचि and कात्यायन are mentioned in commentary works in connection with the Varttikas on the Sutras of Panini, and it is very likely that Vararuci was the individual name of the scholar, and Katyayana his family name. The words कात्य and कात्यायन are found used in Slokavarttikas in the Mahabhasya on P.III.2.3 and III.2.118 where references made are actually found in the prose Varttikas (see कविधेो सर्वत्र प्रसारणिभ्यो ड: P.III. 2. 3 Vart and स्मपुरा भूतमात्रे न स्मपुराद्यतने P.III.2.118 Vart. 1)indicating that the Slokavarttikakara believed that the Varttikas were composed by Katyayana. There is no reference at all in the Mahabhasya to Vararuci as a writer of the Varttikas; there is only one reference which shows that there was a scholar by name Vararuci known to Patanjali, but he was a poet; confer, compare वाररुचं काव्यं in the sense of 'composed' ( कृत and not प्रोक्त ) by वररुचि M.Bh. on P. IV. 2.4. ( 2 ) वररुचि is also mentioned as the author of the Prakrta Grammar known by the name प्राकृतप्रकाश or प्राकृतमञ्जरी, This वररुचि, who also was कात्यायन by Gotra name, was a grammarian later than Patanjali, who has been associated with Sarvvarman, (the author of the first three Adhyayas of the Katantra Sutras), as the author of the fourth Adhyaya. Patanjali does not associate वररुचि with Kityayana at alI. His mention of वररुचि as a writer of a Kavya is a sufficient testimony for that. Hence, it appears probable that Katyayana, to whom the authorship of the Vajasaneyi Pratisakhya and many other works allied with Veda has been attributed, was not associated with Vararuci by Patanjali, and it is only the later writers who identified the grammarian Vararuci,who composed the fourth Adhyaya of the Katantra Grammar and wrote a Prakrit Grammar and some other grammar' works, with the ancient revered Katyayana, the author of Varttikas, the Vijasaneyi Pratisakhya and the Puspasutra; (3) There was a comparatively modern grammariannamed वररुचि who wrote a small treatise on genders of words consisting of about 125 stanzas with a commentary named Lingavrtti, possibly written by the author himselfeminine. (4) There was also another modern grammarian by name वररुचि who wrote a work on syntax named प्रयोगमुखमण्डन discuss^ ing the four topics कारक, समास, तद्धित and कृदन्त.
varavarṇinīname of a commentary on the Paribhsendusekhara written by Guruprasada Sastri, a reputed grammarian of the present cenutry.
varṇasamāmnāyaa collection of letters or alphabet given traditionally. Although the Sanskrit alphabet has got everywhere the same cardinal letters id est, that is vowels अ, इ et cetera, and others, consonants क्, ख् etc : semivowels य्, र्, ल्, व, sibilants श् ष् स् ह् and a few additional phonetic units such as अनुस्वार, विसर्ग and others, still their number and order differ in the different traditional enumerations. Panini has not mentioned them actually but the fourteen Siva Sutras, on which he has based his work, mention only 9 vowels and 34 consonants, the long vowels being looked upon as varieties of the short ones. The Siksa of Panini mentions 63 or 64 letters, adding the letter ळ ( दुःस्पृष्ट ); confer, compare त्रिषष्टि: चतुःषष्टिर्वा वर्णाः शम्भुमते मताः Panini Siksa. St.3. The Rk Pratisakhya adds four (Visarga, Jihvamuliya, Upadhmaniya and Anusvara ) to the forty three given in the Siva Sutras and mentions 47. The Taittiriya Pratisakhya mentions 52 letters viz. 16 vowels, 25class consonants, 4 semivowels,six sibilants (श्, ष् , स्, ह् , क्, प् , ) and anusvara. The Vajasaneyi Pratisakhya mentions 65 letters 3 varieties of अ, इ, उ, ऋ and लृ, two varieties of ए, ऐ, ओ, औ, 25 class-consonants, four semivowels, four sibilants, and जिह्वामूलीय, उपध्मानीय, अनुस्वार, विसर्जनीय, नासिक्य and four यम letters; confer, compare एते पञ्चषष्टिवर्णा ब्रह्मराशिरात्मवाचः Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.VIII. 25. The Rk Tantra gives 57 letters viz. 14 vowels, 25 class consonants, 4 semivowels, 4 sibilants, Visarga,.Jihvamuliya, Upadhmaniya, Anunasika, 4_yamas and two Anusvaras. The Rk Tantra gives two different serial orders, the Uddesa (common) and the Upadesa (traditional). The common order or Uddesa gives the 14 vowels beginning with अ, then the 25 class consonants, then the four semivowels, the four sibilants and lastly the eight ayogavahas, viz. the visarjanya and others. The traditional order gives the diphthongs first, then long vowels ( अा, ऋ, लॄ, ई and ऊ ) then short vowels (ऋ, लृ, इ, उ, and lastly अ ), then semivowels, then the five fifth consonants, the five fourths, the five thirds, the five seconds, the five firsts, then the four sibilants and then the eight ayogavaha letters and two Ausvaras instead of one anuswara. Panini appears to have followed the traditional order with a few changes that are necessary for the technigue of his work.
varṇikuberanāthaor वर्णिकुवेरानन्द an old writer on grammar who has written a work named शब्दविवरण on the meanings of words. The work forms a part of his bigger work दानभागवत. Both the works are incomplete. The शब्दविवरण is based mostly upon ancient grammar works of Patanjali Vararuci, Varttikakara, Sarvavarman, Bhartrhari and others.
varsvyaor वर्त्य gingival, produced at the gums; the word वर्स्व is probably the correct word meaning the root of the teeth or gums; the word वर्स was also used in the same sense as वर्स्व from which the word वर्स्य could be derivedition बर्स्व्य and बर्स्य are only the variant pronnnciations of वर्स्व्य and वर्स्य.The word वर्त्स्य, with त् inserted between र् and स् , is given a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. as explained by Uvvata from वर्त्स. It is very likely that वर्त्स is wrongly written for वर्स्व or वर्स।
vākaranāgal[WACKERNAGELL]German Professor and scholar of Sanskrit Grammar who collaborated in the work of editing 'Altindisch Grammatik'.
vākyakāraa term used for a writer who composes a work in pithy, brief assertions in the manner of sutras, such as the Varttikas. The term is found used in Bhartrhari's Mahabhasyadipika where by contrast with the term Bhasyakara it possibly refers to the varttikakara Katyayana; confer, compare एषा भाष्यकारस्य कल्पना न वाक्यकारस्य Bhartrhari Mahabhasyadipika. confer, compare also Nagesa's statement वाक्यकारो वार्तिकरमारभते: confer, compare also चुलुम्पादयो वाक्यकारीया ; Madhaviya Dhatuvrtti.
vākyapadīname of a work on the denotation of words in verse-form with a comentary of his own written by a grammarian named गङ्गादास. The name वाक्यपदी is confounded with वाक्यपदीय of Bhartrhari through mistake.
vākyapadīyaa celebrated work on meanings of words and sentences written by the famous grammarian Bhartrhari ( called also Hari ) of the seventh century. The work is looked upon as a final authority regarding the grammatical treatment of words and sentences,for their interpretation and often quoted by later grammarians. It consists of three chapters the Padakanda or Brahmakanda, the Vakyakanda and the Samkirnakanda, and has got an excellent commentary written by Punyaraja and Helaraja.
vākyapadīyaṭīkāname of a commentary on Bhartrhari's Vakyapadiya written by Punyaraja on the first and the second Kanda. Some scholars hold the view that the commentary on the first knda was written by Bhartrhari himselfeminine.
vākyaparisamāpticompletion of the idea to be expressed in a sentence or in a group of sentences by the wording actually given, leaving nothing to be understood as contrasted with वाक्यापरिसमाप्ति used in the Mahabhasya: confer, compare वाक्यापरिसमाप्तेर्वा P.I.1.10 vart. 4 and the Mahabhasya thereon. There are two ways in which such a completion takes place,singly and collectively; cf प्रत्येकं वाक्यपरिसमाप्तिः: illustrated by the usual example देवदत्तयज्ञदत्तविष्णुमित्रा भोज्यन्ताम् where Patanjali remarks प्रत्येकं ( प्रत्यवयवं) भुजिः परिसमाप्यते; cf also समुदाये वाक्यपरिसमाप्तिः where Patajali remarks गर्गा: शतं दण्ड्यन्ताम् | अर्थिनश्च राजानो हिरण्येन भवन्ति न च प्रत्येकं दण्डयन्ति | Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ).on P.I.1.1Vart.12: cf also M.Bh. on P.I.1.7, I.2.39, II.2.l et cetera, and others वाक्यप्रकाश a work on the interpretation of sentences written with a commentary upon it by उदयधर्ममुनि of North Gujarat who lived in the seventeenth century A.D.
vājasaneyeiprātiśākhyathe Pratisakhya work belonging to the Vajasaneyi branch of the White Yajurveda, which is the only Pratisakhya existing to-day representing all the branches of the Sukla Yajurveda. Its authorship is attributed to Katyayana, and on account of its striking resemblance with Panini's sutras at various places, its author Katyayana is likely to be the same as the Varttikakara Katyayana. It is quite reasonable to expect that the subject matter in this Pratisakhya is based on that in the ancient Prtisakhya works of the same White school of the Yajurveda.The work has a lucid commentary called Bhasya written by Uvvata.
vātsapraan ancient writer of Pratisakhya works who believed in the very feeble utterance ( लघुप्रयत्नतर ) of the consonants य and व, when preceded by अ and standing at the end of a word. See लघुप्रयत्न.
vāmananame of one of the joint authors of the well-known gloss or वृति upon the Sutras of Panini, who lived in the seventh century A. D. It cannot be ascertained which portion of the Kasika was written by Vamana and which by his colleague जयादित्य, There was another famous scholar of Kashmir by name Vamana who flourished in the tenth century and who wrote an independent grammar treatise विश्रान्तविद्याधर, together with उणादसूत्रवृत्ति and लिङ्गानुशासन.
vārarucaa work attributed to वररुचि: confer, compare वाररुचे काव्यम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ).on P. IV.3.101 cf also वाररुनो ग्रन्थ: S.K.on P.IV.3. 101 This work possibly was not a grammar work and its author also was not the same as the Varttikakara Katyayana. See वरुरुचि a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. The name वाररुचव्याकरण was given possibly to Katyayana's Prakrit Grammar, the author of which was वररुचि surnamed Katyayana. For details see p.395 Vyakarana Mahabhasya Vol. VII. D. E. Society's Edition.
vārarucakārikāan ancient grammarwork in verse believed to have been written by an ancient scholar of grammar, who, if not the same as Katyayana who wrote the Varttikas, was his contemporary and to whom the authorship of the Unadi Sutras is ascribed by some scholars. See वररुचि.
vārttikaa statement which is as much authoritative as the original statement to which it is given as an addition for purposes of correction, completion or explanation. The word is defined by old writers in an often-guoted verseउक्तानुक्तदुरुक्तनां चिन्ता यत्र प्रवर्तते | तं ग्रन्थं वार्तिकं प्राहुर्वार्तिकज्ञा मनीषिण:|This definition fully applies to the varttikas on the Sutras of Panini. The word is explained by Kaiyata as वृत्तौ साधु वार्त्तिकम् which gives strength to the supposition that there were glosses on the Sutras of Panini of which the Varttikas formed a faithful pithy summary of the topics discussedition The word varttika is used in the Mahabhasya at two places only हन्तेः पूर्वविप्रविषेधो वार्तिकेनैव ज्ञापित: M.Bh. on P.III. 4.37 and अपर आह् यद्वार्त्तिक इति M.Bh. on P. II.2.24 Vart. 18. In अपर अहृ यद्वार्त्तिक इति the word is contrasted with the word वृत्तिसूत्र which means the original Sutra (of Panini ) which has been actuaIly quoted, viz. संख्ययाव्ययासन्नाo II.2. 25. Nagesa gives ' सूत्रे अनुक्तदुरुक्तचिन्ताकरत्वं वार्तिक्रत्वम् as the definition of a Varttika which refers only to two out of the three features of the Varttikas stated a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. If the word उक्त has been omitted with a purpose by Nagesa, the definition may well-nigh lead to support the view that the genuine Varttikapatha of Katyayana consisted of a smaller number of Varttikas which along with a large number of Varttikas of other writers are quoted in the Mahabhasya, without specific names of writers, For details see pages 193-223 Vol. VII Patanjala Mahabhasya, D.E, Society's Edition.
vārttikakārabelieved to be Katyayana to whom the whole bulk of the Varttikas quoted in the Mahabhasya is attributed by later grammarians. Patafijali gives the word वार्तिककार in four places only (in the Mahabhasya on P.I.1.34, III.1.44: III.2.118 and VII.1.1) out of which his statement स्यादिविधिः पुरान्तः यद्यविशेषणं भवति किं वार्तिककारः प्रातिषेधेनं करोति in explanation of the Slokavarttika स्यादिविधिः...इति हुवता कात्यायनेनेहृ, shows that Patanjali gives कात्यायन as the Varttikakara (of Varttikas in small prose statements) and the Slokavarttika is not composed by Katyayana. As assertions similar to those made by other writers are quoted with the names of their authors ( भारद्वाजीयाः, सौनागाः, कोष्ट्रियाः et cetera, and others) in the Mahabhasya, it is evident that the Varttikas quoted in the Mahabhasya(even excluding the Slokavarttikas) did not all belong to Katyayana. For details see pp. 193-200, Vol. VII, Vyakarana Mahabhasya, D. E. Society's Edition.
vārtikavacanaa small pithy statement or assertion in the manner of the original sutras which is held as much authoritative as the Sutra: cf न ब्रुमो वृत्तिसूत्रवचनप्रामाण्यादिति | किं तर्हि | वार्तिकवचनप्रामाण्यादिति [ M.Bh. on P.II..1.1 Varttika 23.
vārttikasiddhāntacategorical conclusive statements made by the Varttikakara many of which were cited later on as Paribhasas by later writers For details see pp. 212220 Vol. VII, Vyakarana Mahbhasya, D. E. Society's edition.
vārttikasūtrathe same as वार्तिकवचन which see a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. The Varttikas are termed Varttika sutras on account of their close similarity with the original Sutras, which in contrast are termed Vrttisutras.
vāsudeva( शास्त्री)surnamed Abhyankar, who lived from 1863 to l942 and did vigorous and active work of teaching pupils and writing essays, articles, commentary works and original works on various Shastras with the same scholarship, zeal and acumen for fifty years in Poona. He wrote गूढार्थप्रकाश a commentary on the LaghuSabdendusekhara and तत्त्वादर्श a commentary on the Paribhasendusekhara in 1889. His edition of the Patanjala Mahabhasya with full translation and notes in Marathi can be called his magnum opus. See अभ्यंकर.
vikṛtivallīṭīkāname of a commentary on विकृतिवल्ली (which see a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.) written by a Vedic scholar गङ्गाधर.
vinayavijayaa.]ain grammarian who has written a gloss on हेमलधुप्रक्रिया.
viprarājendraa grammarian who has written पाणिनिसूत्रविवरण, a gloss on the Sūtras of Pāṇini.
vibhaktyarthanirṇayaa general term given to a chapter on case-affixes as also to treatises discussing the sense and relations of case-affixes. There is a treatise of this name written by Giridhara and another written by Jayakṛṣna Maunī.
vibhaktyarthaprakāśaa work on syntax of words written by a grammarian named Kamalākarabhaṭṭa.
vimalamatian old grammarian who is believed to have written a gloss named भागवृत्ति on Pāṇini's Sūtras to which the grammarians Purusottamadeva, Sīradeva's Paribhāṣāvṛttiand others of the twelfth century refer. Some scholars say that भागवृत्ति was written by भर्तृहरि; but it is not feasible, as there is a reference to Māghakāvya in भागवृति. In books on grammar,. especially of the Eastern School in the 11th and the 12th century, there are several quotations from the Bhāgavṛtti. See भागवृत्ति.
vivaraṇacritical comment; a name given by a writer of commentary works to a critical commentary work written by him; e. g. काशिकाविवरणपञ्जिका ( न्यास ) by Jinendrabuddhi, भाष्यप्रदीपविवरण ( उद्द्योत ) by Nāgeśa, as also लघुशब्देन्दुशेखरविवरण by Bhāskaraśastrī Abhyankar.
viśrāntavidyādharaname of a grammar work of a general type which once occupied a prominent position and was studied as a text book of grammar, representing an independent system. The work is referred to by Hemacandra and Haribhadra. It is attributed to Vāmana who may be the same as one of the joint writers of the Kāśikāvṛtti. In that case the date of the work is the 7th century A. D.;confer, compare the popular verse परेत्र पाणिनीयज्ञाः केचित्कालपकोविदा: । एकेकं विश्रान्तविद्याः स्युरन्ये संक्षिप्तसारकाः quoted in Vol.VII p. 388 Vyākaraṇa Mahābhāṣya D.E. Society's edition.
viśvarūpaa grammarian of the sixteenth century who has written a small grammar treatise called विश्वरूपनिबन्ध.
viśveśvaratīrthaa grammarian who has written a gloss on the Siddhāntakaumudī.
viṣamapadavyākhyāor विषमी (1) a critical commentary on Nāgeśa's Laghuśabdenduśekhara written by Rāghavendrācārya Gajendragadkar of Satara who lived in the first half of the nineteenth century and who has also written a gloss named त्रिपथगा on the Paribhāṣenduśekhara; (2) name of a commentary on Nāgeśa's Paribhāṣenduśekhara by Cidrūpāśraya: (3) name of a commentary on Sīradeva's Paribhāṣāvṛtti.
viṣṇupaṇḍitaa grammarian belonging to the famous Śeṣa family of grammarians, who has written a small treatise on Paribhāṣā or maxims of interpretation which he has named परिभाषाप्रक्राश.
viṣṇubhadṛ( विष्णुशास्त्री भट )a scholar of grammar of the latter half of the nineteenth century who has written learned commentaries on the works of Nāgeśa Bhaṭṭa, two of which viz. चिच्चन्द्रिका and विष्णुभट्टी are well known to scholars.
viṣṇubhaṭṭīname given to the commentary on the Paribhāṣenduśekhara written by Viṣṇubhaṭṭa. See विष्णुभट्ट् a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
viṣṇumiśraa scholar of the Supadma system of grammar who has written a commentary named मकरन्द on the सुपद्मव्याकरण and also a commentary on the सुपद्मसमाससंग्रह.
vuñ(ID taddhita affix. affix अक causing vṛddhi to the vowel of the first syllable of that word to which it is added, as prescribed, (a) to the words denoting an offspring as also to the words उक्ष, उष्ट्र et cetera, and othersin the sense of 'a group'; e. g. अोपगवकम् , औष्ट्रकम् , कैदारकम् et cetera, and others: confer, compare P.IV.2.39, 40; (b) to the words राजन्य and others in the sense of 'inhabited country' ; e. g. राजन्यकः देवनायकः et cetera, and others, confer, compare P. IV.2.53, (c) to the words headed by अरीहण such as द्वुघण, खदिर्, मैत्रायण, काशकृत्स्न et cetera, and others in the quadruple senses; exempli gratia, for example अारीहणकम् , द्रौबणकम् , confer, compare P.IV.2.80, (d) to the word धन्व meaning a desert, to words with य् or र for their penultimate, to words ending in प्रस्थ, पुर and वह as also to words headed by धूम, नगर, अरण्य कुरु, युगन्धर et cetera, and others, under certain conditions in the miscellaneous senses; e. g. सांकाश्यकः,पाटलिपुत्रकः, माकन्दकः, आङ्गकः, वाङ्गकः, धौमकः, नागरकः, अारण्यकः et cetera, and others; confer, compare P.IV.2.121-130,134,135, 136; (e) to the words शरद् , आश्वयुजी, ग्रीष्म, वसन्त, संवत्सर,अाग्रहायणी and others in the specific senses given: confer, compare P. IV. 3.27, 45, 46, 49, 50; (f) to words denoting descendence or spiritual relation, words meaning families and warrior clans, words कुलाल and others, words meaning clans, and students learning a specific Vedic branch in specific senses prescribed : e. g. आचार्यक, मातामहक, ग्लौचुकायनक, कालालक, काठक, कालापक et cetera, and others; confer, compare P. IV. 3.77, 99, 118, 126; (g) to the words शाकल, उष्ट्र, उमा and ऊर्णा in the specially given senses; exempli gratia, for example शाकलः, संघः, औप्ट्रकः, औमम् और्णम्, confer, compareP.IV.3.188,157,158; (h) to words with य् as the penultimate, and a long vowel preceding the last one, to words in the dvandva compound, and to the words मनोज्ञ, कल्याण and others in the sense of 'nature' or 'profession';e.g रामणीयकम् गौपालपशुपालिका, गार्गिका, काठिका etc; confer, compare P. V.1.132,133,134: (2) kṛt affix अक added to the roots निन्द् हिंस् and others, and to the roots देव् and कृश् with a prefix before,in the sense of a habituated,professional or skilled agent; exempli gratia, for example. निन्दकः, परिक्षेपकः, असूयकः, परिदेवकः, आक्रोशकः et cetera, and others confer, compare P.III.2. 146, 147.
vṛtta(1)arrived at or accomplished,as a result of वृत्ति which means a further grammatical formation from a noun or a verb; resultant from a vṛtti; confer, compare यावता कामचारो वृत्तस्य ये लिङ्गसंख्ये ते अतिदेक्ष्येते, न पुनः, प्राग्वृत्तेर्ये M Bh. on P.I.2.51; cf also युक्तंपुनर्यद् वृत्तनिमित्तको नाम अनुबन्धः स्यात्; (2) | employment, the same as प्रयोग, confer, compare वृत्ताद्वा । वृत्तं प्रयेागः । Kaiyaṭa's Mahābhāṣyapradīpa.on P. I. 3.9; (3)behaviour, treatment confer, compare नकारस्योष्मवद् वृत्ते Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) X.13; (4) manner of Veda writing, metrical form, metre; confer, compare तद् वृत्तं प्राहुश्छन्दसाम् Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XVII.22.
vṛtti(1)treatment, practice of pronunciation; (2) conversion of one phonetic element into another; confer, compare R.Pr.I.95;(3) position of the padas or words as they stand in the Saṁhhitā text, the word is often seen used in this way in the compound word पदवृत्ति; आन्पदा: पदवृत्तयः R.Pr. IV.17: (4) modes of recital of the Vedic text which are described to be three द्रुत, मध्य and विलम्बित based upon the time of the interval and the pronunciation which differs in each one; confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I.4. 109, Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 4; also I.l.69 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini).ll ; ( 5 ) nature confer, compare गुर्वक्षराणां गुरुवृत्ति सर्वम् R.Pr.XVIII.33; (6) interpretation of a word; (7) verbal or nominal form of a root; confer, compare अर्थनित्यः परीक्षेत केनचिद् वृत्तिसामान्येन Nirukta of Yāska.II.1; (8)mode or treatment followed by a scientific treatise; cf का पुनर्वृत्तिः । वृत्तिः शास्त्रप्रवृत्तिः | M.Bh. in Āhnika l on वृत्तिसमवायार्थ उपदेश: Vārttika 10; (9) manner of interpretation with the literal sense of the constituents present or absent, described usually as two-fold जहत्स्वार्था and अजहत्स्वार्था, | but with a third kind added by some grammarians viz. the जहदजहत्स्वार्था; (10) a compound word giving an aggregate sense different from the exact literal sense of the constituent words; there are mentioned five vṛittis of this kind; confer, compare परार्थाभिधानं वृत्तिः । कृत्तद्धितसमासैकदेशधातुरूपाः पञ्च वृत्तयः | वृत्त्यर्थावबोधकं वाक्यं विग्रहः S. K. at the end of the Ekaśeṣaprakaraṇa; ( 11 ) interpretation of a collection of statements; the word was originally applied to glosses or comments on the ancient works like the Sūtra works, in which the interpretation of the text was given with examples and counterexamples where necessary: confer, compare वृत्तौ भाष्ये तथा नामधातुपारायणादिषु; introductory stanza in the Kāśikā.Later on, when many commentary works were written,the word वृत्ति was diferentiated from भाष्य, वार्तिक, टीका,चूर्णि, निर्युक्ति, टिप्पणी, पञ्जिका and others, and made applicable to commentary works concerned with the explanation of the rules with examples and counter-examples and such statements or arguments as were necessary for the explanation of the rules or the examples and counter examples. In the Vyākaraṇa-Śāstra the word occurs almost exclusively used for the learned Vṛtti on Pāṇini-sūtras by Vāmana and Jayāditya which was given the name Kāśikā Vṛtti; confer, compare तथा च वृत्तिकृत् often occurring in works on Pāṇini's grammar.
vṛticandrikāname of a grammar work written by a grammarian Kāśinātha who also is believed to have written वर्णविवेकचन्द्रिका and वैयाकरणसर्वस्व.
vṛttidīpikāa treatise on the different ways in which the meaning is conveyed by words according to the conventions of grammarians,written by a grammarian Krisnabhatta surnamed Mauni.
vṛtisaṃgrahaname of a gloss on Panini's Astadhyayi written by Ramacandra.
vṛttisūtraa rule forming the basis of a vrtti, i. e. a rule on which glosses are written, as contrasted with वार्तिकसूत्र or वार्तिक a pithy Sutralike statement composed as an addition or a modification of the original Sutra; confer, compare केचित्तावदाहुर्यद् वृत्तिसूत्रे इति | संख्ययाव्ययासन्नादूराधिकसंख्यां: संख्येये ( P. II. 2.25 ) इति | M, Bh. on P. II. 2. 24,
vedamitraan ancient writer of a Pratisakhya work mentioned in the Rk Pratisakhya.
vebarWEBER, ALBRECHT of Berlin, 1825-190l ]a sound scholar of Vedic Literature who has written many articles on Sanskrit Grammar in "Indische Studien."
vaidikīprakriyāname of that section of Bhattoji's Siddhantakaumudi which deals with Vedic peculiarities noticed by Panini in his sutras. There is a well-known commentary upon this section named सुबोधिनी written by Jayakrisna a famous grammar scholar of the Maunin family.
vaidikaprakriyāṭīkā(1)a commentary on the sutras of Panini dealing with the Vedic words and their peculiarities written by a grammarian named Murari; (2) a commentary on the section of Bhattoji's Siddhantakaumudi named वैदिकीप्रक्रिया written by Jayakrsna Maunin and named Subodhini.
vaidyanāthaVaidyanatha Payagunde, a famous grammarian of the eighteenth century, who was one of the chief pupils of Nagesa and who prepared a line of pupils at Varanasi. He has written learned commentaries on standard works on grammar, the principal ones being the Prabha on the Sabdakaustubha, the Bhavaprakasika on the Brhaccabdendusekhara, the Cidasthimala on the LaghuSabdendusekhara, the Kasika or Gada on the Paribhasendusekhara and an independent short treatise named Rapratyaya-khandana
vaiyākaraṇajīvātua term used for the grammar treatise written by Cangudasa which is also called Cangusutra or Canguvyakarana.
vaiyākaraṇabhūṣaṇaa well-known work on the grammatical interpretation of words written by Kondabhatta as an explanatory work (व्याख्यान) on the small work in verse consisting of only 72 Karikas written by his uncle Bhattoji Diksita. The treatise is also named Brihadvaiyakaranabhusana. A smaller work consisting of the same subjectmatter but omitting discussions, is written by the author for facilitating the understanding of students to which he has given the name Vaiyakarahabhusanasara. This latter work has got three commentary works written on it named Kasika, Kanti and Matonmajja and one more scholarly one Sankari, recently written by Shankar Shastri Marulkar.
vaiyākaraṇabhūṣaṇasāraṭīkāa commentary written on the well-known work on the sense of words and syntax written by Kondabhatta. There are many commentaries out of which, the well-known ones are (1) Darpana by Harivallabha, (2) Laghubhushanakanti by Gopaladeva, a pupil of Balambhatta Payagunde, and (3) Kasika by Harirama Kesava Kale and Sankari by Sankarasastri Marulakara
vaiyākaraṇabhūṣaṇasāravṛttia commentary on the Vaiyākaranabhusana, written by Mahānanda in the beginning of the nineteenth century.
vaiyākaraṇaśābdamālāवैयाकरणशब्दरत्नमाला a treatise on the use of words written as a helpful guide to Sanskrit writers, by a grammarian named Somayajin in 1848 A.D.
vaiyākaraṇasarvasvaa small treatise on grammar written by a scholar of grammar named Kasinatha who has also written a few more small works वर्णविवेकचन्द्रिका, वृत्तिचन्द्रिका,धातुमञ्जरी etc
vaiyākaraṇasiddhāntakārikāa very scholarly work by Bhattoji Diksita on the interpretation of words and sentences, based upon the learned discussions on that subject introduced in the Mahabhasya, Vakyapadiya, Pradipa, et cetera, and others and discussed fully in his Sabdakaustubha by the author himselfeminine. The work although scholarly and valuable, is compressed in only 72 verses ( karikas ) and has to be understood with the help of the Vaiyakaranabhusana or BhuSansara written by Kondabhatta, the nephew of the author. See वैयाकरणभूषण and वैयाकरणभूषणसार.
vaiyākaraṇasiddhāntakaimudīan extremely popular work on the subject of Sanskrit grammar written for the use of students, which, although difficult at a few places, enables the students by its careful study to get a command over the subject. and enable him to read other higher works on grammar. The work is based on the Astadhyayi of Panini without omitting a single Sutra. The arrangement of the Sutras is, entirely different, as the author, for the sake of facility in understanding, has divided the work into different topics and explained the Sutras required for the topic by bringing them together in the topic. The main topics or Prakaranas are twelve in number, viz. (1) संज्ञापरिभाषा, (2) पञ्चसंधि, (3) सुबन्त or षड्लिङ्ग, (4) स्त्रीप्रत्यय, (5) कारक, (6) समास, (7) तद्धित, (8) तिङन्त, (9) प्रक्रिया, (10) कृदन्त, (11) वैदिकी and (12) स्वर which are sometimes styled as व्याकरणद्वादशी. The work is generally known by the term सिद्धान्तकौमुदी, or even कौमुदी, and it has got a large number of scholarly and ordinary commentaries as also commentaries on commentaries, all numbering a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. twelve, and two abridgments the Madhyakaumudi and the Laghukaumudi. The work was written by the reputed scholar Bhattoji Diksita of Varanasi in the seventeenth century. See Bhattoji Diksita.
vaiyākaraṇasiddhāntakaumudīṭīkāor सिद्धान्तकौमुदीव्याख्या a general name given to the large number of commentaries written by members of the line of pupils, and pupils of pupils of Bhattoji. The well-known among the commentaries are प्रौढमनोरमा by the author himself, तत्त्वबोधिनी by ज्ञानेन्द्रसरस्वती, सुबोधिनी by जयकृष्णभट्ट मौनी बालमनोरमा by वासुदेवदीक्षित, and crowning all, the लघुशब्देन्दुशेखर by नागेशभट्ट. The प्रौढमनोरमा has got a learned commentary written by हरिदीक्षित called लघुशब्दरत्न or शब्दरत्न, which also has on it commentaries named भावप्रक्राश by बाळंभट्ट and शब्दरत्नदीप by कल्याणमल्ल. The Laghusabdendusekhara has got commentaries reaching about ten in number.
vaiyākaraṇasiddhāntamañjūṣāa well-known work on the syntax and denotation of words written by Nagesabhatta which is popular by the name Laghumanjusha. The Paramalaghumanjusha is an abridgment of this work by the author himselfeminine.
vaiyāghrapadyaname of a treatise of grammar written in ten chapters by an ancient grammarian व्याघ्रपाद्; confer, compare दशकं वैयाघ्रपद्यम् Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana.on P. IV 2.65. For details, see Vyakaranamahabhasya Vol. VII. D. E. Society's Ed. pp. 133, 134.
vaivṛttaname given to the svarita or circumflex accent on the vowel following upon a vowel accented acute, when there is a vivrtti or pause between the two vowels; e.g, य इन्द्रः; cf वैवृत्ततैरोव्यञ्जनौ क्षैप्राभिनिहितौ च तान् | Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) III. 10.
vaiśiṣṭayaspecific feature, peculiarity.
vyaṅkaṭasubbāśāsrīa grammarian who has written a grammar treatise named भाषामञ्जरीव्याकरण.
vyabhicāralit, deviation or discrepancy: irregularity re: the application of a rule; confer, compareसंज्ञाव्यभिचारार्थश्चकार: Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana.on P. III.3.19; confer, comparealso.बहुलग्रहृणं व्यभिचारार्थम् । प्रवाहिका, विचर्चिका । न च भवति । शिरॊर्ति:; Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. III.3.108.
vyākaraṇacandrikāa short treatise on grammar written by Krsnacarya.
vyākaraṇadīpikāname of a short gloss or Vrtti on the Sutras of Panini written by a modern scholar of grammar Orambhatta of Varanasi.
vyākaraṇaprakāśaname of the commentary written by Mahamisra on Jinendrabuddhi's great work 'Kasikavivaranapanjika' or Nyasa.
vyākaraṇamahābhāṣyagūḍhārthadīpinīa brief commentary on the Mahabhasya, written by Sadasiva, son of Nilakantha and pupil of Kamalakara Diksita. The gloss confines itself to the explanations of obscure and difficult passages in the Mahabhasya and criticizes Kaiyata's explanations.
vyākaraṇamahābhāṣyapradīpavivaraṇa( )a gloss on the Mahabhasyapradipa of Kaiyata, written by ईश्वरानन्द, a pupil of सत्यानन्द; (2) a gloss on the Mahabhasyapradipa of Kaiyata by नारायण.
vyākaraṇaratnāvalīa short work on grammar written by विद्यारत्न गौरमॊदन. व्याकरणसंग्रह a small grammar work written by a grammar scholar Gangadhara which is based upon the Mugdhabodha of Bopadeva.
vyākaraṇasudhānighia gloss on the Sutras of Panini written by Visvesvara.
vyākhyāna(1)explanation of a rule, or a line, or a verse by analysing the rule and giving examples and counter-examples; confer, compare न केवलानि चर्चापदानि व्याख्यानं वृद्धिः आत् ऎजिति | किं तर्हि । उदाहरणं प्रत्युदाहरणं वाक्याध्याहारः इत्येतत्समुदितं व्याख्यानं भवति | M.Bh. Ahnika l Vart.11 ; (2)authoritative decision given in places of doubt by ancient scholars; confer, compare याख्थानतो विशेषप्रतिपत्ति: न हि संदेहादलक्षणम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Ahnika .1; Par.Sek.Pari.1.
byāḍiname of an ancient grammarian with a sound scholarship in Vedic phonetics, accentuation,derivation of words and their interpretation. He is believed to have been a relative and contemporary of Panini and to have written a very scholarly vast volume on Sanskrit grammar named *Samgraha which is believed to have consisted of a lac of verses; confer, compare संग्रहो व्याडिकृतो लक्षसंख्ये ग्रन्थ: NageSa's Uddyota; confer, compare also इह पुरा पाणिनीये अस्मिन्व्याकरणे ब्याड्युपरचितं लक्षग्रन्थपरिमाणं निबन्धनमासीत् Vākyapadīya of Bhartṛhari. Tika. The work is not available at present. References to Vyadi or to his work are found in the Pratisakhya works, the Mahabhasya, the Varttikas, the Vakyapadiya and many subsequent treatises. A work on the Vyakarana Paribhasas, believed to have been written by Vyadi, is available by the name परिभाषासूचन which from its style and other peculiarities seems to have been written after the Varttikas, but before the Mahabhasya. Vyadi is well-known to have been the oldest exponent of the doctrine that words denote an individual object and not the genus. For details see pp. 136-8, Vol. 7 Vyakarana Mahabhasya DE. Society's Edition.
vhiṭne[ WHITNEY, WILLIAM DWIGHT, 1827-1894]a sound scholar of Vedic grammar who has, besides some books on Linguistic studies, written a work on Vedic Grammar and edited the Atharvaveda Pratisakhya.
śaṃkaraśāstrī( मारुलकर )a modern scholar of grammar who lived in Poona and did the work of teaching and writing commentaries. He has written a commentary mamed शांकरी on the Vaiyakaranabhusanasara of Kondabhatta.
śabarasvāmina grammarian to whom a metrical treatise on genders named लिङ्गानुशासन is ascribedition This शवरस्वामिन् was comparatively a modern grammarian who was given the title बालयोगीश्वर. This लिङ्गानुशासन has a commentary written by हृर्षवर्धन Evidently these grammarians शबरस्वामिन् and हृर्षवर्धन are different from the famous author of the मीमांसाभाष्य and the patron of the poet Bana respectively.
śabdakaustubhaa treatise on grammar, critically explaining and discuss ing the meaning of Panini's Sutras in the order of the author himselfeminine. the work is written by Bhattoji Diksita and is mainly based on the Mahabhasya.
śabdakaustubhaguṇaa short gloss on Bhatoji's Sabdakaustubha written by a grammarian named इन्द्रदत्तोपाध्याय
śabdakaustubhaṭīkāor शब्दकौस्तुभप्रभा a commentary on Bhattoji's Sabdakaustubha written by Vaidyanatha Payagunde.
śabdkaustubhavyākhyāa commentary on Bhattoji's Sabdakaustubha, named विषमपदव्याख्या a name probably given to a commentary written by Nagesa.
śābdabodhaprakriyāa grammar treatise on the denotation and relation of words written by a grammarian ramed Ramakrsna.
śabdabhūṣaṇaname of a short gloss on the Sutras of Panini, written by Narayana Pandita.
śabdabhedanirūpaṇaname of a small grammatical work written by Ramacandra Diksita
śabdamañjarīname of a short grammar work written by Narayana Pandita.
śabdaratnaname of a scholarly gloss written by Haridiksita on the Manorama, a commentary by Bhattoji Diksita on his own Siddhantakaumudi. The proper name of the commentary is लघुशब्दरत्न of which शब्दरत्न is an abridged form.The commentary लघुशब्दरत्न is generally studied along with the Manorama by students.There is a bigger work named बृहच्छब्दरत्न written by Hari Diksita, of which the लधुशद्वरत्न is an abridgment.
śabdaratnaṭīkāknown by the name भावप्रकाशिका, a commentary on Hari Diksita's Sabdaratna, written by Vaidyanatha Payagunde.
śabdaratnadīpaa commentary on the Laghusabdaratna written by a grammarian named Kalyanamalla.
śabdavivaraṇaa grammar work on the meaning of words and how it is conveyed, written by a grammarian named वर्णिकुबेरानन्द The work forms a part of his bigger work दानभागवत. See वर्णिकुबेरानन्द,
śabdavyutpattikaumudīa small treatise on the derivation of words written by a grammarian named RajaramaSastrin.
śabdasattvaprakāśaa work on grammar said to have been written by a grammarian named इन्द्रदत्त.
śabdsādhyaprayogaa grammar work on the formation of words written by a grammarian named रमानाथशर्मा.
śabdānuśāsanaliterally science of grammar dealing with the formation of words, their accents, and use in a sentence. The word is used in connection with standard works on grammar which are complete and self-sufficient in all the a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.mentioned features. Patanjali has begun his Mahabhasya with the words अथ शब्दानुशासनम् referring possibly to the vast number of Varttikas on the Sutras of Panini, and hence the term शब्दानुशासन according to him means a treatise on the science of grammar made up of the rules of Panini with the explanatory and critical varttikas written by Katyayana and other Varttikakaras.The word शब्दानुशासन later on, became synonymons with Vyakarana and it was given as a title to their treatises by later grammarians, or was applied to the authoritative treatise which introduced a system of grammar, similar to that of Panini. Hemacandra's famous treatise, named सिद्धहैमचन्द्र by the author,came to be known as हैमशब्दानुशासन. Similarly the works on grammar written by पाल्यकीर्तिशाकटायन and देवनन्दिन् were called शाकटायनशब्दानुशासन and जैनेन्द्र' शब्दानुशासन respectively.
śabdāmṛtaa work, explanatory of the Sutras of Panini, written by a grammarian named विप्रराजेन्द्र.
śabdenduśekharaa popular name given to the Laghusabdendusekhara written by Nagesabhatta. See लघुशब्देन्दुशेखर.
śabdopadeśascientific and authoritative citation or statement of a word as contrasted with अपशब्दोपदेशः; confer, compare किं शब्दोपदेश: कर्तव्यः आहोस्विदपशब्दोपदेशः आहोस्विदुभयोपदेश इति ।Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). in Ahnika l. शमादि a class of eight roots headed by शम् which get their vowel lengthened before the conjugational sign य (श्यन्) as also before the krt. affix इन् ( घिनुण् ) in the sense of 'habituated to': exempli gratia, for example शाम्यति, शमी, भ्राम्यति, भ्रमी et cetera, and others: confer, compare P.VII.3.74 and P. III.2.141.
śarkarādia class of words headed by शर्करा to which the taddhita affix. affix अ (अण्) is added in the sense of इव viz. similarity:cf शर्करेव शार्करम् ,कापालिकम् पौण्डरीकम् Kas on P. V. 3.107.
śarvavarmāa reputed grammarian who is believed to have been a contemporary of the poet Gunadhya in the court of Satavahana. He wrote the Grammar rules which are named the Katantra Sutras which are mostly based on the Sutras of Panini. In the grammar treatise named 'the Katantra Sutra' written by Sarvavarman the Vedic section and all the intricacies and difficult elements are carefully and scrupulously omitted by him, with a view to making his grammar useful for beginners and students of average intelligence.
śāṃkari(1)name of a glo:s on Kondabhatta's Vaiyakaranabhusanasara by Samkara; (2) name of a commentary on the Paribhasendusekhara of Nagesa written by Sankarabhatta; (3) The Vyakarana vidya or instructions in Grammar given by God Siva to Panini on which the Siksa of Panini has been basedition
śākaṭāyanavyākaraṇathe treatise on grammar written by sakatayana। See शाकटायन.
śākaṭāyanaśabdānuśāsananame of the treatise on grammar written by पाल्यकीर्ति-शाकटायन.
śākapūṇian ancient writer of Nirukta who is quoted by Yaska; confer, compare विद्युत् तडिद्भवतीति शाकपूणि; Nirukta of Yāska.III. 11, or मानेन अन्यत् जहातीति महानिति शाकपूणिः Nirukta of Yāska.III. 13 or ऋत्विक्कस्मात् । ईरणः । ऋग्यष्टा भवतीति शाकपूणिः Nir.III.19
śākalyaname of an ancient grammarian and Vedic scholar who is supposed to have revised the Vedic texts and written their Pada-pātha. He is often quoted by Pāṇini and the writers of the Prātiśākhya works: confer, compare शाकल्यस्य संहितामनुप्रावर्षत् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I.4.84; also on P.I.1.18, IV.1.18; confer, compare also उपचारं लक्षणतश्च सिद्धं अाचार्या व्यालिशाकल्यगार्ग्या: R.Pr.XIII.12.
śākhādia class of words headed by the word शाखा which have the taddhita affix य added to them in the sense of इव id est, that is similarity; exempli gratia, for example शाख्य:, मुख्यः, जघन्यः et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. V.3.103.
śābdabodhataraṅgiṇīa treatise on the theory of verbal import written by ईश्वरानन्द.
śābdabodhaprakāśikāa treatise on the theory of शब्दबोघ written by रामकिशोरचक्रवर्तिन्.
śivasūtraname given to the fourteen small sutras giving the alphabet which Panini took as the basis of his grammar. The Sivasutras have got a well-known explanation in Verse, named नन्दिकेश्वरकारिका on which there is a commentary of the type of Bhasya by उपमन्यु. The origin of the Sivasutra given by the writer of the Karika is summed up in the stanza नृत्तावसाने नटराजराजो ननाद ढक्कां नवपञ्चवारम् । उद्धर्तुकामः सनकादिसिद्धानेतद् विमर्शे शिवसूत्रजालम् | Nand. 1.
śiṣyahitā(वृत्ति)a work on grammar written by उग्रभूति of which a mention is made by Al Beruni in his work. शी (1) case affix (ई) substituted for the nominative case. plural affix जस् (अस् ) in the declension of the pronouns, when the affix जस् is preceded by the vowel अ; exempli gratia, for example सर्वे, विश्वे; confer, compare kas. on P VII.1.17; (2) case affix (ई ) substituted for औ of the nominative case. and the acc. dual after feminine. bases ending in आ, as also after bases in the neuter gender; exempli gratia, for example खट्वे रमे; कुण्डे, वने; confer, compare Kas on P. VII.1.18, 19.
śuklayajuḥprātiśākhyaname of the Pratisakhya treatise pertaining to the White Yajurveda which is also called the Vajasaneyi-Pratisakhya. This work appears to be a later one as compared with the other PratiSakhya works and bears much similarity with some of the Sutras of Panini. It is divided into eight chapters by the author and it deals with letters, their origin and their classification, the euphonic and other changes when the Samhita text is rendered into the Pada text, and accents. The work appears to be a common work for all the different branches of the White Yajurveda, being probably based on the individually different Pratisakhya works of the different branches of the Shukla Yajurveda composed in ancient times. Katyayana is traditionally believed to be the author of the work and very likely he was the same Katyayana who wrote the Varttikas on the Sutras of Panini.
śuddhāśubodhasūtrārthavyākaraṇaa gloss on the Asubodha-grammar, written by a grammarian named Ramesvara.
śeṣaśarbhanalso known by the name मनीषिशेषशर्मन्, a grammarian who has written सर्वमङ्गला, a commentary on Nagesa's Paribhasendusekhara.
śeṣādria grammarian of the seventeenth century who has written a work, Paribhasabhaskara, on the Paribhasas of the Panini system; the treatise is written in the manner of Siradeva's Paribhasavrtti which has been taken as a basis by him.
śaunakaa great ancient Vedic scholar who is believed to have written the Rk. Pratisakhya, which is said to be common for the two main branches of the Rgveda but which at present represents, in fact, all the different branches of the Rgveda.
śrīkaṇoktaa grammarian who has written a small treatise on corrupt words or ungrammatical words, which is named अपशब्दखण्डन.
śrīdharaa grammarian of the last century who has written a commentary named श्रीधरी after him, on the Paribhasendusekhara.
śrīdharīname of commentary on the Paribhasendueskhara written by Sridhara. See श्रीधर.
śrīnivāsaa grammarian who has written a commentary on the Paribhasabhaskara of Haribhaskara.
śrīmaṇikaṇṭhaa famous grammarian who held the titles महामहोपाध्याय, प्रगल्भतर्कसिंह and भट्टाचार्य and who has written a systematic work on caserelations named कारकखण्डनमण्डन; the work is also known by the name षट्कारकखण्डनमण्डन.
śrīmānaśarmāa famous grammarian of Eastern India who has written a short scholarly gloss named Vijaya on Nagesa's Paribhasendusekhara. For details refer to Paribhasasamgraha.
śrutaliterally what is actually heard; the word is used in connection with such statements as are made by the authoritative grammarians, Panini and the Varttikakara by their actual utterance or wording, as contrasted with such dictums as can be deduced only from their writings. confer, compare श्रुतानुभितंयोः श्रौतः संबन्धो बलीयान्. Par. Sek Pari. 104.
śruti(1)literally hearing sound.confer, compare श्रुतौ च रूपग्रहणम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 2.64; perception, as a proof contrasted with inference; confer, compare ननु च श्रुतिकृतोपि भेदोस्ति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. VII. 1.72 Vart. 1; confer, compare also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. VIII. 2.25; cf also तस्मादुच्चश्रुतीनि Ṛktantra Prātiśākhya. 61; (2) authoritative word; the word is sometimes used in connection with the utterances of the Sutrakaras viz. the Sutra.
śvobhūtivṛttia grammatical work of the type of a gloss on the Sutras of Panini written by an ancient grammarian श्वोभूति mentioned in the Mahabhasya; confer, compare स्तोष्याम्यहं पादिकमौदवाहिं ततः श्वेाभूते शातनीं पातनीं च Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I.1.57. Possibly the grammarian श्वोभूति is referred to in the word श्वोभूत in the verse.
ṣaṭkāraka(1)the six Karakas or instruments of action, which are differently connected with the verbal activity, viz. कर्तृ, कर्म, करण, संप्रदान, अपादान and अधिकरण; for details see कारक a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.; confer, compare तत्र शक्तिमतो द्रव्यस्य कारकाख्यायामवान्तरव्यापारनिबन्धना षडुपाख्या भवन्ति |कर्ता कर्म करणं संप्रदानमपादानमधिकरणं चेति | Sringara Prakasa IV; (2) a work of the name (षट्कारक) written by a Jain grammarian Mahesanandin.
ṣaṭkāraka(1)the six Karakas or instruments of action, which are differently connected with the verbal activity, viz. कर्तृ, कर्म, करण, संप्रदान, अपादान and अधिकरण; for details see कारक a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.; confer, compare तत्र शक्तिमतो द्रव्यस्य कारकाख्यायामवान्तरव्यापारनिबन्धना षडुपाख्या भवन्ति |कर्ता कर्म करणं संप्रदानमपादानमधिकरणं चेति | Sringara Prakasa IV; (2) a work of the name (षट्कारक) written by a Jain grammarian Mahesanandin.
ṣaṭkārakakhaṇḍanamaṇḍanaknown also as कारकखण्डनमण्डन a grammar-work on the six case-relations written by a scholar of grammar named श्रीमणिकण्ठ.
ṣaṭkārakanirūpaṇaa work dealing with the six kinds of instruments of the verbal activity ( karakas ) written by Trilokanatha.
ṣaṭkārakabālabodhinīa short work in verses on the six case-relations written by a grammarian Prabhudasa who has added his own commentary to it.
ṣaṭkārakavivecanaa small treatise on the six case-relations written by a grammarian Bhavananda who held the title Siddhāntavagisa.
ṣaḍbhāṣācandrikāa work on six dialects written by a Jain grammarian लक्ष्मणसूरि.
saṃkṣiptasāraname of a complete grammar-work written by क्रमदीश्वर for facility of study. This grammar appears to have been written before the time of कैयटं or हेमचन्द्र, as can be seen from the popular stanza परेत्र पाणिनयिज्ञा: केचित् कालापकोविदा; ।| एके विश्रान्तविद्याः स्युरन्ये संक्षिप्तसारका; ll
saṃdarbhāmṛtaname of a commentary on the Mugdhabodha Vyakarana of Bopadeva, written by a grammarian, named Bholanatha.
saṃprasāraṇaliterally extension; the process of changing a semi-vowel into a simple vowel of the same sthana or place of utterance; the substitution of the vowels इ, उ, ऋ and लृ for the semi-vowels य्, व् , र् and ल् respectively; cf इग्यणः संप्रसारणम् P. 1.1.45. The term संप्रसारण is rendered as a 'resultant vowel' or as 'an emergent vowel'. The ancient term was प्रसारण and possibly it referred to the extension of य् and व्, into their constituent parts इ +अ, उ+अ et cetera, and others the vowel अ being of a weak grade but becoming strong after the merging of the subseguent vowel into it exempli gratia, for example confer, compare सर्वत्र प्रसारणिभ्यो ड: P. III. 2.8 Vart.1. For the words taking this samprasarana change, see P. VI. 1 .13 to .19. According to some grammarians the term संप्रसारण is applied to the substituted vowels while according to others the term refers to the operation of the substitution: confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 1.15. The substitution of the samprasarana vowel is to be given preference in the formation of a word; , confer, compare संप्रसारणं तदाश्रयं च कार्यं बलवत् Pari. Sek. Pari. 1 19. संप्रसारणबलीयस्त्व the relative superior strength of the samprasarana change in comparison with other operations occurring simultaneotisly. The phrase न वा संप्रसारणबलीयस्त्वात् is often used in the Mahabhasya which is based upon the dictum of the superior strength of the samprasarana substitution, which is announced by the writer of the Varttikas; P. VI. 1.17 Vart, 2. , See संप्रसारण.
saṃvādacintāmaṇiname of a small treatise on roots and their meanings written by : a grammarian named इन्द्रदत्तोपाध्याय who has also written a commentary on the Sabdakaustubha called कौस्तुभगुण and सिद्धान्तकौमुदीगूढफक्किकाप्रकाश,
saṃskṛtamañjarīa short handbook on declension and case-relations written by a grammarian named Sadhusundara, who lived in the beginning of the eighteenth century.
saṃhitāposition of words or parts of words in the formation ofa word quite near each other which results into the natural phonetic coalescence of the preceding and the following letters. Originally when the Vedic hymns or the running prose passages of the Yajurveda were split up into their different constituent parts namely the words or padas by the Padakaras, the word संहिता or संहितापाठ came into use as contrasted with the पदपाठ. The writers of of the Pratisakhyas have conseguently defined संहिता as पदप्रकृतिः संहिता, while Panini who further split up the padas into bases ( प्रकृति ) and affixes ( प्रत्यय ) and mentioned several augments and substitutes, the phonetic combinations, which resulted inside the word or pada, had to be explained by reason of the close vicinity of the several phonetic units forming the base, the affix, the augment, the substitute and the like, and he had to define the word संहृिता rather differently which he did in the words परः संनिकर्षः संहिता; cf P.I.4.109: confer, compare also संहितैकपदे नित्या नित्या धातूपसर्गयोः । नित्य समासे वाक्ये तु सा विवक्षामपेक्षते Sabdakaustubha on Maheshvara Sutra 5.1.
sadāśiva-agnihotrīname of a modern grammarian of the seventeenth century who has written a gloss on Pratisakhya works called प्रातिशाख्यदीपिका.
sadāśiva-paṇḍitaa grammarian of the seventeenth century who has written a commentary on the Sutras of Panini and a brief commentary on the Mahabhasya called गूढार्थदीपिनी or गूढार्थदीपिका which is incomplete.
sadāśivabhaṭṭīname of a commentary written by सदाशिवभट्ट घुले on the Laghusabdendusekhara of Nagesa.
samantabhadraa Jain scholar of great repute who is believed to have written, besides many well-known religious books such as आप्तमीमांसा गन्धहस्तिभाष्य et cetera, and others on Jainism, a treatise on grammar called Cintamani Vyakarana.
samanvayapradīpasaṃketaa treatise on the philosophy of Vyakarana written as a commentary by the author दंवशर्मन् on his own Karikas on the subject.
samānākṣarasimple vowels or monophthongs अ, इ and उ as contrasted with diphthongs ( संध्यक्षर ); cf अष्टौ समानाक्षराण्यादितस्ततश्चत्वारि संध्यक्षराण्युत्तराणि Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I. 11, confer, compare also अथ नवादितस्समानाक्षराणि Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.1. 2. Some writers of Pratisakhyas held ऋ as संध्यक्षर and not as समानाक्षर; cf अन्यत्तु मतम्-ऋकारादीनां त्रयाणां त्वरद्वयसंधिरूपत्वाभावेपि रूपद्वयसद्भावादेषा संज्ञा न युक्तेति नवानामेवाहेति। gloss on Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.I. 2.
samāsaplacing together of two or more words so as to express a composite sense ; compound composition confer, compare पृथगर्थानामेकार्थीभावः समासः। Although the word समास in its derivative sense is applicable to any wording which has a composite sense (वृत्ति), still it is by convention applied to the समासवृत्ति only by virtue of the Adhikarasutra प्राक् कडारात् समास: which enumerates in its province the compound words only. The Mahabhasyakara has mentioned only four principal kinds of these compounds and defined them; confer, compare पूर्वपदार्थ प्रधानोव्ययीभावः। उत्तरपदार्थप्रधानस्तत्पुरुषः। अन्यपदार्थप्रधानो बहुव्रीहिः । उभयपदार्थप्रधानो द्वन्द्वः । M.Bh. on P.II.1.6; confer, compare also M.Bh. on P.II.1.20, II.1.49,II.2.6, II.4.26, V.1.9. Later grammarians have given many subdivisions of these compounds as for example द्विगु, कर्मधारय and तत्पुरुष (with द्वितीयातत्पुरुष, तृतीयातत्पुरुष et cetera, and othersas also अवयवतत्पुरुष, उपपदतत्पुरुष and so on) समानाधिकरणबहुव्रीहि, व्यधिकरणबहुव्रीहि, संख्याबहुवीहि, समाहारद्वन्द्व, इतरेतरद्वन्द्व and so on. समासचक्र a short anonymous treatise on compounds which is very popular and useful for beginners. The work is attributed to वररुचि and called also as समासपटल. The work is studied and committed to memory by beginners of Sanskrit ] studies in the PathaSalas of the old type.
samāsavāda(l)a short treatise on compounds by गोविन्दचक्रवर्तिन् ; (2) a small compendium on compounds written by a grammarian named सार्वभौम.
saralāname of a comparatively modern lucid commentary written by Taranatha Tarkavacaspati on the Siddhantakaumudi.
sarvanighātagrave accent ( अनुदात्त ) for the whole word, generally for a verbal form or a word in the vocative case, if preceded by another word which is not a verb. The term is used in contrast with शेषनिघात the grave accent for the remaining vowels of a word when a particular vowel is definitely fixed as an acute or an independent Svarita or circumflex; confer, compare P.VIII. 1.28 to 74.
sarvamaṅgalāa commentary on Nagesa's Paribhasendusekhara written by a grammarian of the nineteenth century named शेषशर्मन् or मनीषिशेषशर्मन्. The work is incomplete.
sāṃpratika(l)what is actually expressed .or found in the context; confer, compare सांप्रतिकाभावे भूतपूर्वगतिर्विज्ञायते M. Bh on P. VI. 1.177 Vart. 1: (2) original, found in the original context of Prakriti; confer, compare सांप्रतिके प्रकृतिस्थे कण्ठे सति हकारो नाम बाह्यः प्रयत्नः क्रियते Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.II. 6; (3) of the present time: confer, compare Purus. Pari. 15.
sāmavedprātiśākhyaname of a Pratisakhya work on Samaveda. It is probable that there were some Pratisakhya works written dealing with the different branches or Sakhas of the Samaveda, as could be inferred from indirect references to such works. For instance in the Mahabhasya there is a passage "ननु च भोश्छन्दोगानां सात्यमुग्रिराणायनीयाः अर्धमेकारमर्धमोकारं चाधीयते। ..पार्षदकृतिरेषां तत्रभवताम् " which refers to such works At present, however, one such work common to the several branches of the Samaveda, called Rktantra is available, and it is called Samaveda Pratisakhya. It is believed to have been written by औदव्रजि and revised by शाकटायन.
sāmyasimilarity, homogeneity: described to be of two kindsin words and in sense; confer, compare किं पुनः शब्दतः साम्ये संख्यातानुदेशो भवत्याहोस्विदर्थतः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 3. 10 Vart 3; confer, compare also स्थानकरणकालादिभि: तौल्यम् T. Pr XXIV. 5.
sāyaṇa,sāyaṇācāryathe celebrated Vedic scholar and grammarian of Vijayanagar who flourished in the 14th century and wrote, besides the monumental commentary works on the Vedas, a grammatical work on roots and their forms known by the name माधवीया धातुवृत्ति. As the colophon of the work shows, the Dhatuvrtti was written by Sayanacarya, but published under the name of Madhava, the brother of Sayanacarya: confer, compare इति महामन्त्रिणा मायणसुतेन माधवसहोदरेण सायणाचार्येण विरचितायां माधवीयायां धातुवृत्तौ...Madhaviya Dha tuvrtti at the end; cf also तेन मायणपुत्रेण सायणेन मनीषिणा । व्याख्येया माधवी चेयं धातुवृत्तिर्विरच्यते । Mad. Dhatuvrtti at the beginning.
sāraṅgakaviname of a grammarian, the writer of प्रयुक्ताख्यातमञ्जरीसारसंग्रह.
sārasatvarīname of a grammar work written by Kavicandra.
sārasvataname of a grammar work which was once very popular on account of its brevity, believed to have been written in the sutra form by an ancient grammarian named Narendra who is said to have composed 700 sutras under the inspiration of Sarasvati.The exposition of these Sutras by a reputed grammarian named Anubhutisvarupacarya who possibly flourished in the thirteenth century A. D., is known by the name सारस्वतप्रक्रिया which has remained as a text book on grammar to the present day in some parts of India. This प्रक्रिया is popularly known as सारस्वतव्याकरण. The technical terms in this grammar are the current popular ones.
sārasvataṭīkāname in general given to commentary works on the Sarasvata Vyakarana out of which those written by Ramanarayana, Satyaprabodha, Ksemamkara, Jagannatha and Mahidhara are known to scholars.
sārasvataparibhāṣāa grammar work of the Sarasvata school written by Dayaratna in explanation of the technical rules giving conventions and maximanuscript.
sārasvatabhāṣyaa critical gloss on the Sarasvata grammar by a grammarian named Kasinatha.
sārāsāravivekaname of a commentary on Nagesa's Paribhasendusekhara written by बालशास्त्री रानडे, the stalwart grammarian of the nineteenth century at Varanasi.
sārvabhaumaa grammarian of the eighteenth century who wrote a very brief critical work on compounds named समासवाद.
siddhakāṇḍathe chapter or portion of Panini's grammar which is valid to the rules inside that portion, as also to the rules enumerated after it. The word is used in connection with the first seven chapters and a quarter of the eighth chapter of Panini's Astadhyayi, as contrasted with the last three guarters called त्रिपादी, the rules in which are not valid to any rule in the preceding portion, called by the name सपासप्ताध्यायी or सपादी as also to any preceding rule in the Tripadi itSelf confer, compare पूर्वत्रासिद्धम् P, VIII.2.1. सिद्धनन्दिन् an ancient Jain sage who is believed to have written an original work on grammar.
siddhāntakaumudīa critical and scholarly commentary on the Sutras of Panini, in which the several Sutras are arranged topicwise and fully explained with examples and counter examples. The work is exhaustive, yet not voluminous, difficult yet popular, and critical yet lucid. The work is next in importance to the Mahabhasya in the system of Panini, and its study prepares the way for understanding the Mahabhasya. It is prescribed for study in the courses of Vyakarana at every academy and Pathasala and is expected to be committed to memory by students who want to be thorough scholars of Vyakarana.By virtue of its methodical treatment it has thrown into the back-ground all kindred works and glosses or Vrttis on the Sutras of Panini. It is arranged into two halves, the first half dealing with seven topics ( 1 ) संज्ञापरिभाषा, ( 2 ) पञ्त्वसंधि, ( 3 ) षड्लिङ्ग, ( 4 ) स्त्रीप्रत्यय, ( 5 ) कारक, ( 6 ) समास, ( 7 ) तद्धित, and the latter half dealing with five topics, ( 1 ) दशगणी, ( 2 ) द्वादशप्राक्रिया ( 3 ) कृदन्त ( 4 ) वैदिकी and ( 5 ) स्वर. The author भट्टोजीदीक्षित has himself written a scholarly gloss on it called प्रौढमनेरमा on which, his grandson, Hari Diksita has written a learned commentary named लघुशब्दरत्न or simple शब्दरत्न. The Siddhāntakaumudi has got a large number of commentaries on it out of which, the commentaries प्रौढमनेरमा, बालमनोरमा, (by वासुदेवदीक्षित) तत्त्वबोधिनी and लघुशब्देन्दुशेखर are read by almost every true scholar of Vyakarana. Besides these four, there are a dozen or more commentaries some of which can be given below with their names and authors ( I ) सुबेाधिनी by जयकृष्णमौनि, ( 2 ) सुबोधिनी by रामकृष्णभट्ट ( 3 ) वृहृच्छब्देन्दुशेखर by नागेश, ( 4 ) बालमनेारमा by अनन्तपण्डित, ( 5 ) वैयाकरणसिद्धान्तरहृस्य by नीलकण्ठ, ( 6 ) रत्नार्णव, by कृष्णमिश्र ( 7 ) वैयाकरणसिद्धान्तरत्नाकर by रामकृष्ण, ( 8 ) सरला by तारानाथ,(9) सुमनोरमा by तिरुमल्ल,(10)सिद्वान्तकौमुदीव्याख्या by लक्ष्मीनृसिंह, (11 )सिद्धान्तकौमुदीव्याख्या by विश्वेश्वरतीर्थ, (12) रत्नाकर by शिवरामेन्द्रसरस्वती and (13) प्रकाश by तोलापदीक्षित. Although the real name of the work is वैयाकरणसिद्धान्ततकौमुदी, as given by the author, still popularly the work is well known by the name सिद्धान्तकौमुदी. The work has got two abridged forms, the Madhyakaumudi and the Laghukaumudi both written by Varadaraja, the pupil of Bhattoji Diksita.
siddhāntakaumudīgūḍhaphakkikāprakāśaa small gloss on Bhattoji's Siddhantakaumudi, explaining its difficult lines and passages, written by a grammarian named इन्द्रदत्तोपाध्याय.
siddhāntakaumudīvādārthaan explanatory work, discussing the difficult sentences and passages of the Siddhantakaumudi, written by a grammarian named Ramakrisna. सिद्धान्तरत्न a gloss on the Sarasvatisutra written by a grammarian natmed Jinacandra. सिद्धान्तरत्नाङ्कुर name of a commentary on the Katantraparisista by Sivaramacakravartin.
siddhāntasārasvataan independent work on grammar believed to have been written by Devanandin. सिद्धान्तिन् a term used in connection with the writer himself of a treatise when he gives a reply to the objections raised by himself or quoted from others,the term पूर्वपाक्षिन् being used for the objector. सिद्धि formation of a word: establishment of the correct view after the removal of the objection; e. g. संज्ञासिद्वि, कार्यसिाद्व, स्वरसिद्धि. सिप् (1) the personal ending ( सि ) of the second person singular (मध्यमपुरुषैकवचन ) substituted for the affix ल्; of the ten tenses and moods लट्, लिट्, लृट् and others; confer, compare P.III.4.78: (2 Vikarana affix स् added to a root before the affixes of लेट् or Vedic Subjunctive. सिम् a technical term used in the Vajasaneyi-Pratisakhya for the first eight vowels of the alphabet, viz. अ, आ, इ, ई, उ, ऊ, ऋ and ऋ: confer, compare सिमादितोष्टौ स्वराणाम् V. Pr.. I.44.
supadmavyākaraṇaan independent work on grammar written by a scholar of grammar named पद्मनाभ, who fourished in Mithila in the fifteenth century A. D.
supadmavyākaraṇaṭīkāa commentary written by a scholar of grammar named विष्णुमिश्र on the Supadmavyakarana, which see a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
supadmasamāsasaṃgrahaa treatise written by a grammarian named रूपनारायण, on the सुपद्मव्याकरण, which see below.
subodhinīname given to (1) a commentary on the Siddhantakaumudi by Kshamaunin or Jayakrshamaunin; (2) a commentary on the Sarasvata Vyakarana by Amritabharati : (3) a commentary on the Sarasvata Vyakarana by Candrakirti.
sumanoramāname of a commentary written by a Southern grammarian तिरुमल्ल on Bhattoj's Siddhantakaumudi
sūtrakārathe original writer of the sutras; e. g. पाणिनि, शाकटायन, शर्ववर्मन् , हेमचन्द्र and others. In Panini's system, Panini is called Sutrakara, as contrasted with Katyayana,who is called the Varttikakara and Patanjali, who is called the Bhasyakara;confer, compare पाणिने: सूत्रकारस्य M.Bh. on P.II 2.1.1.
setusaṃgrahaname of a commentary on Bopadeva's Mugdhabodha Grammar written by a grammarian named Gangadhara.
soma,somacāryaname of the writer of a gloss named त्रिभाष्यरत्न on the Taittiriya Pratisakhya.
somadevaa Jain Grammarian, the writer of a gloss on the commentary Jainendra Vyakarana named शब्दार्णवचन्द्रिका by the author, who was a resident of thc Deccan and lived in a village named Arjurika ( called आजर्रे to-day ) near Kolhapur in the twelfth century.
sthavirakauṇḍinyaname of an ancient writer of Pratisakhya works who is quoted in the Taittiriya Pratisakhya confer, compare Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XVII. 4.
sphoṭacandrikāa small treatise on the theory of Sphota written by Jayakrsna Mauni of the famous Maunin family. The author is known as Krsnabhatta also.
sphoṭanirūpaṇaname of a work discussing the nature of Sphota written by Apadeva.
sphoṭavādaa general name given to treatises discussing the nature of Sphota written by the Vaiyakaranas who defend and establish the theory of Sphota and by the Naiyayikas who criticise the theory. Famous among these works are (l) स्फोटवाद by a stalwart Grammarian Kondabhatta, the author of the Vaiyakaramabhusana and (2) स्फोटवाद by NageSa, the reputed grammarian of the eighteenth century.
sphoṭasiddhāntathe doctrine of Sphota, as advocated by the grammarians and criticised by others. See the word स्फोट,
sphīṭasiddhi(1)name of a short treatise on the nature of Sphota, written by a grammarian named Bharata MiSra; (2) name of a short disquisition on Sphota by MandanamiSra.
smṛtian authoritative dictum of an ancient grammarian before the famous author of the Varttika;confer, compare तथा च स्मृतिः श्तिपा शापानुबन्धेन निर्दिष्ट्ं etc, Siradeva Pari. 68.
svara(l)vowel, as contrasted with a consonant which never stands by itself independently. The word स्वर is defined generally :as स्वयं राजन्ते ते स्वराः ( Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on pan. The word स्वर is always used in the sense of a vowel in the Pratisakhya works; Panini however has got the word अच् (short term or Pratyahara formed of अ in 'अइउण्' and च् at the end of एऔच् Mahesvara sutra 4 ) always used for vowels, the term स्वर being relegated by him to denote accents which are also termed स्वर in the ancient Pratisakhyas and grammars. The number of vowels, although shown differently in diferent ancient works, is the same, viz. five simple vowels अ,इ,उ, ऋ, लृ, and four diphthongs ए, ऐ, ओ, and अौ. These nine, by the addition of the long varieties of the first four such as आ, ई, ऊ, and ऋ, are increased to thirteen and further to twentytwo by adding the pluta forms, there being no long variety for लृ and short on for the diphthongs. All these twentytwo varieties have further subdivisions, made on the criterion of each of them being further characterized by the properties उदात्त, अनुदIत्त and स्वरित and निरनुनासिक and सानुनासिक. (2) The word स्वर also means accent, a property possessed exclusively by vowels and not by consonants, as they are entirely dependent on vowels and can at the most be said to possess the same accent as the vowel with which they are uttered together. The accents are mentioned to be three; the acute ( उदात्त ), the grave अनुदात्त and the circumflex (स्वरित) defined respectively as उच्चैरुदात्तः, नीचैरनुदात्तः and समाहारः स्वरितः by Panini (P. I. 2.29, 30,3l). The point whether समाहार means a combination or coming together one after another of the two, or a commixture or blending of the two is critically discussed in the Mahabhasya. (vide Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 2.31). There are however two kinds of svarita mentioned by Panini and found actually in use : (a) the independent स्वरित as possessed by the word स्वर् (from which possibly the word स्वरित was formed) and a few other words as also many times by the resultant vowel out of two vowels ( उदात्त and अनुदात्त ) combined, and (b) the enclitic or secondary svarita by which name, one or more grave vowels occurring after the udatta, in a chain, are called cf P. VIII. 2.4 VIII. 2.6 and VIII 4.66 and 67. The topic of accents is fully discussed by the authors of the Pratisakhyas as also by Panini. For details, see Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) III. 1.19; T.Pr. 38-47 Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.I. 108 to 132, II. I.65 Atharvaveda Prātiśākhya. Adhyaya l padas 1, 2, 3 and Rk. Tantra 51-66; see also Kaiyata on P. I. 2.29; (3) The word स्वर is used also in the sense of a musical tone. This meaning arose out of the second meaning ' accent ' which itself arose from the first viz. 'vowel', and it is fully discussed in works explanatory of the chanting of Samas. Patanjali has given Seven subdivisions of accents which may be at the origin of the seven musical notes. See सप्तस्वर a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
svaravivṛtti( 1 )the same as स्वरविराम which see a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.; ( 2 ) a short treatise on Vedic accents written by a modern Vedic scholar and grammrian named Indradattopadhyaya.
hareidīkṣitaa reputed grammarian of the Siddhantakaumudi school of Panini who lived in the end of the seventeenth century. He was the grandson of Bhattoji Diksita and the preceptor of Nagesabhtta. His commentary named लधुशब्दरत्न, but popularly called शब्दरत्न on Bhattoji Diksita's Praudhamanorama, is widely studied by pupils along with the Praudhamanorama in the Vyakaranapathasalas. There is a work existing in a manuscript form but recentlv taken for printing, mamed 'Brhatsabdaratna ' which has been written by Haridiksita, although some scholars beiieve that it was written by Nagesa who ascribed it to his preceptor. For details see लधुशब्दरत्न.
harināthadvivedīa grammarian of the nineteenth century who has written a commentary named अकाण्डताण्डव on Nagesa's Paribhasendusekhara.
haribhāskara( अग्निहोत्री )a grammarian of the Deccan who lived in the seventeenth century at Nasik and wrote commentaries on grammarworks out of which his treatise on Paribhasas ( परिभाषाभास्कर ) written independently but based upon Siradeva's Paribhasavrtti, deserves a special notice and mention.
harirāma( इरिराम केशव काळे )a modern grammarian who has written a commentary named Ksika on Kondabhatta's Vaiyakaranabhusanasara. He lived in the second half of the eighteenth century and the commentary Kasika was written by him in 1797, He is said to have been a pupil of the great grammarian BhairavamiSra.
harivallabhaa grammarian who has written commentaries named दर्पणा on the Vaiyakaranabhusanasara of Kondabhatta, and Laghubhusanakanti on the Sabdakaustubha of Bhattoji Diksita.
hariśātri( भागवत )a grammarian of the nineteenth century who has written Vakyarthacandrika, a commentary on Nagesa's Paribhasendusekhara.
harṣavardvanasvāmina fairly old grammarian who wrote an extensive metrical compendium on genders named लिङ्गानुशासन on which a commentary was written by a grammarian named शबरस्वासिन्. These grammarians were,of course, different from the reputed king इर्षवर्धन and the ; Mimamsaka शाबरस्वामिन्.
hṛdayahāriṇīname of a commentary written by a grammrian named दण्डनाथ on the Sarasvatikanthabharana of Bhojarja.
hemacandraa Jain sage and scholar of remarkable erudition in the religious works of the Jainas as also in several Shastras. He was a resident of Dhandhuka in Gujarat, who, like Sankarācārya took संन्यासदीक्षा at a very early age and wrote a very large number of original books and commentaries, the total number of which may well nigh exceed fifty, during his long life of eighty-four years ( 1088 to ll 2 ). He stayed at AnhilavalaPattana in the North Gujarat and was patronised with extreme reverence by King Kumarapala who in fact, became his devoted pupil. Besides the well-known works on the various Shastras like Kavyanusasana, Abhidhanacintamani, Desinamamla, Yogasastra, Dvyasrayakavya, Trisastisalakapurusacarita and others which are well-known, he wrote a big work on grammar called सिद्धहेमचन्द्र by him,but popularly known by the name हेमव्याकरण or हैमशब्दानुशासन The , work consists of eight books or Adhyayas, out of which the eighth book is devoted to prakrit Grammar, and can be styled as a Grammar of all the Prakrit dialects. The Sanskrit Grammar of seven chapters is based practically upon Panini's Astadhyayi, the rules or sutras referring to Vedic words or Vedic affixes or accents being entirely omittedThe wording of the Sutras is much similar to that of Panini; at some places it is even identical. The order of the treatment of the subjects in the सिद्धहैम. शब्दानुशासनमृत्र is not, however, similar to that obtaining in the Astadhyayi of Panini. It is somewhat topicwise as in the Katantra Vyakarana. The first Adhyaya and a quarter of the second are devoted to Samjna, Paribhasa and declension; the second pada of the second Adhyaya is devoted to karaka, while the third pada of it is devoted to cerebralization and the fourth to the Stripratyayas.The first two Padas of the third Adhyaya are devoted to Samasas or compound words, while the last two Padas of the third Adhyaya and the fourth Adhyaya are devoted to conjugation The fifth Adhyaya is devoted to verbal derivatives or krdanta, while the sixth and the seventh Adhyayas are devoted to formations of nouns from nouns, or taddhita words. On this Sabda nusasana, which is just like Panini's Astadhyayi, the eighth adhyaya of Hemacandra being devoted to the grammar of the Arsa language similar to Vedic grammar of Panini, Hemacandra has himself written two glosses which are named लधुवृति and वृहृदवृत्ति and the famous commentary known as the Brhannyasa. Besides these works viz the हैमशब्दानुशासन, the two Vrttis on it and the Brhannyasa, he has given an appendix viz the Lingnusasana. The Grammar of Hemacandra, in short, introduced a new system of grammar different from, yet similar to, that of Panini, which by his followers was made completely similar to the Paniniya system by writing works similar to the Siddhantakaumudi, the Dhatuvrtti, the Manorama and the Paribhasendusekhara. हेमहंसगणि a grammarian belonging to the school of Hemacandra, who lived in the fifteenth century and wrote a work on Paribhasas named न्यायसंग्रह, on which he himself wrote a commentary called न्यायार्थमञ्जूषा and another one called by the name न्यास.
haimakaumudīan exhaustive commentary on the Sabdanusasana of Hemacandra written by a Jain grammarian Meghavijaya in the seventeenth century which is similar to the Siddhāntakaumudi of Bhattoji Diksita,
haimadhātuvyākhyāwritten by a Jain grammarian named पुण्यसुंदर which is similar to the Madhaviya Dhatuvrtti,
haimabṛhatprakriyāa work very similar to the Siddhantakaumudi written by a comparatively modern Jain scholar named Girijashankar Shastri.
haimabṛhadavṛttia gloss written on the Haima Sabdanusasana sutrapatha by Hemacandra himselfeminine. See हेमचन्द्र a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
haimabṛhannyāsaan extensive critical commentary written by Hemacandra on his own work, Haima Sabdanusasana. See हेमचन्द्र.
hemalaghuprakriyāvṛttia topicwise work based on Hemacandra's Sabdanu-sasana written by Vinayavijaya, a Jain scholar of grammar.
haimalaghuvṛttia short gloss on the Sabdanusasana, written by Hemacandra himselfeminine. See हेमचन्द्र a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
haimāliṅgānuśāsanaa treatise on genders written by हेमचन्द्र, See हेमचन्द्र a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
haimaliṅgānuśāsanavivaraṇaa commentary, written in the seventeenth century by Kalyanasagara on the हैमलिङ्गानुशासन.
haimaliṅānuśāsanavyākhyāa commentary named उद्धार also, written by Jayananda on the हैमलिङ्गानुशासन.
haimavyākaraṇaa treatise on grammar written by हेमचन्द्र, called by the name हेमशब्दानुशासन. See हेमचन्द्र a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
haimaśābdānuśāsanaa treatise on grammar written by Hemacandra. See हेमचन्द्र a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
haimaśabdānuśāsanalaghunyāsaa short commentary on Hemacandra's Sabdanusasana written by Devendrassuri. हैमशब्दनुशासनवृत्ति a short gloss called अवचूरि also, written by a Jain grammarian नन्दसुन्दर on the हैमशब्दानुशासन.
Vedabase Search
1452 results
abhimantritaḥ was addressedSB 4.9.45
tat-abhimantritam consecrated by the mantra of Bhadra KālīSB 5.9.16
ācarita activitiesSB 1.18.17
ācarita-agrya simply preaching His activitiesSB 4.22.24
ācaritaḥ followedSB 4.2.10
ācaritaḥ executedSB 4.14.15
ācaritāḥ utilizedSB 10.47.49
ācaritaḥ doneSB 10.78.31-32
sva-ācaritaiḥ by their characteristic behaviorSB 10.13.23
ācaritaiḥ because of worksSB 10.47.67
mańgala-ācaritaiḥ by auspicious activitiesCC Adi 6.61
ācaritam characterSB 3.14.27
ācaritam activitySB 3.14.28
ācaritam practiceSB 4.22.7
ācaritam performedSB 5.4.15
ācaritam activitiesSB 5.6.16
ācaritam practicedSB 5.8.23
ācaritam performedSB 6.16.46
ācaritām behaviorSB 9.19.2
toka-ācaritam adbhutam they are also wonderful childhood pastimesSB 10.7.3
ācaritam what they doSB 10.33.31
ācaritam has been performedSB 10.38.3
ācaritam performedSB 10.58.11
ācaritam actedSB 10.60.29
ācaritam and actionsSB 10.87.15
ācaritam action doneSB 10.90.19
ācaritān executedSB 8.19.15
ācaritāni the modes of behaviorSB 10.48.4
ācaritāni the activitiesSB 11.29.10
ācaritena by activitySB 10.33.32
adabhuta caritra wonderful characteristicsCC Madhya 16.162-163
harita-ādayaḥ headed by the HaritasSB 8.13.28
toka-ācaritam adbhutam they are also wonderful childhood pastimesSB 10.7.3
sphurita-aruṇa-adharam swollen reddish lipsSB 10.9.6
avidvat-adhikāritvāt from being without knowledgeSB 6.1.11
adhiśrita situatedSB 4.7.21
adhiśritam crownedSB 3.23.18
adhiśrite in the milk pan on the ovenSB 10.9.5
adhiśritya placed onSB 3.4.8
adhiśritya having placed on the stoveSB 10.29.5
adhyāsana-āśritaḥ situated on the throneSB 6.7.2-8
carita-ādi character, pastimes and so forthNoI 7
carita-ādi character, pastimes and so onNoI 8
ācarita-agrya simply preaching His activitiesSB 4.22.24
parituṣṭaḥ aham I was very much satisfiedSB 10.3.36
madhya-ahna karite to execute daily noontime dutiesCC Antya 1.60
madhya-ahna karite to perform His noontime dutiesCC Antya 1.102
madhya-ahna karite to perform His noon dutiesCC Antya 4.92
rite āila was ready to beatCC Antya 13.54
karite nā āise you should not present yourselfCC Madhya 25.74
akhila-durita all sinful activitiesSB 12.6.68
sura-nara-mṛga-miśrita-jalacara-ākṛtibhiḥ with different forms like those of the demigods, human beings, animals, mixtures and aquatics (the incarnations Vāmana, Lord Rāmacandra, Kṛṣṇa, Varāha, Hayagrīva, Nṛsiṃha, Matsya and Kūrma)SB 6.9.40
karite ālińgana to embraceCC Antya 4.147
āmā nistārite to deliver meCC Madhya 8.38
āmantritaḥ being prayed forSB 3.3.6
āmantritaḥ was declaredSB 4.17.9
amiśritāḥ not confused with the sounds vibrated by KṛṣṇaSB 10.33.9
marita' amogha Amogha would have diedCC Madhya 15.290
amṛta-yantritaḥ being captivated by the nectarSB 7.13.20
amṛta-carita nectarean characteristicsCC Madhya 4.170
smārita-ananta as soon as Lord Kṛṣṇa was rememberedSB 10.12.44
anāśritaḥ without taking shelterBG 6.1
andha-kāritāḥ blindedSB 11.30.17
ańga-parityāgaḥ the giving up of his bodySB 12.12.24
dhūli-dhūsarita-ańgaḥ tvam You have become covered with dust and sand all over Your bodySB 10.11.18
ańghri-śrita under the protection of His feetSB 2.1.37
śekharita-ańghri-reṇuḥ the dust of whose lotus feet is the crownCC Adi 6.73
antaritaḥ situated betweenSB 3.7.17
antaritaḥ having endedSB 10.53.23
bhagavat-āśrita-āśrita-anubhāvaḥ the consequence of taking shelter of a devotee who has similarly taken shelter of a spiritual master in the paramparā system (one is sure to get out of the great nescience of the bodily concept of life)SB 5.13.25
anucarita constantly performed activitiesSB 10.47.18
anucaritam character and activitiesSB 2.8.16
anucaritam and the activities of the incarnationSB 2.8.17
anucaritam activitiesSB 2.10.5
kila anucaritam pastimes as a paramahaṃsa, above all regulative varṇāśrama principlesSB 5.6.9
anucaritam the narrationSB 5.14.46
anucaritam the narrationSB 5.24.27
anucaritam characteristics (understood by reading or describing his activities)SB 7.10.43-44
avatāra-anucaritam activities performed in His different incarnationsSB 8.23.30
anucaritam transcendental activitiesSB 9.10.3
vaṃśa-anucaritam the narrations of their activitiesSB 12.7.9-10
vaṃśa-anucaritam histories of the dynastiesSB 12.7.16
anucaritam the life storySB 12.12.14-15
vaṃśa-anucaritāni ca and their dynasties and characteristicsSB 9.1.4
anukāritāḥ caused to performSB 7.8.55
anumantritaḥ being permittedSB 4.7.16
anuparitaḥ surroundingSB 5.16.29
apāśrita taking rest againstSB 3.4.8
kṛta-śriyā apāśrita beauty created by those dresses and ornamentsSB 3.8.25
apavāritā preventedSB 3.16.30
āpūrita filledSB 6.4.41
āpūritāḥ filledSB 6.4.17
āpūritāḥ populatedSB 6.6.3
āpūritāḥ filledSB 10.40.10
āpūritam is fulfilledSB 3.12.57
āpūritam spread all overSB 4.1.13
arca-āśritāḥ places where the Deity of Rādhā-Kṛṣṇa is worshiped (such as big American cities like New York, Los Angeles and San Francisco, and European cities like London and Paris, or wherever there are centers of Kṛṣṇa consciousness)SB 7.14.30-33
sphurita-aruṇa-adharam swollen reddish lipsSB 10.9.6
ārya-caritāt from the path of chastity according to Vedic civilizationCC Madhya 24.56
ārya-caritāt from the path of chastity according to Vedic civilizationCC Antya 17.31
upāśritaḥ asmi I take full shelterCC Madhya 25.36
āśrita-padaḥ surrendered soulSB 2.7.42
bhagavat-āśrita-āśrita-anubhāvaḥ the consequence of taking shelter of a devotee who has similarly taken shelter of a spiritual master in the paramparā system (one is sure to get out of the great nescience of the bodily concept of life)SB 5.13.25
bhagavat-āśrita-āśrita-anubhāvaḥ the consequence of taking shelter of a devotee who has similarly taken shelter of a spiritual master in the paramparā system (one is sure to get out of the great nescience of the bodily concept of life)SB 5.13.25
āśrita resting onSB 7.3.2
āśrita-mārgam its holes stoppedSB 10.35.2-3
āśrita of the shelteredCC Adi 2.95
caraṇa-āśrita one who has taken shelter of the lotus feetCC Adi 7.2
tāńhāra caraṇa-āśrita all who have taken shelter at His lotus feetCC Adi 11.2
āśrita-padaḥ those who have taken shelter of the LordCC Madhya 6.235
āśrita of the shelteredCC Madhya 20.151
āśrita jana subservient peopleCC Antya 6.150
āśritāḥ acceptingBG 7.15
āśritāḥ having taken shelter ofBG 9.13
āśritaḥ taking refugeBG 12.11
āśritaḥ situatedBG 15.14
āśritaḥ underSB 1.3.6
āśritaḥ taking shelter ofSB 1.6.15
āśritaḥ under the protectionSB 1.16.11
āśritāḥ being taken toSB 3.2.10
āśritāḥ those who are so situatedSB 3.6.29
āśritaḥ taken refugeSB 3.23.42
āśritāḥ have taken shelterSB 4.2.30
ātma-āśritāḥ about himselfSB 4.16.26
durga-āśritaḥ being in a fortified placeSB 5.1.18
āśritaḥ taken shelter ofSB 5.1.19
āśritaḥ receivingSB 6.4.34
adhyāsana-āśritaḥ situated on the throneSB 6.7.2-8
āśritaḥ taking shelter ofSB 6.17.38
bhavam āśritaḥ who is in material existenceSB 7.6.5
āśritāḥ sheltered atSB 7.8.51
āśritaḥ situated onSB 7.9.35
arca-āśritāḥ places where the Deity of Rādhā-Kṛṣṇa is worshiped (such as big American cities like New York, Los Angeles and San Francisco, and European cities like London and Paris, or wherever there are centers of Kṛṣṇa consciousness)SB 7.14.30-33
āśritaḥ took shelter of (and is living in even now)SB 9.22.11
āśritāḥ accepting as the jurisdictionSB 9.23.16
āśritaḥ (I am) dependingSB 10.36.29
āśritaḥ resorting toSB 10.61.30
āśritaḥ resorting toSB 10.61.32
āśritaḥ situatedSB 11.6.20
āśritāḥ taken shelter ofSB 11.7.33-35
āśritaḥ taking shelter ofSB 11.29.13-14
āśritaḥ was taken shelter ofSB 11.29.37
āśritāḥ are situatedSB 12.2.27-28
āśritāḥ shelteredCC Adi 3.81
āśritaḥ taking recourse toCC Adi 3.83
āśritaḥ acceptingCC Adi 4.34
āśritaḥ taken shelter ofCC Madhya 22.101
āśritam assumingBG 9.11
āśritam directedSB 4.4.20
āśritam absorbedSB 4.6.39
yogeśvara-āśritām the place occupied by great mystic yogīsSB 9.2.35-36
āśritām taking shelter ofSB 9.10.30
āśritām composedSB 10.62.29-30
āśritam acceptedCC Madhya 25.39
āśritān dependents (like us)SB 6.9.23
āśritān set asideSB 11.27.50
māyā-āśritānām for those in the clutches of material energySB 10.12.7-11
māyā-āśritānām for ordinary persons under the clutches of the external energyCC Madhya 8.75
māyā-āśritānām for ordinary persons under the clutches of the external energyCC Antya 7.32
āśritāni places of shelterSB 7.14.30-33
āśritya taking shelter ofBG 7.29
āśritya taking shelter ofBG 16.10
āśritya taking shelterBG 18.59
āśritya taking shelter ofSB 3.14.20
āśritya taking shelterSB 4.1.2
āśritya taken shelter ofSB 4.26.5
āśritya taking shelter ofSB 6.7.18
āśritya acceptingSB 10.1.11
āśritya taking shelter ofSB 10.36.29
āśritya taking shelter ofSB 10.74.37
āśritya identifying withSB 12.6.34
āśritya resorting toSB 12.7.8
caritra-āsvādana relishing the characteristicsCC Madhya 25.246
vidārita-āsye within the wide-open mouthSB 10.8.37-39
atandritā without any lazinessSB 8.17.1
atandritaḥ with great careBG 3.23
atandritaḥ instrumentalSB 2.9.29
atandritaḥ alertSB 3.28.7
atandritaḥ attentiveSB 3.28.30
atandritaḥ attentiveSB 3.30.9
atandritāḥ becoming free from lazinessSB 6.14.20
atandritāḥ very carefully, without diversionSB 8.6.22-23
atandritāḥ without becoming laxSB 10.73.30
atandritaḥ very carefullySB 11.9.11
atandritaḥ carefullySB 11.13.12
atandritaḥ with great careSB 11.14.29
atandritaḥ carefullySB 11.20.19
atandritam ceaselessSB 12.13.2
ātma-āśritāḥ about himselfSB 4.16.26
ātma pavitrite to purify MyselfCC Madhya 20.56
īrita-ātmane unto the Lord, who is manifestedSB 5.18.36
avadhāritam is understoodSB 11.6.28
avadhīrita which have defiedMM 6
avadhūta-veṣa-bhāṣā-caritaiḥ by the dress, language and characteristics of an avadhūtaSB 5.6.6
avatāra-anucaritam activities performed in His different incarnationsSB 8.23.30
avatāritaḥ is removedSB 11.6.28
avatāritaḥ diminishedSB 11.30.25
avatārite to cause His adventCC Adi 13.70
avatārite to cause to descendCC Antya 3.224
avidūritaḥ not far awaySB 10.30.40
avidvat-adhikāritvāt from being without knowledgeSB 6.1.11
avikāritvam freedom from all distractionSB 3.26.22
tat-bāla-caritāni in which the activities of her own child were enactedSB 10.9.1-2
bhagavat-āśrita-āśrita-anubhāvaḥ the consequence of taking shelter of a devotee who has similarly taken shelter of a spiritual master in the paramparā system (one is sure to get out of the great nescience of the bodily concept of life)SB 5.13.25
udara bharite to fill Your bellyCC Madhya 3.85
avadhūta-veṣa-bhāṣā-caritaiḥ by the dress, language and characteristics of an avadhūtaSB 5.6.6
bhavam āśritaḥ who is in material existenceSB 7.6.5
karite bhojana to partake of the prasādamCC Madhya 3.60
bhojana karite to eatCC Madhya 3.78
bhojana karite to take lunchCC Madhya 9.354
karite bhojana to take their luncheonCC Madhya 11.198
karite bhojana to take lunchCC Madhya 12.159
bhojana karite to eatCC Madhya 14.41
karite bhojana to take lunchCC Madhya 15.223
bhojana-carita eating affairsCC Madhya 15.299
karite bhojana to accept the prasādamCC Antya 7.64
karite bhojane to take his lunchCC Madhya 19.91
paritoṣam ca and satisfactionSB 7.13.35
vaṃśa-anucaritāni ca and their dynasties and characteristicsSB 9.1.4
dvitaḥ tritaḥ ca ekataḥ ca Dvita, Trita and EkataSB 10.84.2-5
dvitaḥ tritaḥ ca ekataḥ ca Dvita, Trita and EkataSB 10.84.2-5
marite cāhe wants to kill Subuddhi RāyaCC Madhya 25.193
go-dohana karite cāhi I want to milk the cowsCC Madhya 4.31
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Adi 1.110
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Adi 2.121
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Adi 3.114
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Adi 4.277
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Adi 5.235
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Adi 6.120
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Adi 7.171
caitanya-carita of the pastimes of Lord Caitanya MahāprabhuCC Adi 8.42
caitanya-carite in the pastimes of Lord CaitanyaCC Adi 8.61
caitanya-carite in the pastimes of Lord CaitanyaCC Adi 8.67
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Adi 8.85
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Adi 9.55
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Adi 10.164
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Adi 11.61
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Adi 12.96
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Adi 14.97
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Adi 15.34
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Adi 16.111
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Śrī Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Adi 17.336
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 1.287
caitanya-carita pastimes of Lord Śrī Caitanya MahāprabhuCC Madhya 2.87
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 3.219
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 4.213
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 5.161
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 6.286
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 7.155
caitanya-caritra the activities of Śrī Caitanya MahāprabhuCC Madhya 8.304
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 8.313
caitanya-carita the activities of Lord Śrī Caitanya MahāprabhuCC Madhya 9.361
caitanya-carita the pastimes of Śrī Caitanya MahāprabhuCC Madhya 9.364
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 9.365
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 10.190
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 11.243
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 12.222
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 13.209
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 14.257
śrī-caitanya-caritāmṛta-śrotā-gaṇa to the listeners of Śrī Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 15.3
caitanya-caritāmṛta Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 15.3
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 15.302
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 16.290
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 17.234
caitanya-caritra pastimes of Śrī Caitanya MahāprabhuCC Madhya 18.228
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 18.229
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 19.257
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 20.406
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 21.149
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 22.169
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 23.127
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 24.355
caitanya-caritāmṛta the pastimes of Lord Śrī Caitanya MahāprabhuCC Madhya 25.281
caitanya-caritāmṛtam the book known as Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 25.282
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Antya 1.223
caitanya-carita the pastimes of Śrī Caitanya MahāprabhuCC Antya 2.171
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Antya 2.172
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Antya 3.272
caitanya-caritra the characteristics of Lord Śrī Caitanya MahāprabhuCC Antya 4.238
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Antya 4.239
caitanya-caritāmṛta this transcendental literature known as Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Antya 5.89
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Antya 5.164
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Antya 6.329
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Antya 7.173
caitanya-caritra the character of Śrī Caitanya MahāprabhuCC Antya 8.101
caitanya-caritra the character of Śrī Caitanya MahāprabhuCC Antya 8.102
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Antya 8.103
caitanya-caritra behavior of Lord CaitanyaCC Antya 9.151
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Antya 9.153
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Antya 10.162
caitanya-caritra the life and characteristics of Śrī Caitanya MahāprabhuCC Antya 11.106
caitanya-caritra life and characteristics of Śrī Caitanya MahāprabhuCC Antya 11.107
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Antya 11.108
caitanya-caritāmṛtam the transcendental life and characteristics of Śrī Caitanya MahāprabhuCC Antya 12.1
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Antya 12.155
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Antya 13.139
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Antya 14.123
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Antya 15.99
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Antya 16.151
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Antya 17.73
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Antya 18.121
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Antya 19.111
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Antya 19.112
caitanya-caritra of the characteristics of Śrī Caitanya MahāprabhuCC Antya 20.78
caitanya-caritāmṛta the description of Lord Śrī Caitanya's pastimesCC Antya 20.151
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Antya 20.153
caitanya-caritāmṛtam containing the nectarean activities of Lord Śrī Caitanya MahāprabhuCC Antya 20.155
camatkāritām the madnessCC Antya 1.145
cānda dharite to catch the moonCC Antya 18.19
caraṇa-āśrita one who has taken shelter of the lotus feetCC Adi 7.2
tāńhāra caraṇa-āśrita all who have taken shelter at His lotus feetCC Adi 11.2
carita characteristicsSB 3.5.7
sat-carita of very good character, observing all necessary rules and regulationsSB 9.6.50
carita of the pastimesSB 10.87.21
caitanya-carita of the pastimes of Lord Caitanya MahāprabhuCC Adi 8.42
carita characteristicsCC Adi 10.43
carita activitiesCC Adi 13.15
carita the characterCC Adi 17.329
daśama-carita poetry about the Tenth Canto of Śrīmad-BhāgavatamCC Madhya 1.35
carita the activitiesCC Madhya 2.32
carita characteristicCC Madhya 2.50
caitanya-carita pastimes of Lord Śrī Caitanya MahāprabhuCC Madhya 2.87
amṛta-carita nectarean characteristicsCC Madhya 4.170
gopāla-carita the narration of GopālaCC Madhya 5.134
carita the characterCC Madhya 8.187
vaiṣṇava-carita pure devoteesCC Madhya 9.305
caitanya-carita the activities of Lord Śrī Caitanya MahāprabhuCC Madhya 9.361
caitanya-carita the pastimes of Śrī Caitanya MahāprabhuCC Madhya 9.364
ińhāra carita his characterCC Madhya 10.63
śrī-kṛṣṇa-carita the Personality of Godhead Śrī KṛṣṇaCC Madhya 10.106
bhojana-carita eating affairsCC Madhya 15.299
caitanya-carita the pastimes of Śrī Caitanya MahāprabhuCC Antya 2.171
carita the characteristicsCC Antya 16.121-122
carita-ādi character, pastimes and so forthNoI 7
carita-ādi character, pastimes and so onNoI 8
kāka-mṛga-go-caritaḥ behaving exactly like the crows, deer and cowsSB 5.5.34
daitya-dānava-kula-tīrthī-karaṇa-śīlā-caritaḥ whose activities and character were so exalted that he delivered all the daityas (demons) born in his familySB 5.18.7
upagīyamāna-caritaḥ being glorified for His uncommon activitiesSB 9.10.33
caritaḥ whose characterSB 9.10.54
upagīyamāna-caritaḥ being worshiped and adored for his exalted character and activitiesSB 9.16.26
caritaḥ His pastimesSB 10.15.10-12
caritaḥ His pastimesSB 10.65.23
caritaiḥ devotional servicesSB 3.16.21
caritaiḥ activitiesSB 4.8.57
avadhūta-veṣa-bhāṣā-caritaiḥ by the dress, language and characteristics of an avadhūtaSB 5.6.6
caritaiḥ by His activitiesSB 10.15.19
caritaiḥ by actsCC Adi 3.87
caritam activitiesSB 1.3.40
caritam activitiesSB 1.18.15
caritam characterSB 3.13.3
caritam characterSB 3.14.29
caritam the characterSB 3.22.39
caritam characterSB 4.12.44
caritam characterSB 4.12.48
caritam characterSB 4.23.30
caritam characterSB 4.23.37
pṛthu-caritam the narration of Pṛthu MahārājaSB 4.23.39
caritam his characterSB 4.25.9
caritam activitiesSB 7.1.4-5
tat-caritam the activities of the LordSB 8.3.20-21
caritam activitiesSB 8.23.28
uttamaśloka-caritam the pastimes of the Supreme Personality of GodheadSB 8.24.2-3
caritam the pastimesSB 8.24.4
caritam characterSB 9.5.28
rāma-caritam the narration concerning the activities of the Supreme Personality of Godhead Lord RāmacandraSB 9.11.23
caritam the characterSB 10.1.1
kṛṣṇa-caritam topics of Lord KṛṣṇaSB 10.1.14
caritam the activitiesSB 10.12.40
caritam pastimesSB 10.14.60
caritam the pastimesSB 10.16.3
su-caritam pious workSB 10.53.38
caritam doneSB 10.64.14-15
caritam the activitiesSB 10.84.17
caritam pastimeSB 10.85.59
deva-caritam the activities of demigodsSB 11.2.5
caritam the pastimesSB 12.12.2
caritam the historySB 12.12.14-15
caritam the historySB 12.12.18
caritam the pastimesSB 12.12.24
caritam the character and activitiesCC Antya 20.154
caritam pastimesMM 24
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Adi 1.110
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Adi 2.121
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Adi 3.114
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Adi 4.277
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Adi 5.235
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Adi 6.120
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Adi 7.171
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Adi 8.85
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Adi 9.55
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Adi 10.164
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Adi 11.61
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Adi 12.96
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Adi 14.97
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Adi 15.34
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Adi 16.111
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Śrī Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Adi 17.336
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 1.287
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 3.219
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 4.213
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 5.161
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 6.286
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 7.155
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 8.313
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 9.365
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 10.190
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 11.243
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 12.222
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 13.209
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 14.257
śrī-caitanya-caritāmṛta-śrotā-gaṇa to the listeners of Śrī Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 15.3
caitanya-caritāmṛta Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 15.3
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 15.302
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 16.290
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 17.234
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 18.229
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 19.257
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 20.406
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 21.149
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 22.169
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 23.127
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 24.355
caitanya-caritāmṛta the pastimes of Lord Śrī Caitanya MahāprabhuCC Madhya 25.281
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Antya 1.223
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Antya 2.172
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Antya 3.272
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Antya 4.239
caitanya-caritāmṛta this transcendental literature known as Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Antya 5.89
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Antya 5.164
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Antya 6.329
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Antya 7.173
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Antya 8.103
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Antya 9.153
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Antya 10.162
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Antya 11.108
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Antya 12.155
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Antya 13.139
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Antya 14.123
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Antya 15.99
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Antya 16.151
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Antya 17.73
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Antya 18.121
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Antya 19.111
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Antya 19.112
caitanya-caritāmṛta the description of Lord Śrī Caitanya's pastimesCC Antya 20.151
caitanya-caritāmṛta the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Antya 20.153
caitanya-caritāmṛtam the book known as Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 25.282
caitanya-caritāmṛtam the transcendental life and characteristics of Śrī Caitanya MahāprabhuCC Antya 12.1
caitanya-caritāmṛtam containing the nectarean activities of Lord Śrī Caitanya MahāprabhuCC Antya 20.155
caritān pleasures enjoyedSB 4.29.78
caritāni activitiesSB 1.11.20
caritāni activities ofSB 1.19.22
caritāni activitiesSB 3.15.17
tat-caritāni their characteristicsSB 6.1.4-5
tat-bāla-caritāni in which the activities of her own child were enactedSB 10.9.1-2
caritāni the deedsSB 10.39.17-18
caritāni the activitiesSB 10.46.28
caritāni pastimesSB 11.6.24
caritāni pastimesSB 11.31.28
caritasya one who possesses such qualitiesSB 4.23.30
caritāt from the proper behaviorSB 10.29.40
ārya-caritāt from the path of chastity according to Vedic civilizationCC Madhya 24.56
ārya-caritāt from the path of chastity according to Vedic civilizationCC Antya 17.31
caitanya-carite in the pastimes of Lord CaitanyaCC Adi 8.61
caitanya-carite in the pastimes of Lord CaitanyaCC Adi 8.67
carite in the characterCC Madhya 1.280
carite characteristicsCC Madhya 21.144
prabhura carite about Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu's characteristicsCC Antya 5.91
caritena with the endeavorSB 12.6.62
caritra the activities or the characterSB 4.29.39-40
sva-vidhi-niyoga-śauca-cāritra-vihīnāḥ without character, cleanliness, and the rules and regulations given according to one's own duty in lifeSB 5.6.10
rāmera caritra saba all the activities of Lord RāmacandraCC Adi 5.150
mańgala-caritra all characteristics are auspiciousCC Adi 6.12
caritra characterCC Adi 10.100
caritra characterCC Adi 12.19
caritra characterCC Adi 17.297
caritra characterCC Adi 17.304
kṛṣṇa-caritra-līlā the pastimes of KṛṣṇaCC Madhya 1.227
caritra characterCC Madhya 7.26
caitanya-caritra the activities of Śrī Caitanya MahāprabhuCC Madhya 8.304
rāmānanda-caritra the story of Rāmānanda RāyaCC Madhya 8.304
madhura-caritra pleasing characterCC Madhya 15.141
citra-caritra of varieties of activitiesCC Madhya 15.298
adabhuta caritra wonderful characteristicsCC Madhya 16.162-163
caritra tāńhāra His characteristicsCC Madhya 17.105
prabhu-caritra pastimes of Śrī Caitanya MahāprabhuCC Madhya 18.223
caitanya-caritra pastimes of Śrī Caitanya MahāprabhuCC Madhya 18.228
caritra characterCC Madhya 21.16
caritra the activityCC Madhya 25.219
caritra characterCC Madhya 25.221
caritra-āsvādana relishing the characteristicsCC Madhya 25.246
caritra-varṇana a description of the characteristicsCC Madhya 25.247
haridāsera caritra the characteristics of Haridāsa ṭhākuraCC Antya 3.97
caritra characterCC Antya 3.143
caritra characteristicCC Antya 3.227
caitanya-caritra the characteristics of Lord Śrī Caitanya MahāprabhuCC Antya 4.238
īśvara-caritra character exactly like that of the Supreme Personality of GodheadCC Antya 8.95
caitanya-caritra the character of Śrī Caitanya MahāprabhuCC Antya 8.101
caitanya-caritra the character of Śrī Caitanya MahāprabhuCC Antya 8.102
caritra saba all the behaviorCC Antya 9.116
caitanya-caritra behavior of Lord CaitanyaCC Antya 9.151
caitanya-caritra the life and characteristics of Śrī Caitanya MahāprabhuCC Antya 11.106
caitanya-caritra life and characteristics of Śrī Caitanya MahāprabhuCC Antya 11.107
caritra characterCC Antya 12.28
saba caritra all characteristicsCC Antya 12.33
īśvara-caritra the characteristic of the Supreme Personality of GodheadCC Antya 12.85
caritra the characteristicsCC Antya 19.103
caitanya-caritra of the characteristics of Śrī Caitanya MahāprabhuCC Antya 20.78
caritraiḥ characteristicsSB 2.7.20
caritram storiesNBS 63
tāńhāra caritre in his behaviorCC Madhya 16.138
prabhura caritre by the character of Śrī Caitanya MahāprabhuCC Antya 7.79
yāhāra caritre in whose activitiesCC Antya 19.4
caritreṇa by characterSB 3.3.20
ritryāṇi the characteristicsNBS 78
carit performingSB 6.19.25
carit wanderingSB 9.7.20
carit after executingSB 9.16.1
carit having executedSB 10.75.19
carit performing penancesSB 10.78.40
carit having executedSB 10.84.53
carvaṇa karite chewingCC Antya 4.238
sneha-yantrita-cetasā his mind being controlled by such affectionSB 9.7.15
churita smearedSB 10.15.42
churita powderedSB 10.35.22-23
churita smearedSB 10.39.30
churita tingedBs 5.38
churitam coveredSB 7.8.19-22
churiteṣu filledSB 10.69.1-6
citra-caritra of varieties of activitiesCC Madhya 15.298
daitya-dānava-kula-tīrthī-karaṇa-śīlā-caritaḥ whose activities and character were so exalted that he delivered all the daityas (demons) born in his familySB 5.18.7
daiva-īritāt according to destinySB 3.26.38
daitya-dānava-kula-tīrthī-karaṇa-śīlā-caritaḥ whose activities and character were so exalted that he delivered all the daityas (demons) born in his familySB 5.18.7
daṇḍavat karite offering their obeisancesCC Madhya 21.70
darśana karite to see Lord JagannāthaCC Madhya 6.33
daśama-carita poetry about the Tenth Canto of Śrīmad-BhāgavatamCC Madhya 1.35
deva-caritam the activities of demigodsSB 11.2.5
dharite capturingCC Adi 7.78
dharite to captureCC Madhya 1.205
dharite to captureCC Madhya 5.52
dharite to hold himCC Madhya 8.283
dharite to catchCC Madhya 13.86
dharite to arrestCC Antya 3.108
dharite pāre can controlCC Antya 3.112
dharite dharite keeping and keepingCC Antya 10.111
dharite dharite keeping and keepingCC Antya 10.111
cānda dharite to catch the moonCC Antya 18.19
dharitri O earthSB 1.16.23
dharit the earthSB 4.17.3
dharit the earthSB 4.22.57
dharitryā by the earthSB 3.3.6
nānā-dhātu-vicitritaiḥ decorated with various mineralsSB 4.6.10
dhūli-dhūsarita-ańgaḥ tvam You have become covered with dust and sand all over Your bodySB 10.11.18
dhūli-dhūsarita-ańgaḥ tvam You have become covered with dust and sand all over Your bodySB 10.11.18
nā dilā karite did not allow me to doCC Antya 4.137
sarit divaḥ the transcendental water within the banks of the GangesSB 4.1.14
go-dohana karite cāhi I want to milk the cowsCC Madhya 4.31
durga-āśritaḥ being in a fortified placeSB 5.1.18
durita by sinful activitiesSB 7.9.39
akhila-durita all sinful activitiesSB 12.6.68
durita of sinful reactionsSB 12.11.17
duritakṣayaḥ a son named DuritakṣayaSB 9.21.18
duritam and sinsSB 10.57.42
duritāni sinful activitiesSB 3.30.7
duścarita sinful activitiesSB 5.6.16
dvāra karite to make a wayCC Madhya 4.49
dvija-īritāḥ sounded by learned brāhmaṇasSB 1.10.19
dvitaḥ tritaḥ ca ekataḥ ca Dvita, Trita and EkataSB 10.84.2-5
dvitaḥ tritaḥ ca ekataḥ ca Dvita, Trita and EkataSB 10.84.2-5
ekatra karite to assembleCC Madhya 25.9
śrī-caitanya-caritāmṛta-śrotā-gaṇa to the listeners of Śrī Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 15.3
ghargharitam the tumultuous soundSB 3.13.25
ghāṭi karite to reduceCC Antya 9.26
girā īritam merely being pronounced by the tongueSB 4.4.14
sa-giri-sarit-samudra-sattvam with many mountains, trees, oceans and living entitiesSB 5.25.12
giritra by Lord ŚivaSB 10.44.13
giritra of Lord ŚivaSB 10.88.40
giritraḥ Lord ŚivaSB 4.3.15
giritraḥ Lord ŚivaSB 8.6.15
giritram Rudra (Śiva)SB 2.1.35
giritrāya to ŚivaSB 4.2.19
giritreṇa by Lord ŚivaSB 4.24.16
kāka-mṛga-go-caritaḥ behaving exactly like the crows, deer and cowsSB 5.5.34
go-dohana karite cāhi I want to milk the cowsCC Madhya 4.31
gopāla-carita the narration of GopālaCC Madhya 5.134
parityakta-guṇaḥ one who is disassociated from the material modes of natureSB 4.20.10
rita ha-ila became filledCC Madhya 14.35
haridāsera caritra the characteristics of Haridāsa ṭhākuraCC Antya 3.97
harit-maṇi like emeraldsSB 3.28.25
harit greenSB 8.2.4
harita greenSB 3.8.24
śaśvat-harita of evergreenSB 3.22.29-30
harita-ādayaḥ headed by the HaritasSB 8.13.28
haritaḥ the king named HaritaSB 9.8.1
haritāḥ greenishSB 10.20.11
harite to attractCC Madhya 9.147
harite to attractCC Madhya 14.123
tāńre hāsya karite to make Him a laughingstockCC Madhya 14.206
rita ha-ila became filledCC Madhya 14.35
ińhāra carita his characterCC Madhya 10.63
īrita blownSB 3.11.31
īrita-ātmane unto the Lord, who is manifestedSB 5.18.36
īrita by the instructionsSB 7.5.56-57
īritā sentSB 8.24.33
īritā had been explainedSB 9.8.13
dvija-īritāḥ sounded by learned brāhmaṇasSB 1.10.19
īritaḥ explainedSB 3.7.23
īritaḥ describedSB 4.13.4
īritaḥ spreadingSB 7.3.4
īritaḥ describedSB 8.4.14
īritaḥ had been releasedSB 8.11.32
īritaḥ known as suchSB 9.6.12
īritaḥ knownSB 9.17.6
īritāḥ blownSB 10.15.34
īritāḥ encouragedSB 10.20.24
īritāḥ sentSB 10.39.16
īritāḥ playedSB 10.77.37
īritaḥ impelledSB 11.3.10
īritaiḥ chantedSB 8.8.14
īritaiḥ shotSB 10.76.24
īritaiḥ which are blownSB 11.7.43
īritaiḥ usedSB 11.23.2
īritam indicated bySB 1.14.24
īritam utteredSB 3.15.35
girā īritam merely being pronounced by the tongueSB 4.4.14
īritam resoundedSB 4.10.22
īritam now explainedSB 5.6.16
īritam promisedSB 8.22.2
īritam spoken (by Mahārāja Yayāti)SB 9.19.26
īritam trying for that purposeSB 10.9.9
īritam what was pronouncedSB 10.74.26
īritam impelledSB 11.20.17
īritān tossedSB 3.17.26
daiva-īritāt according to destinySB 3.26.38
īritayā wieldedSB 10.77.34
īrite consideringSB 9.20.34
īritum or to express by wordsSB 8.3.6
īśvara-caritra character exactly like that of the Supreme Personality of GodheadCC Antya 8.95
īśvara-caritra the characteristic of the Supreme Personality of GodheadCC Antya 12.85
svarita-ñ-itaḥ of verbs having an indicatory ñ or a svarita accentCC Madhya 24.26
jāgaritāni while awakeSB 10.42.28-31
jagat tārite to deliver the whole worldCC Madhya 15.160
jagat nistārite to deliver the whole worldCC Antya 3.75
sura-nara-mṛga-miśrita-jalacara-ākṛtibhiḥ with different forms like those of the demigods, human beings, animals, mixtures and aquatics (the incarnations Vāmana, Lord Rāmacandra, Kṛṣṇa, Varāha, Hayagrīva, Nṛsiṃha, Matsya and Kūrma)SB 6.9.40
sarit-jalaiḥ by the water of the riverSB 9.15.21
sarit-jale in the water of the riverSB 8.24.14
jana-paritāpam the miserable condition of everyoneSB 7.8.52
āśrita jana subservient peopleCC Antya 6.150
jīva nistārite to deliver all the fallen soulsCC Madhya 25.264
kāka-mṛga-go-caritaḥ behaving exactly like the crows, deer and cowsSB 5.5.34
kāla-yantritā being forced by timeSB 7.2.52
daitya-dānava-kula-tīrthī-karaṇa-śīlā-caritaḥ whose activities and character were so exalted that he delivered all the daityas (demons) born in his familySB 5.18.7
karita would have madeCC Adi 2.85
ritāḥ made to actSB 10.22.22
andha-kāritāḥ blindedSB 11.30.17
nā karitāma I would not doCC Antya 4.196
karite to makeCC Adi 4.4
karite to doCC Adi 4.15-16
karite to doCC Adi 4.15-16
karite to doCC Adi 4.101
niṣedha karite nāre unable to prohibit Lord RāmacandraCC Adi 5.151
namaskāra karite while offering obeisances, bowing downCC Adi 5.164
karite takingCC Adi 7.158
karite to doCC Adi 10.22
karite to doCC Adi 12.12
karite to doCC Adi 12.94
karite to executeCC Adi 14.25
karite to doCC Adi 14.49
karite to doCC Adi 14.53
karite lāgilā began to observeCC Adi 15.10
karite to executeCC Adi 15.26
niścaya karite to ascertainCC Adi 16.10
karite to takeCC Adi 17.54
karite performingCC Adi 17.89
karite to performCC Adi 17.101
karite to performCC Adi 17.121
karite to doCC Adi 17.128
karite to executeCC Adi 17.157
karite to performCC Adi 17.224
karite to doCC Adi 17.256
karite to doCC Adi 17.290
karite to takeCC Madhya 1.62
karite to makeCC Madhya 1.90
karite to doCC Madhya 1.271
karite bhojana to partake of the prasādamCC Madhya 3.60
bhojana karite to eatCC Madhya 3.78
karite to doCC Madhya 3.79
karite to doCC Madhya 3.105
karite to doCC Madhya 3.122
kīrtana karite while performing chantingCC Madhya 3.162
karite to doCC Madhya 3.184
karite to doCC Madhya 3.208
karite while offeringCC Madhya 4.14
go-dohana karite cāhi I want to milk the cowsCC Madhya 4.31
dvāra karite to make a wayCC Madhya 4.49
karite to makeCC Madhya 4.189
darśana karite to see Lord JagannāthaCC Madhya 6.33
karite to doCC Madhya 6.191
karite to composeCC Madhya 6.206
karite to doCC Madhya 7.21
madhyāhna karite to take lunch at noonCC Madhya 7.84
karite to doCC Madhya 7.140
karite to doCC Madhya 8.148
karite to doCC Madhya 8.236
karite to makeCC Madhya 8.281
karite khaṇḍana to curbCC Madhya 9.140
karite to doCC Madhya 9.331
bhojana karite to take lunchCC Madhya 9.354
praveśa karite to enter intoCC Madhya 9.363
pavitra karite to purifyCC Madhya 10.11
karite to executeCC Madhya 10.66
karite paṭhana to reciteCC Madhya 11.56
karite to performCC Madhya 11.81
karite bhojana to take their luncheonCC Madhya 11.198
karite to takeCC Madhya 11.205
viśrāma karite going to take restCC Madhya 11.211
nṛtya karite dancingCC Madhya 11.234
karite śayana to take restCC Madhya 11.240
karite to doCC Madhya 12.81
kṣamā karite to be excusedCC Madhya 12.129
nṛtya karite to danceCC Madhya 12.143
karite bhojana to take lunchCC Madhya 12.159
karite to doCC Madhya 12.169
karite to acceptCC Madhya 12.219
karite to actCC Madhya 13.13
vihāra karite to perform pastimesCC Madhya 13.24
nṛtya karite dancingCC Madhya 13.180
karite to doCC Madhya 13.185
karite to performCC Madhya 13.192
bhojana karite to eatCC Madhya 14.41
karite to doCC Madhya 14.102
tāńre hāsya karite to make Him a laughingstockCC Madhya 14.206
loka vidāya karite to bid farewell to the devoteesCC Madhya 15.67
su-śītala karite to make it very coolCC Madhya 15.73
karite to executeCC Madhya 15.161
mukta karite to liberateCC Madhya 15.171
karite to doCC Madhya 15.188
sammāna karite nāri I cannot receive them properlyCC Madhya 15.197
karite bhojana to take lunchCC Madhya 15.223
karite to go seeCC Madhya 17.16
karite to doCC Madhya 17.30
karite to performCC Madhya 17.163
karite to makeCC Madhya 17.232
kīrtana karite to perform kīrtanaCC Madhya 18.79
karite śodhana to repayCC Madhya 18.153
madhyāhna karite to accept lunchCC Madhya 19.58
karite bhojane to take his lunchCC Madhya 19.91
karite to doCC Madhya 20.84
praśna karite to inquireCC Madhya 20.94
daṇḍavat karite offering their obeisancesCC Madhya 21.70
sva-karma karite performing his duty in lifeCC Madhya 22.26
karite pāri I can doCC Madhya 24.255
karite to doCC Madhya 24.328
ekatra karite to assembleCC Madhya 25.9
karite nā āise you should not present yourselfCC Madhya 25.74
karite to composeCC Antya 1.34
madhya-ahna karite to execute daily noontime dutiesCC Antya 1.60
karite to writeCC Antya 1.69
karite to writeCC Antya 1.69
madhya-ahna karite to perform His noontime dutiesCC Antya 1.102
parīkṣā karite to examineCC Antya 1.106
nāṭaka karite composing a dramaCC Antya 1.124
karite to doCC Antya 1.202
karite to doCC Antya 1.203
parīkṣā karite to testCC Antya 2.23
madhyāhna karite to execute His noon activitiesCC Antya 2.127
karite just to makeCC Antya 3.97
karite to doCC Antya 3.103
kīrtana karite chanting and chantingCC Antya 3.130
karite to doCC Antya 3.224
kīrtana karite chanting and chantingCC Antya 3.244
karite to doCC Antya 3.250
pratīta karite just to make one faithfulCC Antya 3.261
karite to doCC Antya 4.7
karite doCC Antya 4.77
karite to doCC Antya 4.81
karite vināśa to destroyCC Antya 4.87
madhya-ahna karite to perform His noon dutiesCC Antya 4.92
nā pārena karite He cannot doCC Antya 4.95
nā dilā karite did not allow me to doCC Antya 4.137
karite ālińgana to embraceCC Antya 4.147
upadeśa karite to adviseCC Antya 4.158
tyāga karite to rejectCC Antya 4.180
carvaṇa karite chewingCC Antya 4.238
prakāśa karite to demonstrateCC Antya 5.81
śravaṇa karite to hearCC Antya 5.81
karite to doCC Antya 5.84
karite uddhāra to deliverCC Antya 5.151
nivedana karite to submit my desiresCC Antya 6.132
madhyāhna karite for performing His midday dutiesCC Antya 6.209
sevā karite lāgilā began to worshipCC Antya 6.298
karite doingCC Antya 6.319
karite bhojana to accept the prasādamCC Antya 7.64
karite lāgilā began to performCC Antya 7.77
karite nā pāre niścaya cannot make a decisionCC Antya 7.95
karite nāre niṣedhana could not forbidCC Antya 7.97
nindā karite lāgila began to criticizeCC Antya 8.14
karite nā yuyāya one should not followCC Antya 8.82
ghāṭi karite to reduceCC Antya 9.26
rakṣā karite to saveCC Antya 9.43
karite to doCC Antya 9.44
kṛpā karite to show mercyCC Antya 9.148
karite śayana to take restCC Antya 10.81
karite to doCC Antya 10.88
karite miśrita mixingCC Antya 10.138
madhyāhna karite to perform His noon dutiesCC Antya 11.43
madhyāhna karite to perform His noon dutiesCC Antya 11.44
karite uccāraṇa chantingCC Antya 11.56
karite karite performingCC Antya 11.63
karite karite performingCC Antya 11.63
karite mardana to give massagesCC Antya 12.112
karite to performCC Antya 12.146
kīrtana karite chantingCC Antya 14.101
karite pāri can we doCC Antya 16.129
karite to doCC Antya 16.136
karite lāgilā began to explainCC Antya 17.32
karite doingCC Antya 17.49
karite lāgilā began to feelCC Antya 18.34
karite lāgilā began to doCC Antya 19.34
kṣaṇeke karite pāna drinking only for a momentCC Antya 19.48
karite to makeCC Antya 20.42
kariteche he is compilingCC Antya 1.125
kariteche he was doingCC Antya 11.17
karitechi am doingCC Madhya 11.205
sva-karma karite performing his duty in lifeCC Madhya 22.26
maitreyaḥ kavaṣaḥ tritaḥ Maitreya, Kavasa and TritaSB 10.74.7-9
karite khaṇḍana to curbCC Madhya 9.140
kila anucaritam pastimes as a paramahaṃsa, above all regulative varṇāśrama principlesSB 5.6.9
kīrtana karite while performing chantingCC Madhya 3.162
kīrtana karite to perform kīrtanaCC Madhya 18.79
kīrtana karite chanting and chantingCC Antya 3.130
kīrtana karite chanting and chantingCC Antya 3.244
kīrtana karite chantingCC Antya 14.101
kṛpā karite to show mercyCC Antya 9.148
kṛṣṇa-pūritaḥ being filled with air from the mouth of KṛṣṇaSB 6.8.25
kṛṣṇa-caritam topics of Lord KṛṣṇaSB 10.1.14
kṛṣṇa-caritra-līlā the pastimes of KṛṣṇaCC Madhya 1.227
śrī-kṛṣṇa-carita the Personality of Godhead Śrī KṛṣṇaCC Madhya 10.106
kṛta-śriyā apāśrita beauty created by those dresses and ornamentsSB 3.8.25
kṣamā karite to be excusedCC Madhya 12.129
kṣaṇeke karite pāna drinking only for a momentCC Antya 19.48
kuharita of the sweet sounds made by the cuckoosCC Adi 4.259
daitya-dānava-kula-tīrthī-karaṇa-śīlā-caritaḥ whose activities and character were so exalted that he delivered all the daityas (demons) born in his familySB 5.18.7
trita-kūpam sudarśanam the pilgrimage places known as Tritakūpa and SudarśanaSB 10.78.19-20
karite lāgilā began to observeCC Adi 15.10
sevā karite lāgilā began to worshipCC Antya 6.298
karite lāgilā began to performCC Antya 7.77
nindā karite lāgila began to criticizeCC Antya 8.14
karite lāgilā began to explainCC Antya 17.32
karite lāgilā began to feelCC Antya 18.34
karite lāgilā began to doCC Antya 19.34
kṛṣṇa-caritra-līlā the pastimes of KṛṣṇaCC Madhya 1.227
loka vidāya karite to bid farewell to the devoteesCC Madhya 15.67
loka tārite to deliver the fallen soulsCC Madhya 25.171
loka nistārite to deliver the people in generalCC Antya 11.25
madhura-caritra pleasing characterCC Madhya 15.141
madhya-ahna karite to execute daily noontime dutiesCC Antya 1.60
madhya-ahna karite to perform His noontime dutiesCC Antya 1.102
madhya-ahna karite to perform His noon dutiesCC Antya 4.92
madhyāhna karite to take lunch at noonCC Madhya 7.84
madhyāhna karite to accept lunchCC Madhya 19.58
madhyāhna karite to execute His noon activitiesCC Antya 2.127
madhyāhna karite for performing His midday dutiesCC Antya 6.209
madhyāhna karite to perform His noon dutiesCC Antya 11.43
madhyāhna karite to perform His noon dutiesCC Antya 11.44
maitreyaḥ kavaṣaḥ tritaḥ Maitreya, Kavasa and TritaSB 10.74.7-9
mańgala-caritra all characteristics are auspiciousCC Adi 6.12
mańgala-ācaritaiḥ by auspicious activitiesCC Adi 6.61
harit-maṇi like emeraldsSB 3.28.25
su-mantrita being well advisedSB 8.15.32
karite mardana to give massagesCC Antya 12.112
āśrita-mārgam its holes stoppedSB 10.35.2-3
marita' amogha Amogha would have diedCC Madhya 15.290
marite to dieCC Adi 10.96
rite to killCC Adi 17.92
rite to strikeCC Adi 17.255
rite to strikeCC Madhya 5.51
rite to beatCC Madhya 6.5
rite to strikeCC Madhya 15.250
rite to attackCC Madhya 18.27
uḍiyā mārite to attack the Orissa provinceCC Madhya 19.28
rite to killCC Madhya 25.190
marite cāhe wants to kill Subuddhi RāyaCC Madhya 25.193
nā pāre marite cannot dieCC Antya 4.61
rite to beatCC Antya 6.22
nā pāre mārite he could not beatCC Antya 6.22
rite to beatCC Antya 6.23
rite āila was ready to beatCC Antya 13.54
ritechila condemned to deathCC Madhya 1.265
māyā-āśritānām for those in the clutches of material energySB 10.12.7-11
māyā-āśritānām for ordinary persons under the clutches of the external energyCC Madhya 8.75
māyā-āśritānām for ordinary persons under the clutches of the external energyCC Antya 7.32
sura-nara-mṛga-miśrita-jalacara-ākṛtibhiḥ with different forms like those of the demigods, human beings, animals, mixtures and aquatics (the incarnations Vāmana, Lord Rāmacandra, Kṛṣṇa, Varāha, Hayagrīva, Nṛsiṃha, Matsya and Kūrma)SB 6.9.40
miśrita mixedCC Adi 3.16
miśrita mixedCC Adi 4.17
karite miśrita mixingCC Antya 10.138
miśrita mixedCC Antya 17.44
miśritaḥ mixedSB 10.46.46
miśritam mixed withCC Antya 20.1
miśritān mixedSB 10.53.13
kāka-mṛga-go-caritaḥ behaving exactly like the crows, deer and cowsSB 5.5.34
sura-nara-mṛga-miśrita-jalacara-ākṛtibhiḥ with different forms like those of the demigods, human beings, animals, mixtures and aquatics (the incarnations Vāmana, Lord Rāmacandra, Kṛṣṇa, Varāha, Hayagrīva, Nṛsiṃha, Matsya and Kūrma)SB 6.9.40
mukharitāḥ emanating from the mouthsSB 4.29.39-40
sat-mukharitām chanted by the pure devoteesSB 10.14.3
mukharitam describedSB 10.60.42
sat-mukharitām declared by great realized devoteesCC Madhya 8.67
mukta karite to liberateCC Madhya 15.171
mūtritaḥ polluted with urineSB 11.22.58-59
svarita-ñ-itaḥ of verbs having an indicatory ñ or a svarita accentCC Madhya 24.26
karite nā āise you should not present yourselfCC Madhya 25.74
nā pāre marite cannot dieCC Antya 4.61
nā pārena karite He cannot doCC Antya 4.95
nā dilā karite did not allow me to doCC Antya 4.137
nā karitāma I would not doCC Antya 4.196
nā pāre mārite he could not beatCC Antya 6.22
karite nā pāre niścaya cannot make a decisionCC Antya 7.95
karite nā yuyāya one should not followCC Antya 8.82
parite nā yuyāya is not fit to put onCC Antya 13.61
namaskāra karite while offering obeisances, bowing downCC Adi 5.164
nānā-dhātu-vicitritaiḥ decorated with various mineralsSB 4.6.10
sura-nara-mṛga-miśrita-jalacara-ākṛtibhiḥ with different forms like those of the demigods, human beings, animals, mixtures and aquatics (the incarnations Vāmana, Lord Rāmacandra, Kṛṣṇa, Varāha, Hayagrīva, Nṛsiṃha, Matsya and Kūrma)SB 6.9.40
niṣedha karite nāre unable to prohibit Lord RāmacandraCC Adi 5.151
karite nāre niṣedhana could not forbidCC Antya 7.97
sammāna karite nāri I cannot receive them properlyCC Madhya 15.197
nāri nirdhārite I cannot decide conclusivelyCC Madhya 18.202
nāri nirdhārite I cannot ascertainCC Antya 4.140
nāṭaka karite composing a dramaCC Antya 1.124
nidritāḥ asleepSB 10.35.4-5
nindā karite lāgila began to criticizeCC Antya 8.14
nāri nirdhārite I cannot decide conclusivelyCC Madhya 18.202
nāri nirdhārite I cannot ascertainCC Antya 4.140
niścaya karite to ascertainCC Adi 16.10
karite nā pāre niścaya cannot make a decisionCC Antya 7.95
niṣedha karite nāre unable to prohibit Lord RāmacandraCC Adi 5.151
karite nāre niṣedhana could not forbidCC Antya 7.97
nistārite to deliverCC Adi 2.22
nistārite to deliverCC Adi 7.38
nistārite to deliverCC Adi 7.38
nistārite to deliverCC Adi 17.262
āmā nistārite to deliver meCC Madhya 8.38
jīva nistārite to deliver all the fallen soulsCC Madhya 25.264
nistārite to deliverCC Antya 2.17
jagat nistārite to deliver the whole worldCC Antya 3.75
loka nistārite to deliver the people in generalCC Antya 11.25
nivārita impededSB 6.13.17
nivāritā was forbiddenSB 9.8.3
nivāritaḥ stoppedSB 1.8.45
nivāritaḥ checkedSB 9.9.37
nivāritaḥ forbiddenSB 10.17.9
nivāritaḥ checkedSB 10.36.19
nivāritaḥ forbiddenSB 10.53.2
nivārite to checkCC Madhya 13.88
nivārite to preventCC Antya 15.52
nivedana karite to submit my desiresCC Antya 6.132
sva-vidhi-niyoga-śauca-cāritra-vihīnāḥ without character, cleanliness, and the rules and regulations given according to one's own duty in lifeSB 5.6.10
nṛtya karite dancingCC Madhya 11.234
nṛtya karite to danceCC Madhya 12.143
nṛtya karite dancingCC Madhya 13.180
āśrita-padaḥ surrendered soulSB 2.7.42
āśrita-padaḥ those who have taken shelter of the LordCC Madhya 6.235
kṣaṇeke karite pāna drinking only for a momentCC Antya 19.48
dharite pāre can controlCC Antya 3.112
nā pāre marite cannot dieCC Antya 4.61
nā pāre mārite he could not beatCC Antya 6.22
karite nā pāre niścaya cannot make a decisionCC Antya 7.95
nā pārena karite He cannot doCC Antya 4.95
karite pāri I can doCC Madhya 24.255
karite pāri can we doCC Antya 16.129
parīkṣā karite to examineCC Antya 1.106
parīkṣā karite to testCC Antya 2.23
pariśritaḥ surroundedSB 6.7.2-8
pariśritaḥ surroundedSB 8.4.9
pariśritaḥ surroundedSB 10.25.33
pariśritāḥ surroundingSB 10.36.24
pariśritam surroundedSB 3.24.9
pariśritāt encircledSB 3.21.33
paritaḥ surrounded bySB 2.9.13
paritaḥ all aroundSB 4.29.39-40
paritaḥ all aroundSB 5.1.33
paritaḥ surroundingSB 5.2.9
paritaḥ all aroundSB 5.16.26
paritaḥ all overSB 5.16.27
paritaḥ all aroundSB 5.19.29-30
paritaḥ all aroundSB 5.20.18
paritaḥ all aroundSB 5.20.24
paritaḥ all aroundSB 5.20.34
paritaḥ all aroundSB 5.20.37
paritaḥ being surroundedSB 7.3.14
paritaḥ all aroundSB 7.8.18
paritaḥ all aroundSB 8.2.23-24
paritaḥ everywhereSB 10.13.61
paritaḥ surroundingSB 10.16.19
paritaḥ on all sidesSB 10.19.8
paritaḥ on all sidesSB 10.62.32
paritaḥ all aroundSB 10.83.29
paritaḥ all aroundSB 11.7.62
paritaḥ on all sidesSB 11.27.36
paritaḥ all aroundSB 12.6.71
paritaḥ on all sidesSB 12.8.43
paritaḥ all aroundCC Adi 3.63
paritaḥ all aroundCC Adi 4.125
paritaḥ all aroundCC Madhya 18.1
paritaḥ in all respectsNoI 10
paritaḥ surroundingBs 5.5
paritaḥ all aroundBs 5.5
paritāpa from miserable conditionsSB 5.6.17
jana-paritāpam the miserable condition of everyoneSB 7.8.52
paritāpān sufferingSB 2.2.7
paritāpitaḥ subjected to great painSB 11.8.32
paritapyamānā lamentingSB 1.7.15
paritapyate is feeling painSB 4.3.20
paritarpaṇam satisfyingSB 9.21.10
parite nā yuyāya is not fit to put onCC Antya 13.61
paritoṣa happinessCC Antya 10.8
paritoṣaḥ satisfactionNBS 31-32
paritoṣam ca and satisfactionSB 7.13.35
paritoṣaṇam satisfaction ofSB 1.5.35
paritoṣe happinessSB 4.22.23
paritoṣitaḥ being satisfied in all respectsSB 9.5.22
paritrāṇa deliveranceCC Adi 17.64
paritrāṇa deliveranceCC Madhya 2.70
paritrāṇam the savingSB 12.12.30
paritrāṇāya for the deliveranceBG 4.8
paritrāṇāya for the savingSB 10.46.39
paritrāṇāya for the deliveranceCC Adi 3.23
paritrāsa in total fearSB 10.54.34
paritrastā frightenedCC Antya 1.151
paritrastaiḥ who were terrifiedSB 10.51.15
paritrātaḥ was savedSB 10.11.25
paritrātam deliveredSB 1.16.13-15
paritrātam deliveredSB 10.43.26-27
paritrātum just to deliverSB 4.19.37
paritrātum to saveSB 10.89.40
parituṣṭa being satisfiedSB 4.7.6
parituṣṭa very satisfiedSB 7.13.37
parituṣṭa fully satisfiedSB 11.17.43
parituṣṭaḥ being satisfiedSB 2.7.19
parituṣṭaḥ very gladSB 4.12.2
parituṣṭaḥ satisfiedSB 5.18.10
parituṣṭaḥ being very satisfiedSB 8.16.62
parituṣṭaḥ aham I was very much satisfiedSB 10.3.36
parituṣṭāḥ perfectly satisfiedSB 12.9.3
parituṣṭaḥ perfectly satisfiedSB 12.10.18
parituṣyasi You become satisfiedSB 5.3.6
parituṣyatā fully satisfiedSB 4.7.1
parituṣyate does pacifySB 1.5.5
parituṣyati does it satisfySB 1.5.2
parituṣyati becomes satisfiedSB 4.14.19
parituṣyet one should be satisfiedSB 4.8.29
parityāga give upCC Adi 4.175
parityāga giving upCC Madhya 15.263
parityāgaḥ renunciationBG 18.7
parityāgaḥ the giving upSB 11.19.20-24
ańga-parityāgaḥ the giving up of his bodySB 12.12.24
parityāgaḥ the giving upSB 12.12.42-43
parityāge in the process of renouncingSB 11.20.27-28
parityāgī renouncerBG 12.16
parityāgī renouncerBG 12.17
parityāgī renouncerBG 14.22-25
parityāgī completely rejectingCC Madhya 23.109
parityāgī completely rejectingCC Madhya 23.110
parityajet one should give upSB 7.12.19
parityajya abandoningBG 18.66
parityajya after quitting the bodySB 1.15.49
parityajya giving upSB 7.2.16
parityajya rejectingSB 9.22.11
parityajya abandoningSB 10.51.17
parityajya giving upSB 10.54.50
parityajya rejectingSB 10.65.11-12
parityajya giving upSB 11.7.6
parityajya giving upSB 11.9.2
parityajya giving upCC Madhya 8.63
parityajya giving upCC Madhya 9.265
parityajya giving upCC Madhya 22.94
parityajya giving upCC Antya 1.67
parityajya abandoningBs 5.61
parityajya rejectingMM 38
parityakta disregardingSB 3.23.53
parityaktā given upSB 3.27.24
parityakta-guṇaḥ one who is disassociated from the material modes of natureSB 4.20.10
parityakta given upSB 5.8.26
parityaktāḥ who were given upSB 6.6.45
parityaktāḥ rejectedSB 6.7.1
parityaktaḥ desertedSB 8.22.29-30
parityaktaḥ condemnedSB 9.8.17
parivāritā surroundedSB 10.53.40-41
parivāritaḥ surroundedSB 5.20.40
parivāritaḥ surroundedSB 8.22.33
parivāritaḥ joinedSB 10.41.19
parivāritaḥ attendedSB 10.70.17
vāruṇa-pāśa-yantritaḥ being bound by the ropes of VaruṇaSB 8.22.14
pāsarite to forgetCC Antya 17.57
karite paṭhana to reciteCC Madhya 11.56
sarit-patim the oceanSB 5.17.7
pavitra karite to purifyCC Madhya 10.11
ātma pavitrite to purify MyselfCC Madhya 20.56
prabhu-caritra pastimes of Śrī Caitanya MahāprabhuCC Madhya 18.223
prabhura carite about Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu's characteristicsCC Antya 5.91
prabhura caritre by the character of Śrī Caitanya MahāprabhuCC Antya 7.79
pracārite to propagateCC Adi 4.5
pracārite to preachCC Madhya 1.262
prema pracārite to preach the cult of bhakti, love of GodheadCC Antya 3.148
prakāśa karite to demonstrateCC Antya 5.81
prasāritaḥ castSB 11.29.39
praśna karite to inquireCC Madhya 20.94
prasphurita tremblingSB 4.18.1
prasphurita tremblingSB 7.5.25
praśrita who was humbleSB 7.5.52
praśritaḥ with great humilitySB 10.4.14
praśritāḥ humblySB 10.23.15
praśritam who was humbleSB 10.41.9
praśritasya obedientlySB 1.5.29
pratipūrita fully achievedSB 8.5.44
pratīta karite just to make one faithfulCC Antya 3.261
sarit-pravara of the GangesSB 3.28.22
sarit-pravarā the most important river of allSB 5.7.10
sarit-pravarā the great riverSB 5.24.17
praveśa karite to enter intoCC Madhya 9.363
prema-yantritaḥ as if tied in love, although it is actually lustSB 9.19.12
prema pracārite to preach the cult of bhakti, love of GodheadCC Antya 3.148
preritaḥ induced bySB 3.6.4
pṛthu-caritam the narration of Pṛthu MahārājaSB 4.23.39
sarit-pulinam to the bank of the riverSB 10.13.4
rita full ofCC Adi 13.107
rita filledCC Madhya 8.175
rita ha-ila became filledCC Madhya 14.35
rita filledCC Madhya 15.76
kṛṣṇa-pūritaḥ being filled with air from the mouth of KṛṣṇaSB 6.8.25
ritam has become fullSB 11.5.46
rite to fulfillCC Madhya 18.152
putra-upacāritam indicating his sonSB 6.2.49
putra-upacāritam though spoken for his sonCC Antya 3.64
putra-upacāritam though spoken for his sonCC Antya 3.187
rakṣā karite to saveCC Antya 9.43
rāma-caritam the narration concerning the activities of the Supreme Personality of Godhead Lord RāmacandraSB 9.11.23
rāmānanda-caritra the story of Rāmānanda RāyaCC Madhya 8.304
rāmera caritra saba all the activities of Lord RāmacandraCC Adi 5.150
rātrite at nightCC Madhya 7.138
śekharita-ańghri-reṇuḥ the dust of whose lotus feet is the crownCC Adi 6.73
sa-giri-sarit-samudra-sattvam with many mountains, trees, oceans and living entitiesSB 5.25.12
rāmera caritra saba all the activities of Lord RāmacandraCC Adi 5.150
caritra saba all the behaviorCC Antya 9.116
saba caritra all characteristicsCC Antya 12.33
samanumantritaḥ advisedSB 10.50.57
samāśritāḥ having taken shelterSB 10.14.58
samāśritāḥ having taken positionsSB 10.50.21
samāśritya resorting toSB 10.55.21
samavadhāritam sufficiently understoodSB 11.29.29
saṃhārite to killCC Adi 17.53
yoga-samīrita achieved by practice of yogaSB 5.6.1
samīritāḥ spokenSB 6.19.23
samīritaḥ drivenSB 10.19.7
samīritām vibratedSB 10.1.21
sammāna karite nāri I cannot receive them properlyCC Madhya 15.197
saṃsmāritaḥ rememberingSB 4.3.15
saṃsmāritaḥ made to rememberSB 11.2.10
saṃsmāritaḥ have been made to rememberSB 12.12.57
saṃśritāḥ having taken shelter ofBG 16.18
saṃśritaḥ full ofSB 2.10.49-50
sa-giri-sarit-samudra-sattvam with many mountains, trees, oceans and living entitiesSB 5.25.12
samupāśritaḥ having taken shelter ofBG 18.51-53
sarit of the GangesSB 1.8.2
sarit the riverSB 2.8.15
sarit riverSB 3.1.18
sarit riversSB 3.5.41
sarit-pravara of the GangesSB 3.28.22
sarit a riverSB 3.33.32
sarit divaḥ the transcendental water within the banks of the GangesSB 4.1.14
sarit-taṭe by the side of the riverSB 4.14.36
sarit the riversSB 4.15.12
sarit waterSB 4.21.31
sarit by riversSB 5.1.40
sarit-pravarā the most important river of allSB 5.7.10
sarit-patim the oceanSB 5.17.7
sarit the riversSB 5.18.32
sarit riversSB 5.19.16
sarit-pravarā the great riverSB 5.24.17
sa-giri-sarit-samudra-sattvam with many mountains, trees, oceans and living entitiesSB 5.25.12
sarit riversSB 5.26.40
sarit with riversSB 8.2.8
sarit-śreṣṭhāḥ the best of various sacred watersSB 8.8.10
sarit near the shores of the riversSB 8.12.34
sarit-jale in the water of the riverSB 8.24.14
sarit-jalaiḥ by the water of the riverSB 9.15.21
sarit-tīra to the riversideSB 10.11.12
sarit-pulinam to the bank of the riverSB 10.13.4
sarit of the riverSB 10.15.9
sarit of the riversSB 10.18.5
sarit riversSB 10.21.2
sarit the riversSB 10.46.22
sarit riversSB 10.47.49
sarit the riversSB 10.47.56
sarit of riversSB 10.79.11-15
sarit the riverSB 10.90.47
sarit the riversSB 11.2.41
sarit with riversSB 11.18.24
sarit of a riverSB 11.23.35
sarit riverCC Adi 16.1
sarit the river GangesCC Madhya 24.217
saritaḥ the riversSB 2.2.5
saritaḥ the riversSB 3.17.7
saritaḥ riversSB 3.29.42
saritaḥ the riversSB 4.1.53
saritaḥ riversSB 4.29.39-40
saritaḥ riversSB 5.13.6
saritaḥ the waterSB 10.12.7-11
saritaḥ the riversSB 10.27.26
saritaḥ the riversSB 10.35.6-7
saritaḥ riversSB 10.87.31
saritaḥ riversSB 11.6.19
saritaḥ the riversSB 12.9.28-29
saritaḥ riversCC Madhya 23.114
svaḥ-saritam the celestial water of the GangesSB 3.4.36
saritam of the riverSB 9.15.20
saritau two riversSB 4.6.24
śāstra vicārite to talk on various scripturesCC Madhya 25.19
śaśvat-harita of evergreenSB 3.22.29-30
sat-carita of very good character, observing all necessary rules and regulationsSB 9.6.50
sat-mukharitām chanted by the pure devoteesSB 10.14.3
sat-mukharitām declared by great realized devoteesCC Madhya 8.67
sa-giri-sarit-samudra-sattvam with many mountains, trees, oceans and living entitiesSB 5.25.12
śrita-sattvāya the shelter of the quality of goodnessSB 4.7.40
sva-vidhi-niyoga-śauca-cāritra-vihīnāḥ without character, cleanliness, and the rules and regulations given according to one's own duty in lifeSB 5.6.10
karite śayana to take restCC Madhya 11.240
karite śayana to take restCC Antya 10.81
śekharita placed upon the headsSB 10.83.8
śekharita-ańghri-reṇuḥ the dust of whose lotus feet is the crownCC Adi 6.73
sevā karite lāgilā began to worshipCC Antya 6.298
daitya-dānava-kula-tīrthī-karaṇa-śīlā-caritaḥ whose activities and character were so exalted that he delivered all the daityas (demons) born in his familySB 5.18.7
su-śītala karite to make it very coolCC Madhya 15.73
smārita remembranceSB 3.2.1
smārita-ananta as soon as Lord Kṛṣṇa was rememberedSB 10.12.44
smāritāḥ remindedSB 10.43.21-22
smāritaḥ brought to memorySB 11.2.13
sneha-yantritaḥ being attached by affectionSB 6.1.26
sneha-yantrita-cetasā his mind being controlled by such affectionSB 9.7.15
karite śodhana to repayCC Madhya 18.153
sphurita flappingSB 3.1.14
sphurita tremblingSB 4.8.15
sphurita-aruṇa-adharam swollen reddish lipsSB 10.9.6
sphurita tremblingSB 10.60.30
sphurita which was manifestedCC Madhya 13.207
sphurita distinguishedCC Antya 1.159
sphuritam manifestedSB 4.9.2
śravaṇa karite to hearCC Antya 5.81
sarit-śreṣṭhāḥ the best of various sacred watersSB 8.8.10
śrī-kṛṣṇa-carita the Personality of Godhead Śrī KṛṣṇaCC Madhya 10.106
śrī-caitanya-caritāmṛta-śrotā-gaṇa to the listeners of Śrī Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 15.3
ańghri-śrita under the protection of His feetSB 2.1.37
śritā taken shelter ofSB 2.9.14
śritā situated onSB 3.23.45
śrita-sattvāya the shelter of the quality of goodnessSB 4.7.40
śritā attachedSB 5.2.11
śritāḥ taking shelter ofBG 9.12
śritāḥ taken shelter ofSB 1.15.13
śritaḥ took shelterSB 3.20.3
śritāḥ taken shelterSB 3.21.17
śritaḥ has taken shelterSB 10.2.20
śritam situated inSB 4.7.30
śritān resorted toSB 11.29.10
śritau attainingSB 10.15.1
kṛta-śriyā apāśrita beauty created by those dresses and ornamentsSB 3.8.25
śrī-caitanya-caritāmṛta-śrotā-gaṇa to the listeners of Śrī Caitanya-caritāmṛtaCC Madhya 15.3
su-yantritān well controlledSB 5.4.19
su-yantritaḥ faithful, well behavedSB 7.12.3
su-mantrita being well advisedSB 8.15.32
su-caritam pious workSB 10.53.38
su-śītala karite to make it very coolCC Madhya 15.73
sucaritam good characteristicsSB 5.4.11-12
trita-kūpam sudarśanam the pilgrimage places known as Tritakūpa and SudarśanaSB 10.78.19-20
sura-nara-mṛga-miśrita-jalacara-ākṛtibhiḥ with different forms like those of the demigods, human beings, animals, mixtures and aquatics (the incarnations Vāmana, Lord Rāmacandra, Kṛṣṇa, Varāha, Hayagrīva, Nṛsiṃha, Matsya and Kūrma)SB 6.9.40
sūtra-yantritāḥ bound by ropeSB 5.17.22-23
sva-vidhi-niyoga-śauca-cāritra-vihīnāḥ without character, cleanliness, and the rules and regulations given according to one's own duty in lifeSB 5.6.10
sva-ācaritaiḥ by their characteristic behaviorSB 10.13.23
sva-karma karite performing his duty in lifeCC Madhya 22.26
svaḥ-saritam the celestial water of the GangesSB 3.4.36
svarita vibratedSB 10.31.14
svarita-ñ-itaḥ of verbs having an indicatory ñ or a svarita accentCC Madhya 24.26
svarita-veṇunā by the vibrating fluteCC Antya 16.117
tāńhāra caraṇa-āśrita all who have taken shelter at His lotus feetCC Adi 11.2
tāńhāra caritre in his behaviorCC Madhya 16.138
caritra tāńhāra His characteristicsCC Madhya 17.105
tāńre hāsya karite to make Him a laughingstockCC Madhya 14.206
tantritam under the controlSB 11.18.33
rite to deliverCC Madhya 1.273
rite to deliverCC Madhya 8.39
jagat tārite to deliver the whole worldCC Madhya 15.160
loka tārite to deliver the fallen soulsCC Madhya 25.171
rite to deliverCC Antya 2.13
rite to deliverCC Antya 7.139
tat-abhimantritam consecrated by the mantra of Bhadra KālīSB 5.9.16
tat-caritāni their characteristicsSB 6.1.4-5
tat-caritam the activities of the LordSB 8.3.20-21
tat-bāla-caritāni in which the activities of her own child were enactedSB 10.9.1-2
sarit-taṭe by the side of the riverSB 4.14.36
sarit-tīra to the riversideSB 10.11.12
daitya-dānava-kula-tīrthī-karaṇa-śīlā-caritaḥ whose activities and character were so exalted that he delivered all the daityas (demons) born in his familySB 5.18.7
toka-ācaritam adbhutam they are also wonderful childhood pastimesSB 10.7.3
trita-kūpam sudarśanam the pilgrimage places known as Tritakūpa and SudarśanaSB 10.78.19-20
tritaḥ TritaSB 1.9.6-7
maitreyaḥ kavaṣaḥ tritaḥ Maitreya, Kavasa and TritaSB 10.74.7-9
dvitaḥ tritaḥ ca ekataḥ ca Dvita, Trita and EkataSB 10.84.2-5
tritakūpe to TritakūpaCC Madhya 9.279
tritam TritaSB 4.13.15-16
tritasya the pilgrimage site named TritaSB 3.1.22
tritayam in three stagesSB 2.10.9
tritayam group of threeSB 11.24.19
tritayāt these three divisionsSB 11.24.12
tritayāya three modesSB 2.4.12
tritve into the three qualitiesSB 1.15.42
turite very hastilyCC Antya 5.54
dhūli-dhūsarita-ańgaḥ tvam You have become covered with dust and sand all over Your bodySB 10.11.18
tvaritāḥ very hastySB 7.7.4-5
tvaritaḥ as soon as possibleSB 7.8.2
tvaritāḥ hurriedlySB 10.41.24
tvaritaḥ swiftlySB 10.53.20-21
tvaritaḥ quicklySB 10.62.28
tvaritāḥ swiftlySB 11.31.16-17
tvaritam very quicklySB 10.5.10
tvaritam who was moving swiftlySB 10.34.28
tvaritam quicklyCC Antya 16.87
tvarite quicklyCC Madhya 4.107
tvarite very quicklyCC Madhya 10.100
tvarite very soonCC Madhya 11.164
tyāga karite to rejectCC Antya 4.180
karite uccāraṇa chantingCC Antya 11.56
uccaritaiḥ with those like the stoolSB 6.11.4
uccāritam vibratedSB 3.21.34
uccaritam like stoolSB 9.18.44
uccarite i n the stool and urineSB 5.5.32
uccārite by recitingCC Antya 20.46
ucchritaḥ very highSB 8.2.1
ucchritaiḥ very tallSB 4.30.44
ucchritam highBG 6.11-12
udara bharite to fill Your bellyCC Madhya 3.85
karite uddhāra to deliverCC Antya 5.151
uddhārite to deliverCC Adi 17.49
uddhārite to deliverCC Madhya 1.192
uddhārite to deliverCC Madhya 1.199
uddhārite just to liberateCC Madhya 7.13
uddhārite to liberateCC Madhya 8.237
uddhārite to deliverCC Madhya 11.45
uddhārite to deliverCC Antya 2.3
uddhārite to deliverCC Antya 6.141
udīrita generatedSB 10.60.39
udīritāḥ speakingSB 1.11.10
udīritaḥ describedSB 3.29.35
udīritaḥ spokenSB 10.44.38
udīritaḥ movedSB 12.8.40
udīritam was spoken ofSB 6.19.1
udīritam that which was statedSB 10.71.1
udīritayā for further developmentSB 3.8.12
uḍiyā mārite to attack the Orissa provinceCC Madhya 19.28
putra-upacāritam indicating his sonSB 6.2.49
putra-upacāritam though spoken for his sonCC Antya 3.64
putra-upacāritam though spoken for his sonCC Antya 3.187
upadeśa karite to adviseCC Antya 4.158
upagīyamāna-caritaḥ being glorified for His uncommon activitiesSB 9.10.33
upagīyamāna-caritaḥ being worshiped and adored for his exalted character and activitiesSB 9.16.26
upāmantritaḥ being requestedSB 2.4.11
upāmantritaḥ thus being inquiredSB 2.8.27
upāmantritaḥ being askedSB 5.1.6
upāmantritaḥ being fervently requestedSB 8.9.8
upāmantritaḥ requestedSB 10.70.47
upāmantritaḥ invitedSB 10.86.37
upasaṃśritya having approachedSB 3.21.45-47
upāśritāḥ being fully situatedBG 4.10
upāśritāḥ having taken shelter ofBG 16.11-12
upāśritaḥ having the shelter ofSB 3.8.17
upāśritaḥ surrenderedSB 3.9.3
upāśritaḥ I have taken shelterSB 7.10.2
upāśritaḥ taken shelter ofSB 10.16.63
upāśritaḥ resorting toSB 10.29.1
upāśritaḥ taken shelter ofSB 10.38.22
upāśritaḥ taking shelterSB 10.51.62
upaśritāḥ taken shelter ofSB 11.7.32
upāśritaḥ asmi I take full shelterCC Madhya 25.36
upāśritaḥ surrenderedCC Antya 5.124-125
upāśritau utilizingSB 10.85.34
upāśritya taking shelter ofBG 14.2
upāśritya taking shelter ofBG 18.57
upāśritya by employingSB 2.4.7
upāśritya taking shelter ofSB 4.9.33
upāśritya taking shelter ofSB 10.25.3
upāśritya taking shelter ofSB 10.25.5
upāśritya taking shelter ofCC Antya 5.137
urvarita remainingSB 5.5.28
urvaritāḥ remained aliveSB 9.23.27
urvaritaḥ remaining aloneSB 12.8.2-5
urvaritaḥ remainingSB 12.9.15
uttamaśloka-caritam the pastimes of the Supreme Personality of GodheadSB 8.24.2-3
vaiṣṇava-carita pure devoteesCC Madhya 9.305
vaṃśa-anucaritāni ca and their dynasties and characteristicsSB 9.1.4
vaṃśa-anucaritam the narrations of their activitiesSB 12.7.9-10
vaṃśa-anucaritam histories of the dynastiesSB 12.7.16
rita warded offSB 10.69.1-6
ritaḥ being forbiddenSB 9.9.23-24
ritaḥ when forbidden to do soSB 9.20.36
ritaḥ was stoppedSB 10.50.32-33
caritra-varṇana a description of the characteristicsCC Madhya 25.247
vāruṇa-pāśa-yantritaḥ being bound by the ropes of VaruṇaSB 8.22.14
svarita-veṇunā by the vibrating fluteCC Antya 16.117
avadhūta-veṣa-bhāṣā-caritaiḥ by the dress, language and characteristics of an avadhūtaSB 5.6.6
vicāritaḥ learned from the scripturesSB 10.24.7
vicārite while consideringCC Adi 3.103
vicārite to considerCC Madhya 2.21
vicārite while consideringCC Madhya 8.108
vicārite to deliberateCC Madhya 21.16
śāstra vicārite to talk on various scripturesCC Madhya 25.19
vicārite consideringCC Antya 16.121-122
vicitrita decoratedSB 10.14.47
vicitrita decoratedCC Madhya 8.171
nānā-dhātu-vicitritaiḥ decorated with various mineralsSB 4.6.10
vicitritaiḥ decorated very nicelySB 8.2.2-3
vidārita-āsye within the wide-open mouthSB 10.8.37-39
loka vidāya karite to bid farewell to the devoteesCC Madhya 15.67
sva-vidhi-niyoga-śauca-cāritra-vihīnāḥ without character, cleanliness, and the rules and regulations given according to one's own duty in lifeSB 5.6.10
vihāra karite to perform pastimesCC Madhya 13.24
sva-vidhi-niyoga-śauca-cāritra-vihīnāḥ without character, cleanliness, and the rules and regulations given according to one's own duty in lifeSB 5.6.10
karite vināśa to destroyCC Antya 4.87
vismārita forgottenSB 6.9.39
viṣṇu-yantritaḥ ordered by Lord ViṣṇuSB 6.11.20
visphurita tremblingSB 6.5.35
viśrāma karite going to take restCC Madhya 11.211
vistārita expandedCC Madhya 19.155
vistārite to expand more and moreCC Madhya 2.89
vivarite to describeCC Antya 1.57
vyapāśritam situatedSB 4.11.29
vyapāśritya particularly taking shelterBG 9.32
vyupāśritam leaning onSB 4.6.39
yāhāra caritre in whose activitiesCC Antya 19.4
kāla-yantritā being forced by timeSB 7.2.52
sneha-yantrita-cetasā his mind being controlled by such affectionSB 9.7.15
yantrita subjugatedSB 10.29.23
yantritāḥ are directedSB 3.15.8
yantritāḥ controlledSB 4.11.27
yantritaḥ being captivatedSB 4.20.16
yantritaḥ completelySB 4.22.4
sūtra-yantritāḥ bound by ropeSB 5.17.22-23
sneha-yantritaḥ being attached by affectionSB 6.1.26
yantritāḥ engagedSB 6.5.4-5
viṣṇu-yantritaḥ ordered by Lord ViṣṇuSB 6.11.20
su-yantritaḥ faithful, well behavedSB 7.12.3
amṛta-yantritaḥ being captivated by the nectarSB 7.13.20
vāruṇa-pāśa-yantritaḥ being bound by the ropes of VaruṇaSB 8.22.14
prema-yantritaḥ as if tied in love, although it is actually lustSB 9.19.12
yantritaḥ carefully composedSB 10.84.28
su-yantritān well controlledSB 5.4.19
yoga-samīrita achieved by practice of yogaSB 5.6.1
yogeśvara-āśritām the place occupied by great mystic yogīsSB 9.2.35-36
karite nā yuyāya one should not followCC Antya 8.82
parite nā yuyāya is not fit to put onCC Antya 13.61
 

abhiṣangajvara

fever due to evil spirits or fear, grief , anger etc; viral fevers and fever caused by stress and anxiety are grouped under this heading .

agnikrita

Go to venāmra

ajeyaghrita

invincible ghee, used as antidote in several poisons conditions.

āla

Go to haritāla

amarakośa

a thesaurus in Sanskrit with many medical terms, written by Amarasimha, a Jain or Buddhist monk. It contains three parts. The second part, bhūvargādi khanḍa describes several herbs and medically important substances and their features.

āmavāta

rheumatism, non-specific older term for medical conditions which affect connective tissue and the joints; arthritis caused by undigested stuff.

aṅga

limb, organ; aṅgagaurava heaviness in the body; aṅgadāha burning sensation over the body; aṅgaharṣa pleasant feeling; aṅgalāghava alacrity; aṅgamarda body ache; chaffing of the limbs, aṅgaśoṣana inanition aṅgastambha body stiffness.

antyeṣṭi

last rite, one of the sixteen samskāra; funeral.

āptopadeśa

authoritative statement.

āraṇyaka

forest-born; any of Sanskrit religious and philosophical treatises, post-Vedic in ori intended to interpret Vedic concepts.

arcana

fire-blessing, a religious rite.

artha

prosperity.

arthaśāstra

a book on polity written by Kautilya, which refers to 330 medicinal plants used in Ayurveda.

aṣṭavarga

Plant combination of jīvaka (Melaxis mucifera), ṛṣabhaka (Melaxis acuminta), meda, mahāmeda (Polygonum verticillatum), kākoli (Roscoea purpuera), kṣīrakākoli (Fritillaria roylei), riddhi (Hebenaria intermedia), vṛddhi (Hebenaria edegwothi).

aśvamedha

Great Horse Sacrifice; a vedic ritual that could only be conducted by a king for the acquisition of power and glory, the sovereignty over neighbouring provinces, and general prosperity of the kingdom.

aśvaśāstra

a text written by Abhinavcandra in the 15th Century AD about science of horses; it was published recently.

āyurvedasamgraha

a text on human medicine written by Siddhanti Subrahmanyasastry in the 19th Century

badari

Plant plums; jujube; Zizyphus mauritiana.

bahalavartma

multiple chalazion, cysts in eye caused by blocked glands; blepharitis.

bhojpatra

Plant Betula utilis; bark of this tree was used to write as a paper in ancient India, Himalayan silver birch.

bhūmi

earth, soil, territory.

bhūrja

Plant Himalayan silver birch; Betula utilis; B. bhojapattra, bhūrjapatra traditional writing material.

brahmacarya

chaste life; celibacy before marriage; sexual restrain to promote physical, mental and spiritual health.

bṛhatyogataraṇgiṇi

a treatise of ayurveda written by Trimallabhaṭṭu, 18th Century

candrasūryadarśana

(candra.sūrya.darśana) a rite, taking the infant out of home to show nature particularly sun and moon.

cidrodara

perforation of intestines; peritonitis.

cikitsāsāra

a text of āyurveda written by Gudapalli Yerramsastry in the 19th Century

darbha

Plant ritual grass; cotton grass; thatch grass; Imperata cylindrical.

dāruharidra

Plant Indian barberry, false turmeric, dried stem of Berberis aristata; Coscinium fenestratum is used in Kerala as dāruharidra due to similarity in therapeutic action to Berberis species.

dhātu

1. metal; 2. root words (linguistic elements) of Sanskrit language. 3. tissues – rasa (chyle, lymph, etc), rakta (blood), mamsa (muscle), medas (adipose tissue), asthi (cartilage and bone), majja (bone marrow), and śukra (reproductive elements).

garbhādhāna

one of the sixteen rites, giving conception.

godhuma

Plant common wheat, Triticum sativum.

govidya

a treatise on treatment of cows, written by Kirtivarma in the 12th Century AD; the book is partly available.

gṛdhrasi

sciatica disease; lumbago; group of symptoms including pain that is caused by general compression or irritation of one of five spinal nerve roots that give rise to sciatic nerve, or by compression or irritation of the left or right or both sciatic nerves radiating into lower limbs.

guñja

1. a measurement of weight equivalent to 125mg.; 2. Plant jequirity seeds, dried root of Abrus precatorius, rosary pea.

harimantha

Plant 1. chick-pea (canaka); 2. Premna spinosa (the wood of which by attrition produces flame).

haritāla

yellow orpiment; sulphide of arseni Century

haritamanjari

Plant Indian nettle, Acalypha indica.

homa

ritual offering ghee to fire.

janavarhya

a text on erotics written by Kallarasa in the 16th Century AD, published few decades ago.

jātyādighrita

medicated ghee with jasmine as main ingredient for wound healing.

jvaravivaraṇa

a text written by Narasimha pandita in the 19th Century about human medicine.

kajjali

black mercurial; black sulphide of mercury; sulphur added to mercury and triturated without adding any liquid till it becomes fine black powder.

kākajaṇgha

Plant 1. dried root of Peristrophe bicalyculala; 2. jequirity, Abrus precatorius; 3. Leea hirta.

kākoli

Plant 1. wild lily, Lilium polyphyllum; 2. Roscoea procera, Himalayan fritillary.

kāleya

Go to yakrit.

kalpa

1. cosmic eon; 2. preparation; 3. treatment of the sick; 4. ritual (one of the vedāngas); 5. idea.

kāmadudhāras

herbo-mineral preparation used in gastritis.

kanḍu

itching, pruritis.

kanḍūghna

anti-pruriti Century

kavilingapaḍagalu

a text on erotics written by Kavilinga in the 15th Century

khagendramaṇidarpaṇa

a text on toxicology written by Mangaraja in the 14th Century This text is published and available.

klinnavartma

conjunctivitis, blepharitis.

kohalī

a kind of spirituous liquor.

kopana

irritating, aggravating factor.

krittika

white spot, Pleides constellation, the cutters; third star in the path of moon; Eta Tauri or Alcyone in the constellation Taurus.

kṣata

wound, kṣata udara peritonitis, acute abdomen.

kukūṇaka

ulcerative bhlepharitis, opthalmia neonatorum, eye disease in infants.

madira

spirits.

mahānārāyanataila

medicated oil to reduce muscular spasm and arthritis.

mahārasa

primary alchemical substances, mercury (pādarasa), vermillion (hingulīka), mica (abhraka), loadstone (kāntaloha), iron pyrites (vimala), pyrites (mākṣika), tourmaline (vaikrānta), conch (śankha).

mākṣīka

iron pyrites. It is an iron sulphide with superficial resemblens to gold, hence known as ‘fool’s gold’.

mala

bodily waste products – mutra (urine), puriṣa (faeces), sveda (sweat); impurity.

manḍala

1. nonlepromatous lesion, 2. territory, 3. unit of forty days; 4. an area or a sphear in eye; 5. ringworm.

medaka

thick precipitate of spirituous liquid, liquor used for distillation.

mūtradāha

burning micturition.

mūtrakasāda

nephritis.

mūtrātīta

delay in micturition; atony of the urinary bladder.

navanīta

a treatise on āyurveda (4th Century ) discovered by colonel Bower, a British military officer, therefore named Bower’s manuscript; also known as Yaśomitrasamhita.

pañcamahābhūta

five gross elements (prithvi, ap, tejas, vayu and ākāṣ) that make up the animate and inanimate world.

pārigarbhika

malnutritive disorder affecting the infants; marasmus (affecting the infants of less than one year age) and kwashirkor (after around 18 months of age), a protein deficiency.

parpaṭi

crust, hardened exterior, black sulfide of mercury prepared into a thick film (kajjali) and adding different ingredients one after the other in triturition in a khalva, ex: pancāmṛta parpati.

pārśvāvamarda

pleuritic pain.

pitṛja

characteristics inherited from father.

prasanna

1. pleasant, serenity, tranquil; 2. upper portion of spirituous liquor (surā).

prasūti

birth, parturition; prasūti tantra obstetrics, care of pregrant women.

pritahkrita

separated, separation, detached.

pumsavana

one of the sixteen rites conducted in the prenatal life to help mother conceive male baby.

rakṣaḥkarma

protective rites after surgery to save the patient from evil spirits.

rasa

1. taste, flavour; 2. mercury; 3. essence of digested food that produces blood; 4. nutritive juice; 5. chyme or chyle; 6. gold.

ṛgviniscaya

a treatise on pathology written by Mādhavakara (8th Century ), probably belongs to Bengal region. This is also known as Mādhavanidāna.

sādṛśya

similarity.

sāmanya

similarities, generi Century

samāvartana

returning; one of the sixteen rites in human life.

samskāra

rites with scientific significance on reaching developmental milestones; refining; forming well, alchemical operations.

samskṛta

Sanskrit language

samsodhana

completely purifying, destroying impurity, clearing, palliation therapy.

sandhivāta

osteoarthritis.

sanjīvani

Plant a medicinal herb that revivifies; some plants which are identified as sanjīvani are Cressa critica (littoral bindweed), Selaginella bryopteris, Desmothecum fimbriatus, Tinospora cardifolia, Malaxis acuminata, Mycrosylus willichi, Actiniopteris radiata.

śankhavaṭi

ayurvedic medicine used in gastritis.

sarpa

snake, serpent. sarpakāya serpitine body; a person with serpent traits like irritability, laborious, cowardly, angry, double-dealing and hasty in eating and sexual intercourse.

śāstra

heritage, knowledge, science.

satva

1. purity or pure state of mind; mental strength, one of the psychic humors; 2. extract prepared from a mineral substance. 3. sun-dried paste prepared from a cold infusion which is set in the sun until all the moisture evaporates and the concentrate becomes solid.

satvānubandha

adherence to purity.

śauca

purification, purity of mind.

sīdhu

rum, spirituous liquor distilled from sugarcane juice.

sīmanta

1. sutures on the skull; 2. parting hair, 3. one of the sixteen rites.

śimbi

Dolichos lablab; beans; Mucuna pruritis; Phaseolus trilobus; wild gram.

simhanādaguggulu

herbo-mineral preparation used in arthritis diseases.

sira

duct, blood vessel, vein, nerve; sirapidika episcleritis, sirapratāna prominent and reticulated veins.

śiśuvaidyasanjīvani

a text on paediatrics written by Bhagavatam Krishnaswamy in the 19th Century ; published.

śivasamhita

one of the three important texts on haṭhayoga written between 15th Century and 17th Century AD; the others being Haṭhayogpradipika and Gheraṇdasamhita.

sodhana

1. purification, removal of harmful metabolic substances from the body; cleansing measures; 2. purification of metalic substances, ores by boiling, triturating in various herbal juices, and grinding.

strīvaidya

a text on gynecology written by Timmaraja Gowda in the 18th Century

sūtaśekhararas

herbo-mineral preparation used in gastritis.

svarṇamākṣika

copper pyrites or chalcopyrites; copper iron sulfide, occuring as brass-yellow crystals or masses.

tāḍana

blowing with a pipe to remove impurities, hitting.

tālaka

Go to haritāla

tanḍulīya

1. Plant prickly amaranth, Amaranthus spinosus, A. viridis; 2. iron pyrites.

tapas

austerity, meditation, penance.

tāpyam

copper pyrite, chalcopyrite.

triguṇa

three psychological traits, purity (satva), passion (raja) and gloom (tama).

trika

sacral region; trikagraha arthritis of sacro-iliac region.

tritīyakajvara

fever that appears on the third day repeatedly.

upacaya

accumulation, increase, prosperity, elevation, excess.

upanayana

one of the sixteen rites.

utphullaroga

swollen, wide open; peritonitis.

vaidyacintāmaṇi

a compendium of ayurveda written by Indrakanti Vallabhacarya of 17th Century in Āndhradeśa.

vaidyajīvanadīpika

a text written by Agaram Puttaswamy in the 19th Century on human medicine and it is a translation of Vaidyajīvana of Lolambarāja.

vaidyakanda

a text on human medicine written by Brahmakavi in the 18th Century

vaidyāmṛta

a text on medicine written by Sridharadeva in the 16th Century

vaidyasārasamgraha

1. a text written by Channaraja in the 16th Century about human medicine; 2. an text written by Nanjaraja in the 18th Century about human medicine; 3. another text written by Hosapandita Bheemarao in the 19th Century

vaidyaśataślokiṭīka

a commentary on Vaidyaśataśloki written by Lokanatha Kavi in the 19th Century

vapā

omentum; fold of peritoneum.

ritara,vāritaratva

float on water; a test for improperly processed metal. This is one of the physical analytical parameters for bhasma, and is applied to study the lightness and fineness of prepared bhasma.

vātagajānkuṣarasa

(vāta.gaja.ankusa.ras) herbo-mineral preparation used in the treatment of arthritis and muscular diseases.

vātarakta

gout and arthritis; a kind of arthritis that occurs when uric acid builds up in blood and causes joint inflammation.

veda

a large body of texts in pre-Panini Sanskrit belonging to ancient Indian literature. The vedic verses were divided into 4 sections Ṛgveda, Yajurveḍa, Sāmaveda and Atharvaveḍa. Some verses are recited in religious functions.

vedāṅga

vedic auxiliary disciplines; phonetics (śikṣa), ritual (kalpa), grammar (vyākaraṇa), etymology (nirukti), meter (chandas) and astrology (jyotiṣa).

vedārambha

one fo the sixteen rites; starting educating the child.

vetāla

ghost, spririt, a kind of demon.

vidāri,vidārikanda

Plant Indian kudju, tuber of Pueraria tuberose, syn. Hedysarum tuberosum; milky yam; Ipomea mauritiana.

vidyārambha

commencing education, one of the sixteen rites.

vikriti

1. variation; constitutional disorders; vikritivigyana pathology.

visūcika

cholera, gastro-enteritis.

viśuddhacakra

circle of purity and virtue.

yogacintāmaṇi

a text written by Gorakṣanāth, probably a south Indian Siddhar or a person belonging to Nath-sampradaya or north India in 11th or 12th centuries.

yogarājaguggulu

herbomineral preparation used in the treatment of arthritis.

yonikanḍu

pruritis vulvae.

Wordnet Search
"rit" has 283 results.

rit

daurjanyam, daurātmyam, duṣṭiḥ, dauṣṭyam, duścaritratā, caritrahīnatā   

duścaritrasya avasthā bhāvo vā।

daurjanyāt trāhi।

rit

saccaritratā   

saccaritrasya avasthā bhāvo vā।

saccaritratayā eva manuṣyaḥ mahātmā bhavati।

rit

śasyam, dhānyam, sītyam, gāritraḥ, stambakariḥ, bījaruhaḥ   

vṛkṣādiniṣpannaṃ bījaṃ yad annarūpeṇa upayujyate।

saḥ śasyān krīṇāti।

rit

śiṣṭa, bhadra, madra, ācāravat, vinīta, sabhya, śiṣṭācārasevin, agrāmya, āryavṛtta, suvṛtta, yaśasya, sabheya, anīca, arhat, ādṛtya, ārya, āryamiśra, āryaka, ārṣeya, uḍḍāmara, kulya, guru, mānya, sat, sajjana, sādhu, sujana, praśrayin, praśrita, sudakṣiṇa   

yaḥ sādhuvyavahāraṃ karoti।

rāmaḥ śiṣṭaḥ puruṣaḥ asti।

rit

asahāya, niḥsahāya, anupakṛta, nirāśrita, nirāśraya, anāśrita, āśrayahīna, apāśraya, anātha, niravalaṃba, avalaṃbahīna, anavasthita   

yasya āśrayaḥ nāsti।

surendra mahodayaḥ asahāyānāṃ sahāyaṃ karoti।

rit

sāmañjasyam, saumanasyam, anusāritā, yathātathyam, aucityam, ucitatā, upapattiḥ, sadṛśatā, yogyatā, yuktatā, yuktiḥ   

ucitaḥ upayuktaśca saṃyogaḥ।

sāmañjasyāt kaṭhinam api kāryam sukaraṃ bhavati।

rit

anuvādita-kṛtiḥ, bhāṣāntarita-kṛtiḥ   

yasya anuvādaḥ kṛtaḥ।

eṣā rāṣṭrapatiḥ mahodayasya āṅglapustakasya anuvādita-kṛtiḥ asti।

rit

anuvādita, bhāṣāntarita   

yasya anuvādaḥ kṛtaḥ।

eṣā mahāśvetādevyāḥ anuvāditā kṛtiḥ asti।

rit

aparādhaḥ, pāpam, doṣaḥ, pātakam, duṣkṛtam, duṣkarma, pāpakarma, kalmaṣam, kaluṣam, duritam, duriṣṭham, enaḥ, āgaḥ, agham, anyāyaḥ, mantuḥ, kalkaḥ   

tat kāryaṃ yad dharmaśāstraviruddham asti tathā ca yasya ācaraṇād saḥ vyaktiḥ daṇḍam arhati।

kāryālaye gṛhe vā bāla-śramikasya niyuktiḥ mahān aparādhaḥ asti।

rit

pāpam, paṅkam, pāpmā, kilviṣam, kalmaṣam, kaluṣam, vṛjinam, enaḥ, agham, ahaḥ, duritam, duṣkṛtam, pātakam, tūstam, kaṇvam, śalyam, pāpakam, adharmam, durvinītatā, avinayaḥ, kunītiḥ, kucaritam, duśceṣṭitam, kuceṣṭitam, durvṛttiḥ, kunītiḥ, kucaritam, kucaryā, vyabhicāraḥ, durācāraḥ   

tat karma yad dharmānusāri nāsti।

pāpāt rakṣa।

rit

citrita, varṇita, varṇagata, rañjita, citragata, citrārpita, ālithita, abhilikhita, ālekhyagata   

yasyopari citram ālekhitam asti।

dvāre citritaḥ paṭaḥ baddhaḥ।

rit

sūtram, tantuḥ, tantram, guṇaḥ, sarat, sarit, kubram, cīnaḥ, khātram   

karpāsādeḥ nirmitaḥ paṭāvayavaḥ।

kauśasya sūtreṇa etad vastraṃ nirmitam।

rit

bāhuḥ, bhujā, karaḥ, praveṣṭaḥ, doḥ, doṣaḥ, bāhaḥ, āyātī, cyavanā, anīśū, aplavānā, vinaṅgṛsau, gabhastī, kavasnau, bhūrijau, kṣipastī, śakkarī, bharitre   

avayavaviśeṣaḥ- kakṣādyaṅgulyagraparyantāvayavaviśeṣaḥ yena vastūni dhriyante kāryaṃ ca kriyate।

balinau bhīmasya bāhū। / ṛṣṭayoḥ vo, maruto aṃsayoradhi saha ojo bāhvoḥ vā balam hitam।

rit

ramya, ramaṇīya, ānandamaya, sukhada, paritoṣajanaka, manorama, manohara, subhaga, nandaka, nandana, ānandana, ānandada, harṣaka, harṣakara, harṣaṇa, prītida, modaka, pramodin, ramaṇa, rāmaṇīyaka   

yaḥ ānandayati।

mama yātrā ramyā āsīt।

rit

ānandin, sānandaḥ, prahṛṣṭa, ānandavṛtti, prasannacitta, ullāsī, ānandita, hṛṣṭa, hṛṣṭamānasa, hṛṣṭahṛdaya, praharṣita, harṣita, praharṣaṇa, haroṣamāṇa, harṣaṇa, āhlādin, hlādin, pramodin, pramudita, mudita, mudānvita, harṣānvita, praphulla, harṣayukta, tuṣṭa, parituṣṭa, ullasa, ullāsin, ullasit   

ānandena sahitaḥ।

santuṣṭasya jīvanam ānandi asti।

rit

harit, haritaḥ, haritā, haritariṇi, haritam, haritavarṇaḥ, hariḥ, palāśaḥ, palāśī, palāśam, pālāśaḥ, pālāśī, pālāśam, śyāmaḥ, śyāmā, śyāmam, bharitaḥ, bharitā, bharitam, śyāmavarṇaḥ, śyāmavarṇā, śyāmavarṇam, tālakābhaḥ, tālakābhā, tālakābham   

varṇaviśeṣaḥ, śādvalavat varṇaḥ।

citrakāraḥ śukasya pakṣau haritena varṇena varṇayati।

rit

ciñcā, amlaphalaḥ, amlavṛkṣaḥ, āmlikā, āmlīkā, gurupattrā, caṇḍacukrā, caritrā, ciñciṇī, cukracaṇḍikā, tintiḍikā   

vṛkṣaviśeṣaḥ asya pakvaphalasya guṇāḥ dīpanatva-rucikāritva-bheditvādayaḥ।

śyāmasya prāṅgaṇe ciñcāyāḥ vṛkṣam asti।

rit

mūlakaḥ, mūlakam, sekimam, pāṭīraḥ, paṭīram, hariparṇam, haritparṇam   

kṣupaviśeṣaḥ yasya kandaḥ śubhraḥ kaṭurasayuktaḥ asti।

kṛṣakaḥ mūlakaṃ secayati।

rit

viparitagāmin, pratigāmin, vyatikrānta, viparitagatika, parāvṛtta, prātīpika, avanatiśīla, patanaśīla, patanonmukha, pātuka, patayiṣṇu, vinipātaśīla   

yaḥ avanatim uddiśya gacchati।

svasya kukarmabhireva saḥ viparitagāmī bhavati।

rit

ātmakathā, ātmakathana, ātmavṛttāntaracanam, ātmacaritraracanam   

ātmaviṣayakaḥ ātmanā kathitaḥ vṛttāntaḥ।

mahātmanaḥ ātmakathāṃ śrutvā tasya śiṣyāḥ prabhāvitāḥ jātāḥ।

rit

vikīrṇa, prakīrṇa, ākīrṇaḥ, avakīrṇaḥ, kīrṇaḥ, vikṣipta, vyasta, suvyasta, udasta, prasāritaḥ, vidhūtaḥ, asaṃhata   

itastataḥ kṣiptaḥ।

khagāḥ bhūmyām vikīrṇān annakaṇān avacinvanti।

rit

puraskāraḥ, pāritoṣikaḥ   

guṇagauravārthaṃ sammānanam।

svatantratādine naikeṣu vidyālayeṣu puraskārāṇāṃ vitaraṇaṃ bhavati।

rit

supta, śayita, nidrāṇa, nidrita, nidrāmagna, nidrāgata, svapnila, suptastha, avasupta, suptavigraha   

yaḥ nidrāti।

kumbhakarṇaḥ ṣaṇmāsaṃ yāvat suptaḥ bhavati sma।

rit

prayukta, prayojita, upayojita, vyavahṛta, vyavahārita, sevita, upasevita, bhukta, upabhukta, dhṛta, abhyasta   

yasya upayogaḥ kṛtaḥ।

miṣṭānnavikretā miṣṭānne prayuktānāṃ padārthānāṃ sūcim akarot।

rit

parāvalambinī, āśritā, parāśrayitā   

yā parāśrayeṇa jīvati।

naikāḥ grāmīṇāḥ nāryaḥ parāvalambinyaḥ santi।

rit

āśrita, saṃśrita, upāśrita, avalambin, avalambita, adhīna, abhyādhīna, āyatta, vaśa, tantra, nighna, sambaddha, nibaddha   

kasyacit ādhāreṇa āśrayeṇa vā tiṣṭhati।

parāvalambinaḥ kṣupāḥ anyasmin kṣupe āśritāḥ santi।

rit

harita, śādaharita, amlāna, śādvala   

haritavarṇīyavṛkṣakṣupādibhiḥ paripūrṇaḥ।

vardhatyāṃ janasaṅkhyāyāṃ haritānāṃ vṛkṣāṇāṃ saṅkhyā nyūnībhavati।

rit

nirāśrita, anāśrita, āśrayahīna, apāśraya, nirāśraya   

yaḥ āśrayarahitaḥ।

eṣā saṃsthā nirāśritān āśrayaṃ prayacchati।

rit

nirdhārita   

yasmin sambandhe anubandhaḥ niścitaḥ।

nirdhāritaṃ kāryaṃ satvaraṃ sampādanīyam।

rit

cālita, calita, cārita, sañacārita, sārita, pracalita, prerita, praṇodita, praṇunna, pracodita   

yaḥ cālyate।

adhunā asya cālitasya yantrasya rodhanam āvaśyakam।

rit

kṣepaṇī, kṣepaṇiḥ, kṣipaṇiḥ, kṣipaṇī, kṣapaṇī, naukādaṇḍaḥ, naudaṇḍaḥ, aritram, āritram, taraṇḍaḥ, tarirathaḥ   

naukāyāḥ vāhanārthe upayuktaḥ daṇḍaḥ।

nāvikaḥ kṣepaṇyā naukāṃ vāhayati।

rit

pratigāmin, viparitagāmin, vyatikrānta, viparitagatika   

yaḥ viparītaṃ gacchati।

pratigāminaḥ puruṣaḥ vikāsam avarundhati।

rit

cintita, sucintita, sañcintita, saṃcintita, parāmṛṣṭa, samīkṣita, ālocita, nirupita, vicārita, sunirupita, pratīkṣita, nirīkṣita, vigaṇita, mata, smṛta   

yasya samīkṣā kṛtā vartate।

ayaṃ viṣayaḥ asmābhiḥ cintitaḥ asti atra punarvicārasya āvaśyakatā nāsti।

rit

saccaritrā, caritravatī, śīlavatī, sadācāriṇī, sādhvī   

yasyāḥ caritraṃ śobhanam।

saccaritrameva saccaritrāyāḥ nāryāḥ ābhūṣaṇam।

rit

starita   

yasmin starāḥ santi।

eṣaḥ staritaḥ parvataḥ।

rit

uṣita, paryuṣita, rātryantarita   

pūrvasmin dine pakvam annam।

uṣitam annam śarīrāya apāyakārakam asti।

rit

aniyata, aniścita, anirṇīta, anirdhārita, anirdiṣṭa, avyavasthita, alakṣita, alakṣaṇaँ, aparimita, vaikalpika, sandigdha, avivakṣita   

yad nirdhāritam nāsti।

avakāśāt sarvāṇi yānāni anirdhārite samaye gacchanti।

rit

haritavanam   

tad vanaṃ yad varṣaṃ yāvad haritam asti।

vayaṃ haritavanāt agre gacchāmaḥ।

rit

tuṣṭiḥ, tṛptiḥ, toṣaḥ, santoṣaḥ, paritoṣaḥ, tuṣiṭatā, parituṣṭatā, tṛptatā, paryāpta   

ākāṅkṣānivṛttiḥ।

jñānārjanena tuṣṭiḥ jātā ।

rit

uttuṅga, ucca, prāṃśu, udagra, ucchrita, tuṅga   

yaḥ ūrdhvadiśi vardhitaḥ।

evaresṭa nāma himālayasya uttuṅgaḥ śikharaḥ।

rit

oṣadhiḥ, oṣadhī, śākaḥ, tṛṇam, haritakam, arbhaḥ, kandaḥ   

kṣupaviśeṣaḥ daṇḍahīnaḥ kṣupaḥ।

kustumbarādayāḥ śākāḥ।

rit

tṛṇam, arjunam, triṇam, khaṭam, kheṭṭam, haritam, tāṇḍavam   

yad gavādibhiḥ bhakṣyate।

gauḥ tṛṇaṃ khādati।

rit

vyavahāraḥ, vṛttiḥ, vṛttam, ācāraḥ, rītiḥ, caritram, caritam, ācaraṇam, gatiḥ, ceṣṭitam, sthitiḥ   

samāje anyaiḥ saha kṛtam ācaraṇam।

tasya vyavahāraḥ samyak nāsti।

rit

sat, sādhu, puṇyavat, sāttvika, satyapara, satyarata, satyavṛtta, sadharma, śuddhakarman, śucicarit, viśuddha, śīlin, sthitimat, prāñjala, praguṇa, sarala, ajihma, aśaṭha, āli, udāra, ṛjūyu, nirvyāja, niścakrika, niṣkaitava, niṣprapañca, niśaṭha, rajiṣṭha, vaktṛ, ślakṣṇa, supratīka   

akapaṭī satśīlaḥ।

santaḥ sadā pūjārhāḥ santi।

rit

śīghram, tvarayā, tvaritam, drutam, vegena, vegataḥ, javena, tūrṇam, āśu, satvaram, satvaritam, añjasā, kṣipram, jhaṭiti, drāk, ajiram, añjas, abhitaḥ, caturam, capalam, am, kṣepṇā, kṣepīyaḥ, dravat   

tīvragatyā saha yathā syāt tathā।

śīghram etat kāryaṃ sampannatāṃ nayatu।

rit

śivaḥ, śambhuḥ, īśaḥ, paśupatiḥ, pinākapāṇiḥ, śūlī, maheśvaraḥ, īśvaraḥ, sarvaḥ, īśānaḥ, śaṅkaraḥ, candraśekharaḥ, phaṇadharadharaḥ, kailāsaniketanaḥ, himādritanayāpatiḥ, bhūteśaḥ, khaṇḍaparaśuḥ, girīśaḥ, giriśaḥ, mṛḍaḥ, mṛtyañjayaḥ, kṛttivāsāḥ, pinākī, prathamādhipaḥ, ugraḥ, kapardī, śrīkaṇṭhaḥ, śitikaṇṭhaḥ, kapālabhṛt, vāmadevaḥ, mahādevaḥ, virūpākṣaḥ, trilocanaḥ, kṛśānuretāḥ, sarvajñaḥ, dhūrjaṭiḥ, nīlalohitaḥ, haraḥ, smaraharaḥ, bhargaḥ, tryambakaḥ, tripurāntakaḥ, gaṅgādharaḥ, andhakaripuḥ, kratudhvaṃsī, vṛṣadhvajaḥ, vyomakeśaḥ, bhavaḥ, bhaumaḥ, sthāṇuḥ, rudraḥ, umāpatiḥ, vṛṣaparvā, rerihāṇaḥ, bhagālī, pāśucandanaḥ, digambaraḥ, aṭṭahāsaḥ, kālañjaraḥ, purahiṭ, vṛṣākapiḥ, mahākālaḥ, varākaḥ, nandivardhanaḥ, hīraḥ, vīraḥ, kharuḥ, bhūriḥ, kaṭaprūḥ, bhairavaḥ, dhruvaḥ, śivipiṣṭaḥ, guḍākeśaḥ, devadevaḥ, mahānaṭaḥ, tīvraḥ, khaṇḍaparśuḥ, pañcānanaḥ, kaṇṭhekālaḥ, bharuḥ, bhīruḥ, bhīṣaṇaḥ, kaṅkālamālī, jaṭādharaḥ, vyomadevaḥ, siddhadevaḥ, dharaṇīśvaraḥ, viśveśaḥ, jayantaḥ, hararūpaḥ, sandhyānāṭī, suprasādaḥ, candrāpīḍaḥ, śūladharaḥ, vṛṣāṅgaḥ, vṛṣabhadhvajaḥ, bhūtanāthaḥ, śipiviṣṭaḥ, vareśvaraḥ, viśveśvaraḥ, viśvanāthaḥ, kāśīnāthaḥ, kuleśvaraḥ, asthimālī, viśālākṣaḥ, hiṇḍī, priyatamaḥ, viṣamākṣaḥ, bhadraḥ, ūrddharetā, yamāntakaḥ, nandīśvaraḥ, aṣṭamūrtiḥ, arghīśaḥ, khecaraḥ, bhṛṅgīśaḥ, ardhanārīśaḥ, rasanāyakaḥ, uḥ, hariḥ, abhīruḥ, amṛtaḥ, aśaniḥ, ānandabhairavaḥ, kaliḥ, pṛṣadaśvaḥ, kālaḥ, kālañjaraḥ, kuśalaḥ, kolaḥ, kauśikaḥ, kṣāntaḥ, gaṇeśaḥ, gopālaḥ, ghoṣaḥ, caṇḍaḥ, jagadīśaḥ, jaṭādharaḥ, jaṭilaḥ, jayantaḥ, raktaḥ, vāraḥ, vilohitaḥ, sudarśanaḥ, vṛṣāṇakaḥ, śarvaḥ, satīrthaḥ, subrahmaṇyaḥ   

devatāviśeṣaḥ- hindūdharmānusāraṃ sṛṣṭeḥ vināśikā devatā।

śivasya arcanā liṅgarūpeṇa pracalitā asti।

rit

nirdhārita-samayaḥ, nirdhārita-kālaḥ   

ekasmāt niścitasamayāt ārabhya anyaṃ niścitasamayaṃ yāvat kālaḥ।

asya kāryasya nirdhāritasamayaṃ vardhituṃ na śakyate।

rit

channa, chādita, āchanna, ācchādita, pracchanna, pracchādita, paricchanna, samavachanna, samācchanna, āvṛta, prāvṛta, saṃvṛta, vṛta, pihita, avatata, ācita, nicita, āstīrṇa, āstṛta, guṇṭhita, ūrṇuta, saṃvīta, veṣṭita, pinaddha, rūṣita, apavārita   

kṛtācchādanam।

bālakaḥ meghaiḥ ācchāditam ākāśaṃ paśyati।

rit

pārvatī, ambā, umā, girijā, gaurī, bhagavatī, bhavānī, maṅgalā, mahāgaurī, mahādevī, rudrāṇī, śivā, śailajā, himālayajā, ambikā, acalakanyā, acalajā, śailasutā, himajā, śaileyī, aparṇā, śailakumārī, śailakanyā, jagadjananī, tribhuvanasundarī, sunandā, bhavabhāminī, bhavavāmā, jagadīśvarī, bhavyā, pañcamukhī, parvatajā, vṛṣākapāyī, śambhukāntā, nandā, jayā, nandinī, śaṅkarā, śatākṣī, nityā, mṛḍa़ाnī, hemasutā, adritanayā, haimavatī, āryā, ilā, vāruṇī   

śivasya patnī।

pārvatī gaṇeśasya mātā asti।

rit

pariprath, avatan, abhitan, paritan, viyam, samprasār, abhiprasār, drāgh, pādaya, hastaya, vyākṣip   

hastau pādau ca prasārya kiñcit śayanasadṛśāvasthāyām āsanātmakaḥ vyāpāraḥ।

āpaṇāt āgatena tena sukhāsane svaśarīraṃ paryaprathata।

rit

citram, citralekhā, citralikhitam, ālekhyam, pratimā, pratimānam, citraphalakaḥ, pratikṛtiḥ, pratirūpam, praticchāyā, praticchandakam, prativimbam, pritivimbaḥ, jharjharīkaḥ, pratinidhiḥ, pratiyātanā   

rekhābhiḥ varṇaiḥ vā ālekhitā ākṛti।

kalāniketana iti saṃsthāyāṃ naikāni citrāṇi santi।

rit

agrepreṣita, agrapreṣita, agreṣita, agresārita   

kasyāpi nivedanam agrime kāryārthe ucite ājñārthe vā uccādhikāriṇaḥ samīpe preṣitam।

prāntādhikārī agrepreṣitaṃ patraṃ śvaḥ cintayiṣyati।

rit

santuṣṭa, tṛpta, tuṣṭa, parituṣṭa, santoṣita, dhṛtimat   

yasya icchā toṣitā।

bhavatāṃ darśanena ahaṃ santuṣṭaḥ।

rit

pṛthvī, dharatī, dharā, bhū, vasundharā, dharaṇī, dharitrī, avanī, urvī, ratnagarbhā, vasudhā, kṣitiḥ, mahiḥ, mahī, acalakīlā, acalā, bhūmaṇḍalaḥ, pṛthivīmaṇḍalam, viśvambharā, prathī, viśvadhāriṇī, medinī, viśvadhenā   

sauramālāyāṃ sūryaṃ paritaḥ bhramamāṇaḥ sūryāt tṛtīyaḥ martyādyadhiṣṭhānabhūtaḥ grahagolaḥ।

candraḥ pṛthveḥ upagrahaḥ asti।

rit

niṣedhaḥ, pratiṣedhaḥ, vāraṇaḥ, prativāritama, sedhaḥ, aparodhaḥ, upālambhaḥ   

kimapi kāryaṃ kṛtiḥ vā niṣidhyate।

nyāyālayasya ādeśaḥ yat sārvajanikasthalādiṣu dhūmrapānārthe niṣedhaḥ kṛtaṃ vartate।

rit

nirdhārita, niścita, vihita, niyata, avadhārita   

yad vidhīyate।

ahaṃ nirdhāritaṃ sthānam āgamiṣyāmi।

rit

vairam, vairitā, śatrutā, riputā, aritā, śātravam, vipakṣatā, dveṣaḥ, vidveṣaḥ, virodhaḥ, vairabhāvaḥ, pratidvandvam, pratipakṣatā, paratā, virodhaḥ   

yatra śatrubhāvanā vartate।

dānena vairāṇyapi yānti nāśanam।

rit

jāgṛta, anidrita, asupta   

yaḥ jāgarti athavā jāgaritaḥ।

sīmāyāṃ sainikāḥ ahorātraṃ jāgṛtāḥ eva santi।

rit

sāgaraḥ, samudraḥ, abdhiḥ, akūpāraḥ, pārāvāraḥ, saritpatiḥ, udanvān, udadhiḥ, sindhuḥ, sarasvān, sāgaraḥ, arṇavaḥ, ratnākaraḥ, jalanidhiḥ, yādaḥpatiḥ, apāmpatiḥ, mahākacchaḥ, nadīkāntaḥ, tarīyaḥ, dvīpavān, jalendraḥ, manthiraḥ, kṣauṇīprācīram, makarālayaḥ, saritāmpatiḥ, jaladhiḥ, nīranijhiḥ, ambudhiḥ, pāthondhiḥ, pādhodhiḥ, yādasāmpatiḥ, nadīnaḥ, indrajanakaḥ, timikoṣaḥ, vārāṃnidhiḥ, vārinidhiḥ, vārdhiḥ, vāridhiḥ, toyanidhiḥ, kīlāladhiḥ, dharaṇīpūraḥ, kṣīrābdhiḥ, dharaṇiplavaḥ, vāṅkaḥ, kacaṅgalaḥ, peruḥ, mitadruḥ, vāhinīpatiḥ, gaṅagādharaḥ, dāradaḥ, timiḥ, prāṇabhāsvān, urmimālī, mahāśayaḥ, ambhonidhiḥ, ambhodhiḥ, tariṣaḥ, kūlaṅkaṣaḥ, tāriṣaḥ, vārirāśiḥ, śailaśiviram, parākuvaḥ, tarantaḥ, mahīprācīram, sarinnāthaḥ, ambhorāśiḥ, dhunīnāthaḥ, nityaḥ, kandhiḥ, apānnāthaḥ   

bhūmeḥ paritaḥ lavaṇayuktā jalarāśiḥ।

sāgare mauktikāni santi।

rit

pāpam, kalmaṣam, kilviṣam, pātakam, pāpmā, agham, duritam, enas, kaluṣam, abhadram, aśubham, vṛjanam, vṛjinam, doṣaḥ, aparādhaḥ, duṣkṛtam, kalkam, aṃhas, aṃghas, mantuḥ, kulmalam, kalaṅkaḥ, pratyavāyaḥ, kiṇvam, amīvam, paṅkam, jaṅgapūgam   

tat karma yad asmin loke anuttamaḥ tathā ca paraloke aniṣṭaṃ phalaṃ janayati।

kabīrasya mate asatyavadanaṃ pāpam asti।

rit

ādhipatyam, adhikāraḥ, sattā, prabhutvam, svāmitvam, prabhutā, adhikāritā, adhikāritvam   

svāminaḥ avasthā bhāvo vā।

purā bhārate videśinām ādhipatyam āsīt।

rit

aritram, naubandhanakīlaḥ   

lohamayayantraṃ yena naukā badhyate।

nāvikaḥ viśrāmārthe gaṅgātaṭe aritraṃ sthāpayati।

rit

ullasita, ānandī, hṛṣṭa, prasanna, ānandita, pulakita, harṣita, pramudita, praphulla, mudita, parituṣṭa, praphullita, praphulita   

yaḥ prasīdatiḥ।

padonnatteḥ vārtā śrutvā manojaḥ ullasitena manasā gṛhaṃ gataḥ।

rit

pravṛttiḥ, caritam, caryā, anuśīlanam, ācāraḥ, vyavahāraḥ, svabhāvaḥ, prakṛttiḥ, śīlaḥ, svarūpam, nisargaḥ   

saṃtatābhyāsād janitam ācaraṇam।

prātarutthānaṃ tasya pravṛttiḥ।

rit

viśuddha, amiśrita   

yaḥ miśritaḥ nāsti।

suvarṇaḥ ekaḥ amiśritaḥ dhātuḥ asti।

rit

miśrita, saṃmiśrita   

parasparaṃ saṃśliṣṭāni।

pīttalam iti ekaḥ miśritaḥ dhātuḥ asti।

rit

bhayam, bhītiḥ, bhīrutā, santrāsaḥ, paritrāsaḥ, daraḥ, sādhvasam, trāsaḥ   

vipatteḥ aniṣṭasya vā āśaṅkāyāḥ janitaḥ manovikāraḥ।

saurāṣṭre yaḥ sāmpradāyikaḥ saṃkṣobhaḥ abhūt tasmāt janānāṃ manāṃsi bhayena ākulāni abhavat।

rit

rita   

yad pāraṃ jātam।

lokasabhāyām acirāt pāritaḥ vidheyakaṃ prayuktaṃ bhavet।

rit

aṅkurita   

yasmāt aṅkuraḥ bahiḥ āgataḥ।

saḥ prātaḥ aṅkuritān caṇakān atti।

rit

dhāneyam, āvalikā, chattradhānyam, tīkṣṇakalkaḥ, dhanikaḥ, dhanikam, dhānam, dhānakam, dhānā, dhāneyakam, dhānyam, dhānyā, dhānyakam, dhānyeyam, dhenikā, dhenukā, bhidā, vaṃśyā, vanajaḥ, vitunnakaḥ, vitunnakam, vedhakam, śākayogyaḥ, sucaritrā, sūkṣmapatram, sauraḥ, saurajaḥ, saurabhaḥ   

laghukṣupaḥ yasya parṇāni sugandhitāni santi।

dhāneyasya tiktikā apūpena saha rucikarā bhavati।

rit

dik, āśā, harit, nideśinī, diśā, kakubhaḥ, haritaḥ, gauḥ   

kṣitijasya kalpiteṣu caturṣu vibhāgeṣu ekaḥ।

mama gṛham uttarasyāṃ diśi vartate।

rit

āśrita, anujīvin, parāvalambin   

yaḥ anyasya āśrayaṃ karoti।

āśritasya jīvanaṃ māstu।

rit

rakṣita, saṃrakṣita, avatārita, saṃvṛta   

yasya rakṣaṇaṃ kṛtam।

senayā rāṣṭrasya sīmā rakṣitā asti।

rit

ritoṣikam, puraskāraḥ   

tad vastu dravyaṃ vā yad prasannatāpūrvakaṃ preraṇārthe dīyate।

rājā nartakīm apekṣitaṃ pāritoṣikaṃ dattavān।

rit

caritārtha   

yena svasya prayojanaṃ pūrṇaṃ kṛtam।

janaiḥ tasya caritārthā bhaviṣyavāṇī api āśaṅkitā।

rit

śivā, haritakī, abhayā, avyathā, pathyā, vayaḥsthā, pūtanā, amṛtā, haimavatī, cetakī, śreyasī, sudhā, kāyasthā, kanyā, rasāyanaphalā, vijayā, jayā, cetanakī, rohiṇī, prapathyā, jīvapriyā, jīvanikā, bhiṣgavarā, bhiṣakpriyā, jīvanti, prāṇadā, jīvyā, devī, divyā   

haritakīvṛkṣasya phalaṃ yad haritapītavarṇīyam asti।

śuṣkakāse śivā atīva upayuktā asti।

rit

durgā, umā, kātyāyanī, gaurī, brahmāṇī, kālī, haimavatī, īśvarā, śivā, bhavānī, rudrāṇī, sarvāṇī, sarvamaṅgalā, aparṇā, pārvatī, mṛḍānī, līlāvatī, caṇaḍikā, ambikā, śāradā, caṇḍī, caṇḍā, caṇḍanāyikā, girijā, maṅgalā, nārāyaṇī, mahāmāyā, vaiṣṇavī, maheśvarī, koṭṭavī, ṣaṣṭhī, mādhavī, naganandinī, jayantī, bhārgavī, rambhā, siṃharathā, satī, bhrāmarī, dakṣakanyā, mahiṣamardinī, herambajananī, sāvitrī, kṛṣṇapiṅgalā, vṛṣākapāyī, lambā, himaśailajā, kārttikeyaprasūḥ, ādyā, nityā, vidyā, śubhahkarī, sāttvikī, rājasī, tāmasī, bhīmā, nandanandinī, mahāmāyī, śūladharā, sunandā, śumyabhaghātinī, hrī, parvatarājatanayā, himālayasutā, maheśvaravanitā, satyā, bhagavatī, īśānā, sanātanī, mahākālī, śivānī, haravallabhā, ugracaṇḍā, cāmuṇḍā, vidhātrī, ānandā, mahāmātrā, mahāmudrā, mākarī, bhaumī, kalyāṇī, kṛṣṇā, mānadātrī, madālasā, māninī, cārvaṅgī, vāṇī, īśā, valeśī, bhramarī, bhūṣyā, phālgunī, yatī, brahmamayī, bhāvinī, devī, acintā, trinetrā, triśūlā, carcikā, tīvrā, nandinī, nandā, dharitriṇī, mātṛkā, cidānandasvarūpiṇī, manasvinī, mahādevī, nidrārūpā, bhavānikā, tārā, nīlasarasvatī, kālikā, ugratārā, kāmeśvarī, sundarī, bhairavī, rājarājeśvarī, bhuvaneśī, tvaritā, mahālakṣmī, rājīvalocanī, dhanadā, vāgīśvarī, tripurā, jvālmukhī, vagalāmukhī, siddhavidyā, annapūrṇā, viśālākṣī, subhagā, saguṇā, nirguṇā, dhavalā, gītiḥ, gītavādyapriyā, aṭṭālavāsinī, aṭṭahāsinī, ghorā, premā, vaṭeśvarī, kīrtidā, buddhidā, avīrā, paṇḍitālayavāsinī, maṇḍitā, saṃvatsarā, kṛṣṇarūpā, balipriyā, tumulā, kāminī, kāmarūpā, puṇyadā, viṣṇucakradharā, pañcamā, vṛndāvanasvarūpiṇī, ayodhyārupiṇī, māyāvatī, jīmūtavasanā, jagannāthasvarūpiṇī, kṛttivasanā, triyāmā, jamalārjunī, yāminī, yaśodā, yādavī, jagatī, kṛṣṇajāyā, satyabhāmā, subhadrikā, lakṣmaṇā, digambarī, pṛthukā, tīkṣṇā, ācārā, akrūrā, jāhnavī, gaṇḍakī, dhyeyā, jṛmbhaṇī, mohinī, vikārā, akṣaravāsinī, aṃśakā, patrikā, pavitrikā, tulasī, atulā, jānakī, vandyā, kāmanā, nārasiṃhī, girīśā, sādhvī, kalyāṇī, kamalā, kāntā, śāntā, kulā, vedamātā, karmadā, sandhyā, tripurasundarī, rāseśī, dakṣayajñavināśinī, anantā, dharmeśvarī, cakreśvarī, khañjanā, vidagdhā, kuñjikā, citrā, sulekhā, caturbhujā, rākā, prajñā, ṛdbhidā, tāpinī, tapā, sumantrā, dūtī, aśanī, karālā, kālakī, kuṣmāṇḍī, kaiṭabhā, kaiṭabhī, kṣatriyā, kṣamā, kṣemā, caṇḍālikā, jayantī, bheruṇḍā   

sā devī yayā naike daityāḥ hatāḥ tathā ca yā ādiśaktiḥ asti iti manyate।

navarātrotsave sthāne sthāne durgāyāḥ pratiṣṭhāpanā kriyate।

rit

nadī, sarit, taraṅgiṇī, śaivalinī, taṭinī, dhunī, srotasvatī, dvīpavatī, sravantī, nimnagā, āpagā, srotasvinī, srotovahā, sāgaragāminī, apagā, nirjhariṇī, sarasvatī, samudragā, kūlaṅkaṣā, kūlavatī, śaivālinī, samudrakāntā, sāgaragā, rodhovatī, vāhinī   

jalasya saḥ pravāhaḥ yaḥ parvatāt ārabhya viśiṣṭamārgeṇa sāgaraṃ prati gacchati।

parvatapradeśe pāṣāṇasikatādiṣu nadī mārgam ākramati ।/ pāṇineḥ na nadī gaṅgā yamunā na nadī sthalī।

rit

duścaritra, anācārin, apacārin, bhraṣṭa, duścarita, durācārin   

caritrahīnaḥ।

duścaritrāḥ janāḥ samājasya kṛte abhiśāpaḥ।

rit

mandākinī, ākāśagaṅgā, svarganadī, nabhonadī, divyasaritā, suranadī, viyadgaṅgā, svarnadī, suradīrghikā, svarṇapadmā, sureśvarī   

svarge vartamānā gaṅgāyāḥ dhārā।

pūrvajān trātuṃ bhagīrathena tapasyāṃ kṛtvā mandākinī pṛthivyām ānītā।

rit

ātmakathā, ātmacaritram   

svena likhitā svasya jīvanasya kathā।

gāndhīmahodayasya ātmakathayā ahaṃ prabhāvitaḥ।

rit

kārayānam, svayaṃpreritarathaḥ   

catuścakrikāyuktaṃ laghuyānam।

pradhānamantrī kārayānena kṣetrasya abhyāgamaṃ karoti।

rit

parivartita, anyathākṛta, anyathābhūta, ūḍha, ūhita, vikapita, vikārita, vipariṇata, vyasta   

yasmin parivartanaṃ jātam।

santasamāgamena tasya hṛdayaṃ parivartitaṃ jātam।

rit

paritakaḥ, śākaprabhedaḥ, śigruḥ, kembukapuṣpam, gojihvā   

ekaṃ bṛhatpuṣpaṃ yad śākarūpeṇa khādyate।

mātā paritakasya śākaṃ pacati।

rit

paritakaḥ, śākaprabhedaḥ, śigruḥ, kembukapuṣpaḥ   

vanaspativiśeṣaḥ yasya bṛhatpuṣpaṃ śākarūpeṇa khādyate।

saḥ paritakaḥ ropayati।

rit

vismita, paramavismita, vismayin, kṛtavismaya, camatkārita, sādbhuta, hṛṣita, hṛṣṭa   

yaḥ vismayānvitaḥ।

tasya kāryaṃ dṛṣṭvā sarve vismitāḥ।

rit

vṛttiḥ, vṛttam, ācāraḥ, rītiḥ, vyavahāraḥ, caritram, caritam, ācaraṇam, gatiḥ, ceṣṭitam, sthitiḥ   

jīvane vartanasya rītiḥ।

sādhoḥ ācārāt saḥ samāje pratiṣṭhām alabhata।

rit

jīvana-caritram   

kasyāpi jīvanasya varṇanam।

saḥ jīvanacaritraṃ likhati।

rit

sarandhra, chidrita, sachidra   

yasyāṃ chidrāṇi randhrāṇi vā santi।

spañja iti ekaḥ sarandhraḥ jīvaḥ।

rit

adhaḥcaraḥ, apahārakaḥ, apahārikā, apahārakam, avahāraḥ, avāvan, avāvarī, ākhanikaḥ, ākhuḥ, āmoṣī, āmoṣi, kapāṭaghnaḥ, kapāṭaghnā, kapāṭaghnam, kambū, kalamaḥ, kavāṭaghnaḥ, kumbhīrakaḥ, kusumālaḥ, kharparaḥ, coraḥ, cauraḥ, corī, corakaḥ, caurī, caurikā, taḥ, takvān, taskaraḥ, tāyu, tṛpuḥ, dasmaḥ, dasmā, dasraḥ, drāvakaḥ, dhanaharaḥ, dhanahṛt, dhanahṛd, naktacāriḥ, naktacārī, nāgarakaḥ, parāskandī, parāskandi, parimoṣī, parimoṣiḥ, paṭaccaraḥ, pāṭṭacaraḥ, puraṃdaraḥ, pracuraḥ., pracurapuruṣaḥ, pratirodhakaḥ, pratirodhī, bandīkāraḥ, malimluḥ, malimluc, mallīkara, mācalaḥ, mīḍhuṣtamaḥ, mumuṣiṣuḥ, muṣkaḥ, mūṣakaḥ, moṣaḥ, moṣakaḥ, moṣṭā, rajanīcaraḥ, rātricaraḥ, rātryāṭaḥ, rikvān, ritakvān, ribhvān, rihāyaḥ, rerihāṇaḥ, laṭaḥ, luṇṭākaḥ, vaṭaraḥ, vanarguḥ, viloḍakaḥ, viloptā, stenaḥ, stainyaḥ, stāyuḥ, steyakṛt, steyakṛd, steyī, staunaḥ, styenaḥ, styainaḥ, srotasyaḥ, harikaḥ, hartā, hārakaḥ, hārītaḥ   

adatsya paradhanasya apahārakaḥ।

rakṣakaḥ corān daṇḍayati।

rit

viṭapāntaritas sthā, viṭapāntarito bhū, nilī   

adarśanasya icchayā viṭapāntaritaḥ vā anyatra gūḍham avasthānānukūlaḥ vyāpāraḥ।

siṃhaḥ viṭapāntaritaḥ tiṣṭhati।

rit

parityaj, tyaj, udvisṛj, hā, pratyādiś, parākṣip   

svādhikārasvāmitvādinivṛttyanukūlaḥ vyāpāraḥ।

rājñā siṃhāsanaṃ paryatyajat।

rit

haridrā, harit, suvarṇā, kāñcanī, pītā, gaurī, svarṇavarṇā, kāverī, umā, śivā, dīrgharāgā, haladdī, pauñjā, pītavālukā, hemanāśā, rañjanī, bhaṅgavāsā, gharṣiṇī, pītikā, rajanī, mehaghnī, bahulā, varṇinī, rātrināmikā, niśāhvā, niśā, śarvarī, varavarṇinī, varṇadātā, maṅgalapradā, hemarāgiṇī, gharṣaṇī, janeṣṭā, kṛmaghnī, lasā, yāminī, varāṅgī, varā, varṇadātrī, pavitrā, haritā, viṣaghnī, piṅgā, maṅgalyā, maṅgalā, lakṣmīḥ, bhadrā, śiphā, śobhā, śobhanā, subhagāhvayā, śyāmā, jayantikā   

oṣadhiviśeṣaḥ asya pītavarṇīyāni mūlāni pākādiṣu vyañjanatvena upayujyante raktaśuddhikaratvāt te bheṣaje tathā ca dehavarṇavidhāyitvāt ca prasādhakeṣu api upayujyante।

samaye akṛtena siṃcanena haridrā śuṣkā jātā। / haridrā kapha-pittāstraśotha-kaṇḍuvraṇāpahā।

rit

jihma, vakra, tiryañc, añcita, arāla, ānata, ābhogin, kuñcita, kuṭila, kuṭilaka, kubja, krukta, kṣveḍa, pratikuñcita, bandhura, bandhurita, manthara, vaṅkya, vijihma, vellita   

asaralaḥ vakratāpūrṇaḥ ca।

mandiraṃ prati gamyamānā paddhatiḥ jihmā asti।

rit

tapta, ātapta, uttāpita, pratapta, paritapta   

yad tāpitam।

taptena pātrena hastaḥ ajalat।

rit

ūrmiḥ, vīciḥ, ūrmikā, kallolaḥ, ghṛṇiḥ, jalakaraṅkaḥ, jalataraṅgaḥ, taraṅgakaḥ, taralaḥ, argalā, arṇaḥ, arṇam, utkalikā, hillolaḥ, vibhaṅgaḥ, vāritaraṅgaḥ, laharī, valī, bhaṅgī, bhaṅgiḥ   

nadī-samudrādiṣu jalāśayeṣu viśiṣṭāntareṇa ut ca ava ca tvaṅgamānā jalarāśiḥ yā agre gamyamānā dṛśyate।

samudrasya ūrmayaḥ parvatam abhitāḍya vyāghūrṇanti।

rit

haritam   

saḥ kṣupaḥ yasya parṇāni sāgarūpeṇa khādyante।

āpaṇake naikāni haritāni santi।

rit

parityāgaḥ, tyāgaḥ, utsargaḥ   

svasvāmitvasya niḥśeṣeṇa nivṛtteḥ kriyā।

rājñaḥ padasya parityāgena prajā duḥkhī abhavat।

rit

tyāga, parityāga   

tyajanasya bhāvaḥ। patnyāpatyayoḥ tyāgena na saḥ sukham alabhat। /

na mātā na pitā na strī na putrastyāgamarhati [manu. 8.329]

rit

tvarā, rabhasaḥ, tvariḥ, tvaritam, tvaraṇaḥ, tvaraṇam, tvaraṇā, īṣaṇā, ārambhaḥ, āvegaḥ, upatāpaḥ, parīpsā, prajavaḥ, tūrṇiḥ, saṃvegaḥ   

kārye atiśayitaḥ vegaḥ yaḥ anucitaṃ manyate।

tvarā kāryaghātinī asti।

rit

dhānyam, śasyam, sītyam, gāritraḥ, stambakariḥ, bījaruhaḥ, jīvasādhanam, vrīhiḥ   

prakāṇḍarahitavṛkṣasya bījāni।

etad prakoṣṭhaṃ dhānyena pūritam।

rit

pramud, prahṛṣa, hṛṣ, samparimud, mad, prīya, prasad, ānand, saṃtuṣ, santuṣ, parituṣ, saṃhṛṣ, vinand   

kasyāścana vārtāyāḥ kasyacana kāryasya vā hetoḥ modanānukūlaḥ vyāpāraḥ।

rāmaḥ ayodhyāṃ pratyāgataḥ iti vārtāṃ śrutvā prajāḥ pramumudire।

rit

niyantrita, pratibaddha   

yasyopari niyantraṇam asti।

śāsanena niyantritā saṃsthā prasuptā।

rit

niravarodha, avipakṣa, asaṃyatta, niṣpratibandha, anivārita, anuddhata   

virodhena vinā।

etad kāryaṃ niravarodhaṃ saṃpadyate।

rit

suniścita, sunirdhārita   

yaḥ samyaktayā nirdhāritaḥ asti।

mama dillīnagare prayāṇaṃ suniścitam asti।

rit

saccarita, suśīla, sadācārin, nyāyācāra, dhārmika, śuci, dakṣiṇa, sāttvika, śuddhātmā   

śobhanaśīlaviśiṣṭaḥ।

saccaritāḥ vyaktayaḥ samājasya netāraḥ।

rit

caritranāyakaḥ   

saḥ pradhānaḥ puruṣaḥ yasya caritrasya varṇanaṃ kāvyādiṣu asti।

asya kāvyasya caritranāyakaḥ śivarāyaḥ asti।

rit

pīta, piṅga, piṅgala, piṅgalaka, hari, harit, harita, kādrava, pāṇḍu   

haridrāyāḥ varṇaḥ iva varṇaḥ yasya।

tasya vastraṃ pītam āsīt।

rit

rūpāntarita   

ekasmāt rūpād anyasmin rūpe parivartitaḥ।

eṣaḥ ekaḥ rūpāntaritaḥ lekhaḥ asti।

rit

vṛddhiḥ, vārdhuṣyam, bhāgaḥ, kalāntaram, kārikā, kāritā, kusīdavṛddhiḥ, kalā   

ṛṇatvena yad dhanaṃ dattam tasmāt athavā yad dhanaṃ vittakoṣe nihitam asti tasmāt dhanārghatvena paryāyaśaḥ prāpyamāṇā niścitaḥ dhanarāśiḥ।

śyāmaḥ vṛddhiṃ niścitya eva ṛṇaṃ yacchati।

rit

bhaktaḥ, upāsakaḥ, pūjakaḥ, āśritaḥ   

yaḥ īśvaraṃ bhajate।

saḥ hanumataḥ bhaktaḥ asti।

rit

niṣkṛtiṃ dā, nistāraya, pratyupakṛ, apākṛ, parituṣ   

āpadādiṣu kṣatigrastasya kṣatihānipūraṇānukūlaḥ vyāpāraḥ।

jīvanarakṣāsaṃsthā kṣatigrastasya kārayānasya niṣkṛtim adāt।

rit

cihnita, citrita, lakṣita   

yasmin cihnam asti।

eṣā mudrā gāndhīmahodayasya citreṇa cihnitā asti।

rit

sahakāritā, sahodyogaḥ, sāhāyyam, sahakāryam, pratiyogaḥ   

naikaiḥ janaiḥ militvā kaścit kāryasampādanam।

caturṇāṃ deśānāṃ sahakāritayā asyāḥ spardhāyāḥ āyojanaṃ kṛtam asti।

rit

mā, pratolaya, paritolaya, mānaṃ nirūpaya, mānaṃ jñā   

kasyāpi vastunaḥ vistarasya ghanatvasya vā parimāṇasya sāhāyyena māpanānukūlaḥ vyāpāraḥ।

saḥ vastraṃ mīṭara iti parimāṇam anu māti।

rit

mudritam   

yasya mudraṇaṃ jātam।

etad pustakaṃ śāsanasya mudrālaye mudritam asti।

rit

varṇita, nirūpita, citrita   

yad varṇyate।

rāmāyaṇe bhagavataḥ rāmasya caritraṃ viśeṣatvena varṇitam asti।

rit

laśunam, raśunam, laśūnam, lasunam, rasunam, rasonaḥ, rasonakaḥ, gṛñjanaḥ, mahauṣadham, mahākandaḥ, ariṣṭaḥ, sonahaḥ, ugragandhaḥ, dīrghapatraḥ, granthamūlam, śrīmastakaḥ, mukhadūṣaṇaḥ, rāhūcchiṣṭam, taritā   

kandaviśeṣaḥ- yaḥ upaskare upayujyate।

sītā sāgārthe maricalaśunādīnāṃ khaṇḍanaṃ karoti।

rit

santoṣaḥ, saṃtuṣṭiḥ, santuṣṭiḥ, paritoṣaḥ, parituṣṭiḥ, nivṛttiḥ, śāṃtiḥ, upaśamaḥ, toṣaḥ, saṃśamaḥ, svāsthyam, dhṛtiḥ   

manasaḥ sā avasthā yasyāḥ manuṣyaḥ nandati anyad kimapi na icchati ca।

saṃtoṣasya kāraṇāt manuṣyaḥ sukhaṃ śāntiñca anubhavati।

rit

tuṣṭiḥ, tṛptiḥ, parituṣṭiḥ, hārdiḥ, toṣaḥ, alobhaḥ, śāntaḥ, sauhityam, tarpaṇam   

kasyāpi viṣayasya santoṣasya bhāvaḥ।

mama kāryeṇa bhavate tuṣṭiḥ jātā vā na vā।

rit

visphārita   

yena svasya akṣiṇī apāvṛte।

arbhakaḥ mātaraṃ visphāritābhyāṃ netrābhyāṃ paśyati।/ sa naṣṭamāyo'tibalaḥ krodhavisphāritekṣaṇaḥ। kāmamūrtidharaḥ krūraḥ kālakalpo vyadṛśyata।(ki. 14.30)

rit

abhimantrita   

mantreṇa saṃskṛtam।

purohitena jalpakaṃ puruṣam abhimantritaṃ jalaṃ pāyitam।

rit

haridrā, harit, suvarṇā, kāñcanī, pītā, gaurī, svarṇavarṇā, kāverī, umā, śivā, dīrgharāgā, haladdī, pauñjā, pītavālukā, hemanāśā, rañjanī, bhaṅgavāsā, gharṣiṇī, pītikā, rajanī, mehaghnī, bahulā, varṇinī, rātrināmikā, niśāhvā, niśā, śarvarī, varavarṇinī, varṇadātā, maṅgalapradā, hemarāgiṇī, gharṣaṇī, janeṣṭā, kṛmaghnī, lasā, yāminī, varāṅgī, varā, varṇadātrī, pavitrā, haritā, viṣaghnī, piṅgā, maṅgalyā, maṅgalā, lakṣmīḥ, bhadrā, śiphā, śobhā, śobhanā, subhagāhvayā, śyāmā, jayantikā   

oṣadhimūlaviśeṣaḥ। haridrā nāma oṣadheḥ pītavarṇīyāni mūlāni ye janaiḥ pākādiṣu vyañjanatvena upayujyante। raktaśuddhikaratvāt te bheṣaje tathā ca dehavarṇavidhāyitvāt ca prasādhakeṣu upayujyante।

haridrāyāḥ lepena tvakśuddhiḥ bhavati।

rit

āgrahaḥ, haṭhaḥ, nirbandhaḥ, svairitā, durāgrahaḥ, nirbandhaśīlam, dṛḍhatā, avaśyatā, pratiniviṣṭatā, pratīpatā, duravagrahaḥ, pragrahaḥ, durgrahaḥ, āsaktiḥ, anugrahaḥ   

sātatyena kathanaṃ yat yathaiva asti yathaiva bhaviṣyati yathaiva bhavet iti।

tulasī kṛṣṇamūrteḥ purata eva dhanurdhāraṇasya āgraham akarot।

rit

ātmadānam, ātmaparityāgaḥ   

kasyacit kāryasya kṛte svaprāṇārpaṇam।

bhāratadeśaṃ pāratantryāt mocituṃ naikaiḥ netṛbhiḥ ātmadānam kṛtam।

rit

nimantrita   

yasmai nimantraṇaṃ dattam।

svasuḥ vivāhe nimantritānāṃ sahakāriṇāṃ bhrātā abhivādanam akarot।

rit

adhikāritantram   

śāsanasya sā rītiḥ yasyāṃ rājyasya adhikārapadasthāḥ karmakarāḥ uttaradāyinaḥ santi।

adhikāritantram samājasya unnatyām avarodhaḥ asti।

rit

pārārthyam, paropakāritā   

anyeṣāṃ lābhārthaṃ kāryakaraṇasya bhāvaḥ।

pārārthyaṃ kṛtvā eva vinayaḥ janapriय़ḥ abhūt।

rit

patrakāritā   

patrakārasya kāryam।

patrakāritāyāḥ mādhyamena samājasya guṇadoṣāḥ janaiḥ jñāyante।

rit

parityakta, tyakta   

yasya tyāgaḥ kṛtaḥ।

tena svasya parityaktā patnī punaḥ svīkṛtā।

rit

prerita, utprerita   

yena anyasmāt preraṇā prāptā।

guruṇā paṭhanārthe preritaḥ rāmaḥ sarvam adhītavān।

rit

vidīrṇa, avadārita, vidārita, avadīrṇa   

yaḥ jīrṇaḥ।

dāridryāt rītā vidīrṇāni vastrāṇi dhārayati।

rit

cikitsā, upacāryā, upacaritavyā, upakramaḥ   

cikitsakasya kāryam udyogaḥ vā।

saḥ cikitsāṃ kṛtvā svakuṭumbasya pālanaṃ karoti।

rit

kuśika, kekara, gokulika, ṭagara, ṭerākṣa, dūritekṣaṇa, valira, viṣamadṛṣṭi   

yasya kanīnikā tiryak vartate।

kuśikaḥ puruṣaḥ kutra paśyati etad jñātuṃ bahu kaṭhinam asti।

rit

śamaya, praśamaya, upaśamaya, prasādaya, saṃtoṣaya, santoṣaya, paritoṣaya, sāntvaya, ārādhaya   

santoṣajanakapreraṇānukūlaḥ vyāpāraḥ।

mātā bālakaṃ tasya mitreṇa śamayati।

rit

mukharita, mukhara   

śabdaiḥ dhvaninā vā yuktaḥ।

bālakānām āgamanena gṛhaṃ mukharitaṃ jātam।

rit

caritam   

kasyacit manuṣyasya smaraṇīyānāṃ ghaṭanānām nirdeśaḥ।

mahādevīvarmāmahodayayā svasya carite naikānāṃ ghaṭanānām nirdeśaḥ kṛtaḥ।

rit

saubhrātram, bhātṛttavam, bandhutā, bandhutva, sahakāritā   

bhrātṛvat sakhyam;

saubhrātram raghūṇām kulācāraḥ

rit

svairatā, svairitā, durāgrahaḥ, nirbandhaśīm, avaśyatā, pratiniviṣṭatā, pratīpatā, duravagrahaḥ, pragrahaḥ, avineyatā, duṣṭatā, durmadaḥ   

svasya anucitām icchāṃ sādhayituṃ kṛtaḥ āgrahaḥ।

kiśorasya svairatayā sarve api trastāḥ।

rit

haritatvam, haritvam, hārityam, śādvalatā, palāśatā, pālāśatā   

haritānāṃ vṛkṣāṇāṃ vistāraḥ।

varṣā-ṛtau haritatvaṃ vardhate।

rit

haritakrāntiḥ   

sā sthitiḥ yadā deśe sasyānām utpannam adhikaṃ jātam।

haritakrānteḥ kāraṇāt eva idānīṃtane kāle deśe paryāptam annaṃ vartate।

rit

arājapatrita   

yaḥ śāsanasya rājapatre ghoṣitaḥ nāsti।

tasya pitā ekasmin vittakośe arājapatritaḥ adhikārī asti।

rit

caritrapramāṇapatram   

tat patraṃ yad kasyāpi caritrasya pramāṇam asti।

vṛttyarthe caritrapramāṇapatrasya āvaśyakatā asti।

rit

nibhṛtam, apavāritam, upāṃśu, gūḍham, gūḍhatayā, gūḍhe, guhyam, guptam, parokṣam, sagūḍham, rahasyam, channam, sanutar, channe, tiraścathā, nigūḍham, niṇik, niṇyam   

anyaiḥ mā vijñāyi iti rītyā।

śyāmaḥ nibhṛtam āgatya mama pṛṣṭhataḥ asthāt।

rit

abhihitam, kathitam, uktam, bhaṇitam, bhāṣitam, uditam, jalpitam, ākhyātam, lapitam, gaditam, nigaditam, īritam, udīritam, bhaṇitam, laḍitam, rapitam, raṭhitam, bhaṭitam, raṭitam, vyāhṛtam   

yad prāg eva uktam।

yad vibhāgapramukhena abhihitaṃ tad eva karaṇīyam।

rit

pratisthānam, sthāne sthāne, abhitaḥ, paritaḥ, sarvatra, sarvataḥ, mārgavartmasu, viṣvañc   

pratyekasmin sthāne।

rakṣārthaṃ sainikāḥ pratisthānaṃ tiṣṭhanti।

rit

suvimarśita, suvicārita, avagāhita   

yasya yogyatāyogyatayoḥ samyak vicāraḥ kṛtaḥ।

etat prakaraṇaṃ suvimarśitam asti।

rit

āpūrita   

yad āmukhaṃ pūrṇam।

taḍāgaḥ jalena āpūritaḥ asti।

rit

sambandhaḥ, sambandhitā, bāndhavatā, bandhubhāvaḥ, āpyam, gotritvam, jñātibhāvaḥ   

vivāhādīnāṃ nimittena manuṣyāṇāṃ paraspareṣu vartamānaḥ bhāvaḥ athavā ekasmin kule jātānāṃ manuṣyāṇām paraspareṣu vartamānaḥ bhāvaḥ।

madhurimayā bhavataḥ kaḥ sambandhaḥ।

rit

du, śuc, khid, pīḍaya, bādh, kliś, vyathaya, upatap, saṃtap, santap, paritap, āyas, udvij, duḥkhaya   

duḥkhānubhūtyanukūlaḥ vyāpāraḥ।

mṛtaḥ puruṣaḥ kadāpi na pratyāgacchati bhavān mā dauṣīḥ।

rit

durhaṇā, dauritam   

kenacit dattā pīḍā।

mohanena sohanasya āpaṇakaṃ prajvālya tam ārthikī durhaṇā pradattā।

rit

vilāyita, vilīna, līna, pralīna, miśrita   

ekībhūtaḥ padārthaḥ।

pānīye śarkarā vilāyitā asti।

rit

vilīna, antarita, kīrṇa, antargata, upagupta, aprakāśa, gupta, vṛta, nigūḍha, catta, apīcya, antarlīna, guhya, upacchanna   

yaḥ adṛśyaḥ asti।

vaijñānikāḥ jale vilīnaṃ tatvaṃ pariśodhayanti।

rit

vyadh, chid, āvyadh, anuvyadh, nirbhid, avabhid, prabhid, nirbhad, pratibhid, vibhid, vinirbhid, nirvyadh, nivyadh, parivyadh, pratud, nistud, pariṇud, tṛd, ātṛd, atitṛd, ativyadh, nikṣ, anunikṣ, udṛṣ, upatṛd, upārṣ, nitud, nitṛd, paritṛd, pracchid, vitud, vitṛd, vinikṣ, vivyadh, vyṛṣ, śvabhr, saṃkṛt, saṃchid, sañchid, sambhid   

tigmena astreṇa kasyacana vastunaḥ chidranirmāṇānukūlaḥ vyāpāraḥ।

takṣakaḥ utpīṭhikāṃ nirmātuṃ kānicana kāṣṭhāni avidhyat।

rit

aniyantrita   

yaḥ niyantritaḥ nāsti।

pragrahāt niṣkrāntaḥ aśvaḥ aniyantritaḥ abhavat।

rit

adhikāraḥ, adhikāritā, adhikaraṇyam, abhigrahaḥ, abhihitatā, abhihitatvam   

tat sāmarthyaṃ yasya upayogaṃ kṛtvā anyāni kāryāṇi kartuṃ śakyante।

kecana janāḥ svasya adhikārasya durupayogaṃ kurvanti।

rit

harita, pītanīla   

yaḥ śādvalavarṇīyaḥ asti।

yadā surakṣācālakena haritaḥ dhvajaḥ nidarśitaḥ tadā yānaṃ prasthitam।

rit

rājapatritaḥ   

rājapatre nirdaṣṭaḥ adhikārī;

rājapatritāḥ śāsakīyāḥ adhikāriṇaḥ pramāṇapatrāṇāṃ chāyākṛtiṣu svākṣāṃkanaṃ kartum arhāḥ santi

rit

cint, vicint, paricint, anudhyai, abhiman, paritark, praman, dīdhī, anudhī   

kasmin api viṣayam uddiśya cintanānukūlaḥ vyāpāraḥ।

na jñāyate kiṃ cintayati sā।

rit

uccārita, abhivyāhṛta   

yasya uccāraṇaṃ jātam।

uccāritā tathā ca likhitā bhāṣā samāne na staḥ।

rit

āmantritaḥ, nimantritaḥ   

yaḥ samārambhārthe āhūtaḥ;

vivāhārthe pañcaśatādhikāḥ āmantritāḥ āsan

rit

jayā, jayantī, tarkārī, nādeyī, vaijayantikā, balī, moṭā, haritā, vijayā, sūkṣmamūlā, vikrāntā, aparājitā   

ekā oṣadhī yasyāḥ puṣpāṇi sundarāṇi bhavanti।

mālī upavaneṣu vaijayantikāṃ sthāpayanti।

rit

saṅkarita   

saṃkarāt utpannam।

atra aśvagavādīnām unnatāḥ saṅkaritāḥ prajātayaḥ utpadyante।

rit

parityaktaḥ   

saḥ manuṣyaḥ yaḥ tyaktaḥ।

etad parityaktānām āśrayasthānam।

rit

māpaya, pratolaya, paritolaya   

saukaryātiśayena māpanabhavanānukūlaḥ vyāpāraḥ।

nirdhanebhyaḥ dātuṃ bhūmiḥ māpayate।

rit

caritram   

manuṣyasya jīvane tena kriyamāṇānāṃ kāryāṇāṃ tasya ācaraṇasya vā tad svarūpaṃ yad tasya yogyatāyāḥ sūcakaṃ bhavati।

manuṣyasya caritraṃ tasya yogyatāṃ darśayati।

rit

śamaya, praśamaya, upaśamaya, prasādaya, saṃtoṣaya, santoṣaya, paritoṣaya, sāntvaya, ārādhaya   

ruṣṭasya santoṣajanakānukūlaḥ vyāpāraḥ।

mātā bālakaṃ śamayati।

rit

rāmacaritamānasam   

gosvāmī-tulasīdāsasya ekaḥ granthaḥ;

rāmacaritamānasasya pāṭhaṃ paṭhati

rit

tritāraḥ   

vipañcīsadṛśaḥ vādyaḥ yasmin tisrāḥ tantrayaḥ santi।

manoharaḥ tritārasya vādane nipuṇaḥ asti।

rit

gupta, pālita, rakṣita, saṃrakṣita, adhigupta, anugupta, abhigupta, abhirakṣita, abhisaṃgupta, abhyupapanna, ālambita, ārakṣita, ūta, gopāyita, gupita, daṃśita, datta, dayita, trāṇa, trāta, pratipālita, paritrāta, pāta, sanātha, avita   

samyak gopyate yat।

cauraḥ guptānāṃ sampattīnām anveṣaṇaṃ karoti।

rit

pravṛddha, parivṛddha, samupārūḍa, vardhita, abhivṛddha, abhyuccita, āpī, āpyāna, āpyāyita, ucchrita, udagra, udita, udīrita, udīrṇa, udbhūta, udrikta, unnaddha, unnamita, upasṛṣṭa, ṛddha, edhita, jṛmbhita, paribṛṃhita, paripuṣṭa, parivardhita, pyāyita, bahulīkṛta, bahulita, bṛṃhita, pracurīkṛta, prathita, rūḍha, vejita, vivardhita, vivṛddha, śūna, sādhika, sahaskṛta, samārūḍha, samedhita, sampraviddha, saṃrabdha, samuddhata, samukṣita, samunnīta, saṃvṛddha, sāndrīkṛta, sātirikta, sphītīkṛta, ucchūna   

yaḥ avardhata।

pravṛddhena mūlyena janāḥ pīḍitāḥ।

rit

śītasahā, sindhuvārakaḥ, nirguṇḍī, kapikā, sthirasādhanakaḥ, sindhukaḥ, nīlasindhukaḥ, indrasurasaḥ, sindhuvārikā, śvetapuṣpaḥ, nirguṇṭī, candrasurasaḥ, surasaḥ, sindhurāvaḥ, nīlāśī, sindhuvāritaḥ, śvetarāvakaḥ, nisindhuḥ, sindhuvāraḥ, śepālaḥ, nirguṇḍiḥ, sinduvāraḥ, nisindhukaḥ, nīlakaḥ, arthasiddhakaḥ, indrāṇikā, indrāṇī, śvetasurasā   

kundajātīyā śvetapuṣpaviśiṣṭā latā।

śītasahā varṣākāle vikasati।

rit

śītasaham, sindhuvārakam, nirguṇḍi, kapikam, sthirasādhanakam, sindhukam, nīlasindhukam, indrasurasam, sindhuvārikam, śvetapuṣpam, nirguṇṭi, candrasurasam, surasam, sindhurāvam, nīlāśi, sindhuvāritam, śvetarāvakam, nisindhum, sindhuvāram, śepālam, nirguṇḍim, sinduvāram, nisindhukam, nīlakam, arthasiddhakam, indrāṇikam, indrāṇi, śvetasurasam   

kundajātīyapuṣpam।

śītasahasya ārdragandhaḥ āgacchati।

rit

āśritatā, āśritatvam, āyattatā, āyattatvam, adhīnatā, adhīnatvam, upāśritatā, upāśritatvam   

āśritasya avasthā।

idānīmapi śasyānāṃ vikāsārthaṃ kṛṣakāṇāṃ āśritatā vṛṣṭau eva asti।

rit

adhiśrita   

agnau adhiśrīyate yat।

adhiśrite pātre vartamānaṃ bhojanaṃ pakvam।

rit

tritantrī   

vīṇāsadṛśaṃ vādyam।

prācīne kāle tritantrīṃ vādayati sma।

rit

śamī, saktuphalā, śivā, śaktuphalā, śaktuphalī, śāntā, tuṅgā, kacaripuphalā, keśamathanī, īśānī, lakṣmīḥ, tapanatanayā, iṣṭā, śubhakarī, havirgandhā, medhyā, duritadamanī, śaktuphalikā, samudrā, maṅgalyā, surabhiḥ, pāpaśamanī, bhadrā, śaṅkarī, keśahantrī, śivāphalā, supatrā, sukhadā, jīvaḥ   

vṛkṣaviśeṣaḥ।

śamyāḥ kāṣṭhasya upayogaḥ pūjākāryeṣu bhavati।

rit

vistārita, abhivṛddha, vistīrṇa   

yasya vistāraḥ kṛtaḥ jātaḥ vā।

tena mahyaṃ vistāritasya kāryakramasya sūcī dattā।

rit

prasārita   

yaḥ prasāryate।

jalasya abhāvāt kṛṣīkṣetre prasāritaṃ bījaṃ naṣṭam।

rit

prasārita   

saṃgītabhāṣaṇādīnāṃ dhvaneḥ ākāśavāṇyā kṛtaṃ prasāraṇam।

adhunā bhavān ākāśavāṇeḥ rāyapurakendrena prasāritān kāryakramān śṛṇoti।

rit

tritantrin   

yasmin tisraḥ tantrayaḥ santi।

rohanaḥ tritantri vādyaṃ vādayati।

rit

dānaśīlaḥ, udāraḥ, dānavīraḥ, dānarataḥ, udāttaḥ, dānaśauḍaḥ, bahupradaḥ, udāradhīcetāḥ, mahāmanāḥ, udāracaritaḥ, subhojāḥ, mahānubhāvaḥ, mahātyāgī   

yaḥ dānāya na vilambate।

karṇaḥ mahān dānaśīlaḥ āsīt।

rit

anuttarita   

yasya uttaraṃ na dattam।

asyāḥ hatyāsambandhī sarve praśnāḥ anuttaritāḥ।

rit

anuttaritaḥ   

jainānāṃ devatāyāḥ ekaḥ bhedaḥ।

jainamahātmā anuttaritasya viṣaye vistāreṇa kathayati।

rit

caritam, jīvanavṛttāntaḥ   

yasmin pustake kasyāpi jīvanasya sampūrṇaṃ varṇanaṃ vartate tat pustakam।

śyāmaḥ pustakālaye upaviśya vikhyātānāṃ mahāpuruṣāṇāṃ caritaṃ paṭhati।

rit

nirguṇḍī, śephālikā, śephālī, nīlikā, malikā, suvahā, rajanīhāsā, niśipuṣpikā, sindhukaḥ, sindrakaḥ, sindrarāvaḥ, indrasuṣiraḥ, indrāṇikā, sindhuvāraḥ, indrasurasaḥ, nirguṇṭhī, indrāṇī, paulomī, śakrāṇī, kāsanāśinī, visundhakaḥ, sindhakam, surasaḥ, sindhuvāritaḥ, surasā, sindhuvārakaḥ   

ṣaḍ ārabhya dvāviṃśatiḥ pādonnataḥ nityaharitakṣupaḥ yasmin bhavati tuvaryāḥ iva pañcapatrāṇi evaṃ śākhāyāṃ laghūni romāṇi ca।

nirguṇḍyāḥ patramūlāni tu auṣadheṣu upayujyante।

rit

aparādhaḥ, pāpam, doṣaḥ, pātakam, duritam, vyabhicāraḥ   

anucitaṃ kāryaṃ yena kasyāpi hāniḥ bhavet।

kadācit ajānantaḥ eva vayam aparādhaṃ kurmaḥ।

rit

pracārita   

yasya pracāraḥ kṛtaḥ।

netṛbhiḥ pracāritāni vacanāni na hi satyāni bhavanti।

rit

rita   

yasmin kimapi pūritam।

adya mātā pūritān indravāruṇikān rādhyati।

rit

apasārita, apākṛta, apohita, niruddha, apavartita, avasthāpita   

yasya avasthāpanaṃ kṛtam।

apasāritāni vastūni yathāsthāne sthāpyante।

rit

apahṛta, apahārita   

tat vastu yat apahāritam।

apahṛtaṃ dhanaṃ tena gartaṃ nirmīya tasmin gopitam।

rit

apahṛta, apahārita   

tat vastu yat coritam।

apahṛtena dhanena sākaṃ coraḥ apagataḥ।

rit

apākṛta, apasārita, avakṛṣṭa, mṛjita   

yad dūrīkṛtam।

apākṛtaṃ bhojanam utthāpya sā ante agacchat।

rit

ākārita   

ākāryate yat।

ākāriteṣu citreṣu bālakaḥ varṇalepanaṃ karoti।

rit

matsaraḥ, svārthabuddhiḥ, mātsaryabhāvaḥ, ātmambharitvam, svalābhabuddhiḥ   

svārthinaḥ avasthā bhāvaḥ vā।

lekhāpālasya matsarasya kāraṇāt janāḥ ghṛṇām akurvan।

rit

aprakṛtāśritaśleṣaḥ   

śleṣaśabdālaṅkārasya bhedaḥ।

aprakṛtāśritaśleṣe aprakṛtasya aprastutasya ca śleṣaḥ bhavati।

rit

sindhuvāraḥ, indrasurasaḥ, indrāṇī, indrāṇikā, candrasurasaḥ, nirguṇṭī, nirguṇḍī, nisindhuḥ, nanīlasindhukaḥ, śvetapuṣpaḥ, śvetarāvakaḥ, sindhurāvaḥ, sindhuvārakaḥ, sindhuvāritaḥ, sindhukaḥ, surasaḥ, sthirasādhanakaḥ, arthasiddhakaḥ   

ekaḥ vṛkṣaḥ।

sindhuvārasya patrāṇi bījāḥ ca auṣadhyāṃ prayujyante।

rit

adhikāritvam   

kāryapravartakasya avasthā bhāvaḥ vā।

atra bhavataḥ adhikāritvam na yogyam।

rit

adhikāritvam, kartavyam, niyogaḥ   

kāryapravartakasya kāryam।

tena pañcaviṃśavarṣāṇi yāvat senāyām adhikāritvam ūḍham।

rit

rañjita, abhirañjita, pratirañjita, rāgānvita, rāgavat, varṇagata, vicitrita, rāgin, varṇin   

varṇayuktaṃ varṇaiḥ pūritaṃ vā।

kāścana vidhavāḥ rañjitāni vastrāṇi na dhārayanti।

rit

tritayam, trayam, trikam   

trayāṇāṃ janānāṃ samūhaḥ।

prātaḥ idaṃ tritayaṃ kutra gacchati।

rit

atyācārī, anācārī, ātatāyī, pīḍakaḥ, niṣṭharaḥ, krūracaritaḥ   

yaḥ pīḍayati।

atyācārī daṇḍitavyaḥ।

rit

druta, drutagāmin, tvarita, saṃtvarita   

yat śīghraṃ calati prāpayati vā।

drutayā gatyā pracalitānāṃ relayānānāṃ saṅkhyā atiśīghraṃ dviguṇā bhaviṣyati।

rit

tvarita, ātyayika, satvara, sadyaska, pratyakṣam, anāntarīyaka, āñjas   

yasya sambandhe śīghratāyāḥ āvaśyakatā asti।

tvaritasya sandeśasya preṣaṇāya atyādhikānām ādhunikānāṃ upakaraṇānāṃ vyavasthā bhaviṣyati।

rit

svaritaḥ, svaritam   

svarāṇāṃ tat uccāraṇaṃ yat na udāttaṃ na ca anudāttaṃ bhavati।

vedeṣu ṛkṣu svarāṇām ucitāya uccāraṇāya svaritaḥ api prayuktaḥ।

rit

svarita   

yasmin svarāḥ santi।

svaritaṃ gītaṃ karṇābhyāṃ sukhakaraṃ bhavati।

rit

santoṣaya, toṣaya, saṃtoṣaya, paritoṣaya, prīṇaya, prī   

tṛptijanakānukūlaḥ vyāpāraḥ।

saḥ brāhmaṇaṃ dakṣiṇāṃ dattvā santoṣayati।

rit

vyaṅgyacitram, citritapaṭaḥ, vicitramālekhyam, citrakathā   

hāsyajanakaṃ athavā adhikṣepātmakaṃ citram।

lakṣmaṇamahodayasya vyaṅgyacitrāṇi prabhāvaśālīni āsan।

rit

trimūrtiḥ, tritayam, trikam   

trayāṇāṃ janānāṃ samūhaḥ।

prātaḥkāle eṣā trimūrtiḥ kutra gacchati।

rit

haritāśma   

ekaṃ bahumūlyaṃ ratnam।

haritāśma haritaṃ haryānīlaṃ vā bhavati।

rit

harita   

haritāśmanaḥ varṇaḥ iva varṇaḥ yasya।

haritāśma iti cintayitvā asmābhiḥ haritaḥ prastaraḥ krītaḥ।

rit

ciraharita   

yat sadaiva haritam।

yatra adhikā varṣā bhavati tatra ciraharitāni vanāni dṛśyante।

rit

saṃcārita   

yasya saṃcālanaṃ kṛtam।

vividhāḥ viṣāṇavaḥ raktasya mādhyamena saṃcāritāḥ bhavanti।

rit

uparitana, ūrdhvaja, udac, ūrdhvam, ucca   

ūrdhvena bhāgena sambaddhaḥ।

asyāḥ argalāyāḥ uparitanaḥ bhāgaḥ naṣṭaḥ jātaḥ asti।

rit

harita, śādvala   

yad śuṣkaṃ nāsti।

secanena grīṣmakālepi kṣupāḥ haritāḥ santi।

rit

alakam, ālam, tālakam, tālam, haritālam, godantam, visragandhikam   

ekaḥ pītavarṇīyaḥ khanijapadārthaḥ।

alakasya upayogaḥ bheṣaje bhavati।

rit

rituśālā   

apsaroviśeṣaḥ।

rituśālāyāḥ varṇanaṃ purāṇeṣu asti।

rit

abhisphurita   

pūrṇarūpeṇa vikasitam।

abhisphuritaiḥ puṣpaiḥ vāṭikāyāḥ śobhā vardhate।

rit

guṇita, āhata, abhihata, vinighna, kṣuṇṇa, vyasta, saṃguṇīkṛta, pratyutpanna, pūrita, piṇḍita, abhyasta   

yat guṇyate।

guṇitāḥ aṅkāḥ sarvāṇi yojayatu।

rit

citrita   

citre ārekhitam।

bhittikāyāṃ prāṇinaḥ citritāḥ asti।

rit

pṛthivī, bhūḥ, bhūmiḥ, acalā, anantā, rasā, viśvambharā, sthirā, dharā, dharitrī, dharaṇī, kṣauṇī, jyā, kāśyapī, kṣitiḥ, sarvasahā, vasumatī, vasudhā, urvī, vasundharā, gotrā, kuḥ, pṛthvī, kṣmā, avaniḥ, medinī, mahī, dharaṇī, kṣoṇiḥ, kṣauṇiḥ, kṣamā, avanī, mahiḥ, ratnagarbhā, sāgarāmbarā, abdhimekhalā, bhūtadhātrī, ratnāvatī, dehinī, pārā, vipulā, madhyamalokavartmā, dhāraṇī, gandhavatī, mahākāntā, khaṇḍanī, girikarṇikā, dhārayitrī, dhātrī, acalakīlā, gauḥ, abdhidvīpā, iḍā, iḍikā, ilā, ilikā, irā, ādimā, īlā, varā, ādyā, jagatī, pṛthuḥ, bhuvanamātā, niścalā, śyāmā   

martyādyadhiṣṭhānabhūtā।

pṛthivī pañcamam bhūtam

rit

ritoṣikīyam   

pāritoṣikasambandhī।

pāritoṣikīyam etad dhanaṃ vidyocita karmasu eva upayojanīyam।

rit

nirdharita, niścita   

yat nirdhāryate।

ahaṃ nirdhārite samaye eva bhavantaṃ miliṣyāmi।

rit

aritracakram   

vāhanaṃ viśiṣṭāyāṃ diśi netuṃ sahāyakam upakaraṇam।

lokayānasya cālakaḥ hastena aritracakraṃ bhrāmayati।

rit

aṅkurita, pallavita, udbhinna, sphuṭita, korita, nirantarodbhinna, privarūḍha, protthita, prasṛta   

yaḥ navapatrādi-yukta-śākhāgravān asti।

tena bālena aṅkuritā latā utpāṭitā।

rit

manoharatā, rocakatā, hṛdayahāritā   

guṇākarṣāt manasi jāyamānasya vikārasya avasthā bhāvo vā।

asyāḥ kathāyāḥ śravaṇe janāḥ pade pade manoharatām anubhavanti।

rit

ritoṣikam   

santoṣaprāpteḥ kāraṇāt dīyamānaṃ dhanam।

sarvakāraḥ karmakarebhyaḥ pāritoṣikaṃ dadāti।

rit

rañjita, varṇita, vicitrita   

varṇena liptam।

rañjitām utpīṭhikāṃ gṛhe sthāpayatu।

rit

tritaḥ   

paurāṇikaḥ ṛṣiviśeṣaḥ।

tritaṃ brahmaṇaḥ mānasaputram manyate।

rit

tritaḥ   

gautamamuneḥ putraḥ।

tritasya varṇanaṃ purāṇeṣu asti।

rit

amiśrita   

yad na miśritam।

vibhinnān kusūlān amiśritān eva sthāpayatu।

rit

mañjarita   

mañjaryā yuktaḥ।

saḥ āmrasya mañjaritāṃ śākhām achinad।

rit

manthānakaḥ, haritaḥ, dṛḍhamūlaḥ   

tṛṇaviśeṣaḥ।

bālakaḥ manthānakam aunmūlayat।

rit

hā, tyaj, parityaj, santyaj, apahā, vihā, prahā, apāhā, utsṛj, visṛj, atisṛj, vyapasṛj, rah, virah, uñjh, proñjh, parihṛ, vṛj, parivṛj, vivraj   

ātmanaḥ samīpasthasya kasya api anāsañjanarūpaḥ vyāpāraḥ।

saḥ mām haṭṭe eva ajahāt।

rit

siṃhaḥ, kesarī, keśarī, hapiḥ, mṛgendraḥ, mṛgarājaḥ, mṛgarāṭ, mṛgapatiḥ, paśurājaḥ, paśupatiḥ, śārdūlaḥ, vanarājaḥ, mṛgaripuḥ, mṛgāriḥ, gajāriḥ, kuñjarārātiḥ, dviradāntakaḥ, hastikakṣyaḥ, bhīmanādaḥ, bhīmavikrāntaḥ, bhāriḥ, haryyakṣaḥ, pañcāsyaḥ, pañcānanaḥ, pañcamukhaḥ, pañcavaktraḥ, pañcaśikhaḥ, vyālaḥ, saṭāṅkaḥ, jaṭilaḥ, araṇyarāj, araṇyarāṭ, ibhamācalaḥ, ibhāriḥ, karidārakaḥ, karimācalaḥ, kalaṅkaṣaḥ, palaṅkaṣaḥ, keśī, kravyādaḥ, gajāriḥ, nakhāyudhaḥ, nakharāyudhaḥ, nadanuḥ, pārindraḥ, pārīndraḥ, bahubalaḥ, bhāriḥ, bhīmavikrāntaḥ, mahānādaḥ, mahāvīraḥ, mṛgadviṣ, mṛgadviṭ, mṛgaprabhuḥ, raktajihvaḥ, vanahariḥ, visaṅkaṭaḥ, vikramī, vikrāntaḥ, śṛṅgoṣṇīṣaḥ, śailāṭaḥ, śaileyaḥ, sakṛtprajaḥ, harit, haritaḥ, hemāṅgaḥ   

siṃhajātīyaḥ naraḥ vanyapaśuḥ।

siṃhasya grīvā saṭayā āvṛtā asti।

rit

tvaritagatiḥ   

varṇavṛttaviśeṣaḥ।

tvaritagateḥ pratyekasmin caraṇe nagaṇaḥ jagaṇaḥ nagaṇaḥ tathā guruḥ bhavati।

rit

kramānusāritā   

yathākramaṃ saṃsthitiḥ।

kramānusāritayā tena daśame sthāne sthātavyam।

rit

ritaḥ   

varṇavṛttaviśeṣaḥ।

hāritasya pratyekasmin caraṇe krameṇa tagaṇau tathā dvau gurū ca bhavataḥ।

rit

anavaguṇṭhitā, anavaguṇṭhanavatī, anavaguṇṭhitamukhā, anupāvṛtā, apariguṇṭhitā, aparivāritā   

yasyāḥ mukham avaguṇṭhitaṃ nāsti।

mullāmahodayaḥ anavaguṇṭhitābhiḥ lalanābhiḥ saha bahu hāsyavinodam akurvata।

rit

avakṛṣṭa, bahiṣkṛta, dūrīkṛta, niṣkāsita, niḥsārita   

yad dūre kriyate।

avakṛṣṭānāṃ manuṣyāṇām iyaṃ saṃsthā asti।

rit

avasādaḥ, avasannatā, viṣādaḥ, sādaḥ, tandrā, glāniḥ, tandritā, viṣaṇṇatā   

manasaḥ śarīrasya vā sā sthitiḥ yasyāṃ kimapi kāryaṃ kartum anicchā bhavati।

avasādasya sthitau yogāsanaṃ lābhadāyakaṃ bhavati।

rit

aśvalalitaḥ, adritanayā   

varṇavṛttaviśeṣaḥ।

aśvalalite trayoviṃśatiḥ varṇāḥ santi।

rit

asahāyatā, nissahāyatā, niḥsahāyatā, nirāśritatā, nirāśrayatā, anāśritatā, anāśrayatā, asahāyatvam   

asahāyasya avasthā bhāvo vā।

dīnabālakānāṃ asahāyatāṃ naike janāḥ svārthaparipūrtyartham upayuñjanti।

rit

sarit-pravāhaḥ   

nadyāḥ pravāhaḥ।

saritpravāhe naukā pravahati।

rit

ācarita, vyavahṛta   

yasya ācaraṇaṃ kṛtam।

mahāpuruṣaiḥ ācaritaṃ kāryam asmābhiḥ anusartavyam।

rit

vitarita, vibhājita   

yasya vitaraṇaṃ kṛtam।

nirdhaneṣu vitaritam annam uttamaṃ nāsti।

rit

āśrita, upajīvin   

svasya bharaṇārthaṃ yaḥ anyam apekṣyate।

āśrayadātuḥ mṛtyoḥ vārtāṃ śrutvā āśritaḥ manuṣyaḥ duḥkhitaḥ jātaḥ।

rit

āsāritagītam   

vaidikagītaviśeṣaḥ।

mahātmā āsāritagītasya gāyane magnaḥ asti।

rit

jāgarita   

yaḥ nidrāṃ samāpya utthitaḥ।

apūrṇāyāḥ nidrāyāḥ jāgaritaṃ bālakaṃ mātā śāyayati।

rit

samāhita, saṅkendrita   

yad ekatrībhūtam।

nadītaṭe samāhitān janān jalaplāvanāt svasya rakṣaṇaṃ karaṇīyaṃ bhavati।

rit

caritārtha   

yasya prayojanaṃ siddham।

tasya jīvanaṃ caritārtham āsīt।

rit

saniyama, niyantrita, sāvadhāraṇa   

niyamaiḥ yuktaḥ।

saniyamaṃ lekhanaṃ manorañjakaṃ syāt eva iti nāsti।

rit

mudrita, kṛtamudra, mudrāṅkita, mudrābaddha   

yad vastu saṃvārya tasmin mudrāṅkanaṃ kṛtam।

bhavataḥ nāmnā kāryālayāt mudritam āveṣṭanaṃ prāptam।

rit

ādhārita   

yad kasyacit ādhāreṇa vartate।

lokakathāyām ādhāritaḥ citrapaṭaḥ ayam।

rit

ātmakendrita   

yaḥ ātmani eva magnaḥ bhavati।

adhunā saḥ adhikaḥ eva ātmakendritaḥ jātaḥ।

rit

paritoṣaḥ   

ekaḥ puruṣaḥ ।

paritoṣasya ullekhaḥ kośe vartate

rit

kumārahārita:   

ekaḥ ācāryaḥ, yaḥ yajurveda-saṃpradāya-pravartakaḥ ।

brāhmaṇa-granthe kumārahāritasya varṇanaṃ vidyate

rit

baṭucaritanāṭakam   

ekaṃ nāṭakam ।

saṃskṛtasāhitye baṭucaritanāṭakam iti nāṭakaṃ prasiddham

rit

kumārahārita:   

ekaḥ ācāryaḥ,yaḥ yajurveda-saṃpradāya-pravartakaḥ ।

brāhmaṇa-granthe kumārahāritasya varṇanaṃ vidyate

rit

śrīdāmacaritam   

ekaṃ nāṭakam ।

śrīdāmacaritasya ullekhaḥ koṣe asti

rit

sarvacaritam   

ekaṃ nāṭakam ।

sarvacaritasya ullekhaḥ koṣe asti

rit

siddhārthacaritam   

ekaṃ kāvyam ।

siddhārthacaritasya ullekhaḥ koṣe asti

rit

gauritaḥ   

ekaḥ parivāraḥ ।

gauritasya varṇanaṃ pravaragranthe vartate

rit

caṇḍīcaritam   

ekaṃ nāṭakam ।

caṇḍīcaritasya ullekhaḥ kośe vartate

rit

haritakātyaḥ   

ekaḥ puruṣaḥ ।

haritakātyasya ullekhaḥ pāṇininā kṛtaḥ

rit

haritattvamuktāvaliḥ   

ekaḥ ṭīkāgranthaḥ ।

haritattvamuktāvaleḥ ullekhaḥ koṣe asti

rit

haritattvamuktāvalī   

ekaḥ ṭīkāgranthaḥ ।

haritattvamuktāvalyāḥ ullekhaḥ koṣe asti

rit

haritayajñaḥ   

ekaḥ puruṣaḥ ।

haritayajñasya ullekhaḥ koṣe asti

rit

haritasenaḥ   

ekaḥ rājā ।

haritasenasya ullekhaḥ bauddhasāhitye asti

rit

haracaritacintāmaṇiḥ   

ekaṃ kāvyam ।

haracaritacintāmaṇeḥ ullekhaḥ koṣe asti

rit

purañjanacaritam   

ekaṃ nāṭakam ।

purañjanacaritasya ullekhaḥ koṣe asti

rit

udāracaritaḥ   

ekaḥ rājā ।

udāracaritasya ullekhaḥ kathāsaritsāgare asti

rit

udayanacaritam   

ekaṃ nāṭakam ।

udayanacaritasya ullekhaḥ koṣe asti

rit

pāṇḍavacaritasya ullekhaḥ koṣe asti   

pāṇḍavacarita ।

dve kāvye

rit

ritrasiṃhagaṇi   

ekaḥ lekhakaḥ ।

cāritrasiṃhagaṇiḥ kośe ullikhitaḥ asti

rit

jaritā   

ekaḥ lekhakaḥ ।

jarituḥ ullekhaḥ koṣe asti

rit

taritādhāraṇayantram   

ekaṃ yantram ।

taritādhāraṇayantrasya ullekhaḥ koṣe asti

rit

dhūrtacaritam   

ekaṃ nāṭakam ।

dhūrtacaritasya ullekhaḥ koṣe asti

rit

nalacaritam   

ekaṃ kāvyam ।

nalacaritasya ullekhaḥ koṣe asti

rit

nalacaritam   

ekaṃ nāṭakam ।

nalacaritasya ullekhaḥ koṣe asti

rit

nalacaritram   

ekaṃ kāvyam ।

nalacaritrasya ullekhaḥ koṣe asti

rit

nalacaritram   

ekaṃ nāṭakam ।

nalacaritrasya ullekhaḥ koṣe asti

rit

devaghoṣasya ullekhaḥ kathāsaritsāgare asti   

devaghoṣa ।

ekaḥ puruṣaḥ

Parse Time: 2.486s Search Word: rit Input Encoding: IAST: rit